ENGINEERING TOMORROW

Programming Guide
VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202
Software version: 3.30

www.DanfossDrives.com
Contents Programming Guide

Contents

1 Introduction 4
1.1 Purpose of the Manual 4
1.2 Additional Resources 4
1.3 Software Version 4
1.4 Approvals 4
1.5 Symbols 4
1.6 Definitions 4
1.6.1 Frequency Converter 4
1.6.2 Input 4
1.6.3 Motor 4
1.6.4 References 5
1.6.5 Miscellaneous 5
1.7 Abbreviations, Symbols, and Conventions 7
1.8 Safety 8
1.9 Electrical Wiring 10

2 How to Program 13
2.1 The Graphical and Numerical Local Control Panel 13
2.2 How to Program on the Graphical LCP 13
2.2.1 The LCP Display 14
2.2.2 Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings between Multiple Frequency Con-
verters 17
2.2.3 Display Mode 18
2.2.4 Display Mode - Selection of Readouts 18
2.2.5 Parameter Set-up 19
2.2.6 Quick Menu Key Functions 19
2.2.7 Quick Menu, Q3 Function Set-ups 19
2.2.8 Quick Menu, Q4 SmartStart 21
2.2.9 Main Menu Mode 21
2.2.10 Parameter Selection 21
2.2.11 Changing Data 21
2.2.12 Changing a Text Value 21
2.2.13 Changing a Data Value 22
2.2.14 Infinitely Variable Change of Numeric Data Value 22
2.2.15 Value, Step by Step 22
2.2.16 Readout and Programming of Indexed Parameters 22
2.2.17 How to Program on the Numerical Local Control Panel 23
2.2.18 LCP Keys 24

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved.

Contents VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3 Parameter Description 26
3.1 Parameter Selection 26
3.2 Parameters 0-** Operation and Display 27
3.3 Parameters 1-** Load and Motor 40
3.4 Parameters 2-** Brakes 64
3.5 Parameters 3-** Reference/Ramps 68
3.6 Parameters 4-** Limits/Warnings 74
3.7 Parameters 5-** Digital In/Out 79
3.8 Parameters 6-** Analog In/Out 94
3.9 Parameters 8-** Communications and Options 104
3.10 Parameters 9-** PROFIBUS 113
3.11 Parameters 10-** CAN Fieldbus 114
3.12 Parameters 13-** Smart Logic 117
3.13 Parameters 14-** Special Functions 137
3.14 Parameters 15-** Drive Information 147
3.15 Parameters 16-** Data Readouts 156
3.16 Parameters 18-** Data Readouts 2 163
3.17 Parameters 20-** FC Closed Loop 166
3.18 Parameters 21-** Extended Closed Loop 178
3.19 Parameters 22-** Application Functions 186
3.20 Parameters 23-** Time-based Functions 200
3.21 Parameters 24-** Application Functions 2 211
3.22 Parameters 25-** Cascade Controller 216
3.23 Parameters 26-** Analog I/O Option MCB 109 229
3.24 Parameters 27-** Cascade CTL Option 236
3.25 Parameters 29-** Water Application Functions 249
3.26 Parameters 30-** Special Features 257
3.27 Parameters 31-** Bypass Option 258
3.28 Parameters 35-** Sensor Input Option 259

4 Parameter Lists 262

4.1 Parameter Options 262
4.1.1 Default Settings 262
4.1.2 0-** Operation/Display 263
4.1.3 1-** Load and Motor 265
4.1.4 2-** Brakes 267
4.1.5 3-** Reference/Ramps 268
4.1.6 4-** Limits/Warnings 269

Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Contents Programming Guide

4.1.7 5-** Digital In/Out 270

4.1.8 6-** Analog In/Out 272
4.1.9 8-** Comm. and Options 274
4.1.10 9-** PROFIdrive 275
4.1.11 10-** CAN Fieldbus 277
4.1.12 13-** Smart Logic 278
4.1.13 14-** Special Functions 279
4.1.14 15-** Drive Information 281
4.1.15 16-** Data Readouts 283
4.1.16 18-** Info & Readouts 285
4.1.17 20-** Drive Closed Loop 286
4.1.18 21-** Ext. Closed Loop 287
4.1.19 22-** Appl. Functions 289
4.1.20 23-** Time-based Functions 291
4.1.21 24-** Appl. Functions 2 292
4.1.22 25-** Cascade Controller 292
4.1.23 26-** Analog I/O Option 293
4.1.24 29-** Water Application Functions 295
4.1.25 30-** Special Features 297
4.1.26 31-** Bypass Option 297
4.1.27 35-** Sensor Input Option 297

5 Troubleshooting 299
5.1 Status Messages 299
5.1.1 Warnings/Alarm Messages 299

Index 306

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved.

 Introduction VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202
1 1
1 Introduction

1.1 Purpose of the Manual CAUTION

The programming guide provides information required for Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could
programming the frequency converter in a diversity of result in minor or moderate injury. It can also be used to
applications. alert against unsafe practices.

VLT® is a registered trademark. NOTICE!

Indicates important information, including situations that
1.2 Additional Resources
can result in damage to equipment or property.
Other resources are available to understand advanced
frequency converter functions and programming. 1.6 Definitions

• The VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 Operating Instructions 1.6.1 Frequency Converter
describe mechanical and electrical installation of
the frequency converter. IVLT,MAX
Maximum output current.
• The VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 Design Guide
provides detailed information about capabilities IVLT,N
and functionality to design motor control Rated output current supplied by the frequency converter.
systems. UVLT,MAX
Maximum output voltage.
• Instructions for operation with optional
equipment.
Supplementary publications and manuals are available
1.6.2 Input
from Danfoss. See drives.danfoss.com/knowledge-center/
technical-documentation/ for listings. Control command
Start and stop the connected motor with LCP and digital
1.3 Software Version inputs.
Software version: 3.30 Functions are divided into 2 groups.
Functions in group 1 have higher priority than functions in
group 2.
The software version number can be read from Group 1 Reset, coast stop, reset and coast stop, quick stop,
parameter 15-43 Software Version. DC brake, stop, the [OFF] key.
Group 2 Start, pulse start, reversing, start reversing, jog,
freeze output.
1.4 Approvals
Table 1.1 Function Groups

1.6.3 Motor

Motor running
Torque generated on output shaft and speed from 0 RPM
to maximum speed on motor.
1.5 Symbols
fJOG
The following symbols are used in this guide: Motor frequency when the jog function is activated (via
digital terminals).

WARNING fM
Motor frequency.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could
result in death or serious injury. fMAX
Maximum motor frequency.

4 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Introduction Programming Guide

1 1
fMIN Stop command
Minimum motor frequency. A stop command belonging to Group 1 control commands
fM,N - see Table 1.1.
Rated motor frequency (nameplate data).
1.6.4 References
IM
Motor current (actual).
Analog reference
IM,N A signal transmitted to the analog inputs 53 or 54 (voltage
Rated motor current (nameplate data). or current).
nM,N Binary reference
Nominal motor speed (nameplate data). A signal transmitted to the serial communication port.
ns Preset reference
Synchronous motor speed. A defined preset reference to be set from -100% to +100%
2 × par . 1 − 23 × 60 s of the reference range. Selection of 8 preset references via
ns =
par . 1 − 39 the digital terminals.
nslip Pulse reference
Motor slip. A pulse frequency signal transmitted to the digital inputs
PM,N (terminal 29 or 33).
Rated motor power (nameplate data in kW or hp). RefMAX
TM,N Determines the relationship between the reference input at
Rated torque (motor). 100% full scale value (typically 10 V, 20 mA) and the
resulting reference. The maximum reference value is set in
UM
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference.
Instant motor voltage.
RefMIN
UM,N
Determines the relationship between the reference input at
Rated motor voltage (nameplate data).
0% value (typically 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA) and the resulting
Break-away torque reference. The minimum reference value is set in
Torque parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference.
175ZA078.10

Pull-out
1.6.5 Miscellaneous

Analog inputs
The analog inputs are used for controlling various
functions of the frequency converter.
There are 2 types of analog inputs:
Current input, 0–20 mA, and 4–20 mA
Voltage input, -10 V DC to +10 V DC.
Analog outputs
The analog outputs can supply a signal of 0–20 mA, 4–20
mA.
RPM

Figure 1.1 Break-away Torque

Automatic motor adaptation, AMA
The AMA algorithm determines the electrical parameters
for the connected motor at standstill.
ηVLT Brake resistor
The efficiency of the frequency converter is defined as the The brake resistor is a module capable of absorbing the
ratio between the power output and the power input. brake power generated in regenerative braking. This
regenerative brake power increases the DC-link voltage
Start-disable command
and a brake chopper ensures that the power is transmitted
A stop command belonging to Group 1 control commands
to the brake resistor.
- see Table 1.1.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 5

 Introduction VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202
1 1
CT characteristics Process PID
Constant torque characteristics used for all applications The PID control maintains the required speed, pressure,
such as conveyor belts, displacement pumps, and cranes. temperature, and so on, by adjusting the output frequency
to match the varying load.
Digital inputs
The digital inputs can be used for controlling various PCD
functions of the frequency converter. Process control data.
Digital outputs Power cycle
The frequency converter features 2 solid-state outputs that Switch off the mains until the display (LCP) is dark, then
can supply a 24 V DC (maximum 40 mA) signal. turn power on again.
DSP Pulse input/incremental encoder
Digital signal processor. An external, digital pulse transmitter used for feeding back
information on motor speed. The encoder is used in
ETR
applications where great accuracy in speed control is
Electronic thermal relay is a thermal load calculation based
required.
on present load and time. Its purpose is to estimate the
motor temperature. RCD
Residual current device.
HIPERFACE®
HIPERFACE® is a registered trademark by Stegmann. Set-up
Save parameter settings in 4 set-ups. Change between the
Initializing
4 parameter set-ups and edit 1 set-up, while another set-
If initializing is carried out (parameter 14-22 Operation
up is active.
Mode), the frequency converter returns to the default
setting. SFAVM
Switching pattern called stator flux-oriented asynchronous
Intermittent duty cycle
vector modulation (parameter 14-00 Switching Pattern).
An intermittent duty rating refers to a sequence of duty
cycles. Each cycle consists of an on-load and an off-load Slip compensation
period. The operation can be either periodic duty or non- The frequency converter compensates for the motor slip by
periodic duty. giving the frequency a supplement that follows the
measured motor load keeping the motor speed almost
LCP
constant.
The local control panel makes up a complete interface for
control and programming of the frequency converter. The SLC
control panel is detachable and can be installed up to 3 m The SLC (smart logic control) is a sequence of user-defined
(10 ft) from the frequency converter, that is, in a front actions executed when the associated user-defined events
panel with the installation kit option. are evaluated as true by the SLC. (See
chapter 3.12 Parameters 13-** Smart Logic).
NLCP
Numerical local control panel interface for control and STW
programming of the frequency converter. The display is Status word.
numerical and the panel is used to show process values. FC standard bus
The NLCP has no storage and copy functions. Includes RS485 bus with FC protocol or MC protocol. See
lsb parameter 8-30 Protocol.
Least significant bit. THD
msb Total harmonic distortion states the total contribution of
Most significant bit. harmonics.

MCM Thermistor
Short for mille circular mil, an American measuring unit for A temperature-dependent resistor placed on the frequency
cable cross-section. 1 MCM=0.5067 mm2. converter or the motor.

Online/offline parameters
Changes to online parameters are activated immediately
after the data value is changed. Press [OK] to activate
changes to off-line parameters.

6 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Introduction Programming Guide

1 1
Trip Commanded position
A state entered in fault situations, for example if the The actual position reference calculated by the profile
frequency converter is subject to an overtemperature or generator. The frequency converter uses the commanded
when the frequency converter is protecting the motor, position as setpoint for position PI.
process, or mechanism. The frequency converter prevents a
Actual position
restart until the cause of the fault has disappeared. To
The actual position from an encoder, or a value that the
cancel the trip state, restart the frequency converter. Do
motor control calculates in open loop. The frequency
not use the trip state for personal safety.
converter uses the actual position as feedback for position
Trip lock PI.
The frequency converter enters this state in fault situations
Position error
to protect itself. The frequency converter requires physical
Position error is the difference between the actual position
intervention, for example when there is a short circuit on
and the commanded position. The position error is the
the output. A trip lock can only be canceled by discon- input for the position PI controller.
necting mains, removing the cause of the fault, and
reconnecting the frequency converter. Restart is prevented Position unit
until the trip state is canceled by activating reset or, The physical unit for position values.
sometimes, by being programmed to reset automatically. 1.7 Abbreviations, Symbols, and
Do not use the trip lock state for personal safety.
Conventions
VT characteristics
Variable torque characteristics used for pumps and fans. °C Degrees Celsius
°F Degrees Fahrenheit
VVC+
AC Alternating current
If compared with standard voltage/frequency ratio control,
AEO Automatic energy optimization
voltage vector control (VVC+) improves the dynamics and
AWG American wire gauge
the stability, both when the speed reference is changed
AMA Automatic motor adaptation
and in relation to the load torque.
DC Direct current
60° AVM
EMC Electro magnetic compatibility
60° asynchronous vector modulation
ETR Electronic thermal relay
(parameter 14-00 Switching Pattern).
fM,N Nominal motor frequency
Power factor FC Frequency converter
The power factor is the relation between I1 and IRMS. IINV Rated inverter output current
3 x U x I1 cosϕ ILIM Current limit
Power factor = IM,N Nominal motor current
3 x U x IRMS
The power factor for 3-phase control: IVLT,MAX Maximum output current
Rated output current supplied by the
I1 x cosϕ1 I1 IVLT,N
Power factor = = since cosϕ1 = 1 frequency converter
IRMS IRMS
IP Ingress protection
The power factor indicates to which extent the frequency LCP Local control panel
converter imposes a load on the mains supply.
MCT Motion control tool
The lower the power factor, the higher the IRMS for the
ns Synchronous motor speed
same kW performance.
PM,N Nominal motor power
IRMS = I21 + I25 + I27 + .. + I2n PELV Protective extra low voltage
In addition, a high power factor indicates that the different PCB Printed circuit board
harmonic currents are low. PM Motor Permanent magnet motor
The DC coils in the frequency converters produce a high PWM Pulse width modulation
power factor, which minimizes the imposed load on the RPM Revolutions per minute
mains supply. Regen Regenerative terminals
Target position TLIM Torque limit
The final target position specified by positioning UM,N Nominal motor voltage
commands. The profile generator uses this position to
calculate the speed profile.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 7

 Introduction VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202
1 1
1.8 Safety WARNING
UNINTENDED START
WARNING When the frequency converter is connected to AC mains,
HIGH VOLTAGE DC supply, or load sharing, the motor may start at any
Frequency converters contain high voltage when time. Unintended start during programming, service, or
connected to AC mains input, DC supply, or load sharing. repair work can result in death, serious injury, or
Failure to perform installation, start-up, and maintenance property damage. The motor can start via an external
by qualified personnel can result in death or serious switch, a fieldbus command, an input reference signal
injury. from the LCP, or after a cleared fault condition.
• Only qualified personnel must perform instal- To prevent unintended motor start:
lation, start-up, and maintenance. • Disconnect the frequency converter from the
mains.
• Before performing any service or repair work,
use an appropriate voltage measuring device to • Press [Off/Reset] on the LCP before
make sure that there is no remaining voltage on programming parameters.
the frequency converter.
• Completely wire and assemble the frequency
converter, motor, and any driven equipment
Safety regulations before connecting the frequency converter to
• Disconnect the mains supply to the frequency AC mains, DC supply, or load sharing.
converter whenever repair work is to be carried
out. Check that the mains supply has been
disconnected and that the necessary time has WARNING
elapsed before removing motor and mains supply DISCHARGE TIME
plugs. For information about the discharge time, The frequency converter contains DC-link capacitors,
see Table 1.2. which can remain charged even when the frequency
• [Off] does not disconnect the mains supply and converter is not powered. High voltage can be present
therefore, it must not be used as a safety switch. even when the warning LED indicator lights are off.
Failure to wait the specified time after power has been
• Ground the equipment properly. Protect the user
removed before performing service or repair work can
against supply voltage and protect the motor
result in death or serious injury.
against overload in accordance with applicable
national and local regulations. • Stop the motor.
• The ground leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA. • Disconnect AC mains and remote DC-link power
supplies, including battery back-ups, UPS, and
• Protection against motor overload is not included
DC-link connections to other frequency
in the factory setting. If this function is required,
converters.
set parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to
data value [4] ETR trip 1 or data value [3] ETR • Disconnect or lock PM motor.
warning 1.
• Wait for the capacitors to discharge fully. The
• Do not remove the plugs for the motor and minimum waiting time is specified in Table 1.2
mains supply while the frequency converter is and is also visible on the nameplate on top of
connected to mains. Check that the mains supply the frequency converter.
has been disconnected and that the necessary
time has elapsed before removing motor and
• Before performing any service or repair work,
use an appropriate voltage measuring device to
mains plugs. make sure that the capacitors are fully
• The frequency converter has more voltage discharged.
sources than L1, L2, and L3, when load sharing
(linking of DC-link) or
external 24 V DC is installed. Check that all
voltage sources have been disconnected and that
the necessary time has elapsed before
commencing repair work. For information about
the discharge time, see Table 1.2.

8 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Introduction Programming Guide

1 1
Voltage [V]
Minimum waiting time (minutes) NOTICE!
4 7 15 Hazardous situations must be identified by the machine
200–240 0.25–3.7 kW – 5.5–45 kW builder/integrator who is responsible for taking
(0.34–5 hp) (7.5–60 hp) necessary preventive means into consideration. More
380–480 0.37–7.5 kW – 11–90 kW monitoring and protective devices may be included,
(0.5–10 hp) (15–121 hp) always according to valid national safety regulations, for
525–600 0.75–7.5 kW – 11–90 kW example, law on mechanical tools, regulations for the
(1–10 hp) (15–121 hp) prevention of accidents.
525–690 – 1.1–7.5 kW 11–90 kW
(1.5–10 hp) (15–121 hp) Protection mode
Once a hardware limit on motor current or DC-link voltage
Table 1.2 Discharge Time is exceeded, the frequency converter enters the protection
mode. Protection mode means a change of the PWM
NOTICE! modulation strategy and a low switching frequency to
When using Safe Torque Off, always follow the minimize losses. This continues for 10 s after the last fault
instructions in the VLT® Frequency Converters - Safe and increases the reliability and the robustness of the
Torque Off Operating Instructions. frequency converter while re-establishing full control of the
motor.

NOTICE!
Control signals from or within the frequency converter
may in rare cases be activated in error, be delayed, or
fail to occur entirely. When used in situations where
safety is critical, these control signals must not be relied
on exclusively.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 9

 Introduction VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202
1 1
1.9 Electrical Wiring
1.9.1 Electrical Wiring - Control Cables

e30be257.11
91 (L1) (U) 96
3-phase 92 (L2) (V) 97
power
input 93 (L3) (W) 98
95 PE (PE) 99
Motor
88 (-) Switch mode
DC bus
power supply
89 (+)
24 V DC (R+) 82 Brake
15 mA 200 mA resistor
50 (+10 V OUT) + - + - (R-) 81
+10 V DC
S201
1 2

53 (A IN)
ON

0-10 V DC
ON=0-20 mA relay1
0/4-20 mA S202 03
OFF=0-10 V
1 2

ON

54 (A IN) 240 V AC, 2 A

0-10 V DC 02
0/4-20 mA
55 (COM A IN) 01
relay2
12 (+24 V OUT) 06
240 V AC, 2 A
13 (+24 V OUT) P 5-00 05
400 V AC, 2 A
24 V (NPN)
18 (D IN) 04
0 V (PNP)
24 V (NPN)
19 (D IN) 0 V (PNP) (COM A OUT) 39 Analog output
0/4-20 mA
(A OUT) 42
20 (COM D IN)
24 V (NPN)
27 (D IN/OUT) 0 V (PNP) S801
24V ON=Terminated
1 2

ON

OFF=Open

0V 5V
24 V (NPN)
29 (D IN/OUT) 0 V (PNP)
24V
0V
S801
0V
RS485 RS485
(P RS485) 68
24 V (NPN) Interface
32 (D IN) 0 V (PNP) (N RS485) 69
24 V (NPN) (COM RS485) 61
33 (D IN) 0 V (PNP)
(PNP) = Source
* (NPN) = Sink
37 (D IN)

Figure 1.2 Basic Wiring Schematic Drawing

A = Analog, D = Digital
Terminal 37 is used for Safe Torque Off. For Safe Torque Off installation instructions, refer to the VLT® Frequency Converters -
Safe Torque Off Operating Instructions.
* Terminal 37 is not included in FC 202 (except enclosure size A1). Relay 2 and terminal 29 have no function in VLT® AQUA
Drive FC 202.

Long control cables and analog signals may in rare cases, Connect the digital and analog inputs and outputs
and depending on installation, result in 50/60 Hz ground separately to the common inputs (terminals 20, 55, and 39)
loops due to noise from mains supply cables. of the frequency converter to avoid ground currents from
both groups to affect other groups. For example, switching
If this occurs, it may be necessary to break the shield or on the digital input may disturb the analog input signal.
insert a 100 nF capacitor between shield and enclosure.

10 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Introduction Programming Guide

1 1
Input polarity of control terminals

130BA681.10
130BT106.10
PNP (Source)
+24 V DC

Digital input wiring

0 VDC
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37

Figure 1.3 PNP (Source)

130BT107.11
+24 V DC

0 VDC

NPN (Sink)
Digital input wiring
Figure 1.5 Grounding of Shielded/Armored Control Cables
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37

1.9.2 Start/Stop

Terminal 18 = Parameter 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [8]

Start.
Terminal 27 = Parameter 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [0]
No operation (default [2] Coast inverse).
Terminal 37 = Safe Torque Off (where available).

Figure 1.4 NPN (Sink)

NOTICE!
Control cables must be shielded/armored.

See the section Grounding of Shielded Control Cables in the

design guide for the correct termination of control cables.

Figure 1.6 Start/Stop

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 11

 Introduction VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202
1 1
1.9.3 Pulse Start/Stop

130BA021.12
12 +24V
Terminal 18 = Parameter 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [9]
Latched start.
Terminal 27 = Parameter 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [6] 18 Par. 5-10
Stop inverse.
Terminal 37 = Safe Torque Off (where available).
27 Par. 5-12

29 Par. 5-13

32 Par. 5-14

37

Figure 1.8 Speed Up/Down

1.9.5 Potentiometer Reference

Voltage reference via a potentiometer

Reference source 1 = [1] Analog input 53 (default).
Terminal 53, Low Voltage = 0 V.
Terminal 53, High Voltage = 10 V.
Terminal 53, Low Ref./Feedback = 0 RPM.
Terminal 53, High Ref./Feedback = 1500 RPM.
Switch S201 = OFF (U).

+10 V/30 mA

130BA154.11
Speed RPM
Figure 1.7 Pulse Start/Stop P 6-15

1.9.4 Speed Up/Down

Terminals 29/32 = Speed up/down Ref. voltage

Terminal 18 = Parameter 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [9] P 6-11 10 V
Start (default).
Terminal 27 = Parameter 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [19]
1 kΩ
Freeze reference.
Terminal 29 = Parameter 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input [21]
Speed up. Figure 1.9 Potentiometer Reference
Terminal 32 = Parameter 5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input [22]
Speed down.

12 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

How to Program Programming Guide

2 How to Program
2 2
2.1 The Graphical and Numerical Local

e30ba018.14
Control Panel
Easy programming of the frequency converter is done via
the graphical LCP (LCP 102). For information about using Status 1(0) a

the numerical local control panel (LCP 101), see 1234rpm 10,4A 43,5Hz
chapter 2.2.17 How to Program on the Numerical Local
Control Panel.
1 b
2.2 How to Program on the Graphical LCP 43,5Hz
The LCP is divided into 4 functional groups:
1. Graphical display with status lines. Run OK c

2. Menu keys and indicator lights - changing

parameters and switching between display Quick Main Alarm
2 Status
functions. Menu Menu Log

3. Navigation keys and indicator lights.

4. Operation keys and indicator lights.

Ca
ck

n
Ba

ce
The LCP display can show up to 5 items of operating data

l
while showing Status.

Display lines:

Info
3 On OK
a. Status line: Status messages showing icons and
graphics. Warn.

b. Line 1–2: Operator data lines showing data

Alarm
defined or selected. Add up to 1 extra line by
pressing [Status].
Hand Auto
c. Status line: Status messages showing text. 4
On Off On Reset

NOTICE!
If start-up is delayed, the LCP shows the INITIALIZING Figure 2.1 LCP
message until it is ready. Adding or removing options
can delay the start-up.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 13

 How to Program VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

2.2.1 The LCP Display

2 2

130BP044.10
The LCP display has backlight and a total of 6 alpha-
numeric lines. The display lines show the direction of
rotation (arrow), the selected set-up, and the programming
On
set-up. The display is divided into 3 sections.

Top section
Warn.
Shows up to 2 measurements in normal operating status.
Middle section
The top line shows up to 5 measurements with related
Alarm
Figure 2.3 Indicator Lights
units, regardless of status (except if there is an alarm/
warning).
Bottom section LCP keys
Always shows the state of the frequency converter in The control keys are divided into functions. The keys below
Status mode. the display and indicator lights are used for parameter set-
up, including the option of display indication during
130BP074.10

Status ! 1(1)
Top section normal operation.
43 RPM 5.44 A 25.3 kW

130BP045.10
1.4 Hz Quick Main Alarm
Status
Middle section Menu Menu Log
2.9%

Figure 2.4 LCP Keys

! Pwr.card temp (W29)
Bottom section
Auto Remote Running

Figure 2.2 Bottom Section [Status]

Indicates the status of the frequency converter and/or the
motor. Select between 3 different readouts by pressing
The active set-up (selected as the active set-up in [Status]: 5-line readouts, 4-line readouts, or smart logic
parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) is shown. When programming control.
another set-up than the active set-up, the number of the Press [Status] to select the mode of display or to return to
programmed set-up appears to the right. display mode from either the Quick Menu mode, the Main
Menu mode, or Alarm mode. Also use [Status] to toggle
Display contrast adjustment single or double readout mode.
Press [Status] and [▲] for darker display. [Quick Menu]
Press [Status] and [▼] for brighter display. Provides quick access to the most common functions of
Most parameter set-ups can be changed immediately via the frequency converter.
the LCP, unless a password has been created via The [Quick Menu] consists of:
parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password or via • Q1: My personal menu.
parameter 0-65 Quick Menu Password.
• Q2: Quick set-up.
Indicator lights
If certain threshold values are exceeded, the alarm and/or
• Q3: Function set-ups.
warning indicator lights up. A status and an alarm text • Q4: SmartStart.
appear on the LCP. • Q5: Changes made.
The ON indicator light is activated when the frequency
converter receives mains voltage, or via a DC bus terminal, • Q6: Loggings.
or a 24 V external supply. At the same time, the backlight • Q7: Water and pumps.
is on.
• Green LED/On: Control section is working.
• Yellow LED/Warn.: Indicates a warning.
• Flashing red LED/Alarm: Indicates an alarm.

14 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

How to Program Programming Guide

It is possible to switch directly between Quick Menu mode

The function set-up provides quick access to all parameters
required for most water and wastewater applications and Main Menu mode. 2 2
including:
• Variable torque. [Main Menu]
This section is used for programming all parameters.
• Constant torque.
The Main Menu parameters can be accessed immediately
• Pumps. unless a password has been created via 1 of the following
parameters:
• Dosing pumps.
• Well pumps. • Parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password.

• Booster pumps. • Parameter 0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password.

• Mixer pumps. • Parameter 0-65 Personal Menu Password.

• Aeration blowers. • Parameter 0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o

Password.
• Other pump.
For most water and wastewater applications, it is not
• Fan applications. necessary to access the Main Menu parameters. The Quick
Among other features, it also includes parameters for Menu, quick set-up, and function set-ups provide the
selecting the following: simplest and quickest access to the typical required
• Which variables to show on the LCP. parameters.
It is possible to switch directly between Main Menu mode
• Digital preset speeds.
and Quick Menu mode.
• Scaling of analog references. To create a parameter shortcut, press [Main Menu] for 3 s.
• Closed-loop single-zone and multi-zone The parameter shortcut allows direct access to any
applications. parameter.

• Specific functions related to water. [Alarm Log]

Shows an alarm list of the 5 latest alarms (numbered A1–
• Wastewater applications.
A5). To obtain more details about an alarm, press the
The quick menu Q7: Water and Pumps provides direct navigation keys to navigate to the alarm number and press
access to some of the most important dedicated water and [OK]. Just before entering the alarm mode, information
pump features: about the condition of the frequency converter is
• Q7-1: Special ramps (initial ramp, final ramp, provided.
check valve ramp).
• Q7-2: Sleep mode.
• Q7-3: Deragging.
• Q7-4: Dry Run.
• Q7-5: End of Curve Detection.
• Q7-6: Flow Compensation.
• Q7-7: Pipe Fill (Horizontal Pipes, Vertical Pipes,
Mixed Systems).
• Q7-8: Control Performance.
• Q7-9: Min. Speed Monitor.
The Quick Menu parameters can be accessed immediately,
unless a password was created via 1 of the following
parameters:
• Parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password.
• Parameter 0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password.
• Parameter 0-65 Personal Menu Password.
• Parameter 0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o
Password.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 15

 How to Program VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

2 2

130BA027.10
Info

Quick Main Alarm

Status Menu Menu Log Figure 2.8 Info

Navigation keys

Ca
ck

nc
The 4 navigation keys are used to navigate between the
Ba

el
different options available in Quick Menu, Main Menu, and
Alarm Log. Press the keys to move the cursor.
[OK]
Info

On OK
Is used to select a parameter marked by the cursor and to
enable the change of a parameter.
Warn.
Local control keys
Alarm
Local control keys are at the bottom of the LCP.

e30bp046.12
Hand Auto Hand Auto
Off on Reset Off Reset
on On On

Figure 2.9 Local Control Keys

Figure 2.5 LCP

[Back] [Hand On]

Reverts to the previous step or layer in the navigation Enables control of the frequency converter via the LCP.
structure. [Hand On] also starts the motor, and it is now possible to
enter the motor speed data with the navigation keys. The
[Cancel] key can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
Last change or command is canceled as long as the display parameter 0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP
has not been changed. .External stop signals activated with control signals, or a
[Info] fieldbus, override a start command via the LCP.
Supplies information about a command, parameter, or
function in any display window. [Info] provides detailed
information whenever help is needed.
Exit info mode by pressing either [Info], [Back], or [Cancel].

Back

Figure 2.6 Back

Cancel

Figure 2.7 Cancel

16 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

How to Program Programming Guide

The following control signals are still active when [Hand 2.2.2 Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings
On] is activated: between Multiple Frequency 2 2
• [Hand On] - [Off] - [Auto On]. Converters
• Reset.
Once the set-up of a frequency converter is complete,
• Coast stop inverse. store the data in the LCP or on a PC via MCT 10 Set-up
Software.
• Reversing.
• Set-up select bit 0 - Set-up select bit 1.

130BA027.10
• Stop command from serial communication.
• Quick stop.
Status
Quick Main Alarm
Log
Menu Menu
• DC brake.
[Off]
Stops the connected motor. The key can be selected as [1]

Ca
Enable or [0] Disable via parameter 0-41 [Off] Key on LCP. If

nc
c
Ba

el
no external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is
inactive, stop the motor by disconnecting the voltage.
[Auto On]

Info
Enables control of the frequency converter via the control On OK
terminals and/or serial communication. When a start signal
is applied on the control terminals and/or the fieldbus, the Warn.
frequency converter starts. The key can be selected as [1]
Enable or [0] Disable via parameter 0-42 [Auto on] Key on Alarm
LCP.

NOTICE! Hand
Off
Auto
Reset
on on
An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs
has higher priority than the control keys [Hand On] and
[Auto On].
Figure 2.10 LCP

[Reset]
Is used to reset the frequency converter after an alarm Data storage in LCP
(trip). It can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
parameter 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP.
NOTICE!
Stop the motor before performing this operation.
The parameter shortcut can be created by pressing [Main To store the data in the LCP:
Menu] for 3 s. The parameter shortcut allows direct access 1. Go to parameter 0-50 LCP Copy.
to any parameter.
2. Press the [OK] key.
3. Select [1] All to LCP.
4. Press the [OK] key.
All parameter settings are now stored in the LCP indicated
by the progress bar. When 100% is reached, press [OK].

Connect the LCP to another frequency converter and copy

the parameter settings to this frequency converter as well.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 17

 How to Program VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Data transfer from LCP to frequency converter Press [Info] to obtain information about the measurement
2 2 NOTICE! links to the shown operating variables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2 and
Stop the motor before performing this operation. 3).
To transfer the data from the LCP to the frequency See the operating variables shown in Figure 2.11.
converter:

130BP041.10
Status 1 (1)
1. Go to parameter 0-50 LCP Copy. 799 RPM 7.83 A 36.4 kW
2. Press the [OK] key. 1.1
0.000
3. Select [2] All from LCP.
1.2
4. Press the [OK] key. 53.2%
Auto Remote Ramping
The parameter settings stored in the LCP are now 2
transferred to the frequency converter indicated by the
progress bar. When 100% is reached, press [OK]. 3 1.3

Figure 2.11 Status Screen I

2.2.3 Display Mode

In normal operation, up to 5 different operating variables Status screen II

can be indicated continuously in the middle section: 1.1, See the operating variables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3, and 2) shown in
1.2, and 1.3, as well as 2 and 3. Figure 2.12.
In the example, speed, motor current, motor power, and
2.2.4 Display Mode - Selection of Readouts frequency are selected as variables in the first 2 lines.

130BP062.10
Status 1 (1)
Press [Status] to toggle between 3 status readout screens.
207RPM 5.25A 24.4 kW
Operating variables with different formatting are shown in 1.1
each status screen. For more information, see the examples
in this chapter.
6.9Hz 1.3

1.2
Several values or measurements can be linked to each of Auto Remote Running
the shown operating variables. The values or
measurements to be shown can be defined via the 2

following parameters:
Figure 2.12 Status Screen II
• Parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small.
• Parameter 0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small.
• Parameter 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small. Status screen III
This state shows the event and action of the smart logic
• Parameter 0-23 Display Line 2 Large.
control. For more information, see parameter group 13-**
• Parameter 0-24 Display Line 3 Large. Smart Logic.
Access the parameters via [Quick Menu], Q3 Function Set-
130BP063.10

Status 1 (1)
ups, Q3-1 General Settings, Q3-13 Display Settings.
778 RPM 0.86 A 4.0 kW

Each readout parameter selected in parameter 0-20 Display State: 0 off 0 (off )
When: -
Line 1.1 Small to parameter 0-24 Display Line 3 Large has its Do: -
own scale and digits after a decimal point. The higher
Auto Remote Running
numeric value of a parameter, the fewer digits are shown
after the decimal point. Figure 2.13 Status Screen III
Example: Current readout 5.25 A; 15.2 A; 105 A.

See parameter group 0-2* LCP Display for further details.

Status screen I
This readout state is standard after start-up or initialization.

18 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

How to Program Programming Guide

2.2.5 Parameter Set-up The parameter selection is effected with the navigation
keys. The parameters in Table 2.1 are accessible. 2 2
The frequency converter can be used for practically all
assignments and offers 2 programming mode options: Parameter Setting
• Main menu mode. Parameter 0-01 Language

• Quick menu mode. Parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] [kW]

Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage [V]
Main menu provides access to all parameters. Quick menu
Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency [Hz]
takes the user through a few parameters, making it
Parameter 1-24 Motor Current [A]
possible to start operating the frequency converter.
Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed [RPM]
Change a parameter in either main menu mode or quick
Parameter 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [0] No function1)
menu mode.
Parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor [1] Enable complete
Adaptation (AMA) AMA
2.2.6 Quick Menu Key Functions
Parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference [RPM]
Parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference [RPM]
Press [Quick Menu] to enter a list of different areas
Parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time [s]
contained in the Quick Menu.
Parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time [s]
Select Q1 My Personal Menu to show the selected personal
parameters. These parameters are selected in Parameter 3-13 Reference Site
parameter 0-25 My Personal Menu. Up to 50 different
Table 2.1 Selection of Parameter
parameters can be added in this menu.
1) If terminal 27 is set to [0] No function, no connection to +24 V on
terminal 27 is necessary.
130BC916.10

0RPM 0.00A 1(1)

Quick Menus Select Changes made to get information about:
Q1 My Personal Menu
• The last 10 changes. Use the [▲] [▼] navigation
keys to scroll between the last 10 changed
Q2 Quick Setup
parameters.
Q4 Smart Setup
Q5 Changes Made • The changes made since default setting.

Figure 2.14 Quick Menus

Select Loggings to get information about the show line
readouts. The information is shown as graphs.
Only parameters selected in parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1
Small and parameter 0-24 Display Line 3 Large can be
Select Q2 Quick Setup to go through a selection of
viewed. It is possible to store up to 120 samples in the
parameters to get the motor running almost optimally. The
memory for later reference.
default settings for the other parameters consider the
required control functions and the configuration of signal
inputs/outputs (control terminals).

2.2.7 Quick Menu, Q3 Function Set-ups

The function set-up provides quick access to all parameters • Other pump.
required for most water and wastewater applications
including:
• Fan applications.

• Variable torque. Among other features, the function set-ups menu also
includes parameters for selecting the following:
• Constant torque.
• Which variables to show on the LCP.
• Pumps.
• Digital preset speeds.
• Dosing pumps.
• Scaling of analog references.
• Well pumps.
• Closed-loop single-zone and multi-zone
• Booster pumps. applications.
• Mixer pumps. • Specific functions related to water.
• Aeration blowers. • Wastewater applications.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 19

 How to Program VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

The function set-up parameters are grouped in the following way:

2 2
Q3-1 General settings
Q3-10 Clock Settings Q3-11 Display Settings Q3-12 Analog Output Q3-13 Relays
Parameter 0-70 Date and Time Parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output Relay
Small 1⇒Parameter 5-40 Function
Relay
Parameter 0-71 Date Format Parameter 0-21 Display Line 1.2 Parameter 6-51 Terminal 42 Output Relay
Small Min Scale 2⇒Parameter 5-40 Function
Relay
Parameter 0-72 Time Format Parameter 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Option relay
Small Max Scale 7⇒Parameter 5-40 Function
Relay
Parameter 0-74 DST/Summertime Parameter 0-23 Display Line 2 – Option relay
Large 8⇒Parameter 5-40 Function
Relay
Parameter 0-76 DST/Summertime Parameter 0-24 Display Line 3 – Option relay
Start Large 9⇒Parameter 5-40 Function
Relay
Parameter 0-77 DST/Summertime Parameter 0-37 Display Text 1 – –
End
– Parameter 0-38 Display Text 2 – –
– Parameter 0-39 Display Text 3 – –

Table 2.2 Q3-1 General Settings

Q3-2 Open-loop settings

Q3-20 Digital reference Q3-21 Analog reference
Parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference Parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference
Parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference Parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference
Parameter 3-10 Preset Reference Parameter 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage
Parameter 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input Parameter 6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage
Parameter 5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input Parameter 6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Parameter 5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input Parameter 6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Table 2.3 Q3-2 Open-loop Settings

Q3-3 Closed-loop settings

Q3-30 Feedback settings Q3-31 PID settings
Parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode Parameter 20-81 PID Normal/ Inverse Control
Parameter 20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit Parameter 20-82 PID Start Speed [RPM]
Parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference Parameter 20-21 Setpoint 1
Parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference Parameter 20-93 PID Proportional Gain
Parameter 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage Parameter 20-94 PID Integral Time
Parameter 6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage
Parameter 6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Parameter 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value
Parameter 6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time
Parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function

Table 2.4 Q3-3 Closed-loop Settings

20 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

How to Program Programming Guide

2.2.8 Quick Menu, Q4 SmartStart 2.2.10 Parameter Selection

2 2
SmartStart runs automatically on the first power-up of the In the main menu mode, the parameters are divided into
frequency converter or after a reset to factory settings. groups. Select a parameter group with the navigation keys.
SmartStart guides users through a series of steps to ensure
the correct and most efficient motor control. SmartStart After selecting a parameter group, select a parameter with
can also be started directly via the Quick Menu. the navigation keys.
The middle section on the display shows the parameter
The following settings are available via SmartStart: number and name, and the selected parameter value.
• Single pump/motor: In open loop or closed loop.
• Motor alternation: 2 motors share 1 frequency

130BP067.10
740RPM 10.64A 1 [1]
converter. Basic Settings 0-0*

• Basic cascade control: Speed control of a single 0 -01 Language

pump in a multi-pump system.

For example, this can be a cost-effective solution [0] English
in booster sets.
• Master/slave: Control of up to 8 frequency Figure 2.16 Parameter Selection
converters and pumps to ensure smooth
operation of the overall pump system.

2.2.11 Changing Data

2.2.9 Main Menu Mode
The procedure for changing data is the same in the quick
Press [Main Menu] to enter the main menu mode. The menu mode and the main menu mode. Press [OK] to
readout in Figure 2.15 appears on the display. change the selected parameter.
The middle and bottom sections in the display show a list The procedure for changing data depends on whether the
of parameter groups, which can be selected by toggling selected parameter represents a numeric data value or a
the [▲] and [▼] keys. text value.

2.2.12 Changing a Text Value

130BP066.10

1107 RPM 3.84 A 1 (1)

Main Menu

0 - ** Operation/Display If the selected parameter is a text value, change the text

1 - ** Load/Motor value with the [▲] [▼] keys.
2 - ** Brakes Place the cursor on the value to save and press [OK].
3 - ** Reference / Ramps
130BP068.10

740RPM 10.64 A 1 [1]

Figure 2.15 Main Menu Mode Basic Settings 0-0*

0 -01 Language

Each parameter has a name and number, which remain the

[0] English
same regardless of the programming mode. In the main
menu mode, the parameters are divided into groups. The
first digit of the parameter number (from the left) indicates Figure 2.17 Changing a Text Value
the parameter group number.

All parameters can be changed in the Main Menu.

However, depending on the configuration
(parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode), some parameters can
be hidden. For example, open loop hides all the PID
parameters, and other enabled options make more
parameter groups visible.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 21

 How to Program VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

2.2.13 Changing a Data Value Change the selected digit infinitely variably with [▲] [▼].
2 2 The cursor indicates the selected digit. Place the cursor on
If the selected parameter shows a numeric data value, the digit to save and press [OK].
change the selected data value with the [◀] [▶] navigation
keys and the [▲] [▼] navigation keys. Press [◀] [▶] keys to

130BP072.10
957RPM 11.58A 1 (1)
move the cursor horizontally. Start Adjustments 1-7*

1-71 High starting torque time

130BP069.10
113 RPM 1.78 A 1(1)
0. 4s
Load depen. setting 1- 6*

1 - 60 Low speed load

Figure 2.21 Saving
compensation
100%

2.2.15 Value, Step by Step

Figure 2.18 Changing a Data Value
Certain parameters can be changed step by step. This
applies to:
Press the [▲] [▼] keys to change the data value. [▲] • Parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW].
increases the data value, and [▼] decreases the data value. • Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage.
Place the cursor on the value to save and press [OK]. • Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency.
The parameters are changed both as a group of numeric
130BP070.10

729RPM 6.21A 1(1) data values and as numeric data values that are infinitely
Load depen. setting 1- 6* varying.
1 - 60 Low speed load
compensation
2.2.16 Readout and Programming of
16 0% Indexed Parameters

Figure 2.19 Saving a Data Value Parameters are indexed when placed in a rolling stack.
Parameter 15-30 Fault Log: Error Code to
parameter 15-32 Alarm Log: Time contain a fault log, which
can be read out. Select a parameter, press [OK], and press
2.2.14 Infinitely Variable Change of
Numeric Data Value the [▲] [▼] keys to scroll through the value log.

If the selected parameter shows a numeric data value, For example, parameter 3-10 Preset Reference is changed as
select a digit with [◀] [▶]. follows:
1. Select the parameter, press [OK], and press [▲] [▼]
to scroll through the indexed values.
2. To change the parameter value, select the
indexed value and press [OK].
3. Change the value by pressing [▲] [▼].
4. Press [OK] to accept the new setting.
5. Press [Cancel] to abort. Press [Back] to leave the
parameter.

Figure 2.20 Selecting a Digit

22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

How to Program Programming Guide

2.2.17 How to Program on the Numerical

2 2

e30ba191.11
Local Control Panel

The following instructions are valid for the numerical LCP

(LCP 101).
The control panel is divided into 4 functional groups:
• Numerical display.
• Menu keys and indicator lights - changing 1 Setup

parameters and switching between display

functions.
• Navigation keys and indicator lights.
• Operation keys and indicator lights.
Status Quick Main
Display line 2 Setup Menu
Menu
Status messages showing icons and numeric value.
Indicator lights
• Green LED/On: Indicates if control section is on.
•

ck
Yellow LED/Wrn: Indicates a warning.

Ba
• Flashing red LED/Alarm: Indicates an alarm.
LCP keys
OK
[Menu] 3 On

Select 1 of the following modes: Warn.

• Status.
• Quick set-up.
Alarm

• Main menu.
Hand Auto
4 Off Reset
On On

Figure 2.22 LCP Keys

Status mode
Status mode shows the status of the frequency converter
or the motor.
If an alarm occurs, the NLCP automatically switches to
status mode.
Several alarms can be shown.

NOTICE!
Parameter copy is not possible with LCP 101 numerical
local control panel.

22.8
130BP077.10

rpm
Setup 1

Figure 2.23 Status Mode

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 23

 How to Program VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

2.2.18 LCP Keys

2 2
A 17

130BP078.10
Keys for local control are at the bottom of the LCP.
Setup 1

e30bp046.12
Figure 2.24 Alarm
Hand Auto
Off Reset
On On

Main Menu/Quick Set-up

Used for programming all parameters or only the Figure 2.26 LCP Keys
parameters in the Quick Menu (see also description of the
LCP 102 in chapter 2.1 The Graphical and Numerical Local
Control Panel). [Hand On]
When the value flashes, press [▲] or [▼] to change Enables control of the frequency converter via the LCP.
parameter values. [Hand On] also starts the motor and it is now possible to
enter the motor speed data with the navigation keys. The
1. Press [Main Menu] to select main menu.
key can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
2. Select the parameter group [xx-__] and press parameter 0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP.
[OK]. External stop signals activated with control signals, or a
3. Select the parameter [__-xx] and press [OK]. fieldbus, override a start command via the LCP.

4. If the parameter is an array parameter, select the The following control signals are still active when [Hand
array number and press [OK]. On] is activated:

5. Select the required data value and press [OK].

• [Hand On] - [Off] - [Auto On].
Parameters with functional options show values such as
• Reset.

[1], [2], and so on. For a description of the different • Coast stop inverse.
options, see the individual parameter descriptions in • Reversing.
chapter 3 Parameter Description.
• Set-up select lsb - Set-up select msb.
[Back]
Used for stepping backwards. • Stop command from serial communication.
[▲] [▼] are used for maneuvering between commands and • Quick stop.
within parameters. • DC brake.
[Off]
Stops the connected motor. The key can be selected as [1]
Enable or [0] Disable via parameter 0-41 [Off] Key on LCP.
If no external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is
inactive, stop the motor by disconnecting the voltage.

Figure 2.25 Main Menu/Quick Set-up

24 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

How to Program Programming Guide

[Auto On] Manual initialization

Enables control of the frequency converter via the control 1. Disconnect from mains and wait until the display 2 2
terminals and/or serial communication. When a start signal turns off.
is applied on the control terminals and/or the bus, the 2. 2a Press [Status] - [Main Menu] - [OK] at
frequency converter starts. The key can be selected as [1] the same time while powering up the
Enable or [0] Disable via parameter 0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP 102, graphical display.
LCP.
2b Press [Menu] - [OK] while powering up
NOTICE! the LCP 101, numerical display.
An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs
3. Release the keys after 5 s.
has higher priority than the control keys [Hand On] and
[Auto On]. 4. The frequency converter is now programmed
according to default settings.
[Reset] This procedure initializes all except:
Used for resetting the frequency converter after an alarm • Parameter 15-00 Operating hours.
(trip). It can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
parameter 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP.
• Parameter 15-03 Power Up's.
• Parameter 15-04 Over Temp's.
2.3.1 Initialization to Default Settings
• Parameter 15-05 Over Volt's.
Initialize the frequency converter to default settings in 2 NOTICE!
ways. A manual initialization also resets serial communication,
RFI filter settings (parameter 14-50 RFI Filter), and fault
Recommended initialization (via log settings.
parameter 14-22 Operation Mode)
1. Select parameter 14-22 Operation Mode.
2. Press [OK].
3. Select [2] initialization.
4. Press [OK].
5. Disconnect the mains supply and wait until the
display turns off.
6. Reconnect the mains supply. The frequency
converter is now reset.
Parameter 14-22 Operation Mode initializes all except:
• Parameter 14-50 RFI Filter.
• Parameter 8-30 Protocol.
• Parameter 8-31 Address.
• Parameter 8-32 FC Port Baud Rate.
• Parameter 8-35 Minimum Response Delay.
• Parameter 8-36 Max Response Delay.
• Parameter 8-37 Max Inter-Char Delay.
• Parameter 15-00 Operating hours to
parameter 15-05 Over Volt's.
• Parameter 15-20 Historic Log: Event to
parameter 15-22 Historic Log: Time.
• Parameter 15-30 Fault Log: Error Code to
parameter 15-32 Alarm Log: Time.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 25

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3 Parameter Description

3 3 3.1 Parameter Selection

The parameters are grouped into various parameter groups for easy selection of the correct parameter for optimal operation
of the frequency converter.

Overview of parameter groups

Group Function
0-** Operation and Display Parameters related to the basic functions of the frequency converter, function of the LCP keys, and
configuration of the LCP display.
1-** Load and Motor Parameters related to motor settings.
2-** Brakes Parameters related to brake features in the frequency converter.
3-** Reference/Ramps Parameters for the handling of reference, definitions of limitations, and configuration of the reaction
of the frequency converter to changes.
4-** Limits/Warnings Parameters for configuring limits and warnings.
5-** Digital In/Out Parameters for configuring the digital inputs and outputs.
6-** Analog In/Out Parameters for configuring the analog inputs and outputs.
8-** Communications and Options Parameter group for configuring communications and options.
9-** PROFIBUS Parameter group for Profibus-specific parameters (requires VLT® PROFIBUS DP MCA 101).
10-** CAN Fieldbus Parameter group for DeviceNet-specific parameters (requires VLT® DeviceNet MCA 104).
13-** Smart Logic Parameter group for smart logic control.
14-** Special Functions Parameter group for configuring special frequency converter functions.
15-** Frequency Converter Parameter group containing frequency converter information such as operating data, hardware
Information configuration, and software versions.
16-** Data Readouts Parameter group for data readouts, for example, actual references, voltages, control, alarm, warning,
and status words.
18-** Data Readouts 2 This parameter group contains the last 10 preventive maintenance logs.
20-** FC Closed Loop This parameter group is used for configuring the closed loop PID controller that controls the output
frequency of the unit.
21-** Extended Closed Loop Parameters for configuring the 3 extended closed loop PID controllers.
22-** Application Functions Parameters for water applications.
23-** Time-based Functions Parameters for actions to be performed on a daily or weekly basis.
24-** Application Functions 2 Parameters for the frequency converter bypass.
25-** Cascade Controller Parameters for configuring the basic cascade controller for sequence control of multiple pumps.
26-** Analog I/O Option MCB 109 Parameters for configuring the VLT® Analog I/O Option MCB 109.
29-** Water Application Functions Parameters for setting water-specific functions.
30-** Special Features Parameters for configuring the special features.
31-** Bypass Option Parameters for configuring the bypass function.
35-** Sensor Input Option Parameters for configuring the sensor input function.

Table 3.1 Parameter Groups

Parameter descriptions and selections are shown in the All digital input/output and analog input/output terminals
graphical LCP or the numeric LCP. See chapter 2 How to are multifunctional. All terminals have factory default
Program for details. Access the parameters by pressing functions suitable for most water applications. If other
[Quick Menu] or [Main Menu] on the LCP. The Quick Menu is special functions are required, they must be programmed
used primarily for commissioning the unit at start-up by in parameter groups 5-** Digital In/out or 6-** Analog In/
providing the parameters necessary to start operation. The out.
Main Menu provides access to all parameters for detailed
application programming.

26 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3.2 Parameters 0-** Operation and Display 0-01 Language

Option: Function:
Parameters related to the basic functions of the frequency
[51] Bahasa Part of language package 2.
converter, function of the LCP keys, and configuration of
the LCP display.
Indonesia
[52] Hrvatski Part of language package 2.
3 3
3.2.1 0-0* Basic Settings 0-02 Motor Speed Unit
Option: Function:
0-01 Language
Option: Function:
NOTICE!
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the
Defines the language to be used in the
motor is running.
display.

The frequency converter is delivered with

The information shown in the display depends on the
2 different language packages. English and
settings in parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit and
German are included in both packages.
parameter 0-03 Regional Settings. The default settings
English cannot be erased or manipulated.
of parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit and
[0] * English Part of language packages 1–2. parameter 0-03 Regional Settings depend on to which
region of the world the frequency converter is
[1] Deutsch Part of language packages 1–2.
supplied.
[2] Francais Part of language package 1.
NOTICE!
[3] Dansk Part of language package 1.
Changing the motor speed unit resets certain
[4] Spanish Part of language package 1. parameters to their initial value. Select the
[5] Italiano Part of language package 1.
motor speed unit before modifying other
parameters.
[6] Svenska Part of language package 1.

[7] Nederlands Part of language package 1. [0] * RPM Select to show motor speed variables and parameters
[10] Chinese Part of language package 2. using motor speed (RPM).

[20] Suomi Part of language package 1. [1] Hz Select to show motor speed variables and parameters
using output frequency (Hz).
[22] English US Part of language package 1.

[27] Greek Part of language package 1. 0-03 Regional Settings

[28] Bras.port Part of language package 1. Option: Function:

[36] Slovenian Part of language package 1. NOTICE!

This parameter cannot be adjusted while
[39] Korean Part of language package 2.
the motor is running.
[40] Japanese Part of language package 2.

[41] Turkish Part of language package 1. The display output depends on the settings in
parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit and
[42] Trad.Chinese Part of language package 2.
parameter 0-03 Regional Settings. The default
[43] Bulgarian Part of language package 1. settings of parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit and
parameter 0-03 Regional Settings depend on which
[44] Srpski Part of language package 1.
region of the world the frequency converter is
[45] Romanian Part of language package 1. supplied to. Reprogram the settings as required.
[46] Magyar Part of language package 1. The settings not used are made invisible.
[47] Czech Part of language package 1. [0] Interna- Sets parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] units to
[48] Polski Part of language package 1. tional [kW] and the default value of
parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency to 50 Hz.
[49] Russian Part of language package 1.
[1] North Sets parameter 1-21 Motor Power [HP] units to [hp]
[50] Thai Part of language package 2.
America and the default value of parameter 1-23 Motor
Frequency to 60 Hz.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 27

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

0-04 Operating State at Power-up Using multi set-up, it is possible to switch between set-ups
Option: Function: with the frequency converter running or stopped, via
digital input, or serial communication commands (for
Select the operating mode after reconnection of
example for night setback). If it is necessary to change set-
3 3 the frequency converter to mains voltage after
power-down when operating in hand-on (local)
ups while running, ensure that parameter 0-12 This Set-up
Linked to is programmed as required. For most water/
mode.
wastewater applications, it is not necessary to program
[0] * Resume Resumes operation of the frequency converter parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to even if change of set-
maintaining the same local reference and the up is required when running. However, for complex
same start/stop condition. The start/stop applications using the full flexibility of the multiple set-ups,
condition is applied by [Hand On]/[Off] on the it may be required. Using parameter 0-11 Programming Set-
LCP or local start via a digital input as before up, it is possible to edit parameters within any of the set-
the frequency converter was powered down. ups while continuing the frequency converter operation in
[1] Forced Stops the frequency converter, but at the same its active set-up. The active set-up can be a different set-up
stop, time retains the local speed reference before to the one being edited. Using parameter 0-51 Set-up Copy,
ref=old power-down in the memory. After mains it is possible to copy parameter settings between the set-
voltage is reconnected and after receiving a ups to enable quicker commissioning if similar parameter
start command (pressing [Hand On] or local settings are required in different set-ups.
start command via a digital input), the 0-10 Active Set-up
frequency converter restarts and operates at the
Option: Function:
retained speed reference.
Select the set-up in which the frequency
converter is to operate.
0-05 Local Mode Unit
Use parameter 0-51 Set-up Copy to copy a set-up
Option: Function: to 1 or all other set-ups. To avoid conflicting
Defines if the local reference unit is shown settings of the same parameter within 2
in terms of the motor shaft speed (in different set-ups, link the set-ups using
RPM/Hz) or as percent. parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to. Stop the
[0] * As Motor frequency converter before switching between
Speed Unit set-ups where parameters marked not
[1] % changeable during operation have different
values.
Parameters which are not changeable during
3.2.2 0-1* Set-up Operations operation are marked FALSE in
chapter 4 Parameter Lists.
Define and control the individual parameter set-ups.
The frequency converter has 4 parameter set-ups that can [0] Factory Cannot be changed. It contains the Danfoss
be programmed independently of each other. This makes setup data set and can be used as a data source
the frequency converter flexible in use and able to meet when returning the other set-ups to a known
the requirements of many different water system control state.
schemes often saving the cost of external control [1] Set-up 1 [1] Set-up 1 to [4] Set-up 4 are the 4 parameter
equipment. For example, the set-ups can be used to * set-ups within which all parameters can be
program the frequency converter to operate according to 1 programmed.
control scheme in 1 set-up (for example daytime
[2] Set-up 2
operation) and another control scheme in another set-up
[3] Set-up 3
(for example night setback). Alternatively, they can be used
[4] Set-up 4
by an air handling unit or an OEM unit to identically
program all their factory-fitted frequency converters for [9] Multi Set- Is used for remote set-up selections using
different equipment models within a range to have the up digital inputs and the serial communication
same parameters. During production/commissioning, select port. This set-up uses the settings from
a specific set-up depending on the frequency converter parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to.
model.
Select the active set-up (that is, the set-up in which the
frequency converter is operating) in parameter 0-10 Active
Set-up. The LCP then shows the selected active set-up.

28 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

0-11 Programming Set-up 0-12 This Set-up Linked to

Option: Function: Option: Function:
Select the set-up to be edited (that is Synchronization can be performed in 2 ways:
programmed) during operation; either the
active set-up or 1 of the inactive set-ups. The
• Change the edit set-up to [2] Set-up 2
in parameter 0-11 Programming Set-up 3 3
set-up number being edited is shown in the and set parameter 0-12 This Set-up
LCP in brackets. Linked to to [1] Set-up 1. This starts the
linking (synchronizing) process.
[0] Factory Cannot be edited, but it is useful as a data
setup source to return the other set-ups to a known

130BP075.10
state.

[1] Set-up 1 [1] Set-up 1 to [4] Set-up 4 can be edited freely

during operation, independently of the active
set-up.

[2] Set-up 2 Figure 3.1 Set-up Handling

[3] Set-up 3
[4] Set-up 4
[9] * Active Set- The set-up in which the frequency converter is • While still in set-up 1, using
up operating can be edited during operation. parameter 0-50 LCP Copy, copy set-up
Editing parameters in the selected set-up 1 to set-up 2. Then set
would normally be done from the LCP, but it is parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to to
also possible from any of the serial communi- [2] Set-up 2. This starts the linking
cation ports. process.

130BP076.10
0-12 This Set-up Linked to
Option: Function:
Use this parameter only if a change of set-ups
is required while the motor is running. This
parameter ensures that parameters which are
not changeable during operation have the Figure 3.2 Set-up Handling
same setting in all relevant set-ups.

To enable conflict-free changes from 1 set-up to

After the link is complete,
another while the frequency converter is
parameter 0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups reads
running, link set-ups containing parameters
set-ups 1 and 2 to indicate that all not
which are not changeable during operation.
changeable during operation parameters are now
The link ensures synchronizing of the not
the same in set-up 1 and set-up 2. If there are
changeable during operation parameter values
changes to a not changeable during operation
when moving from 1 set-up to another during
parameter in set-up 2, for example
operation. Parameters marked with FALSE in the
parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs), they are
parameter lists (in chapter 4 Parameter Lists)
also changed automatically in set-up 1. A
cannot be changed while the frequency
switch between set-up 1 and set-up 2 during
converter is running.
operation is now possible.
The parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to feature
[0] * Not linked
is used when [9] Multi set-up in
parameter 0-10 Active Set-up is selected. Use [9] [1] Set-up 1
Multi set-up to move from 1 set-up to another [2] Set-up 2
during operation while the motor is running. [3] Set-up 3
For example: [4] Set-up 4
Use [9] Multi set-up to shift from set-up 1 to set-
up 2 while the motor is running. Program
parameters in set-up 1 first, then ensure that
set-up 1 and set-up 2 are synchronized (or
linked).

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 29

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small

Array [5] Option: Function:
Range: Function: [0] None No display value selected

3 3 0* [0 -
255 ]
View a list of all the set-ups linked by
parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to. The parameter
[953] Profibus
Warning Word
Shows PROFIBUS communication
warnings.
has 1 index for each parameter set-up. The value
[1005] Readout Shows the number of CAN control
for each index shows which set-ups are linked to
Transmit Error transmission errors since the last power-
that parameter set-up.
Counter up.
Index LCP value [1006] Readout Shows the number of CAN control
0 {0} Receive Error receipt errors since the last power-up.
1 {1,2} Counter
2 {1,2} [1007] Readout Bus Shows the number of bus-off events
3 {3} Off Counter since the last power-up.
4 {4}
[1013] Warning Shows a DeviceNet-specific warning
Table 3.2 Set-up Link Example Parameter word. One separate bit is assigned to
every warning.

[1230]
0-14 Readout: Prog. Set-ups / Channel
[1472]
Range: Function: [1473]
0* [-2147483648 View the setting of [1474]
- 2147483647 ] parameter 0-11 Programming Set-up for each [1501] Running Hours View the number of running hours of
of the 4 different communication channels. the motor.
When the number is shown in hex, as it is in
the LCP, each number shows 1 channel. [1502] kWh Counter View the mains power consumption in
Numbers 1–4 show a set-up number; F kWh.
stands for the factory setting, and A stands [1600] Control Word View the control word sent from the
for an active set-up. The channels are, from frequency converter via the serial
right to left: LCP, fieldbus, USB, HPFB1.5. communication port in hex code.
Example: The value AAAAAA21h means that
[1601] Reference Total reference (sum of digital, analog,
the fieldbus channel uses set-up 2 in
[Unit] preset, bus, freeze reference, catch up,
parameter 0-11 Programming Set-up, the LCP
and slow down) in selected unit.
uses set-up 1, and all other channels use the
active set-up. [1602] Reference % Total reference (sum of digital, analog,
preset, bus, freeze reference, catch up,
and slow down) in percent.
3.2.3 0-2* LCP Display
[1603] Status Word Present status word.

Define the variables shown in the LCP. [1605] Main Actual One or more warnings in hex code.
Value [%]

NOTICE! [1609] Custom View the user-defined readouts as

Readout defined in:
For information on how to write display texts, refer to:
• Parameter 0-30 Custom Readout
• Parameter 0-37 Display Text 1. Unit.

• Parameter 0-38 Display Text 2. • Parameter 0-31 Custom Readout

• Parameter 0-39 Display Text 3. Min Value.

• Parameter 0-32 Custom Readout

Max Value.
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small
[1610] Power [kW] Actual power consumed by the motor
Option: Function:
in kW.
Select a variable to show in line 1, left
position. [1611] Power [hp] Actual power consumed by the motor
in hp.

30 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small
Option: Function: Option: Function:
[1612] Motor voltage Voltage supplied to the motor. [1638] SL Controller State of the event executed by the

[1613] Frequency Motor frequency, that is the output

frequency from the frequency converter [1639]
State

Control Card
control.

Temperature of the control card.

3 3
in Hz. Temp.

[1614] Motor Current Phase current of the motor measured as [1650] External Sum of the external reference as a
effective value. Reference percentage, that is the sum of analog,
pulse, and bus.
[1615] Frequency [%] Motor frequency, that is the output
[1651] Pulse
frequency from the frequency converter
Reference
in percent.
[1652] Feedback Signal value in units from the
[1616] Torque [Nm] Present motor load as a percentage of [Unit] programmed digital inputs.
the rated motor torque.
[1653] Digi Pot View the contribution of the digital
[1617] Speed [RPM] Speed in RPM (revolutions per minute), Reference potentiometer to the actual reference
* that is the motor shaft speed in closed feedback.
loop based on the entered motor
nameplate data, the output frequency, [1660] Digital Input Shows the status of the digital inputs.
and the load on the frequency Signal low=0, signal high=1.
converter. Regarding order, see
parameter 16-60 Digital Input. Bit 0 is at
[1618] Motor Thermal Thermal load on the motor calculated the extreme right.
by the ETR function. See also parameter
group 1-9* Motor Temperature. [1661] Terminal 53 Setting of input terminal 53. Current=0,
Switch Setting voltage=1.
[1619] KTY sensor
temperature [1662] Analog Input Actual value at input 53 either as a
[1620] Motor Angle 53 reference or protection value.

[1622] Torque [%] Shows the actual torque produced in [1663] Terminal 54 Setting of input terminal 54. Current=0,
percentage. Switch Setting voltage=1.

[1625] [1664] Analog Input Actual value at input 54 either as

[1630] DC Link DC-link voltage in the frequency 54 reference or protection value.
Voltage converter.
[1665] Analog Output Actual value at output 42 in mA. Use
[1632] Brake Present brake power transferred to an 42 [mA] parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output to
Energy /s external brake resistor. select the variable to be show in output
Shows an instant value. 42.

[1633] Brake Brake power transferred to an external [1666] Digital Output Binary value of all digital outputs.
Energy /2 min brake resistor. The average power is [bin]
calculated continuously for the most [1667] Freq. Input #29 Actual value of the frequency applied at
recent 120 s. [Hz] terminal 29 as a pulse input.

[1634] Heatsink Temp. Present heat sink temperature of the [1668] Freq. Input #33 Actual value of the frequency applied at
frequency converter. The cutout limit is [Hz] terminal 33 as a pulse input.
95 ±5 °C. Cutting back in occurs at 70
[1669] Pulse Output Actual value of pulses applied to
±5 °C.
#27 [Hz] terminal 27 in digital output mode.
[1635] Inverter Percentage load of the inverters.
[1670] Pulse Output Actual value of pulses applied to
Thermal
#29 [Hz] terminal 29 in digital output mode.
[1636] Inv. Nom. Nominal current of the frequency
Current converter. [1671] Relay Output View the setting of all relays.
[bin]
[1637] Inv. Max. Maximum current of the frequency
[1672] Counter A View the present value of counter A.
Current converter.
[1673] Counter B View the present value of counter B.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 31

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small
Option: Function: Option: Function:
[1674] Prec. Stop [3406] PCD 6 Write to

3 3 [1675]
Counter
Analog In Actual value of the signal on input [3407]
MCO
PCD 7 Write to
X30/11 X30/11 (VLT® General Purpose I/O MCB MCO
101, optional). [3408] PCD 8 Write to
MCO
[1676] Analog In Actual value of the signal on input
[3409] PCD 9 Write to
X30/12 X30/12 (VLT® General Purpose I/O MCB
MCO
101, optional).
[3410] PCD 10 Write
[1677] Analog Out Actual value at output X30/8 (VLT® to MCO
X30/8 [mA] General Purpose I/O MCB 101, optional). [3421] PCD 1 Read
Use parameter 6-60 Terminal X30/8 from MCO
Output to select the variable to be [3422] PCD 2 Read
shown. from MCO
[1678] [3423] PCD 3 Read
[1679] from MCO
[1680] Fieldbus CTW Control word (CTW) received from the [3424] PCD 4 Read
1 fieldbus. from MCO
[3425] PCD 5 Read
[1682] Fieldbus REF 1 Main reference value sent with control
from MCO
word via the serial communications
[3426] PCD 6 Read
network, for example, from the BMS,
from MCO
PLC, or another controller.
[3427] PCD 7 Read
[1684] Comm. Option Extended fieldbus communication from MCO
Status option status word.
[3428] PCD 8 Read
[1685] FC Port CTW 1 Control word (CTW) received from the from MCO
fieldbus. [3429] PCD 9 Read
from MCO
[1686] FC Port REF 1 Status word (STW) sent to the fieldbus.
[3430] PCD 10 Read
[1690] Alarm Word One or more alarms in hex code (used from MCO
for serial communication).
[3440] Digital Inputs
[1691] Alarm word 2 One or more alarms in hex code (used [3441] Digital Outputs
for serial communication). [3450] Actual Position
[1692] Warning Word One or more warnings in hex code [3451] Commanded
(used for serial communication). Position
[3452] Actual Master
[1693] Warning word One or more warnings in hex code
Position
2 (used for serial communication).
[3453] Slave Index
[1694] Ext. Status One or more status conditions in hex Position
Word code (used for serial communication). [3454] Master Index
[3401] PCD 1 Write to Position
MCO [3455] Curve Position
[3402] PCD 2 Write to [3456] Track Error
MCO [3457] Synchronizing
[3403] PCD 3 Write to Error
MCO [3458] Actual Velocity
[3404] PCD 4 Write to [3459] Actual Master
MCO Velocity
[3405] PCD 5 Write to [3460] Synchronizing
MCO Status

32 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 3.2.4 0-3* LCP Custom Readout
Option: Function:
[3461] Axis Status
It is possible to customize the display elements for various
purposes:
[3462]
[3470]
Program Status
MCO Alarm
• Custom readout. Value proportional to speed 3 3
(linear, squared, or cubed depending on unit
Word 1
selected in parameter 0-30 Custom Readout Unit).
[3471] MCO Alarm
Word 2 • Display text. Text string stored in a parameter.
[9913] Custom readout
[9914] The calculated value to be shown is based on the settings
[9920] in:
[9921] • Parameter 0-30 Custom Readout Unit.
[9922]
• Parameter 0-31 Custom Readout Min Value (linear
[9923] only).
[9924]
[9925]
• Parameter 0-32 Custom Readout Max Value.

[9926] • Parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM].

[9927] • Parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz].

0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small • Actual speed.

The options are the same as those listed for Custom Readout (Value)

130BT105.12
P 16-09
parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small. Select a variable to show in Custom Readout
Unit P 0-30
line 1, center position.
Max value
P 0-32
0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small
w)
The options are the same as those listed for fl o
nd
e da
parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small. Select a variable to show in pe )
.s re
( e.g s su
line 1, right position. ni t re
(P )
e ar U it er
Li n Un ow
ic (P
0-23 Display Line 2 Large Min value dr
at it
a Un
The options are the same as those listed for
Linear Qu bi
c
units only Cu Motor Speed
parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small. Select a variable to show in P 0-31
0 Motor Speed
line 2. High limit
P 4-13 (RPM)
P 4-14 (Hz)
0-24 Display Line 3 Large
Figure 3.3 Custom Readout
The options are the same as those listed for
parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small. Select a variable to show in
line 2.

0-25 My Personal Menu

Array [50]
Range: Function:
0 [0 - Define up to 20 parameters to appear in the Q1
N/A* 9999 Personal Menu, accessible via the [Quick Menu]
N/A] key on the LCP. The parameters are shown in
the Q1 Personal Menu in the order they are
programmed into this array parameter. Delete
parameters by setting the value to 0000.
For example, this can be used to provide quick,
simple access to just 1 or up to 50 parameters
which require changing regularly.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 33

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

The relation depends on the type of unit selected in 0-30 Custom Readout Unit
parameter 0-30 Custom Readout Unit: Option: Function:
[73] kPa
Unit type Speed relation
3 3 Dimensionless
[74]
[75]
m WG
mm Hg
Speed
[80] kW
Flow, volume
[120] GPM
Flow, mass Linear
[121] gal/s
Velocity
[122] gal/min
Length
[123] gal/h
Temperature
[124] CFM
Pressure Quadratic
[125] ft³/s
Power Cubic
[126] ft³/min
[127] ft³/h
Table 3.3 Speed Relations for Different Unit Types [130] lb/s
[131] lb/min
0-30 Custom Readout Unit [132] lb/h
Option: Function: [140] ft/s
Program a value to be shown in the LCP display. [141] ft/min
The value has a linear, squared, or cubed relation [145] ft
to speed. This relation depends on the unit [160] °F
selected (see Table 3.3). The actual calculated [170] psi
value can be read in parameter 16-09 Custom [171] lb/in²
Readout, and/or shown in the display by selecting [172] in WG
[1609] Custom Readout in parameter 0-20 Display [173] ft WG
Line 1.1 Small to parameter 0-24 Display Line 3 [174] in Hg
Large. [180] HP
[0]
0-31 Custom Readout Min Value
[1] * %
[5] PPM
Range: Function:
[10] 1/min Size [ -999999.99 - This parameter allows selection of
[11] RPM related* 100.00 the minimum value of the custom-
CustomRea- defined readout (occurs at zero
[12] Pulse/s
doutUnit] speed). It is only possible to select a
[20] l/s
value different from 0 when selecting
[21] l/min
a linear unit in
[22] l/h
parameter 0-30 Custom Readout Unit.
[23] m³/s
For quadratic and cubic units, the
[24] m³/min minimum value is 0.
[25] m³/h
[30] kg/s 0-32 Custom Readout Max Value
[31] kg/min
Range: Function:
[32] kg/h
100 Custom- [ par. 0-31 - This parameter sets the
[33] t/min
ReadoutUnit* 999999.99 maximum value to be shown
[34] t/h
CustomRea- when the speed of the motor
[40] m/s doutUnit] has reached the set value for
[41] m/min parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High
[45] m Limit [RPM] or
[60] °C parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High
[70] mbar Limit [Hz] (depends on setting in
[71] bar parameter 0-02 Motor Speed
[72] Pa Unit).

34 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

0-37 Display Text 1 0-39 Display Text 3

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0* [0 - In this parameter, it is possible to write an individual can be inserted by placing the cursor between 2
25 ] text string to be shown in the LCP or to be read via
serial communication.
characters and pressing [▲] or [▼].
3 3
To show the text permanently, select [37] Display Text
3.2.5 0-4* LCP Keypad
1 in 1 of the following parameters:
• Parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small. Enable, disable, and password protect individual keys on
• Parameter 0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small. the LCP.
• Parameter 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small.
0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP
• Parameter 0-23 Display Line 2 Large. Option: Function:
• Parameter 0-24 Display Line 3 Large. [0] Disabled Select to disable the key.
• Parameter 0-37 Display Text 1. [1] * Enabled [Hand On] key is enabled.
Changing parameter 12-08 Host Name changes [2] Password Avoid unauthorized start in hand-on
parameter 0-37 Display Text 1 - but not the opposite mode. If parameter 0-40 [Hand on] Key on
way. LCP is included in My Personal Menu,
define the password in
0-38 Display Text 2 parameter 0-65 Personal Menu Password.
Range: Function: Otherwise, define the password in
0* [0 - In this parameter, it is possible to write an individual parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password.
25 ] text string to be shown in the LCP or to be read via [3] Enabled without
serial communication. OFF
To show the text permanently, select [38] Display Text [4] Password
2 in: without OFF
• Parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small. [5] Enabled with
OFF
• Parameter 0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small.
[6] Password with
• Parameter 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small.
OFF
• Parameter 0-23 Display Line 2 Large. [9] Enabled, ref = 0
• Parameter 0-24 Display Line 3 Large.
0-41 [Off] Key on LCP
Press [▲] or [▼] to change a character. Press [◀] and Option: Function:
[▶] to move the cursor. When a character is [0] Disabled Select to disable the key.
highlighted by the cursor, this character can be
[1] * Enabled [Off] key is enabled.
changed. A character can be inserted by placing the
cursor between 2 characters and pressing [▲] or [▼]. [2] Password Avoid unauthorized stop. If parameter 0-41 [Off]
Key on LCP is included in My Personal Menu,
0-39 Display Text 3 define the password in parameter 0-65 Personal
Menu Password. Otherwise, define the password
Range: Function:
in parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password.
0* [0 - In this parameter, it is possible to write an individual
25 ] text string to show in the LCP or to be read via
serial communication. To show the text permanently,
select display text 3 in parameter 0-20 Display Line
1.1 Small, parameter 0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small,
parameter 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small,
parameter 0-23 Display Line 2 Large, or
parameter 0-24 Display Line 3 Large. Press [▲] or [▼]
to change a character. Press [◀] and [▶] to move the
cursor. When a character is highlighted by the
cursor, this character can be changed. A character

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 35

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP 0-45 [Drive Bypass] Key on LCP
Option: Function: Press [Off] and select [0] Disabled to avoid unintended stop of
[0] Disabled Select to disable the key. the frequency converter. Press [Off] and select [2] Password to

3 3
avoid unauthorized bypass of the frequency converter. If
[1] * Enabled [Auto On] key is enabled.
parameter 0-45 [Drive Bypass] Key on LCP is included in the Quick
[2] Password Avoid unauthorized start in auto-on mode. If Menu, define the password in parameter 0-65 Personal Menu
parameter 0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP is included Password.
in My Personal Menu, define the password in Option: Function:
parameter 0-65 Personal Menu Password.
[0] Disabled Select to disable the
Otherwise, define the password in
key.
parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password.
[1] * Enabled
0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP [2] Password
Option: Function:
[0] Disabled Select to disable the key. 3.2.6 0-5* Copy/Save
[1] * Enabled [Reset] key is enabled.
Copy parameters from and to the LCP. Use these
[2] Password Avoid unauthorized resetting. If parameters for saving and copying set-ups from 1
parameter 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP is included frequency converter to another.
in parameter 0-25 My Personal Menu, define
the password in parameter 0-65 Personal
0-50 LCP Copy
Menu Password. Otherwise, define the Option: Function:
password in parameter 0-60 Main Menu NOTICE!
Password.
This parameter cannot be adjusted
[3] Enabled while the motor is running.
without OFF
[4] Password [0] * No copy
without OFF [1] All to LCP Copies all parameters in all set-ups from the
[5] Enabled with Pressing the key resets the frequency frequency converter memory to the LCP
OFF converter, but does not start it. memory. For service purposes, copy all
[6] Password Prevents unauthorized reset. After authorized parameters to the LCP after commissioning.
with OFF reset, the frequency converter does not [2] All from LCP Copies all parameters in all set-ups from the
start. See option [2] Password for information LCP memory to the frequency converter
on how to set the password. memory.

[3] Size indep. Copies only the parameters that are

0-44 [Off/Reset] Key on LCP
from LCP independent of the motor size. Use the latest
Enable or disable the [Off/Reset] key.
selection to program several frequency
Option: Function: converters with the same function without
[0] Disabled disturbing motor data which is already set.
[1] * Enabled [10] Delete LCP
[2] Password copy data

36 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

0-51 Set-up Copy 0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[0] No copy No function. [6] All: No Prevents unauthorized viewing and editing of
*
[1] Copy to Copies all parameters in the present
access Main Menu parameters and disables access to
parameters via fieldbus. 3 3
set-up 1 programming set-up (defined in
parameter 0-11 Programming Set-up) to set-up 1. 0-65 Personal Menu Password
[2] Copy to Copies all parameters in the present Range: Function:
set-up 2 programming set-up (defined in 200* [-9999 - Define the password for access to My Personal
parameter 0-11 Programming Set-up) to set-up 2. 9999 ] Menu via the [Quick Menu] key. If
parameter 0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o
[3] Copy to Copies all parameters in the present
Password is set to [0] Full access, this
set-up 3 programming set-up (defined in
parameter is ignored.
parameter 0-11 Programming Set-up) to set-up 3.

[4] Copy to Copies all parameters in the present 0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o Password
set-up 4 programming set-up (defined in
If parameter 0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password is set to [0]
parameter 0-11 Programming Set-up) to set-up 4.
Full access, this parameter is ignored.
[9] Copy to Copies the parameters in the present set-up to Option: Function:
all each of the set-ups 1 to 4.
[0] * Full access Disables the password defined in
parameter 0-65 Personal Menu Password.
3.2.7 0-6* Password [1] LCP: Read only Prevents unauthorized editing of My
Personal Menu parameters.
0-60 Main Menu Password [3] Bus: Read only
Range: Function: [5] All: Read only
100* [-9999 - Define the password for access to the Main
0-67 Bus Password Access
9999 ] Menu via the [Main Menu] key. If
parameter 0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Range: Function:
Password is set to [0] Full access, this 0 N/A* [0 - 9999 N/A] Writing to this parameter enables
parameter is ignored. unlocking of the frequency converter
from bus/MCT 10 Set-up Software.
0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password
Option: Function:
3.2.8 0-7* Clock Settings
[0] * Full access Disables the password defined in
parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password. If this
Set the time and date of the internal clock. For example,
option is selected, parameter 0-60 Main Menu
the internal clock can be used for:
Password, parameter 0-65 Personal Menu
Password, and parameter 0-66 Access to
• Timed actions.
Personal Menu w/o Password are ignored. • Energy log.

[1] LCP: Read Prevents unauthorized editing of Main Menu • Trend analysis.
only parameters. • Date/time stamps on alarms.
[2] LCP: No Prevents unauthorized viewing and editing of • Logged data.
access Main Menu parameters.
• Preventive maintenance.
[3] Bus: Read Provides read-only access to parameters via
It is possible to program the clock for daylight saving time/
only fieldbus.
summer time, weekly working days/non-working days,
[4] Bus: No Disables access to parameters via fieldbus. including 20 exceptions (holidays, and so on). Although the
access clock settings can be set via the LCP, they can also be set
[5] All: Read Prevents unauthorized editing of Main Menu along with timed actions and preventive maintenance
only parameters and provides read-only access to functions using the MCT 10 Set-up Software tool.
parameters via fieldbus.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 37

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

NOTICE! 0-74 DST/Summertime

The frequency converter has no back-up of the clock Option: Function:
function and the set date/time resets to default enter the start date and end date in
(01.01.2007 00:00 Mon) after a power-down, unless a
3 3 real-time clock-module with back-up is installed. If no
parameter 0-76 DST/Summertime Start and
parameter 0-77 DST/Summertime End.
module with back-up is installed, only use the clock
[0] * Off
function if the frequency converter is integrated into an
[2] Manual
external system using serial communication, with the
system maintaining synchronization of control 0-76 DST/Summertime Start
equipment clock times. In parameter 0-79 Clock Fault, it is
Range: Function:
possible to program a warning if the clock has not been
set properly, for example, after a power-down. Size [ 0 - 0 ] Sets the date and time when DST/
related* summer time starts. The date is
programmed in the format selected in
NOTICE! parameter 0-71 Date Format.
When mounting VLT® Analog I/O Option MCB 109 or
VLT® Real-time Clock MCB 117, a battery back-up of the 0-77 DST/Summertime End
date and time is included. Range: Function:
Size [ 0 - 0 ] Sets the date and time when DST/
0-70 Date and Time related* summer time ends. The date is
Range: Function: programmed in the format selected in
Size [0 - Sets the date and time of the internal clock. parameter 0-71 Date Format.
related* 0] The format to be used is set in
parameter 0-71 Date Format and
0-79 Clock Fault
parameter 0-72 Time Format. Option: Function:
Enables or disables the clock warning when the
When using VLT® Real-time Clock MCB 117,
clock has not been set, or has been reset due to a
the time is synchronized at 15:00 every day.
power-down and no back-up is installed. If VLT®
0-71 Date Format Analog I/O Option MCB 109 is installed, [1] Enabled
is default.
Option: Function:
[0] YYYY-MM-DD Sets the date format to be used in the LCP. [0] Disabled
[1] Enabled
[1] DD-MM-YYYY Sets the date format to be used in the LCP.

[2] MM/DD/YYYY Sets the date format to be used in the LCP.

0-81 Working Days
Array [7]
0-72 Time Format Array with 7 elements [0]–[6] shown below the parameter
number in the display. Press [OK] and step between elements
Option: Function:
with [▲] and [▼].
Sets the time format to be used in the LCP.
Option: Function:
[0] 24 h
Set for each weekday if it is a working day or a non-
[1] 12 h
working day. First element of the array is Monday. The
0-73 Time Zone Offset working days are used for timed actions.
Range: Function: [0] No
0 min* [-780 - 780 Enter the time zone offset relative to [1] Yes
min] UTC. This parameter is required for the
automatic daylight saving time
adjustment.

0-74 DST/Summertime
Option: Function:
Select how to handle daylight saving time/summer
time. For manual setting of DST/summer time,

38 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

0-82 Additional Working Days

Array [5]
Array with 5 elements [0]–[4] shown below the parameter

3 3
number in the display. Press [OK] and step between elements
with [▲] and [▼].

Range: Function:
Size related* [ 0 - 0 ] Defines dates for additional working days
that would normally be non-working
days according to parameter 0-81 Working
Days.

0-83 Additional Non-Working Days

Array [15]
Array with 15 elements [0]–[14] shown below the parameter
number in the display. Press [OK] and step between elements
with [▲] and [▼].

Range: Function:
Size related* [ 0 - 0 ] Defines dates for additional working days
that would normally be non-working
days according to parameter 0-81 Working
Days.

0-84 Time for Fieldbus

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] Shows the time for fieldbus.

0-85 Summer Time Start for Fieldbus

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] Shows the summer time start for
fieldbus.

0-86 Summer Time End for Fieldbus

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] Shows the summer time end for fieldbus.

0-89 Date and Time Readout

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 25 ] Shows the current date and time. The date and
time is updated continuously.
The clock does not begin counting until a setting
different from default has been made in
parameter 0-70 Date and Time.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 39

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.3 Parameters 1-** Load and Motor 1-01 Motor Control Principle
Option: Function:
3.3.1 1-0* General Settings
[2] Flux Flux vector control without encoder

3 3 Define whether the frequency converter operates in open

sensorless feedback, for simple installation and
robustness against sudden load changes.
loop or closed loop.
[3] Flux w/ High accuracy speed and torque control,
1-00 Configuration Mode motor feedb suitable for the most demanding
Option: Function: applications.
NOTICE!
1-03 Torque Characteristics
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running. Option: Function:
[0] Constant For speed control of constant torque applications

NOTICE! torque such as:

When set to [3] Closed Loop, the commands

• Axial pumps.
reversing and start reversing do not reverse • Positive displacement pumps.
the motor direction. • Blowers.

Provides a voltage, which is optimized for a

[0] Open Motor speed is determined by applying a speed constant torque load characteristic of the motor
Loop reference or by setting the speed when in hand-on in the entire speed range.
mode.
[1] Variable For speed control of centrifugal pumps and fans.
Open loop is also used if the frequency converter
torque Also to be used when controlling more than 1
is part of a closed-loop control system based on an
motor from the same frequency converter (for
external PID controller providing a speed reference
example, multiple condenser fans or cooling
signal as output.
tower fans). Provides a voltage, which is
[3] Closed Motor speed is determined by a reference from the optimized for a squared torque load charac-
Loop built-in PID controller varying the motor speed as teristic of the motor.
in a closed-loop control process (for example
[2] Auto For optimum energy-efficient speed control of
constant pressure or flow). Configure the PID
Energy screw and scroll compressors. Provides a voltage,
controller in parameter group 20-** Feedback or via
Optim. CT which is optimized for a constant torque load
the Function Set-ups accessed by pressing [Quick
characteristic of the motor in the entire range
Menu].
down to 15 Hz. Furthermore, the AEO feature
adapts the voltage exactly to the current load
1-01 Motor Control Principle
situation, reducing energy consumption and
Option: Function:
audible noise from the motor. To obtain optimal
NOTICE! performance, set the motor power factor cos phi
This parameter cannot be adjusted correctly. This value is set in
while the motor is running. parameter 14-43 Motor Cosphi. The parameter has
a default value that is automatically adjusted
Select which motor control principle to when the motor data is programmed. These
employ. settings typically ensure optimum motor voltage,
but if the motor power factor cos phi requires
[0] * U/f Special motor mode for parallel connected
tuning, an AMA function can be carried out
motors in special motor applications. When
using parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation
U/f is selected, edit the characteristic of the
(AMA).
control principle in parameter 1-55 U/f
Characteristic - U and parameter 1-56 U/f [3] Auto For optimum energy-efficient speed control of
Characteristic - F. * Energy centrifugal pumps and fans. Provides a voltage,
Optim. VT which is optimized for a squared torque load
[1] VVC+ Voltage vector control principle suitable for
characteristic of the motor. Furthermore, the AEO
most applications. The main benefit of VVC+ feature adapts the voltage exactly to the current
operation is that it uses a robust motor load situation, reducing energy consumption and
model. audible noise from the motor. To obtain optimal

40 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

1-03 Torque Characteristics The following parameters are active depending on the
Option: Function: setting in parameter 1-10 Motor Construction.
performance, set the motor power factor
[0] [1] PM [2] PM
correctly. This value is set in
parameter 14-43 Motor Cosphi. The parameter has Parameter 1-10 Motor Asynchro Motor Motor
[3]
SynRM
3 3
a default value that is automatically adjusted Construction - non- Salient
Motor
when the motor data is programmed. These nous salient IPM
settings typically ensure optimum motor voltage, Parameter 1-00 Config-
x x x x
but if the motor power factor cos phi requires uration Mode
tuning, an AMA function can be carried out Parameter 1-03 Torque
x – - -
using parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation Characteristics
(AMA). It is rarely necessary to adjust the motor Parameter 1-06 Clockwi
x x x x
power factor parameter manually. se Direction
Parameter 1-14 Dampi
– x x x
NOTICE! ng Gain
Parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics has no effect when Parameter 1-15 Low
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non-salient Speed Filter Time – x x x
SPM. Const.
Parameter 1-16 High
Speed Filter Time – x x x
1-04 Overload Mode
Const.
Select the torque level in overload mode.
Parameter 1-17 Voltage
– x x x
Option: Function: filter time const.
[0] High torque Allows up to 160% overtorque for Parameter 1-20 Motor
x – – –
undersized motors. Power [kW]

[1] * Normal torque Allows up to 110% overtorque. Parameter 1-21 Motor

x – – –
Power [HP]
1-06 Clockwise Direction Parameter 1-22 Motor
x – – –
Voltage
Option: Function:
Parameter 1-23 Motor
NOTICE! Frequency
x – – –

This parameter cannot be adjusted while Parameter 1-24 Motor

x x x x
the motor is running. Current
Parameter 1-25 Motor
x x x x
This parameter defines the term clockwise Nominal Speed
corresponding to the LCP direction arrow. Used for Parameter 1-26 Motor
– x x x
easy change of direction of shaft rotation without Cont. Rated Torque
swapping motor wires. Parameter 1-28 Motor
x x x x
[0] * Normal The motor shaft turns in clockwise direction when Rotation Check
the frequency converter is connected U⇒U, V⇒V, Parameter 1-29 Autom
and W⇒W to the motor. atic Motor Adaptation x x x x
(AMA)
[1] Inverse Motor shaft turns in counterclockwise direction
Parameter 1-30 Stator
when the frequency converter is connected U⇒U, x x x x
Resistance (Rs)
V⇒V, and W⇒W to the motor.
Parameter 1-31 Rotor
x – – –
Resistance (Rr)
3.3.2 1-1* Motor Selection Parameter 1-35 Main
x – – –
Reactance (Xh)
NOTICE! Parameter 1-37 d-axis
– x x x
Inductance (Ld)
This parameter group cannot be adjusted while the
Parameter 1-39 Motor
motor is running. x x x x
Poles

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 41

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

[0] [1] PM [2] PM [0] [1] PM [2] PM

[3] [3]
Parameter 1-10 Motor Asynchro Motor Motor Parameter 1-10 Motor Asynchro Motor Motor
SynRM SynRM
Construction - non- Salient Construction - non- Salient
Motor Motor
nous salient IPM nous salient IPM
3 3 Parameter 1-40 Back
– x x –
Parameter 1-71 Start
x x x x
EMF at 1000 RPM Delay
Parameter 1-44 d-axis Parameter 1-72 Start
– – – x x x x x
Inductance Sat. (LdSat) Function
Parameter 1-45 q-axis Parameter 1-73 Flying
– – x – x x x x
Inductance Sat. (LqSat) Start
Parameter 1-46 Positio Parameter 1-80 Functio
– x x x x x x x
n Detection Gain n at Stop
Parameter 1-47 Torque Parameter 1-81 Min
– x x x
Calibration Speed for Function at x x x x
Parameter 1-48 Inducta Stop [RPM]
– – – x
nce Sat. Point Parameter 1-82 Min
Parameter 1-49 q-axis Speed for Function at x x x x
– – x –
Inductance Sat. Point Stop [Hz]
Parameter 1-50 Motor Parameter 1-86 Trip
x x x x
Magnetisation at Zero x – – – Speed Low [RPM]
Speed Parameter 1-87 Trip
x x x x
Parameter 1-51 Min Speed Low [Hz]
Speed Normal x – – – Parameter 1-90 Motor
x x x x
Magnetising [RPM] Thermal Protection
Parameter 1-52 Min Parameter 1-91 Motor
x x x x
Speed Normal x – – – External Fan
Magnetising [Hz] Parameter 1-93 Thermi
x x x x
Parameter 1-58 Flying stor Source
Start Test Pulses x x x – Parameter 2-00 DC
x – x x
Current Hold/Preheat Current
Parameter 1-59 Flying Parameter 2-01 DC
x x x x
Start Test Pulses x x x – Brake Current
Frequency Parameter 2-02 DC
x – x x
Parameter 1-60 Low Braking Time
Speed Load Compen- x – – – Parameter 2-03 DC
sation Brake Cut In Speed x – x x
Parameter 1-61 High [RPM]
Speed Load Compen- x – – – Parameter 2-04 DC
x – x x
sation Brake Cut-in Speed [Hz]
Parameter 1-62 Slip Parameter 2-06 Parking
x – – – – x x x
Compensation Current
Parameter 1-63 Slip Parameter 2-07 Parking
– x x x
Compensation Time x – – – Time
Constant Parameter 2-10 Brake
x x x x
Parameter 1-64 Resona Function
x – – –
nce Damping Parameter 2-11 Brake
x x x x
Parameter 1-65 Resona Resistor (ohm)
nce Damping Time x – – – Parameter 2-12 Brake
Constant x x x x
Power Limit (kW)
Parameter 1-66 Min. Parameter 2-13 Brake
– x x x x x x x
Current at Low Speed Power Monitoring
Parameter 1-70 Start
– x x x
Mode

42 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

[0] [1] PM [2] PM

[3]
3.3.3 Asynchronous Motor Set-up
Parameter 1-10 Motor Asynchro Motor Motor
SynRM
Construction - non- Salient Enter the following motor data. Find the information on
Motor
nous salient IPM the motor nameplate.
Parameter 2-15 Brake
x x x x
3 3
Check 1. Parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] or
Parameter 2-16 AC parameter 1-21 Motor Power [HP].
x – – –
Brake Max. Current
2. Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage.
Parameter 2-17 Over-
x x x x
voltage Control 3. Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency.
Parameter 4-10 Motor 4. Parameter 1-24 Motor Current.
x x x x
Speed Direction
5. Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed.
Parameter 4-11 Motor
x x x x
Speed Low Limit [RPM] For optimum performance in VVC+ mode, extra motor data
Parameter 4-12 Motor is required to set up the following parameters. Find the
x x x x
Speed Low Limit [Hz] data in the motor datasheet (this data is typically not
Parameter 4-13 Motor available on the motor nameplate). Run a complete
x x x x
Speed High Limit [RPM] automatic motor adaptation (AMA) using
Parameter 4-14 Motor parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) [1]
x x x x
Speed High Limit [Hz] Enable Complete AMA or enter the parameters manually.
Parameter 4-16 Torque Parameter 1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe) is always entered
x x x x manually.
Limit Motor Mode
Parameter 4-17 Torque 1. Parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs).
x x x x
Limit Generator Mode
2. Parameter 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr).
Parameter 4-18 Current
x x x x 3. Parameter 1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1).
Limit
Parameter 4-19 Max 4. Parameter 1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2).
x x x x
Output Frequency
5. Parameter 1-35 Main Reactance (Xh).
Parameter 4-58 Missing
x – x x 6. Parameter 1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe).
Motor Phase Function
Parameter 14-40 VT
x – – –
Level Application-specific adjustment when running VVC+
Parameter 14-41 AEO VVC+ is the most robust control mode. In most situations,
Minimum Magneti- x – – – it provides optimum performance without further
sation adjustments. Run a complete AMA for best performance.
Parameter 14-42 Minim
x – – –
um AEO Frequency 3.3.4 PM Motor Set-up
Parameter 14-43 Motor
x – – –
Cos-Phi This section describes how to set up a PM motor.

1-10 Motor Construction Initial programming steps

Select the motor construction type. To activate PM motor operation, select [1] PM, non-salient
SPM or [2] PM, salient IPM in parameter 1-10 Motor
Option: Function:
Construction.
[0] * Asynchron For asynchronous motors.

[1] PM, non salient SPM For permanent magnet (PM) motors.
PM motors are divided into 2 groups,
with either surface-mounted (non-
salient) or interior (salient) magnets.

[2] PM, salient IPM

[5] SynRM

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 43

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Programming motor data • Parameter 1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq).

After selecting a PM motor, the PM motor-related
parameters in parameter groups 1-2* Motor Data, 1-3* Adv.
• Parameter 1-44 d-axis Inductance Sat.
(LdSat).
Motor Data, and 1-4* Adv. Motor Data II are active.
3 3 The necessary data can be found on the motor nameplate
and on the motor datasheet.
• Parameter 1-45 q-axis Inductance Sat.
(LqSat).

Program the following parameters in the order listed: • Parameter 1-49 q-axis Inductance Sat.
1. Parameter 1-24 Motor Current. Point.

2. Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed. NOTICE!

3. Parameter 1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque. IPM motors may be missing some inductance values on
the nameplates or in the datasheets. Perform AMA to get
4. Parameter 1-39 Motor Poles. the valid values.
Run a complete AMA using parameter 1-29 Automatic
Motor Adaptation (AMA) [1] Enable Complete AMA. Test motor operation
1. Start the motor at low speed (100–200 RPM). If
NOTICE! the motor does not turn, check the installation,
When using AMA, make sure that the value of
general programming, and motor data.
parameter 1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM is calculated using
nominal speed. 2. Check if the start function in parameter 1-70 Start
Mode fits the application requirements.
If a complete AMA is not performed, configure the Rotor detection
following parameters manually: This function is the recommended selection for
1. Parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) applications where the motor starts from standstill, for
Enter the line-to-common stator winding example pumps or conveyors. On some motors, a sound is
resistance (Rs). If only line-line data is available, heard when the frequency converter performs the rotor
divide the line-line value by 2 to get the line- detection. This does not harm the motor.
common value. Parking
2. Parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld) This function is the recommended selection for
Enter the line-to-common direct axis inductance applications where the motor is rotating at slow speed, for
of the PM motor. example windmilling in fan applications.
If only line-line data is available, divide the line- Parameter 2-06 Parking Current and parameter 2-07 Parking
line value by 2 to get the line-common value. Time can be adjusted. Increase the factory setting of these
parameters for applications with high inertia.
3. Parameter 1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM.
Enter the line-to-line back EMF of the PM Motor Application-specific adjustment when running VVC+
at 1000 RPM (RMS value). Back EMF is the voltage VVC+ is the most robust control mode. In most situations,
generated by a PM motor when no frequency it provides optimum performance without further
converter is connected and the shaft is turned adjustments. Run a complete AMA for best performance.
externally. It is normally specified for nominal
Start the motor at nominal speed. If the application does
motor speed or for 1000 RPM measured between
not run well, check the VVC+ PM settings. Table 3.4
2 lines. If the value is not available for a motor
contains recommendations for various applications.
speed of 1000 RPM, calculate the correct value as
follows:
If back EMF is, for example, 320 V at 1800 RPM, it
can be calculated at 1000 RPM as follows:
Back EMF = (Voltage/RPM)x1000 =
(320/1800)x1000 = 178.
4. For IPM motors: Configure the inductance values
in the following parameters:

44 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

Application Settings If a complete AMA is not performed, configure the

Low-inertia applications Increase parameter 1-17 Voltage filter following parameters manually:
ILoad/IMotor<5 time const. by factor 5–10. 1. Parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs)
Reduce parameter 1-14 Damping Enter the line-to-common stator winding
Gain. resistance (Rs). If only line-line data is available,
divide the line-line value by 2 to get the line-
3 3
Reduce parameter 1-66 Min. Current
at Low Speed (<100%). common value.
Low-inertia applications Keep the default values. 2. Parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld)
50>ILoad/IMotor>5 Enter the line-to-common direct axis inductance
High-inertia applications Increase parameter 1-14 Damping of the motor.
ILoad/IMotor>50 Gain, parameter 1-15 Low Speed Filter If only line-line data is available, divide the line-
Time Const., and parameter 1-16 High line value by 2 to get the line-common value.
Speed Filter Time Const.
3. Parameter 1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq).
High load at low speed Increase parameter 1-17 Voltage filter
Enter the line-to-common quadrature axis
<30% (rated speed) time const.
inductance of the motor.
Increase parameter 1-66 Min. Current
If only line-line data is available, divide the line-
at Low Speed to adjust the starting
line value by 2 to get the line-common value.
torque. 100% current provides
nominal torque as starting torque. 4. Parameter 1-44 d-axis Inductance Sat. (LdSat).
Working at a current level higher Enter the line-to-common saturated value of the
than 100% for a prolonged time can d-axis inductance. This is the value at a current
cause the motor to overheat. higher than the nominal current where the
inductance is fully saturated.
Table 3.4 Recommendations for Various Applications
5. Parameter 1-48 Inductance Sat. Point.
Enter the percentage of nominal current where
If the motor starts oscillating at a certain speed, increase
the d-axis inductance is half-saturated, that is has
parameter 1-14 Damping Gain. Increase the value in small
the average value of the non-saturated and
steps. Depending on the motor, this parameter can be set
saturated values.
to 10–100% higher than the default value.
NOTICE!
3.3.5 SynRM Motor Set-up Motors may be missing some inductance values on the
nameplates or in the datasheets. Perform AMA to get the
This section describes how to set up a synchronous valid values.
reluctance motor.
Test motor operation
Initial programming steps 1. Start the motor at low speed (100–200 RPM). If
To activate SynRM motor operation, select option [5] the motor does not turn, check the installation,
SynRM in parameter 1-10 Motor Construction. general programming, and motor data.
Programming motor data 2. Check if the start function in parameter 1-70 Start
After selecting option [5] SynRM, the SynRM motor-related Mode fits the application requirements.
parameters in parameter groups 1-2* Motor Data, 1-3* Adv. Rotor detection
Motor Data, and 1-4* Adv. Motor Data II are active. This function is the recommended selection for
The necessary data can be found on the motor nameplate applications where the motor starts from standstill, for
and on the motor datasheet. example pumps or conveyors. On some motors, a sound is
Program the following parameters in the order listed: heard when the frequency converter performs the rotor
1. Parameter 1-24 Motor Current. detection. This does not harm the motor.
2. Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed. Parking
This function is the recommended selection for
3. Parameter 1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque.
applications where the motor is rotating at slow speed, for
4. Parameter 1-39 Motor Poles. example windmilling in fan applications.
Run a complete AMA using parameter 1-29 Automatic Parameter 2-06 Parking Current and parameter 2-07 Parking
Motor Adaptation (AMA) [1] Enable Complete AMA. Time can be adjusted. Increase the factory setting of these
parameters for applications with high inertia.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 45

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Application-specific adjustment when running VVC+ For high load at low speed (<30% of rated speed), increase
VVC+ is the most robust control mode. In most situations, parameter 1-17 Voltage filter time const. due to non-linearity
it provides optimum performance without further in the inverter at low speed.
adjustments. Run a complete AMA for best performance.
3 3 Start the motor at nominal speed. If the application does
1-11 Motor Model
Option: Function:
not run well, check the VVC+ SynRM settings. Table 3.5 Automatically sets the factory values for the
contains recommendations for various applications. selected motor. If the default value Std.
Asynchron is used, determine settings
Application Settings
manually according to the selection
Low-inertia applications Increase parameter 1-17 Voltage filter
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction.
ILoad/IMotor<5 time const. by factor 5–10.
[1] Std. Default motor model when [0] Asynchron is
Reduce parameter 1-14 Damping
Asynchron selected in parameter 1-10 Motor Construction.
Gain.
[2] Std. PM, non Selectable when [1] PM, non-salient SPM is
Reduce parameter 1-66 Min. Current
salient selected in parameter 1-10 Motor Construction.
at Low Speed (<100%).
[10] Danfoss OGD Selectable when [1] PM, non-salient SPM is
Low-inertia applications Keep the default values.
LA10 selected in parameter 1-10 Motor Construction.
50>ILoad/IMotor>5
Only available for T4, T5 in 1.5–3 kW. Settings
High-inertia applications Increase parameter 1-14 Damping
are loaded automatically for this specific
ILoad/IMotor>50 Gain, parameter 1-15 Low Speed Filter
motor.
Time Const., and parameter 1-16 High
[11] Danfoss OGD Selectable when [1] PM, non-salient SPM is
Speed Filter Time Const.
V210 selected in parameter 1-10 Motor Construction.
High load at low speed Increase parameter 1-17 Voltage filter
Only available for T4, T5 in 0.75–3 kW.
<30% (rated speed) time const.
Settings are loaded automatically for this
Increase parameter 1-66 Min. Current
specific motor.
at Low Speed to adjust the starting
torque. 100% current provides 1-14 Damping Gain
nominal torque as starting torque.
Range: Function:
Working at a current level higher
Size [0 - The parameter stabilizes the PM motor so it
than 100% for a prolonged time can
related* 250 % runs smoothly and with stability. The value of
cause the motor to overheat.
] damping gain controls the dynamic
Table 3.5 Recommendations for Various Applications performance of the PM motor. Low damping
gain results in high dynamic performance and
If the motor starts oscillating at a certain speed, increase a high value results in a low dynamic
parameter 1-14 Damping Gain. Increase the value in small performance. If the damping gain is too high
steps. Depending on the motor, this parameter can be set or low, the control becomes unstable. The
to 10–100% higher than the default value. resulting dynamic performance is related to
the machine data and load type.

3.3.6 1-1* VVC+ PM/SynRM

1-15 Low Speed Filter Time Const.
Range: Function:
The default control parameters for VVC+ PMSM control core
are optimized for applications and inertia load in range of Size [0.01 - High-pass filter damping time constant
50>Jl/Jm>5. Jl is load inertia from the application and Jm related* 20 s] determines the response time to load
is machine inertia. steps. Obtain quick control through a
For low-inertia applications (Jl/Jm<5), increase short damping time constant. However,
parameter 1-17 Voltage filter time const. with a factor of 5– if this value is too low, the control
10 and sometimes parameter 1-14 Damping Gain to becomes unstable. This time constant is
improve performance and stability. used below 10% rated speed.
For high-inertia applications (Jl/Jm>50) increase
parameter 1-15 Low Speed Filter Time Const., 1-16 High Speed Filter Time Const.
parameter 1-16 High Speed Filter Time Const., and Range: Function:
parameter 1-14 Damping Gain to improve performance and Size [0.01 - High-pass filter damping time constant
stability. related* 20 s] determines the response time to load

46 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

1-16 High Speed Filter Time Const. 1-20 Motor Power [kW]
Range: Function: Range: Function:
steps. Obtain quick control through a parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] or
short damping time constant. However,
if this value is too low, the control
parameter 1-21 Motor Power [HP] is made
invisible. 3 3
becomes unstable. This time constant is
used above 10% rated speed. 1-21 Motor Power [HP]
Range: Function:
1-17 Voltage filter time const.
Size [ 0.09 - NOTICE!
Range: Function: related* 500.00
This parameter cannot be adjusted
Size [0.001 - 2 Supply voltage filter time constant is hp]
while the motor is running.
related* s] used for reducing the influence of high
frequency ripples and system
Enter the nominal motor power in hp
resonances in the calculation of
according to the motor nameplate data.
machine supply voltage. Without this
The default value corresponds to the
filter, the ripples in the currents can
nominal rated output of the unit.
distort the calculated voltage and affect
Depending on the selections made in
the stability of the system.
parameter 0-03 Regional Settings, either
parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] or
3.3.7 1-2* Motor Data parameter 1-21 Motor Power [HP] is made
invisible.
This parameter group contains input data from the
nameplate on the connected motor. 1-22 Motor Voltage
Range: Function:
NOTICE! 500. V* [10. - NOTICE!
1000. V]
Changing the value of these parameters affects the This parameter cannot be adjusted
setting of other parameters. while the motor is running.

NOTICE! Enter the nominal motor voltage according

to the motor nameplate data. The default
The following parameters have no effect when
value corresponds to the nominal rated
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [1] PM, non-
output of the unit.
salient SPM, [2] PM, salient IPM, [5] Sync. Reluctance:
• Parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW]. 1-23 Motor Frequency
• Parameter 1-21 Motor Power [HP]. Range: Function:
• Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage. Size [20 - NOTICE!
related* 1000
• Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency.
Hz]
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.

1-20 Motor Power [kW] Select the motor frequency value from the
Range: Function: motor nameplate data. For 87 Hz operation
Size [ 0.09 - NOTICE! with 230/400 V motors, set the nameplate
related* 2000.00 data for 230 V/50 Hz. Adapt
This parameter cannot be adjusted
kW] parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
while the motor is running.
and parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference to
the 87 Hz application.
Enter the nominal motor power in kW
according to the motor nameplate data.
The default value corresponds to the
nominal rated output of the unit.

Depending on the selections made in

parameter 0-03 Regional Settings, either

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 47

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

1-24 Motor Current 1-28 Motor Rotation Check

Range: Function: Option: Function:
Size [ 0.10 - NOTICE! NOTICE!
3 3 related* 10000.00 A]
This parameter cannot be
adjusted while the motor is
Once the motor rotation check is enabled,
the display shows: Note! Motor may run in
running. wrong direction.
Pressing [OK], [Back], or [Cancel] dismisses
Enter the nominal motor current value the message and shows a new message:
from the motor nameplate data. The Press [Hand On] to start the motor. Press
data is used for calculating motor [Cancel] to abort. Pressing [Hand On] starts
torque, motor thermal protection, and the motor at 5 Hz in forward direction and
so on. the display shows: Motor is running. Check
if motor rotation direction is correct. Press
1-25 Motor Nominal Speed [Off] to stop the motor. Pressing [Off] stops
the motor and resets parameter 1-28 Motor
Range: Function:
Rotation Check. If motor rotation direction
Size [100 - NOTICE! is incorrect, interchange 2 motor phase
related* 60000 RPM]
This parameter cannot be cables.
adjusted while the motor is
running. Following installation and connection of the
motor, this function allows the correct motor
Enter the nominal motor speed value rotation direction to be verified. Enabling this
from the motor nameplate data. The function overrides any bus commands or digital
data is used for calculating automatic inputs, except external interlock and Safe Torque
motor compensations. Off (STO) (if included).

[0] Off Motor rotation check is not active.

1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque
*
Range: Function: [1] Enabled Motor rotation check is enabled.
Size [1 - Enter the value from the motor
related* 10000.0 nameplate data. The default value 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)
Nm] corresponds to the nominal rated output.
Option: Function:
This parameter is available when
The AMA function optimizes dynamic motor
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set
performance by automatically optimizing the
to [1] PM, non-salient SPM, that is the
advanced motor parameter 1-30 Stator
parameter is valid for PM and non-salient
Resistance (Rs) to parameter 1-35 Main
SPM motors only.
Reactance (Xh)) while the motor is stationary.

1-28 Motor Rotation Check [0] Off No function.

Option: Function: *
[1] Enable Performs AMA of the stator resistance RS, the
WARNING Complete rotor resistance Rr, the stator leakage
HIGH VOLTAGE AMA reactance X1, the rotor leakage reactance X2,
and the main reactance Xh.
Frequency converters contain high voltage
when connected to AC mains input, DC [2] Enable Performs a reduced AMA of the stator
supply, or load sharing. Reduced resistance Rs in the system only. Select this

• Remove mains power before AMA option if an LC filter is used between the
frequency converter and the motor.
disconnecting motor phase cables.
[3] Enable Performs enhanced functionality AMA II of the
Complete stator resistance RS, the rotor resistance Rr, the
AMA II stator leakage reactance X1, the rotor leakage
reactance X2, and the main reactance Xh. For

48 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) 3.3.8 1-3* Adv. Motor Data
Option: Function:
improved results, update Parameters for advanced motor data. The motor data in
parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to

[4] Enable
parameter 14-43 Motor Cos-Phi.

Performs a reduced AMA II of the stator

parameter 1-39 Motor Poles must match the relevant motor 3 3
to run the motor optimally. The default settings are figures
Reduced resistance Rs in the system only. Select this based on common motor parameter values from normal
AMA II option if an LC filter is used between the standard motors. If the motor parameters are not set
frequency converter and the motor. correctly, a malfunction of the frequency converter system
may occur. If the advanced motor data is not known,
NOTICE! running an AMA is recommended. See the chapter
Parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) has no Automatic Motor Adaptation in the VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202
effect when parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, Design Guide. The AMA sequence adjusts all motor
non-salient SPM. parameters except the inertia moment of the rotor and the
iron loss resistance (parameter 1-36 Iron Loss Resistance
Activate the AMA function by pressing [Hand On] after (Rfe)).
selecting [1] Enable complete AMA or [2] Enable reduced
AMA. See also the chapter Automatic Motor Adaptation in P 1-30

130BA375.11
the design guide. After a normal sequence, the display I1 RS X1 X2
reads: Press [OK] to finish AMA. After pressing [OK], the
frequency converter is ready for operation.

U1
NOTICE! R1s Xh R1
• For the best adaptation of the frequency P1-35

converter, run AMA on a cold motor.

• AMA cannot be performed while the motor is
running. Figure 3.4 Motor Equivalent Diagram for an Asynchronous
Motor

NOTICE!
Avoid generating external torque during AMA. ωsLqIq

130BC056.11
Iq Par. 1-30 Par. 1-37
Rs Ld
+ -
NOTICE!
If 1 of the settings in parameter group 1-2* Motor Data is
changed, parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to
parameter 1-39 Motor Poles return to the default setting. Ud

This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is

running.
d-axis equivalent circuit

NOTICE!
Par. 1-30 Par. 1-37 ωsLdId
Full AMA should be run without filter only, while reduced Iq
Rs Lq=Ld
AMA should be run with filter. + -

+
See the chapter Automatic Motor Adaptation in the VLT®
Par. 1-40
AQUA Drive FC 202 Design Guide. ωsλ PM
Uq
-

q-axis equivalent circuit

Figure 3.5 Motor Equivalent Circuit Diagram for a PM Non-

salient Motor

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 49

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) 1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1)

Range: Function: Range: Function:
Size [ 0.0140 - NOTICE! measures the value from the

3 3 related* 140.0000
Ohm]
This parameter cannot be
adjusted while the motor is •
motor.

Enter the X1 value manually.

running. Obtain the value from the motor
supplier.
For PM motors, see the description in • Use the X1 default setting. The
parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld). frequency converter establishes
Set the stator resistance value. Enter the setting based on the motor
the value from a motor datasheet or nameplate data.
perform an AMA on a cold motor. See Figure 3.4.

1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) NOTICE!

The parameter value is updated
Range: Function:
after each torque calibration if
1.0000 [0.0100 - NOTICE! option [3] 1st start with store or
Ohm* 100.0000
Parameter 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) option [4] Every start with store is
Ohm]
has no effect when selected in parameter 1-47 Torque
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is Calibration.
set to [1] PM, non-salient SPM, [5]
Sync. Reluctance.
1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2)
Set the rotor resistance value Rr to improve Range: Function:
shaft performance using 1 of these 4.0000 [0.0400 - NOTICE!
methods: Ohm* 400.0000
This parameter is only relevant for
• Run an AMA on a cold motor. The Ohm]
asynchronous motors.
frequency converter measures the
value from the motor. All
Set the rotor leakage reactance of the
compensations are reset to 100%.
motor using 1 of these methods:
• Enter the Rr value manually.
• Run an AMA on a cold motor.
Obtain the value from the motor The frequency converter
supplier. measures the value from the
• Use the Rr default setting. The motor.
frequency converter establishes
• Enter the X2 value manually.
the setting based on the motor Obtain the value from the motor
nameplate data. supplier.

1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1) • Use the X2 default setting. The
frequency converter establishes
Range: Function:
the setting based on the motor
4.0000 [0.0400 - NOTICE! nameplate data.
Ohm* 400.0000
This parameter is only relevant for See Figure 3.4.
Ohm]
asynchronous motors.
NOTICE!
Set the stator leakage reactance of the The parameter value is updated
motor using 1 of these methods: after each torque calibration if
• Run an AMA on a cold motor. option [3] 1st start with store or
The frequency converter option [4] Every start with store is
selected in parameter 1-47 Torque
Calibration.

50 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

1-35 Main Reactance (Xh) 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld)

Range: Function: Range: Function:
Size [ 1.0000 - NOTICE! Size [0.000 - NOTICE!
related* 10000.0000
Ohm]
Parameter 1-35 Main Reactance (Xh)
has no effect when
related* 1000.000
mH]
This parameter is only active
when parameter 1-10 Motor
3 3
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [1] PM,
Construction=[1] PM, non-salient non-salient SPM.
SPM.
Enter the value of the d-axis
NOTICE! inductance. Obtain the value from the
PM motor datasheet.
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
For asynchronous motor, stator resistance, and d-axis
inductance values are normally described in technical
Set the main reactance of the motor
specifications as between line and common (startpoint).
using 1 of these methods:
For PM motors, they are typically described in technical
• Run an AMA on a cold motor. specifications as between line-line. PM motors are typically
The frequency converter
built for star connection.
measures the value from the
motor.
Parameter 1-30 Stator This parameter gives stator winding
• Enter the Xh value manually. Resistance (Rs) resistance (Rs) similar to asynchronous
Obtain the value from the (line to common). motor stator resistance. The stator
motor supplier. resistance is defined for line-to-
• Use the Xh default setting. The common measurement. For line-line
frequency converter establishes data, where stator resistance is
the setting from the motor measured between any 2 lines, divide
nameplate data. by 2.
Parameter 1-37 d-axis This parameter gives direct axis
1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe) Inductance (Ld) inductance of the PM motor. The d-
Range: Function: (line to common). axis inductance is defined for phase-
to-common measurement. For line-
Size [0 - NOTICE! line data, where stator resistance is
related* 10000.000
This parameter cannot be measured between any 2 lines, divide
Ohm]
adjusted while the motor is by 2.
running. Parameter 1-40 Back EMF This parameter gives back EMF across
at 1000 RPM stator terminal of PM motor at 1000
Enter the equivalent iron loss resistance RMS (line to line value). RPM mechanical speed specifically. It
(RFe) value to compensate for iron is defined between line-to-line and
losses in the motor. expressed in RMS value.
The RFe value cannot be found by
performing an AMA. Table 3.6 Parameters Related to PM Motors
The RFe value is especially important in
torque control applications. If RFe is
unknown, leave parameter 1-36 Iron
Loss Resistance (Rfe) on default setting.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 51

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

NOTICE! 1-39 Motor Poles

Motor manufacturers provide values for stator resistance Range: Function:
(parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs)) and d-axis Size [2 - NOTICE!
inductance (parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld)) in
3 3 technical specifications as between line and common
related* 132 ]
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
(startpoint) or line between line. There is no general
standard. The different set-ups of stator winding
resistance and induction are shown in Figure 3.6. Danfoss Enter the number of motor poles.
frequency converters always require the line-to-common
Poles ~nn@ 50 Hz ~nn@ 60 Hz
value. The back EMF of a PM motor is defined as induced
2 2700–2880 3250–3460
EMF developed across any of 2 phases of stator winding
4 1350–1450 1625–1730
of a free-running motor. Danfoss frequency converters
6 700–960 840–1153
always require the line-to-line RMS value measured at
1000 RPM, mechanical speed of rotation. This is shown in Table 3.7 Pole Counts and Related
Figure 3.7. Frequencies

Table 3.7 shows the pole numbers for normal

e30bc008.12

Line to common (starpoint) Line-to-line values

speed ranges of various motor types. Define
motors designed for other frequencies
Rs and Ld separately. The motor pole value is always an
Rs and Ld even number, because it refers to the total
pole numbers, not pairs of poles. The
frequency converter creates the initial setting
of parameter 1-39 Motor Poles based on
parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency and
Figure 3.6 Stator Winding Set-ups
parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed.

1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM

e30bc009.11

Permanent magnet motors Range: Function:

Size [ 10 - Set the nominal back EMF for the motor
Line-to-line back
related* 9000 V] when running at 1000 RPM. This
EMF in RMS value
at 1000 RPM parameter is only active when
speed (mech) parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set
to [1] PM, non-salient SPM.

1-44 d-axis Inductance Sat. (LdSat)

Figure 3.7 Machine Parameter Definitions of Back EMF of PM
Range: Function:
Motors
Size [0 - Enter the inductance saturation of Ld.
related* 1000 mH] Ideally, this parameter has the same
value as parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance
1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq)
(Ld). If the motor supplier provides an
Range: Function: induction curve, enter the induction
Size related* [0.000 - 1000 NOTICE! value at 200% of the nominal value.
mH]
This parameter cannot be
adjusted while the motor is 1-45 q-axis Inductance Sat. (LqSat)
running. Range: Function:
Size [0 - This parameter corresponds to the
Set the value of the q-axis related* 1000 mH] inductance saturation of Lq. Ideally, this
inductance. See the motor parameter has the same value as
datasheet. parameter 1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq). If
the motor supplier provides an induction

52 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

1-45 q-axis Inductance Sat. (LqSat) 1-47 Torque Calibration

Range: Function: Option: Function:
curve, enter the induction value at 200% • Parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld).
of the nominal value.
1-48 Inductance Sat. Point 3 3
1-47 Torque Calibration Range: Function:
Option: Function: Size related* [1 - 500 %] Enter the induction saturation point.
Use this parameter to optimize the torque estimate
in the full speed range. The estimated torque is 1-49 q-axis Inductance Sat. Point
I2.
based on the shaft power, Pshaft = Pm - Rs x Make Range: Function:
sure that the Rs value is correct. The Rs value in this
formula is equal to the power loss in the motor, the
Size [0 - NOTICE!
related* 200 %]
cable, and the frequency converter. When this
Run an AMA to set the value of this
parameter is active, the frequency converter
parameter. Edit the value manually
calculates the Rs value during power-up, ensuring
only when the application requires a
the optimal torque estimate and optimal
value other than determined by AMA.
performance. Use this feature in cases when it is
not possible to adjust parameter 1-30 Stator Enter the q-Axis inductance saturation point.
Resistance (Rs) on each frequency converter to The frequency converter uses this value to
compensate for the cable length, frequency optimize the performance of IPM motors.
converter losses, and the temperature deviation on Select the value that matches the point
the motor. where the inductance equals the average
[0] Off value of parameter 1-38 q-axis Inductance
* (Lq) and parameter 1-45 q-axis Inductance
[1] 1st Calibrates at the first start-up after power-up and Sat. (LqSat), as percentage of nominal
start keeps this value until reset by a power cycle. current.
after
pwr-
up
[2] Every Calibrates at every start-up, compensating for a
start possible change in motor temperature since last
start-up. The value is reset after a power cycle.

[3] 1st The frequency converter calibrates the torque at the

start first start-up after power-up. This option is used to
with update motor parameters:
store • Parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs).
• Parameter 1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance
(X1).

• Parameter 1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance

(X2).

• Parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld).

[4] Every The frequency converter calibrates the torque at

start every start-up, compensating for a possible change
with in motor temperature since last start-up. This option
store is used to update motor parameters:
• Parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs).
• Parameter 1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance
(X1).

• Parameter 1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance

(X2).

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 53

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.3.9 1-5* Load Indep. Setting 1-52 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [Hz]
Range: Function:
1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed Size [ 0.3 - NOTICE!
3 3 Range:
100 [0 -
Function:
NOTICE!
related* 10.0
Hz]
Parameter 1-52 Min Speed Normal
Magnetising [Hz] has no effect when
%* 300 %] parameter 1-10 Motor Construction =
Parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at
Zero Speed has no effect when [1] PM, non-salient SPM.
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1]
PM, non-salient SPM. Set the required frequency for normal
magnetizing current. If the frequency is set
Use this parameter along with lower than the motor slip frequency,
parameter 1-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetising parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero
[RPM] to obtain a different thermal load on the Speed and parameter 1-51 Min Speed Normal
motor when running at low speed. Magnetising [RPM] are inactive.
Enter a value which is a percentage of the rated Use this parameter along with
magnetizing current. If the setting is too low, the parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero
torque on the motor shaft may be reduced. Speed. See Table 3.7.

1-55 U/f Characteristic - U

Array [6]
Range: Function:
0 V* [0.0 - Enter the voltage at each frequency point to
Figure 3.8 Magnetizing Current 1000.0 V] form a U/f characteristic manually matching
the motor.
The frequency points are defined in
parameter 1-56 U/f Characteristic - F.
1-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [RPM] This parameter is an array parameter [0-5] and
Range: Function: is only accessible when parameter 1-01 Motor
Control Principle is set to [0] U/f.
Size [10 - NOTICE!
related* 300
Parameter 1-51 Min Speed Normal 1-56 U/f Characteristic - F
RPM]
Magnetising [RPM] has no effect when
Array [6]
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction =
[1] PM, non-salient SPM. Range: Function:
0 Hz* [0 - Enter the frequency points to form a U/f
Set the required speed for normal 1000.0 Hz] characteristic manually matching the motor.
magnetizing current. If the speed is set The voltage at each point is defined in
lower than the motor slip speed, parameter 1-55 U/f Characteristic - U.
parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero This parameter is an array parameter [0–5]
Speed and parameter 1-51 Min Speed Normal and is only accessible when
Magnetising [RPM] are of no significance. parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle is set
Use this parameter along with to [0] U/f.
parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero
Speed. See Table 3.7.

54 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

1-59 Flying Start Test Pulses Frequency

Range: Function:
torque. In this mode, 100% means 2 times the
slip frequency.
[1] PM non-salient: [0–10%] 3 3
This parameter defines the motor speed (in %
of nominal motor speed) below which the
parking function (see parameter 2-06 Parking
Current and parameter 2-07 Parking Time)
becomes active. This parameter is only active
when parameter 1-70 Start Mode is set to [1]
Parking and only after starting the motor.

3.3.10 1-6* Load Depend. Setting

Figure 3.9 U/f Characteristic

1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation

Range: Function:
1-58 Flying Start Test Pulses Current
Range: Function:
100 [0 - NOTICE!
%* 300 %]
Size [0 - Set the magnitude of the magnetizing current
Parameter 1-60 Low Speed Load Compen-
related* 200 for the pulses used to detect the motor
sation has no effect when
%] direction. The value range and function
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1]
depend on parameter 1-10 Motor Construction:
PM, non-salient SPM.
[0] Asynchronous: [0–200%]
Reducing this value reduces the generated Enter the % value to compensate voltage in
torque. 100% means full nominal motor relation to load when the motor is running at
current. In this case, the default value is 30%. low speed and obtain the optimum U/f charac-
[1] PM non-salient: [0–40%] teristic. The motor size determines the frequency
A general setting of 20% is recommended for range within which this parameter is active.
PM motors. Higher values can give increased
Motor size [kW] Changeover [Hz]
performance. However, on motors with back
0.25–7.5 <10
EMF higher than 300 VLL (rms) at nominal
11–45 <5
speed and high winding inductance (more
55–550 <3–4
than 10 mH), a lower value is recommended to
avoid wrong speed estimation. The parameter
Table 3.8 Changeover Frequency
is active when parameter 1-73 Flying Start is
enabled.

1-59 Flying Start Test Pulses Frequency

Range: Function:
Size [0 - NOTICE!
related* 500 %
See description of parameter 1-70 Start
]
Mode for an overview of the relation
between the PM Flying Start
parameters.

The value range and function depend on

parameter 1-10 Motor Construction:
[0] Asynchronous: [0–500%]
Control the percentage of the frequency for
Figure 3.10 Low Speed Load Compensation
the pulses used to detect the motor direction.
Increasing this value reduces the generated

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 55

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

1-61 High Speed Load Compensation 1-64 Resonance Damping

Range: Function: Range: Function:
100 [0 - NOTICE! Size [0 - NOTICE!
3 3 %* 300 %]
Parameter 1-61 High Speed Load Compen-
sation has no effect when
related* 500 %
]
Parameter 1-64 Resonance Damping has
no effect when parameter 1-10 Motor
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] Construction = [1] PM, non-salient SPM.
PM, non-salient SPM.
Enter the resonance damping value. Set
Enter the % value to compensate voltage in parameter 1-64 Resonance Damping and
relation to load when the motor is running at parameter 1-65 Resonance Damping Time
high speed and obtain the optimum U/f charac- Constant to help eliminate high frequency
teristic. The motor size determines the frequency resonance problems. To reduce resonance
range within which this parameter is active. oscillation, increase the value of
parameter 1-64 Resonance Damping.
Motor size [kW] Changeover [Hz]
0.25–7.5 >10 1-65 Resonance Damping Time Constant
11–45 <5 Range: Function:
55–550 <3–4 5 ms* [5 - 50 NOTICE!
ms]
Parameter 1-65 Resonance Damping Time
Table 3.9 Changeover Frequency
Constant has no effect when
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1]
1-62 Slip Compensation PM, non-salient SPM.
Range: Function:
Set parameter 1-64 Resonance Damping and
0 %* [-500 - NOTICE! parameter 1-65 Resonance Damping Time
500 %]
Parameter 1-62 Slip Compensation has no Constant to help eliminate high frequency
effect when parameter 1-10 Motor resonance problems. Enter the time constant
Construction = [1] PM, non-salient SPM. that provides the best dampening.

To compensate for tolerances in the value of 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed
nM,N, enter the % value for slip compensation.
Range: Function:
Slip compensation is calculated automatically,
that is based on the nominal motor speed nM,N.
Size [1 - NOTICE!
related* 200 %]
Parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low
1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant Speed has no effect if
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction =
Range: Function:
[0] Asynchron.
Size [0.05 - NOTICE!
related* 5 s]
Parameter 1-63 Slip Compensation Enter the minimum motor current at low
Time Constant has no effect when speed.
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = Increasing this current improves developed
[1] PM, non-salient SPM. motor torque at low speed. Low speed is
here defined as speeds below 6% of the
Enter the slip compensation reaction nominal motor speed (parameter 1-25 Motor
speed. A high value results in slow Nominal Speed) in VVC+ PM Control.
reaction, and a low value results in quick
reaction. If low-frequency resonance
problems occur, use a longer time setting.

56 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3.3.11 1-7* Start Adjustments 1-73 Flying Start

Option: Function:
1-70 Start Mode [0] Clockwise: Flying start searches in clockwise
Option:
[0] Rotor
Function:
Suitable for all applications where the motor is
direction. If not successful, a DC brake is carried
out. 3 3
Detection known to be standing still when starting (for [2] Both Directions: The flying start first makes a
example conveyors, pumps, and non-wind search in the direction determined by the last
milling fans). reference (direction). If the speed is not found, it
makes a search in the other direction. If not
[1] Parking If the motor turns at a low speed (that is lower
successful, a DC brake is activated in the time set
than 2–5% of the nominal speed), for example
in parameter 2-02 DC Braking Time. Start then takes
due to fans with windmilling, select [1] Parking
place from 0 Hz.
and adjust parameter 2-06 Parking Current and
parameter 2-07 Parking Time accordingly. [0] Disabled Select [0] Disable if this function is not required.

[2] Rotor Det. [1] Enabled Select [1] Enable to enable the frequency converter
w/ Parking to catch and control a spinning motor.

The parameter is always set to [1] Enable when

1-71 Start Delay
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM non-
Range: Function: salient.
00 s* [0 - Enter the time delay between the start
Important related parameters:
300 s] command and the time when the frequency
• Parameter 1-58 Flying Start Test Pulses
converter supplies the power to the motor.
Current.
This parameter is related to the start function
selected in parameter 1-72 Start Function. • Parameter 1-59 Flying Start Test Pulses
Frequency.
1-72 Start Function • Parameter 1-70 Start Mode.
Option: Function: • Parameter 2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed
Select the start function during start delay. This [RPM].
parameter is linked to parameter 1-71 Start Delay.
• Parameter 2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz].
[0] DC Hold/ Energizes the motor with a DC hold current
• Parameter 2-06 Parking Current.
Motor (parameter 2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current) during
Preheat the start delay time. • Parameter 2-07 Parking Time.

[2] Coast Motor coasted during the start delay time When parameter 1-73 Flying Start is enabled,
(inverter off). parameter 1-71 Start Delay has no function.
Available selections depend on
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction: [0] Asynchron: The flying start function used for PM motors is based on
• [2] Coast. an initial speed estimation. The speed is always estimated
immediately after an active start signal is given. Based on
• [0] DC hold.
the setting of parameter 1-70 Start Mode, the following
[1] PM non-salient: happens:
• [2] Coast. Parameter 1-70 Start Mode = [0] Rotor Detection:
If the speed estimate comes out as higher than 0 Hz, the
1-73 Flying Start frequency converter catches the motor at that speed and
Option: Function: resumes normal operation. Otherwise, the frequency
This function makes it possible to catch a motor converter estimates the rotor position and starts normal
that is spinning freely due to a mains dropout. operation from there.
When parameter 1-73 Flying Start is enabled,
parameter 1-71 Start Delay has no function.
Search direction for flying start is linked to the
setting in parameter 4-10 Motor Speed Direction.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 57

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Parameter 1-70 Start Mode=[1] Parking: 3.3.12 1-8* Stop Adjustments

If the speed estimate comes out lower than the setting in
parameter 1-59 Flying Start Test Pulses Frequency, the 1-80 Function at Stop
parking function is engaged (see parameter 2-06 Parking
3 3 Current and parameter 2-07 Parking Time). Otherwise, the
frequency converter catches the motor at that speed and
Option: Function:
Select the frequency converter function after
resumes normal operation. Refer to the description of a stop command or after the speed is
parameter 1-70 Start Mode for recommended settings. ramped down to the settings in
parameter 1-81 Min Speed for Function at Stop
[RPM].
Current limitations of the flying start principle used for PM
motors: Available selections depend on
• The speed range is up to 100% nominal speed or parameter 1-10 Motor Construction:
the field weakening speed (whichever is lowest). [0] Asynchron:
• [0] Coast.
• PMSM with high back EMF (>300 VLL(rms)) and
high-winding inductance (>10 mH) needs more • [1] DC hold.
time for reducing short-circuit current to 0 and [1] PM non-salient:
may be susceptible to error in estimation. • [0] Coast.
• Current testing limited to a speed range up to [0] * Coast Leaves the motor in free mode.
300 Hz. For certain units, the limit is 250 Hz; all
[1] DC Hold/ Energizes the motor with a DC hold current
200–240 V units up to and including 2.2 kW
Motor (see parameter 2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current).
(3 hp) and all 380–480 V units up to and
Preheat
including 4 kW (5.4 hp).
[2] Motor
• Current testing limited to a machine power size check,
up to 22 kW (30 hp). warning
• Prepared for salient pole machine (IPMSM) but [6] Motor
not yet verified on those types of machine. check, alarm

• For high-inertia applications (where the load 1-81 Min Speed for Function at Stop [RPM]
inertia is more than 30 times larger than the
Range: Function:
motor inertia), a brake resistor is recommended
Size related* [0 - 600 Set the speed at which to activate
to avoid overvoltage trip during high-speed
RPM] parameter 1-80 Function at Stop.
engagement of the flying-start function.

1-79 Pump Start Max Time to Trip 1-82 Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz]
Range: Function: Range: Function:
0 s* [0 - If the motor does not reach the speed specified Size related* [ 0 - 20.0 Set the output frequency at which to
3600.0 s] in parameter 1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM] within Hz] activate parameter 1-80 Function at
the time specified in this parameter, the Stop.
frequency converter trips. The time in this
parameter includes the time specified in
parameter 1-71 Start Delay. For instance, if the 3.3.13 Advanced Minimum Speed
value in parameter 1-71 Start Delay is more or Monitoring for Submersible Pumps
equal to the value in parameter 1-79 Pump Start
Max Time to Trip, the frequency converter never Some pumps are sensitive to operating at low speed.
starts. Insufficient cooling or lubrication at low speed are typical
reasons.
Under overload conditions, the frequency converter
protects itself using its integral protection features, which
include lowering the speed. For example, the current limit
controller can lower the speed. Sometimes, the speed may
go lower than the speed specified in parameter 4-11 Motor
Speed Low Limit [RPM] and parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low
Limit [Hz].

58 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

If the speed drops below a certain value, the advanced 1-87 Trip Speed Low [Hz]
minimum-speed monitoring feature trips the frequency Range: Function:
converter. If the pump motor does not reach the speed
Enter the low limit for the motor speed at
specified in parameter 1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM] within the
time specified in parameter 1-79 Pump Start Max Time to
Trip (ramping up takes too long), the frequency converter
which the frequency converter trips. If the
value is 0, the function is not active. If the 3 3
speed at any time after the start (or during a
trips. Timers for parameter 1-71 Start Delay and
stop) drops below the value in the
parameter 1-79 Pump Start Max Time to Trip start at the
parameter, the frequency converter trips with
same time when the start command is issued. For instance,
alarm 49, Speed Limit.
this means that if the value in parameter 1-71 Start Delay is
more than or equal to the value in parameter 1-79 Pump
Start Max Time to Trip, the frequency converter never starts. 3.3.14 1-9* Motor Temperature

N RPM 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection

1
N 1-86 Option: Function:
Motor thermal protection can be implemented
using a range of techniques:

0 T 1-71 T 1-79 T • Via a PTC sensor in the motor

windings connected to 1 of the
analog or digital inputs
T1-71 Parameter 1-71 Start Delay.
(parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source).
T1-79 Parameter 1-79 Pump Start Max Time to Trip. This time
See chapter 3.3.15 PTC Thermistor
includes the time in T1-71.
Connection.
N1-86 Parameter 1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM]. If the speed
drops below this value during normal operation, the • Via calculation (ETR = Electronic
frequency converter trips. Thermal Relay) of the thermal load,
1 Normal operation. based on the actual load and time.
The calculated thermal load is
compared with the rated motor
Figure 3.11 Advanced Minimum Speed Monitoring
current IM,N and the rated motor
frequency fM,N. See chapter 3.3.16 ETR
and chapter 3.3.17 ATEX ETR.
1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM]
Range: Function:
• Via a mechanical thermal switch
(Klixon type). See
Size [0 - NOTICE! chapter 3.3.18 Klixon.
related* par.
This parameter is only available if For the North American market: The ETR
4-13
parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit is set functions provide class 20 motor overload
RPM]
to [11] RPM. protection in accordance with NEC.
[0] No Continuously overloaded motor, when no
Enter the low limit for the motor speed at protection warning or trip of the frequency converter is
which the frequency converter trips. If the required.
value is 0, the function is not active. If the [1] Thermistor Activates a warning when the connected
speed at any time after the start (or during warning thermistor or KTY sensor in the motor reacts if
a stop) drops below the value in the motor overtemperature occurs.
parameter, the frequency converter trips [2] Thermistor Stops (trips) the frequency converter when the
with alarm 49, Speed Limit. trip connected thermistor or KTY sensor in the
motor reacts if motor overtemperature occurs.
1-87 Trip Speed Low [Hz] The thermistor cutout value must be more
Range: Function: than 3 kΩ.
Size [0 - NOTICE! Integrate a thermistor (PTC sensor) in the
related* par. motor for winding protection.
This parameter is only available if
4-14 [3] ETR Calculates the load when set-up 1 is active
parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit is set
Hz] warning 1 and activates a warning on the display when
to [1] Hz.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 59

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

1-90 Motor Thermal Protection 3.3.15 PTC Thermistor Connection

Option: Function:
the motor is overloaded. Program a warning

3 3 [4] ETR trip 1

signal via 1 of the digital outputs.
Calculates the load when set-up 1 is active
and stops (trips) the frequency converter
when the motor is overloaded. Program a
warning signal via 1 of the digital outputs. The
signal appears if there is a warning and if the
frequency converter trips (thermal warning).
[5] ETR
warning 2
[6] ETR trip 2
[7] ETR
warning 3
[8] ETR trip 3
[9] ETR
warning 4
[10] ETR trip 4
[20] ATEX ETR Activates the thermal monitoring function for
Ex-e motors for ATEX. Enables
parameter 1-94 ATEX ETR cur.lim. speed Figure 3.12 PTC Profile
reduction, parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR interpol.
points freq., and parameter 1-99 ATEX ETR
interpol points current. Using a digital input and 10 V as supply:
Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor
NOTICE! temperature is too high.
If [20] ATEX ETR is selected, follow the instructions in the Parameter set-up:
dedicated chapter of the design guide and the • Set parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to [2]
instructions provided by the motor manufacturer. Thermistor Trip.
• Set parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source to [6] Digital
NOTICE! Input.
If [20] ATEX ETR is selected, set parameter 4-18 Current
+10V

130BA152.10
Limit to 150%.
39 42 50 53 54 55

OFF
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37

ON
PTC / Thermistor <800 Ω >2.7 kΩ R

Figure 3.13 PTC Thermistor Connection - Digital Input

60 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

t [s]

175ZA052.11
Using an analog input and 10 V as supply:
Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor 2000

temperature is too high.

1000

3 3
Parameter set-up:
600
• Set parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to [2] 500
400
Thermistor Trip. 300

• Set parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source to [2] Analog

200

Input 54. 100 fOUT = 1 x f M,N

fOUT = 2 x f M,N
60
50 fOUT = 0.2 x f M,N
40
30
20

10 IM
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 IMN

Figure 3.15 ETR Profile

3.3.17 ATEX ETR

Figure 3.14 PTC Thermistor Connection - Analog Input

The VLT® PTC Thermistor Card MCB 112 offers ATEX-

approved monitoring of motor temperature. Alternatively,
Input Supply voltage Threshold
an external ATEX-approved PTC protection device can be
digital/analog cutout values
used.
Digital 10 V <800 Ω⇒2.7 kΩ
Analog 10 V <3.0 kΩ⇒3.0 kΩ
NOTICE!
Table 3.10 Threshold Cutout Values Only use ATEX Ex-e-approved motors for this function.
See the motor nameplate, approval certificate, datasheet,
NOTICE! or contact motor supplier.
Check that the selected supply voltage follows the
specification of the used thermistor element. When controlling an Ex-e motor with increased safety, it is
important to ensure certain limitations. The parameters
3.3.16 ETR that must be programmed are presented in Table 3.11.

The calculations estimate the need for a lower load at

lower speed due to less cooling from the fan incorporated
in the motor.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 61

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Function Setting 3.3.18 Klixon

Parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal [20] ATEX ETR
Protection The Klixon type thermal circuit breaker uses a KLIXON®
Parameter 1-94 ATEX ETR cur.lim. 20% metal dish. At a predetermined overload, the heat caused
3 3 speed reduction by the current through the disc causes a trip.
Parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR interpol.
points freq. Using a digital input and 24 V as supply:
Motor nameplate.
Parameter 1-99 ATEX ETR interpol Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor
points current temperature is too high.
Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency Enter the same value as for
parameter 4-19 Max Output
Parameter set-up:
Frequency.
• Set parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to [2]
Parameter 4-19 Max Output Motor nameplate, possibly Thermistor Trip.
Frequency reduced for long motor cables,
sine-wave filter, or reduced • Set parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source to [6] Digital
supply voltage.
Input.
Parameter 4-18 Current Limit Forced to 150% by 1-90 [20]

130BA151.11
+24V

GND
Parameter 5-15 Terminal 33 [80] PTC Card 1 OFF

B
A
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
Digital Input
Parameter 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe [4] PTC 1 Alarm
Stop
Parameter 14-01 Switching Check that the default value
ON
Frequency fulfills the requirement from PTC / Thermistor
<6.6 k Ω >10.8 k Ω R
the motor nameplate. If not,
Figure 3.16 Thermistor Connection
use a sine-wave filter.
Parameter 14-26 Trip Delay at 0
Inverter Fault
1-91 Motor External Fan
Table 3.11 Parameters Option: Function:
[0] * No No external fan is required, that is the motor is
NOTICE! derated at low speed.
Compare the minimum switching frequency requirement
[1] Yes Applies an external motor fan (external ventilation), so
stated by the motor manufacturer to the minimum
no derating of the motor is required at low speed. The
switching frequency of the frequency converter, the
upper curve in Figure 3.15 (fout = 1 x fM,N) is followed if
default value in parameter 14-01 Switching Frequency. If
the motor current is lower than nominal motor current
the frequency converter does not meet this requirement,
(see parameter 1-24 Motor Current). If the motor
use a sine-wave filter.
current exceeds nominal current, the operation time
still decreases as if no fan was installed.
More information about ATEX ETR thermal monitoring can
be found in Application Note for FC 300 ATEX ETR Thermal 1-93 Thermistor Source
Monitoring Function.
Option: Function:
NOTICE!
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.

NOTICE!
Set digital input to [0] PNP - Active at
24 V in parameter 5-00 Digital I/O
Mode.

Select the input to which the thermistor (PTC

sensor) should be connected. An analog

62 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

1-93 Thermistor Source

Option: Function:
input option [1] Analog Input 53 or [2] Analog
Input 54 cannot be selected if the analog
input is already in use as a reference source 3 3
(selected in parameter 3-15 Reference 1
Source, parameter 3-16 Reference 2 Source, or
parameter 3-17 Reference 3 Source).
When using VLT® PTC Thermistor Card MCB
112, always select [0] None.

[0] * None
[1] Analog
Input 53
[2] Analog
Input 54
[3] Digital input
18
[4] Digital input
19
[5] Digital input
32
[6] Digital input
33

1-95 KTY Sensor Type

Option: Function:
Select the type of the thermistor sensor.

[0] * KTY Sensor 1 1 kΩ at 100 °C (212 °F).

[1] KTY Sensor 2 1 kΩ at 25 °C (77 °F).

[2] KTY Sensor 3 2 kΩ at 25 °C (77 °F).

1-96 KTY Thermistor Resource

Option: Function:
Select analog input terminal 54 as a thermistor
sensor input. Terminal 54 cannot be selected as
thermistor source if otherwise used as reference
(see parameter 3-15 Reference Resource 1 to
parameter 3-17 Reference Resource 3).

NOTICE!
Connection of thermistor sensor
between terminals 54 and 55 (GND). See
chapter 3.3.15 PTC Thermistor Connection.

[0] * None
[2] Analog
input 54

1-97 KTY Threshold level

Range: Function:
80 °C* [-40 - 140 °C] Select the thermistor sensor threshold
level for motor thermal protection.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 63

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.4 Parameters 2-** Brakes 2-02 DC Braking Time

Range: Function:
3.4.1 2-0* DC brakes
10 s* [0 - 60 s] Set the duration of the DC brake current set in

3 3 Parameter group for configuring the DC brake and DC hold

parameter 2-01 DC Brake Current, once
activated.
functions.

2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current 2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM]

Range: Function: Range: Function:
50 [0 - NOTICE! Size [0 - 0 NOTICE!
%* 160 %] related* RPM]
Parameter 2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current is Parameter 2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed
not effective when parameter 1-10 Motor [RPM] is not effective when
Construction = [1] PM, non-salient SPM. parameter 1-10 Motor Construction =
[1] PM, non-salient SPM.
NOTICE!
Set the DC brake cut-in speed to activate
The maximum value depends on the rated
the DC brake current set in
motor current.
parameter 2-01 DC Brake Current after a
Avoid 100% current for too long. It may
stop command.
damage the motor.
When parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is
Enter a value for holding current as a percentage set to [1] PM non-salient SPM, this value is
of the rated motor current IM,N set in limited to 0 RPM (OFF).
parameter 1-24 Motor Current. 100% DC hold
current corresponds to IM,N. 2-04 DC Brake Cut-in Speed [Hz]
This parameter holds the motor (holding torque) Range: Function:
or preheats the motor. 0.0 Hz* [0.0 - par. NOTICE!
This parameter is active if [1] DC hold/Preheat is 4-14 Hz]
Parameter 2-04 DC Brake Cut-in Speed
selected in parameter 1-80 Function at Stop.
[Hz] is not effective when
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction =
2-01 DC Brake Current
[1] PM, non-salient SPM.
Range: Function:
50 [0 - NOTICE! Set the DC brake cut-in speed for activation
%* 1000 %
The maximum value depends on the rated of the DC brake current set in
]
motor current. Avoid 100% current for too parameter 2-01 DC Brake Current after a stop
long. It may damage the motor. command.

Enter a value for current as a percentage of the 2-06 Parking Current

rated motor current IM,N, see parameter 1-24 Motor Range: Function:
Current. 100% DC brake current corresponds to 50 [0 - NOTICE!
IM,N. %* 1000 %]
Parameter 2-06 Parking Current and
DC brake current is applied on a stop command, parameter 2-07 Parking Time: Only active
when the speed is lower than the limit set in: if [1] PM, non-salient SPM is selected in
• Parameter 2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed parameter 1-10 Motor Construction.
[RPM].

• Parameter 2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed Set current as percentage of rated motor
[Hz], when the DC brake inverse function current, parameter 1-24 Motor Current. Active
is active, or via the serial communication with parameter 1-73 Flying Start. The parking
port. current is active during the time period set in
parameter 2-07 Parking Time.
The braking current is active during the time
period set in parameter 2-02 DC Braking Time.

64 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

2-07 Parking Time 2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW)

Range: Function: Range: Function:
3 s* [0.1 - 60 Set the duration of the parking current time set Size [ 0.001 - NOTICE!
s] in parameter 2-06 Parking Current. Active with
parameter 1-73 Flying Start.
related* 2000.000
kW]
This parameter is only active in
frequency converters with an
3 3
NOTICE! integral dynamic brake.
Parameter 2-07 Parking Time is only active
when [1] PM, non-salient SPM is selected Set the monitoring limit of the brake
in parameter 1-10 Motor Construction. power transmitted to the resistor.
The monitoring limit is a product of the
maximum duty cycle (120 s) and the
maximum power of the brake resistor at
3.4.2 2-1* Brake Energy Funct. that duty cycle. See the formulas below.

For 200–240 V units:

Parameter group for selecting dynamic brake parameters.
3902 × dutytime
Only valid for frequency converters with brake chopper. Presistor =
R × 120

2-10 Brake Function For 380–480 V units:

7782 × dutytime
Option: Function: Presistor =
R × 120
Available selections depend on
For 525–600 V units:
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction:
9432 × dutytime
Presistor =
[0] Asynchronous: R × 120

• [0] Off.
2-13 Brake Power Monitoring
• [1] Resistor brake.
Option: Function:
• [2] AC braking.

[1] PM non-salient:
NOTICE!
This parameter is only active in
• [0] Off.
frequency converters with an integral
• [1] Resistor brake. dynamic brake.
[0] Off No brake resistor installed.

[1] Resistor Brake resistor incorporated in the system, for This parameter enables monitoring of the
brake dissipation of surplus brake energy as heat. power to the brake resistor. The power is
Connecting a brake resistor allows a higher DC- calculated based on the resistance
link voltage during braking (generating operation). (parameter 2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm)), the DC-
The resistor brake function is only active in link voltage, and the resistor duty time.
frequency converters with an integral dynamic [0] * Off No brake power monitoring is required.
brake.
If power monitoring is set to [0] Off or [1]
[2] AC brake AC braking only works in compressor torque Warning, the brake function remains active
mode in parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics. even if the monitoring limit is exceeded. This
may lead to thermal overload of the resistor.
2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm) It is also possible to generate a warning via
Range: Function: a relay/digital output. The measuring
accuracy of the power monitoring depends
Size [5 - Set the brake resistor value in Ω. This value
on the accuracy of the resistance of the
related* 65535 is used for monitoring the power to the
resistor (better than ±20%).
Ohm] brake resistor in parameter 2-13 Brake Power
Monitoring. This parameter is only active in [1] Warning Activates a warning when the power
frequency converters with an integral 120s transmitted over 120 s exceeds 100% of the
dynamic brake. monitoring limit (parameter 2-12 Brake Power
Use this parameter for values without Limit (kW)).
decimals. For a selection with 2 decimals, The warning disappears when the
use parameter 30-81 Brake Resistor (ohm). transmitted power drops below 80% of the
monitoring limit.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 65

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

2-13 Brake Power Monitoring 2-15 Brake Check

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[2] Trip 120s Trips the frequency converter and shows an 3. If the DC-link ripple amplitude while

3 3 alarm when the calculated power exceeds

100% of the monitoring limit.
braking is lower than the DC-link ripple
amplitude before braking +1%, the
brake check fails. If brake check fails, a
[3] Warning & Activates both of the above, including
warning or alarm is returned.
trip 120s warning, trip, and alarm.
4. If the DC-link ripple amplitude while
[4] Warning 30s
braking is higher than the DC-link ripple
[5] Trip 30s
amplitude before braking +1%, the
[6] Warning &
brake check is OK.
trip 30s
[7] Warning 60s [0] Off Monitors brake resistor and brake IGBT for a short
[8] Trip 60s * circuit during operation. If a short circuit occurs,
a warning appears.
[9] Warning &
trip 60s [1] Warning Monitors brake resistor and brake IGBT for a short
[10] Warning circuit and runs a test for brake resistor discon-
300s nection during power-up.
[11] Trip 300s [2] Trip Monitors for a short circuit or disconnection of
[12] Warning & the brake resistor, or a short circuit of the brake
trip 300s IGBT. If a fault occurs, the frequency converter
[13] Warning cuts out while showing an alarm (trip lock).
600s
[3] Stop and Monitors for a short circuit or disconnection of
[14] Trip 600s
trip the brake resistor, or a short circuit of the brake
[15] Warning &
IGBT. If a fault occurs, the frequency converter
trip 600s
ramps down to coast and then trips. A trip lock
2-15 Brake Check alarm is shown.

Option: Function: [4] AC brake Monitors for a short circuit or disconnection of

NOTICE! the brake resistor, or a short circuit of the brake

IGBT. If a fault occurs, the frequency converter
Remove a warning arising with [0] Off or
performs a controlled ramp down.
[1] Warning by cycling the mains supply.
Correct the fault first. For [0] Off or [1]
2-16 AC Brake Max. Current
Warning, the frequency converter keeps
running even if a fault is found. Range: Function:
100.0 %* [0.0 - NOTICE!
1000.0 %]
Select the type of test and monitoring function Parameter 2-16 AC Brake Max.
to check the connection to the brake resistor, or Current is not effective when
whether a brake resistor is present, and then parameter 1-10 Motor Construction
show a warning or an alarm if a fault occurs. The = [1] PM, non-salient SPM.
brake resistor disconnection function is tested
during power-up. However, the brake IGBT test is Enter the maximum allowed current
performed when there is no braking. A warning when using AC braking to avoid
or trip disconnects the brake function. overheating of motor windings.
The testing sequence is as follows:
1. Measure the DC-link ripple amplitude 2-17 Over-voltage Control
for 300 ms without braking. Option: Function:
2. Measure the DC-link ripple amplitude [0] Disabled No OVC required.
for 300 ms with the brake turned on. [2] * Enabled Activates OVC.

66 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

2-19 Over-voltage Gain

Range: Function:
100 %* [10 - 200 %] Select overvoltage gain.

3 3

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 67

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.5 Parameters 3-** Reference/Ramps

130BB036.10
P3-03

3.5.1 3-0* Reference Limits

3 3 3-02 Minimum Reference

Range: Function:
Size [ -999999.999 - Enter the minimum value for the
related* par. 3-03 remote reference. The minimum
ReferenceFeed- reference value and unit match the P3-02
backUnit] configuration selection made in
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode
and parameter 20-12 Reference/
Feedback Unit.

3-03 Maximum Reference

Range: Function:
Size [ par. 3-02 - Enter the maximum acceptable P3-10
related* 999999.999 value for the remote reference. The 0 50 100%

ReferenceFeed- maximum reference value and unit Figure 3.17 Preset Reference
backUnit] match the configuration option
selected in parameter 1-00 Configu-
ration Mode and
parameter 20-12 Reference/Feedback
Unit.

3-04 Reference Function

Option: Function:
[0] * Sum Sums both external and preset reference
sources.

[1] External/ Use either the preset or the external

Preset reference source.
Shift between external and preset via a
command or a digital input.

Figure 3.18 Preset Reference Scheme

3.5.2 3-1* References

Select the preset references. Select Preset ref. bit 0/1/2 [16], 3-11 Jog Speed [Hz]
[17], or [18] for the corresponding digital inputs in Range: Function:
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.
Size [ 0 - par. The jog speed is a fixed output speed at
3-10 Preset Reference related* 4-14 Hz] which the frequency converter is running
Array [8] when the jog function is activated.
See also parameter 3-19 Jog Speed [RPM]
Range: Function:
and parameter 3-80 Jog Ramp Time.
0 %* [-100 - Enter up to 8 different preset references (0–7) in
100 %] this parameter, using array programming. The
preset reference is stated as a percentage of the
value RefMAX (parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference).
When using preset references, select Preset ref. bit
0/1/2 [16], [17] or [18] for the corresponding
digital inputs in parameter group 5-1* Digital
Inputs.

68 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3-13 Reference Site 3-15 Reference 1 Source

Option: Function: Option: Function:
Select which reference site to activate. NOTICE!
[0] * Linked to Use local reference when in hand-on mode,
Hand / Auto or remote reference when in auto-on mode.
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
3 3
[1] Remote Use remote reference in both hand-on mode
and auto-on mode. Select the reference input to be used for
the 1st reference signal:
[2] Local Use local reference in both hand-on mode
• Parameter 3-15 Reference 1 Source.
and auto-on mode.
• Parameter 3-16 Reference 2 Source.
NOTICE!
• Parameter 3-17 Reference 3 Source.
When set to [2] Local, the frequency
converter starts with this setting again Define up to 3 different reference signals.
after a power-down. The sum of these reference signals defines
the actual reference.

[0] No function
3-14 Preset Relative Reference [1] * Analog Input
Range: Function: 53
0% [-100 The actual reference, X, is increased or decreased [2] Analog Input
* - with the percentage Y, set in parameter 3-14 Preset 54
100 %] Relative Reference. [7] Pulse input 29
This results in the actual reference Z. Actual [8] Pulse input 33
reference (X) is the sum of the inputs selected in: [20] Digital
• Parameter 3-15 Reference 1 Source. pot.meter
[21] Analog input
• Parameter 3-16 Reference 2 Source.
X30/11
• Parameter 3-17 Reference 3 Source. [22] Analog input
• Parameter 8-02 Control Source. X30/12
[23] Analog Input
130BA059.12

Y X42/1
Relative Z Resulting
actual [24] Analog Input
X Z=X+X*Y/100 reference
X42/3

Figure 3.19 Preset Relative Reference [25] Analog Input

X42/5
[29] Analog Input
X48/2
130BA278.10

Z
[30] Ext. Closed
0 Loop 1
*Y /10
X+X [31] Ext. Closed
Loop 2
X
[32] Ext. Closed
Loop 3
[33] PCD Bus
Y Reference
-100 0 100 % [35] Digital input The frequency converter selects AI53 or
P 3-14 select AI54 as the reference source based on the
Figure 3.20 Actual Reference input signal defined in option [42] Ref
source bit 0 as 1 of the digital inputs. For
more information, see parameter group 5-1*
Digital Inputs, option [42] Ref source bit 0.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 69

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3-16 Reference 2 Source 3-17 Reference 3 Source

Option: Function: Option: Function:
NOTICE! NOTICE!
3 3 This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.

Select the reference input to be used for Select the reference input to be used for
the 2nd reference signal: the 3rd reference signal:
• Parameter 3-15 Reference 1 Source. • Parameter 3-15 Reference 1 Source.
• Parameter 3-16 Reference 2 Source. • Parameter 3-16 Reference 2 Source.

• Parameter 3-17 Reference 3 Source. • Parameter 3-17 Reference 3 Source.

Define up to 3 different reference signals. Define up to 3 different reference signals.
The sum of these reference signals defines The sum of these reference signals defines
the actual reference. the actual reference.

[0] * No function [0] * No function

[1] Analog Input [1] Analog Input
53 53
[2] Analog Input [2] Analog Input
54 54
[7] Pulse input 29 [7] Pulse input 29
[8] Pulse input 33 [8] Pulse input 33
[20] Digital [20] Digital
pot.meter pot.meter
[21] Analog input [21] Analog input
X30/11 X30/11
[22] Analog input [22] Analog input
X30/12 X30/12
[23] Analog Input [23] Analog Input
X42/1 X42/1
[24] Analog Input [24] Analog Input
X42/3 X42/3
[25] Analog Input [25] Analog Input
X42/5 X42/5
[29] Analog Input [29] Analog Input
X48/2 X48/2
[30] Ext. Closed [30] Ext. Closed
Loop 1 Loop 1
[31] Ext. Closed [31] Ext. Closed
Loop 2 Loop 2
[32] Ext. Closed [32] Ext. Closed
Loop 3 Loop 3
[33] PCD Bus [33] PCD Bus
Reference Reference
[35] Digital input The frequency converter selects AI53 or [35] Digital input The frequency converter selects AI53 or
select AI54 as the reference source based on the select AI54 as the reference source based on the
input signal defined in option [42] Ref input signal defined in option [42] Ref
source bit 0 as 1 of the digital inputs. For source bit 0 as 1 of the digital inputs. For
more information, see parameter group 5-1* more information, see parameter group 5-1*
Digital Inputs, option [42] Ref source bit 0. Digital Inputs, option [42] Ref source bit 0.

70 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3-19 Jog Speed [RPM] 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time

Range: Function: Range: Function:
Size [0 - Enter a value for the jog speed nJOG, which ramp-down time should also be long
related* par. 4-13 is a fixed output speed. The frequency
RPM] converter runs at this speed when the jog
enough to prevent that the generated
current exceeds the current limit set in 3 3
function is activated. The maximum limit is parameter 4-18 Current Limit. See ramp-up
defined in parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High time in parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up
Limit [RPM]. Time.
See also parameter 3-11 Jog Speed [Hz] and
tdec × nnom par . 1 − 25
par . 3 − 42 = s
parameter 3-80 Jog Ramp Time. ref RPM

3.5.3 3-4* Ramp 1 3.5.4 3-5* Ramp 2

Configure the ramp times for each of the 2 ramps To select ramp parameters, see parameter group 3-4* Ramp
(parameter group 3-4* Ramp 1 and parameter group 3-5* 1.
Ramp 2). 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time
Range: Function:
Size [ 0.10 - Enter the ramp-up time, that is the
related* 3600 s] acceleration time from 0 RPM–
parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed. Select
a ramp-up time such that the output
current does not exceed the current limit in
parameter 4-18 Current Limit during
ramping. See ramp-down time in
parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time.
tacc × nnom par . 1 − 25
par . 3 − 51 = s
ref rpm

3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time

Range: Function:
Figure 3.21 Ramp 1
Size [ 0.10 - Enter the ramp-down time, that is the
related* 3600 s] deceleration time from
parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed–0 RPM.
3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time
Select a ramp-down time such that no
Range: Function: overvoltage occurs in the inverter due to
Size [ 0.10 Enter the ramp-up time, that is the regenerative operation of the motor, and
related* - 3600 acceleration time from 0 RPM– such that the generated current does not
s] parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed. Select a exceed the current limit set in
ramp-up time such that the output current parameter 4-18 Current Limit. See ramp-up
does not exceed the current limit in time in parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up
parameter 4-18 Current Limit during ramping. Time.
See ramp-down time in parameter 3-42 Ramp tdec × nnom par . 1 − 25
par . 3 − 52 = s
1 Ramp Down Time. ref rpm

tacc × nnom par . 1 − 25

par . 3 − 41 = s
ref RPM

3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time

Range: Function:
Size [ 0.10 - Enter the ramp-down time, that is the
related* 3600 s] deceleration time from
parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed–0 RPM.
Select a ramp-down time preventing
overvoltage from arising in the inverter due
to regenerative operation of the motor. The

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 71

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.5.5 3-8* Other Ramps Speed

130BA962.10
Motor Speed
3-80 Jog Ramp Time High

3 3
Normal
Range: Function: Ramps
Size [0.1 - Enter the jog ramp time, that is the
Motor Speed
related* 3600 s] acceleration/deceleration time between 0 RPM Low
and the nominal motor speed (nM,N) (set in Initial Final
Ramp Ramp
parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed). Ensure
that the resulting output current required for Time
the given jog ramp time does not exceed the Figure 3.23 Initial and Final Ramp Time
current limit in parameter 4-18 Current Limit.
The jog ramp time starts after activating a jog
signal via the control panel, a selected digital 3-85 Check Valve Ramp Time
input, or the serial communication port.
Range: Function:
par . 3 − 80 =
0 s* [0 - To protect ball check valves in a stop situation, the
t jog × nnom par . 1 − 25
jog speed par . 3 − 19
s
650 s] check valve ramp can be utilized as a slow ramp
rate from parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit
130BA070.10

RPM
[RPM] or parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
to check valve ramp end speed, set in
parameter 3-86 Check Valve Ramp End Speed [RPM]
P 4-13 RPM
high limit or parameter 3-87 Check Valve Ramp End Speed
P 1-25
[HZ]. When parameter 3-85 Check Valve Ramp Time
Motor speed is different from 0 s, the check valve ramp time is
P 3-19 effectuated and is used to ramp down the speed
Jog speed
from motor speed low limit to the check valve end
P 4-11 RPM speed in parameter 3-86 Check Valve Ramp End
low limit
t jog t jog Time Speed [RPM] or parameter 3-87 Check Valve Ramp
P 3-80 P 3-80 End Speed [HZ]. See Figure 3.24.
Ramp up Ramp down
(acc) (dec)
Speed

130BA961.10
Figure 3.22 Jog Ramp Time
Motor Speed
High
Normal
Ramp
3-84 Initial Ramp Time Motor Speed
Range: Function: Low
Check valve
0 s* [0 - Enter the initial ramp-up time from zero speed to End Speed
60 s] motor speed low limit, parameter 4-11 Motor Speed
Low Limit [RPM] or parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Time
Limit [Hz]. Submersible deep-well pumps can be Figure 3.24 Check Valve Ramp
damaged by running below minimum speed. A fast
ramp time below minimum pump speed is
recommended. This parameter may be applied as a
3-86 Check Valve Ramp End Speed [RPM]
fast ramp rate from zero speed to motor speed low
Range: Function:
limit. See Figure 3.23.
Size related* [ 0 - par. Set the speed in [RPM] below motor
4-11 RPM] speed low limit where the check
valve is expected to be closed.
Check that the valve is no longer
active. See Figure 3.24.

72 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3-87 Check Valve Ramp End Speed [HZ] 3-92 Power Restore
Range: Function: Option: Function:
Size related* [ 0 - par. 4-12 Set the speed in [Hz] below motor [0] * Off Resets the digital potentiometer reference to 0% after
Hz] speed low limit where the check
valve ramp is no longer active. See
[1] On
power-up.

Restores the most recent digital potentiometer

3 3
Figure 3.24.
reference at power-up.

3-88 Final Ramp Time

3-93 Maximum Limit
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0 s* [0 - Enter the final ramp time to be used when ramping
100 %* [-200 - Set the maximum allowed value for the
60 s] down from parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit
200 %] resulting reference. This is recommended if
[RPM] or parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
the digital potentiometer is used for fine-
to zero speed.
tuning of the resulting reference.
Submersible deep-well pumps can be damaged by
running below minimum speed. A fast ramp time
3-94 Minimum Limit
below minimum pump speed is recommended.
Range: Function:
This parameter may be applied as a fast ramp rate
from parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or 0 %* [-200 - Set the minimum allowed value for the
parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] to zero 200 %] resulting reference. This is recommended if
speed. See Figure 3.23. the digital potentiometer is used for fine-
tuning of the resulting reference.

3.5.6 3-9* Digital Pot.Meter 3-95 Ramp Delay

Range: Function:
Use the digital potentiometer function to increase or
Size [0 - Enter the delay required from activation of
decrease the actual reference by adjusting the set-up of
related* 0] the digital potentiometer function until the
the digital inputs using the functions increase, decrease, or
frequency converter starts to ramp the
clear. To activate the function, at least 1 digital input must
reference. With a delay of 0 ms, the reference
be set to increase or decrease.
starts to ramp when increase/decrease is
3-90 Step Size activated. See also parameter 3-91 Ramp Time.

Range: Function:
0.10 % [0.01 - Enter the increment size required for
* 200 %] increase/decrease as a percentage of the
synchronous motor speed, ns. If increase/
decrease is activated, the resulting reference
is increased or decreased by the value set in
this parameter.

Figure 3.25 Ramp Delay Case 1

3-91 Ramp Time
Range: Function:
1 [0 - Enter the ramp time, that is the time for adjustment
s 3600 s] of the reference 0–100% of the specified digital
potentiometer function (increase, decrease, or clear).
If increase/decrease is activated for longer than the
ramp delay period specified in parameter 3-95 Ramp
Delay, the actual reference is ramped up/down
according to this ramp time. The ramp time is
defined as the time spent to adjust the reference by
the step size specified in parameter 3-90 Step Size.

Figure 3.26 Ramp Delay Case 2

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 73

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.6 Parameters 4-** Limits/Warnings 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
Range: Function:

3.6.1 4-1* Motor Limits

Size [0 - NOTICE!
3 3 related* 60000
RPM]
Any changes in parameter 4-13 Motor
Speed High Limit [RPM] reset the value
Define torque, current, and speed limits for the motor, and
in parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High
the reaction of the frequency converter when the limits are
to the value set in
exceeded.
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit
A limit may generate a message in the display. A warning
[RPM].
always generates a message in the display or on the
fieldbus. A monitoring function may initiate a warning or a
trip, after which the frequency converter stops and NOTICE!
generates an alarm message. Maximum output frequency cannot
exceed 10% of the inverter switching
4-10 Motor Speed Direction
frequency (parameter 14-01 Switching
Option: Function: Frequency).
Selects the motor speed direction required.
When parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is
Enter the maximum limit for motor speed in
set to [3] Closed loop, the parameter default
RPM. The motor speed high limit can be set
is changed to [0] Clockwise. If both directions
to correspond to the manufacturer’s
are selected, running in counterclockwise
maximum rated motor. The motor speed
direction cannot be selected from the LCP.
high limit must exceed the setting in
[0] * Clockwise parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM].
[1] Counter- The parameter name appears as either
clockwise parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]
[2] Both or parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz],
directions depending on:

4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]

• The settings of other parameters in
the Main Menu.
Range: Function:
Size [ 0 - par. Enter the minimum limit for motor speed
• Default settings based on
geographical location.
related* 4-13 in RPM. The motor speed low limit can be
RPM] set to correspond to the minimum motor
4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
speed recommended by the manufacturer.
The motor speed low limit must not Range: Function:
exceed the setting in Size [ .1 - Enter the maximum limit for motor speed in
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit related* par. Hz. Parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit
[RPM]. 4-19 [Hz] can be set to correspond to the
Hz] manufacturer's recommended maximum
4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] motor speed. The motor speed high limit
must exceed the value in
Range: Function:
parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz].
Size [0 - Enter the minimum limit for motor speed
The output frequency must not exceed 10%
related* par. 4-14 in Hz. The motor speed low limit can be
of the switching frequency
Hz] set to correspond to the minimum output
(parameter 14-01 Switching Frequency).
frequency of the motor shaft. The speed
low limit must not exceed the setting in
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz].

74 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode 4-19 Max Output Frequency

Range: Function: Range: Function:
Size [0 - Enter the maximum torque limit for motor NOTICE!
related* 1000.0 %
]
operation. The torque limit is active in the
speed range up to and including the
When parameter 1-10 Motor Construction
is set to [1] PM, non-salient SPM, the
3 3
nominal motor speed set in maximum value is limited to 300 Hz.
parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed. To
protect the motor from reaching the
Enter the maximum output frequency value.
stalling torque, the default setting is 1.1 x
Parameter 4-19 Max Output Frequency specifies
the rated motor torque (calculated value).
the absolute limit on the frequency converter
See also parameter 14-25 Trip Delay at
output frequency for improved safety in
Torque Limit for further details.
applications where unintended overspeeding
If a setting in parameter 1-00 Configuration
must be avoided. This absolute limit applies to
Mode to parameter 1-28 Motor Rotation
all configurations and is independent of the
Check is changed, parameter 4-16 Torque
setting in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.
Limit Motor Mode is not automatically reset
to the default setting.
3.6.2 4-5* Adj. Warnings
4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode
Range: Function: Define adjustable warning limits for current, speed,
100 [0 - Enter the maximum torque limit for generator- reference, and feedback.
%* 1000.0 % mode operation. The torque limit is active in
] the speed range up to and including the NOTICE!
nominal motor speed (parameter 1-25 Motor
Not visible in the display, only in MCT 10 Set-up
Nominal Speed). Refer to parameter 14-25 Trip
Software.
Delay at Torque Limit for further details.
If a setting in parameter 1-00 Configuration
Mode to parameter 1-28 Motor Rotation Check is
4-50 Warning Current Low
changed, parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Range: Function:
Mode is not automatically reset to the default 0 [0 - Warnings are shown on the display, programmed
settings. A* par. output, or fieldbus.
4-51 Imotor 130BA064.10

4-18 Current Limit A]

ILIM ON REF

Range: Function:
(P 4-18)

IHIGH
(P 4-51)
160.0 [1.0 - Enter the current limit for motor and
IN RANGE
%* 1000.0 % generator operation. To protect the motor
ILOW
] from reaching the stalling torque, the default (P 4-50)

setting is 1.1 x the rated motor torque

nmotor [RPM]

nMIN nLOW REF nHIGH nMAX

(calculated value). If a setting in

(P 4-11) (P 4-52) (P 4-53) (P 4-13)

Figure 3.27 Low Current Limit

parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode to
parameter 1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque is
changed, parameter 4-18 Current Limit is not
automatically reset to the default setting. Enter the ILOW value. When the motor current drops
below this limit (ILOW), the display reads Current low.
4-19 Max Output Frequency The signal outputs can be programmed to produce
a status signal on terminal 27 or 29, and on relay
Range: Function:
output 01 or 02. Refer to Figure 3.27.
Size [1 - NOTICE!
related* 590
This parameter cannot be adjusted
Hz]
while the motor is running.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 75

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

4-51 Warning Current High 4-54 Warning Reference Low

Range: Function: Range: Function:
Size [ par. 4-50 Enter the IHIGH value. When the motor -999999.999* [ -999999.999 - Enter the lower reference limit.

3 3 related* - par. 16-37 current exceeds this limit (IHIGH), the

A] display reads Current high. The signal
par. 4-55 ] When the actual reference drops
below this limit, the display
outputs can be programmed to produce indicates RefLow. The signal
a status signal on terminal 27 or 29, and outputs can be programmed to
on relay output 01 or 02. Refer to produce a status signal on
Figure 3.27. terminal 27 or 29, and on relay
output 01 or 02.
4-52 Warning Speed Low
Range: Function: 4-55 Warning Reference High
0 RPM* [0 - Enter the nLOW value. When the motor speed Range: Function:
par. 4-53 drops below this limit (nLOW), the display 999999.999* [ par. 4-54 - Enter the upper reference limit.
RPM] reads Speed Low. The signal outputs can be 999999.999 ] When the actual reference exceeds
programmed to produce a status signal on this limit, the display reads RefHigh.
terminal 27 or 29, and on relay output 01 or The signal outputs can be
02. Program the lower signal limit of the programmed to produce a status
motor speed, nLOW, within the normal signal on terminal 27 or 29, and
working range of the frequency converter. on relay output 01 or 02.
Refer to Figure 3.27.
4-56 Warning Feedback Low
4-53 Warning Speed High Range: Function:
Range: Function: -999999.999 [ -999999.999 - Enter the lower feedback
Size [ par. NOTICE! ReferenceFeed- par. 4-57 limit. When the feedback
related* 4-52 - backUnit* ReferenceFeed- drops below this limit,
Any changes in parameter 4-13 Motor
par. backUnit] the display reads
Speed High Limit [RPM] reset the value
4-13 FeedbLow. The signal
in parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High
RPM] outputs can be
to the same value as set in
programmed to produce
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit
a status signal on
[RPM].
terminal 27 or 29, and on
If a different value is needed in
relay output 01 or 02.
parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High, it
must be set after programming of
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit 4-57 Warning Feedback High
[RPM]. Range: Function:
999999.999 [ par. 4-56 - Enter the upper feedback
Enter the nHIGH value. When the motor speed ReferenceFeed- 999999.999 limit. When the feedback
exceeds this limit (nHIGH), the display reads backUnit* ReferenceFeed- exceeds this limit, the
Speed high. The signal outputs can be backUnit] display reads FeedbHigh.
programmed to produce a status signal on The signal outputs can
terminal 27 or 29, and on relay output 01 or be programmed to
02. Program the upper signal limit of the produce a status signal
motor speed, nHIGH, within the normal on terminal 27 or 29, and
working range of the frequency converter. on relay output 01 or 02.
Refer to Figure 3.27.

76 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function 4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz]

Option: Function: Array [4]

NOTICE! Range: Function:

This parameter cannot be adjusted while the
motor is running.
Size related* [ 0 - par.
4-14 Hz]
Some systems require that certain
output frequencies or speeds are
3 3
avoided due to resonance problems
Shows an alarm if a motor phase is missing. in the system. Enter the upper limits
of the speeds to be avoided.
[0] * No alarm is shown if a missing motor phase occurs.

[1] An alarm is shown if a missing motor phase occurs.

3.6.4 Semi-Automatic Bypass Speed Set-up
[2]
Use the semi-automatic bypass speed set-up to facilitate
3.6.3 4-6* Speed Bypass the programming of the frequencies to be skipped due to
resonances in the system.
Some systems require that certain output frequencies or
speeds are avoided due to resonance problems in the Carry out the following process:
system. A maximum of 4 frequency or speed ranges can 1. Stop the motor.
be avoided.
2. Select [1] Enabled in parameter 4-64 Semi-Auto
4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM] Bypass Set-up.
Array [4] 3. Press [Hand On] on the LCP to start the search for
Range: Function: frequency bands causing resonances. The motor
Size related* [ 0 - par. Some systems require that certain ramps up according to the ramp set.
4-13 RPM] output frequencies or speeds are 4. When sweeping through a resonance band, press
avoided due to resonance problems [OK] on the LCP when leaving the band. The
in the system. Enter the lower limits actual frequency is stored as the first element in
of the speeds to be avoided. parameter 4-62 Bypass Speed To [RPM] or
parameter 4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz] (array).
4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz] Repeat this step for each resonance band
Array [4] identified at the ramp-up (maximum 4 can be
adjusted).
Range: Function:
Size related* [ 0 - par. Some systems require that certain 5. When maximum speed has been reached, the
4-14 Hz] output frequencies or speeds are motor automatically begins to ramp down.
avoided due to resonance problems Repeat the above procedure when speed is
in the system. Enter the lower limits leaving the resonance bands during the
of the speeds to be avoided. deceleration. The actual frequencies registered
when pressing [OK] are stored in
4-62 Bypass Speed To [RPM] parameter 4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM] or
parameter 4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz].
Array [4]
Range: Function: 6. When the motor has ramped down to stop, press
[OK]. Parameter 4-64 Semi-Auto Bypass Set-up
Size related* [ 0 - par. Some systems require that certain
automatically resets to Off. The frequency
4-13 RPM] output frequencies or speeds are
converter stays in hand-on mode until [Off] or
avoided due to resonance problems
[Auto On] is pressed on the LCP.
in the system. Enter the upper limits
of the speeds to be avoided.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 77

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

If the frequencies for a certain resonance band are not

registered in the right order, all registrations are canceled
and the following message is shown: Collected speed areas
overlapping or not completely determined. Press [Cancel] to
3 3 abort. Registration in wrong order is when frequency
values stored in parameter 4-62 Bypass Speed To [RPM] are
higher than the values in parameter 4-60 Bypass Speed
From [RPM], or if they do not have the same numbers of
registrations for the Bypass From and Bypass To.

4-64 Semi-Auto Bypass Set-up

Option: Function:
[0] * Off No function.

[1] Enabled Starts the semi-automatic bypass set-up and

continues with the procedure described in
chapter 3.6.4 Semi-Automatic Bypass Speed Set-up.

78 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3.7 Parameters 5-** Digital In/Out The digital inputs are used for selecting various functions
in the frequency converter. All digital inputs can be set to
Parameter group for configuring the digital input and the following functions:
output.
Options [120]–[138] are related to the cascade controller 3 3
3.7.1 5-0* Digital I/O Mode functionality. For more information, see parameter group
25-** Cascade Controller.
Parameters for configuring the input and output using
NPN and PNP. Digital input function Option Terminal
No operation [0] 19, 29, 32, 33
5-00 Digital I/O Mode
Reset [1] All
Option: Function:
Coast inverse [2] 27
NOTICE! Coast and reset inverse [3] All
This parameter cannot be adjusted DC-brake inverse [5] All
while the motor is running. Stop inverse [6] All
External interlock [7] All
Digital inputs and programmed digital Start [8] All
outputs are pre-programmable for operation Latched start [9] All
either in PNP or NPN systems. Reversing [10] All
[0] * PNP - Active Action on positive directional pulses (0). PNP Start reversing [11] All
at 24V systems are pulled down to GND. Jog [14] All

[1] NPN - Active Action on negative directional pulses (1). Preset reference on [15] All
at 0V NPN systems are pulled up to +24 V, Preset ref bit 0 [16] All
internally in the frequency converter. Preset ref bit 1 [17] All
Preset ref bit 2 [18] All
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode Freeze reference [19] All
Option: Function: Freeze output [20] All
Speed up [21] All
NOTICE! Speed down [22] All
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
Set-up select bit 0 [23] All
the motor is running.
Set-up select bit 1 [24] All
Pulse input [32] 29, 33
[0] * Input Defines terminal 27 as a digital input.
Ramp bit 0 [34] All
[1] Output Defines terminal 27 as a digital output. Mains failure inverse [36] All
Ref source bit 0 [42] All
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode Hand/auto start [51] All
Option: Function: Run permissive [52] All

NOTICE! Hand start [53] All

Auto start [54] All
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running. DigiPot increase [55] All
DigiPot decrease [56] All
DigiPot clear [57] All
[0] * Input Defines terminal 29 as a digital input.
Counter A (up) [60] 29, 33
[1] Output Defines terminal 29 as a digital output. Counter A (down) [61] 29, 33
Reset counter A [62] All
3.7.2 5-1* Digital Inputs Counter B (up) [63] 29, 33
Counter B (down) [64] 29, 33
Parameters for configuring the input functions for the Reset counter B [65] All
input terminals. Sleep mode [66] All
Reset maintenance word [78] All
PTC card 1 [80] All

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 79

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Digital input function Option Terminal NOTICE!

Latched pump derag [85] All When the frequency converter is at
Lead pump start [120] All the torque limit and has received a
Lead pump alternation [121] All stop command, it may not stop by
3 3 Pump 1 interlock [130] All itself. To ensure that the frequency
Pump 2 interlock [131] All converter stops, configure a digital
Pump 3 interlock [132] All output to [27] Torque limit & stop and
connect it to a digital input
Table 3.12 Functions for Digital Inputs configured as coast.
[7] External Same function as coast stop inverse, but
All stands for terminals 18, 19, 27, 29, 32, X30/2, X30/3, and
Interlock external interlock generates the alarm
X30/4.
message external fault when the terminal
X30/X are the terminals on VLT® General Purpose I/O MCB
programmed for coast inverse is logic 0. The
101.
alarm message is also active via digital
outputs and relay outputs, if programmed
Functions dedicated to only 1 digital input are stated in for external interlock. The alarm can be reset
the associated parameter. using a digital input or the [Reset] key if the
cause for the external interlock has been
All digital inputs can be programmed to these functions: removed. A delay can be programmed in
parameter 22-00 External Interlock Delay. After
[0] No operation No reaction to signals transmitted to applying a signal to the input, the reaction
terminal. is delayed with the time set in
[1] Reset Resets the frequency converter after a trip/ parameter 22-00 External Interlock Delay.
alarm. Not all alarms can be reset. [8] Start Select start value for a start/stop command.
[2] Coast inverse Leaves motor in free mode. Logic 0=coast 1=start, 0=stop.
stop. (Default digital input 18).
(Default digital input 27) Coast stop, inverted [9] Latched start The motor starts if a pulse is applied for
input (NC). minimum 2 ms. The motor stops when stop
[3] Coast and Reset and coast stop inverted input (NC). inverse is activated.
reset inverse Leaves motor in free mode and resets the [10] Reversing Changes direction of motor shaft rotation.
frequency converter. Logic 0=coast stop and Select logic 1 to reverse. The reversing signal
reset. only changes the direction of rotation. It
[5] DC-brake Inverted input for DC brake (NC). does not activate the start function. Select
inverse Stops motor by energizing it with a DC both directions in parameter 4-10 Motor
current for a certain time period. See Speed Direction.
parameter 2-01 DC Brake Current to (Default digital input 19).
parameter 2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM]. [11] Start Used for start/stop and for reversing on the
The function is only active when the value reversing same wire. Signals on start are not allowed
in parameter 2-02 DC Braking Time is at the same time.
different from 0. Logic 0=DC brake. [14] Jog Used for activating jog speed. See
This selection is not possible when parameter 3-11 Jog Speed [Hz].
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to (Default digital input 29).
[1] PM, non-salient SPM. [15] Preset Used for shifting between external reference
[6] Stop inverse Stop inverted function. Generates a stop reference on and preset reference. It is assumed that [1]
function when the selected terminal goes External/preset has been selected in
from logical level 1 to 0. The stop is parameter 3-04 Reference Function. Logic 0 =
performed according to the selected ramp external reference active; logic 1 = 1 of the
time (parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down 8 preset references is active.
Time and parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp [16] Preset ref bit Enables a selection of 1 of the 8 preset
Down Time). 0 references according to Table 3.13.
[17] Preset ref bit Enables a selection of 1 of the 8 preset
1 references according to Table 3.13.

80 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

[18] Preset ref bit Enables a selection of 1 of the 8 preset [32] Pulse input Select [32] Pulse input when using a pulse
2 references according to Table 3.13. sequence as either reference or feedback.
Scaling is done in parameter group 5-5* Pulse
Preset ref. bit 2 1 0 Input.
Preset reference 0
Preset reference 1
0
0
0
0
0
1
[34] Ramp bit 0 Select which ramp to use. Logic 0 selects 3 3
ramp 1 while logic 1 selects ramp 2.
Preset reference 2 0 1 0 [36] Mains failure Activates parameter 14-10 Mains Failure.
Preset reference 3 0 1 1 inverse Mains failure inverse is active in the logic 0
Preset reference 4 1 0 0 situation.
Preset reference 5 1 0 1 [42] Ref source bit An active input in bit 0 selects AI54 as the
Preset reference 6 1 1 0 0 reference source (see parameter group 3-1*
Preset reference 7 1 1 1 References, option [35] Digital input select).
An inactive input selects AI53.
Table 3.13 Preset Reference Bit
[51] Hand/Auto Selects hand or auto start. High signal
Start selects auto on only, Low signal selects hand
[19] Freeze ref Freezes the actual reference. The frozen
on only.
reference is now the point of enable/
[52] Run The input terminal, for which the [52] Run
condition for speed up and speed down to
Permissive Permissive has been programmed, must be
be used. If speed up/speed down is used,
logic 1 before a start command can be
the speed change always follows ramp 2
accepted. Run permissive has a logic AND
(parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time and
function related to the terminal, which is
parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time) in
programmed for [8] Start, [14] Jog, or [20]
the range 0–parameter 3-03 Maximum
Freeze Output. To start running the motor,
Reference.
both conditions must be fulfilled. If [52] Run
[20] Freeze output Freezes the actual motor frequency (Hz). The
Permissive is programmed on multiple
frozen motor frequency is now the point of
terminals, it only has to be logic 1 on 1 of
enable/condition for speed up and speed
the terminals to carry out the function. The
down to be used. If speed up/speed down is
digital output signal for run request ([8]
used, the speed change always follows ramp
Start, [14] Jog, or [20] Freeze output)
2 (parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time and
programmed in parameter group 5-3* Digital
parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time) in
Outputs, or parameter group 5-4* Relays, is
the range 0–parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency.
not affected by [52] Run Permissive.
NOTICE! [53] Hand start A signal applied puts the frequency
When [20] Freeze output is active, the converter into hand-on mode as if [Hand
frequency converter cannot be On] has been pressed and a normal stop
stopped via a low [13] Start signal. command is overridden. If disconnecting the
Stop the frequency converter via a signal, the motor stops. To make any other
terminal programmed for [2] Coast start commands valid, assign another digital
inverse or [3] Coast and reset, inverse. input to [54] Auto Start and apply a signal to
[21] Speed up For digital control of the speed up/speed this. [Hand On] and [Auto On] have no
down (motor potentiometer). Activate this impact. [Off] overrides local start and auto
function by selecting either [19] Freeze start. Press either [Hand On] or [Auto On] to
reference or [20] Freeze output. When [21] make local start and auto start active again.
Speed up is activated for less than 400 ms, If there is no signal on neither [53] Hand
the resulting reference is increased by 0.1%. start nor [54] Auto start, the motor stops
If [21] Speed up is activated for more than regardless of any normal start command
400 ms, the resulting reference ramps applied. If a signal is applied to both [53]
according to ramp 1 in parameter 3-41 Ramp Hand start and [54] Auto start, the function is
1 Ramp Up Time. auto start. If pressing [Off], the motor stops
[22] Speed down Same as [21] Speed up. regardless of signals on [53] Hand start and
[23] Set-up select Selects 1 of the 4 set-ups. Set [54] Auto start.
bit 0 parameter 0-10 Active Set-up to Multi Set-up. [54] Auto start A signal applied puts the frequency
[24] Set-up select Same as [23] Set-up select bit 0. converter into auto-on mode as if [Auto On]
bit 1 (Default digital input 32). has been pressed. See also [53] Hand Start.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 81

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

[55] DigiPot Uses the input as an increase signal to the Yes, Pump1 refers to the pump controlled by
Increase digital potentiometer function described in the frequency converter only (without any of
parameter group 3-9* Digital Pot.Meter. the built-in relays involved) and Pump2 to
[56] DigiPot Uses the input as a decrease signal to the the pump controlled by relay1. Variable
3 3 Decrease digital potentiometer function described in speed pump (lead) cannot be interlocked in
the basic cascade controller.
parameter group 3-9* Digital Pot.Meter.
[57] DigiPot Clear Uses the input to clear the digital potenti- See Table 3.14.
ometer reference described in parameter
Setting in Setting in
group 3-9* Digital Pot.Meter.
parameter parameter 25-06 Number of
[60] Counter A (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for increment
group 5-1* Pumps
(up) counting in the SLC counter.
Digital Inputs
[61] Counter A (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for decrement
[0] No [1] Yes
(down) counting in the SLC counter.
[130] Pump1 Controlled by Controlled by
[62] Reset Counter Input for reset of counter A.
Interlock relay1 frequency
A
(only if not converter
[63] Counter B (Terminal 29 and 33 only) Input for
lead pump) (cannot be
(up) increment counting in the SLC counter.
interlocked)
[64] Counter B (Terminal 29 and 33 only) Input for
[131] Pump2 Controlled by Controlled by
(down) decrement counting in the SLC counter.
Interlock relay2 relay1
[65] Reset Counter Input for reset of counter B.
[132] Pump3 Controlled by Controlled by
B
Interlock relay3 relay2
[66] Sleep Mode Forces the frequency converter into sleep
[133] Pump4 Controlled by Controlled by
mode (see parameter group 22-4* Sleep
Interlock relay4 relay3
Mode). Reacts on the rising edge of signal
[134] Pump5 Controlled by Controlled by
applied.
Interlock relay5 relay4
[78] Reset Resets all data in
[135] Pump6 Controlled by Controlled by
Preventive parameter 16-96 Maintenance Word to 0.
Interlock relay6 relay5
Maintenance
[136] Pump7 Controlled by Controlled by
Word
Interlock relay7 relay6
[80] PTC Card1 All digital inputs can be set to [80] PTC Card
[137] Pump8 Controlled by Controlled by
1. However, only 1 digital input must be set
Interlock relay8 relay7
to this option.
[138] Pump9 Controlled by Controlled by
[85] Latched Starts deragging.
Interlock relay9 relay8
Pump Derag

Options [120]–[138] are related to the cascade controller

functionality. For more information, see parameter group 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input
25-** Cascade Controller. The parameter contains all options and functions listed in
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for option [32] Pulse
[120] Lead Pump Starts/stops the lead pump (controlled by input.
Start the frequency converter). A start also
5-11 Terminal 19 Digital Input
requires applying a system start signal, for
example to 1 of the digital inputs set for [8] The parameter contains all options and functions listed in
Start. parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for option [32] Pulse
[121] Lead Pump Forces alternation of the lead pump in a input.
Alternation cascade controller. Set parameter 25-50 Lead
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input
Pump Alternation to either [2] At Command
or [3] At Staging or At Command. The parameter contains all options and functions listed in
Parameter 25-51 Alternation Event can be set parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for option [32] Pulse
to any of the 4 options. input.

[130 Pump1 The function depends on the setting in

5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input
- Interlock - parameter 25-06 Number of Pumps. If set to
The parameter contains all options and functions listed in
138] Pump9 [0] No, then Pump1 refers to the pump
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.
Interlock controlled by relay1 and so on. If set to [1]

82 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop

The parameter contains all options and functions listed in Use this parameter to configure the Safe Torque Off functionality.
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for option [32] Pulse A warning message makes the frequency converter coast the

3 3
input. motor and enables the automatic restart. An alarm message
makes the frequency converter coast the motor and requires a
5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input manual restart (via a fieldbus, Digital I/O, or by pressing [RESET]
The parameter contains all options and functions listed in on the LCP). When the VLT® PTC Thermistor Card MCB 112 is
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs. mounted, configure the PTC options to get the full benefit from
the alarm handling.
5-16 Terminal X30/2 Digital Input
Option: Function:
Option: Function:
established, the frequency converter
[0] * No operation This parameter is active when VLT® General
continues without manual reset.
Purpose I/O MCB 101 is installed in the
frequency converter. The parameter contains [4] Coasts the frequency converter when Safe
all options and functions listed in parameter Torque Off is activated. Manual reset from
group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for option LCP, digital input, or fieldbus.
[32] Pulse input. [5] Coasts the frequency converter when Safe
Torque Off is activated (terminal 37 off).
5-17 Terminal X30/3 Digital Input
When the Safe Torque Off circuit is re-
Option: Function: established, the frequency converter
[0] * No operation This parameter is active when VLT® General continues without manual reset, unless a
Purpose I/O MCB 101 is installed in the digital input set to [80] PTC Card 1 is still
frequency converter. The parameter contains enabled.
all options and functions listed in parameter
[6] This option is used when the VLT® PTC
group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for option
Thermistor Card MCB 112 gates with a
[32] Pulse input.
stop key through a safety relay to terminal
5-18 Terminal X30/4 Digital Input 37. Coasts the frequency converter when
Safe Torque Off is activated. Manual reset
Option: Function:
from LCP, digital input, or fieldbus.
[0] * No operation This parameter is active when VLT® General
Purpose I/O MCB 101 is installed in the [7] This option is used when the VLT® PTC
frequency converter. The parameter contains Thermistor Card MCB 112 gates with a
all options and functions listed in parameter stop key through a safety relay to terminal
group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for option 37. Coasts the frequency converter when
[32] Pulse input. Safe Torque Off is activated (terminal 37
off). When the Safe Torque Off circuit is
5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop re-established, the frequency converter
Use this parameter to configure the Safe Torque Off functionality. continues without manual reset, unless a
A warning message makes the frequency converter coast the digital input set to [80] PTC Card 1 is still
motor and enables the automatic restart. An alarm message enabled.
makes the frequency converter coast the motor and requires a
[8] This option makes it possible to use a
manual restart (via a fieldbus, Digital I/O, or by pressing [RESET]
combination of alarm and warning.
on the LCP). When the VLT® PTC Thermistor Card MCB 112 is
mounted, configure the PTC options to get the full benefit from [9] This option makes it possible to use a
the alarm handling. combination of alarm and warning.

Option: Function:
[1] * Coasts the frequency converter when Safe
Torque Off is activated. Manual reset from
LCP, digital input, or fieldbus.

[3] Coasts the frequency converter when Safe

Torque Off is activated (terminal 37 off).
When the Safe Torque Off circuit is re-

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 83

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

NOTICE! 5-22 Terminal X46/5 Digital Input

Options [4] PTC 1 Alarm to [9] PTC 1 & Relay W/A are only This parameter is related to the digital input on VLT® Extended
available when the MCB 112 is connected. Relay Card MCB 113. The parameter contains all options and

3 3 NOTICE!
functions listed in parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for
option [32] Pulse input.

Selecting Auto Reset/Warning enables automatic restart 5-23 Terminal X46/7 Digital Input
of the frequency converter.
This parameter is related to the digital input on VLT® Extended
Relay Card MCB 113. The parameter contains all options and
Function Num PTC Relay functions listed in parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for
- option [32] Pulse input.
ber
5-24 Terminal X46/9 Digital Input
No Function [0] – –
This parameter is related to the digital input on VLT® Extended
Safe Torque Off [1]* – Safe Torque Off
Relay Card MCB 113. The parameter contains all options and
Alarm [A68]
functions listed in parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for
Safe Torque Off [3] – Safe Torque Off
option [32] Pulse input.
Warning [W68]
PTC 1 Alarm [4] PTC 1 Safe Torque – 5-25 Terminal X46/11 Digital Input
Off [A71]
This parameter is related to the digital input on VLT® Extended
PTC 1 Warning [5] PTC 1 Safe Torque –
Relay Card MCB 113. The parameter contains all options and
Off [W71]
functions listed in parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for
PTC 1 & Relay A [6] PTC 1 Safe Torque Safe Torque Off
option [32] Pulse input.
Off [A71] [A68]
PTC 1 & Relay W [7] PTC 1 Safe Torque Safe Torque Off 5-26 Terminal X46/13 Digital Input
Off [W71] [W68]
This parameter is related to the digital input on VLT® Extended
PTC 1 & Relay A/W [8] PTC 1 Safe Torque Safe Torque Off Relay Card MCB 113. The parameter contains all options and
Off [A71] [W68] functions listed in parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for
PTC 1 & Relay W/A [9] PTC 1 Safe Torque Safe Torque Off option [32] Pulse input.
Off [W71] [A68]

Table 3.14 Overview of Functions, Alarms, and Warnings 3.7.3 5-3* Digital Outputs
W means warning and A means alarm. For further information, see
Alarms and Warnings in chapter 5 Troubleshooting. Parameters for configuring the output functions for the
output terminals. The 2 solid-state digital outputs are
A dangerous failure related to Safe Torque Off issues alarm common for terminals 27 and 29. Set the I/O function for
72, Dangerous failure. terminal 27 in parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode and set the
Refer to Table 5.1. I/O function for terminal 29 in parameter 5-02 Terminal 29
Mode.
5-20 Terminal X46/1 Digital Input
This parameter is related to the digital input on VLT® Extended NOTICE!
Relay Card MCB 113. The parameter contains all options and
These parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is
functions listed in parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for
running.
option [32] Pulse input.

5-21 Terminal X46/3 Digital Input The digital outputs can be programmed
with these functions:
This parameter is related to the digital input on VLT® Extended
[0] No operation Default for all digital outputs and relay
Relay Card MCB 113. The parameter contains all options and
outputs.
functions listed in parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for
[1] Control ready The control board receives supply voltage.
option [32] Pulse input.
[2] Drive ready The frequency converter is ready for
operation and applies a supply signal on
the control board.

84 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

[3] Drive ready/ The frequency converter is ready for [27] Torque limit Used in performing a coast stop and in
remote operation and is in auto-on mode. and stop torque limit condition. If the frequency
control converter has received a stop signal and is
[4] Standby/no The frequency converter is ready for at the torque limit, the signal is logic 0.
warning operation. No start or stop command has [28] Brake, no The brake is active and there are no 3 3
been given (start/disable). There are no warning warnings.
warnings. [29] Brake ready, The brake is ready for operation and there
[5] Running Motor is running. no fault are no faults.
[6] Running/no The output speed is higher than the speed [30] Brake fault The output is logic 1 when the brake IGBT
warning set in parameter 1-81 Min Speed for (IGBT) is short-circuited. Use this function to
Function at Stop [RPM]. The motor is protect the frequency converter if there is
running and there are no warnings. a fault on the brake modules. Use the
[8] Run on Motor runs at reference speed. output/relay to cut out the mains voltage
reference/no from the frequency converter.
warning [35] External External interlock function has been
[9] Alarm An alarm activates the output. There are Interlock activated via 1 of the digital inputs.
no warnings. [40] Out of ref
[10] Alarm or An alarm or a warning activates the range
warning output. [41] Below
[11] At torque limit The torque limit set in reference low
parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode [42] Above
has been exceeded. reference high
[12] Out of current The motor current is outside the range set [45] Bus Ctrl
range in parameter 4-18 Current Limit. [46] Bus Ctrl 1 if
[13] Below current, Motor current is lower than the setting in timeout
low parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low. [47] Bus Ctrl 0 if
[14] Above current, Motor current is higher than the setting in timeout
high parameter 4-51 Warning Current High. [55] Pulse output
[15] Out of speed Output speed is outside the ranges set in [60] Comparator 0 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If
range parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low and comparator 0 is evaluated as true, the
parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High. output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
[16] Below speed, Output speed is lower than the setting in [61] Comparator 1 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If
low parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low. comparator 1 is evaluated as true, the
[17] Above speed, Output speed is higher than the setting in output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
high parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High. [62] Comparator 2 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If
[18] Out of Feedback is outside the ranges set in comparator 2 is evaluated as true, the
feedback parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low and output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
range parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High. [63] Comparator 3 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If
[19] Below Feedback is below the limit set in comparator 3 is evaluated as true, the
feedback low parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low. output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
[20] Above The feedback is above the limit set in [64] Comparator 4 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If
feedback high parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low. comparator 4 is evaluated as true, the
[21] Thermal The thermal warning turns on when the output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
warning temperature exceeds the limit in the [65] Comparator 5 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If
motor, the frequency converter, the brake comparator 5 is evaluated as true, the
resistor, or the thermistor. output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
[25] Reverse Reversing. Logic 1 = relay activated, 24 V [70] Logic Rule 0 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If
DC when clockwise rotation of the motor. logic rule 0 is evaluated as true, the
Logic 0 = relay not activated, no signal, output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
when counterclockwise rotation of the [71] Logic Rule 1 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If
motor. logic rule 1 is evaluated as true, the
[26] Bus OK Active communication (no timeout) via the output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
serial communication port.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 85

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

[72] Logic Rule 2 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If [161] Running The output is high when the frequency
logic rule 2 is evaluated as true, the reverse converter is running counterclockwise (the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. logical product of the status bits running
[73] Logic Rule 3 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If AND reverse).
3 3 logic rule 3 is evaluated as true, the [165] Local Output is high when
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. reference parameter 3-13 Reference Site=[2] Local or
[74] Logic Rule 4 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If active when parameter 3-13 Reference Site=[0]
logic rule 4 is evaluated as true, the Linked to hand auto at the same time as
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. the LCP is in hand-on mode.
[75] Logic Rule 5 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If [166] Remote Output is high when
logic rule 5 is evaluated as true, the reference parameter 3-13 Reference Site is set to [1]
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. active Remote or [0] Linked to hand/auto while
[80] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action. the LCP is in auto-on mode.
Output A The output goes high whenever the smart [167] start Output is high when there is an active
logic action [38] Set digital out A high is command start command, for example auto on, and
executed. The output goes low whenever active a start command via digital input or bus is
the smart logic action [32] Set digital out A active, or [Hand On].
low is executed. NOTICE!
[81] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action. All inverse stop/coast commands
Output B The output goes high whenever the smart must be inactive.
logic action [39] Set digital out B high is
[168] Drive in hand Output is high when the frequency
executed. The output goes low whenever
mode converter is in hand-on mode (as indicated
the smart logic action [33] Set digital out B
by the indicator light above [Hand On]).
low is executed.
[169] Drive in auto Output is high when the frequency
[82] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
mode converter is in auto-on mode (as indicated
Output C The output goes high whenever the smart
by the indicator light above [Auto On]).
logic action [40] Set digital out C high is
[180] Clock Fault The clock function has been reset to
executed. The output goes low whenever
default (2000-01-01) because of a power
the smart logic action [34] Set digital out C
failure.
low is executed.
[181] Preventive One or more of the preventive
[83] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
Maintenance maintenance events programmed in
Output D The output goes high whenever the smart
parameter 23-10 Maintenance Item has
logic action [41] Set digital out D high is
passed the time for the specified action in
executed. The output goes low whenever
parameter 23-11 Maintenance Action.
the smart logic action [35] Set digital out D
[182] Deragging Deragging is active.
low is executed.
[188] AHF Capacitor See parameter 5-80 AHF Cap Reconnect
[84] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
Connect Delay.
Output E The output goes high whenever the smart
logic action [42] Set digital out E high is [189] External Fan External fan control is active.
executed. The output goes low whenever Control
the smart logic action [36] Set digital out E [190] No-Flow A no-flow situation or minimum speed
low is executed. situation has been detected if enabled in
[85] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action. Parameter 22-21 Low Power Detection.
Output F The output goes high whenever the smart [191] Dry Pump A dry-pump condition has been detected.
logic action [43] Set digital out F high is Enable this function in parameter 22-26 Dry
executed. The output goes low whenever Pump Function.
the smart logic action [37] Set digital out F [192] End of Curve Active when an end-of-curve condition is
low is executed. present.
[90] kWh counter Creates a pulse on the digital output every [193] Sleep Mode The frequency converter/system has
pulse time the frequency converter uses 1 kWh. entered sleep mode. See parameter group
[120] System On Ref 22-4* Sleep Mode.
[155] Verifying Flow [194] Broken Belt A broken-belt condition has been
[160] No alarm Output is high when no alarm is present. detected. Enable this function in
parameter 22-60 Broken Belt Function.

86 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

[195] Bypass Valve The bypass valve control (digital/relay [205] Pump 5
Control output in the frequency converter) is used running
for compressor systems to unload the [206] Pump 6
compressor during start-up by using a running
bypass valve. After the start command is
given, the bypass valve is open until the
[207] Pump 7 3 3
running
frequency converter reaches [208] Pump 8
parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit running
[RPM]). After the limit has been reached, [209] Pump 9
the bypass valve is closed, allowing the running
compressor to operate normally. This [240] RS Flipflop 0 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand S,
procedure is not activated again before a parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R.
new start is initiated and the frequency
[241] RS Flipflop 1 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand S,
converter speed is 0 during the receiving
parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R.
of start signal. Parameter 1-71 Start Delay
[242] RS Flipflop 2 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand S,
can be used to delay the motor start.
parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R.
Speed [243] RS Flipflop 3 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand S,
130BA251.10

parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R.

REF
Speed [244] RS Flipflop 4 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand S,
Min
parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R.
Time
ON [245] RS Flipflop 5 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand S,
OFF parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R.
Time
ON [246] RS Flipflop 6 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand S,
OFF
Start Stop Time parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R.
Figure 3.28 Bypass Valve Control [247] RS Flipflop 7 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand S,
Principle parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R.

Setting in Setting in parameter 25-05 Fixed Lead

parameter group Pump
[199] Pipe Filling Active when the pipe fill function is
5-3* Digital Outputs
operating. See parameter group 29-** Water
[0] No [1] Yes
Application Functions.
[201] Pump 1 Controlled by Controlled by
The below setting options are all related to Running relay1 frequency converter
the cascade controller. [202] Pump 2 Controlled by Controlled by
See parameter group 25-** Cascade Running relay2 relay1
Controller for more details. [203] Pump 3 – Controlled by
[200] Full Capacity All pumps running at full speed. Running relay2
[201] Pump1 One or more of the pumps controlled by
Running the cascade controller are running. The Table 3.15 Pumps Controlled by the Cascade Controller
function also depends on the setting in
parameter 25-05 Fixed Lead Pump. If set to 5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output
[0] No, Pump 1 refers to the pump This parameter has the options described in chapter 3.7.3 5-3*
controlled by relay1, and so on. If set to [1] Digital Outputs.
Yes, Pump 1 refers to the pump controlled Option: Function:
by the frequency converter only (without
[0] * No operation
any of the built-in relays involved) and
Pump 2 to the pump controlled by relay1. 5-31 Terminal 29 Digital Output
See Table 3.15. This parameter has the options described in chapter 3.7.3 5-3*
[202] Pump2 See [201]. Digital Outputs.
Running
Option: Function:
[203] Pump3 See [201].
[0] * No operation
Running
[204] Pump 4
running

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 87

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101) 5-40 Function Relay
This parameter has the options described in chapter 3.7.3 5-3* Array [20]
Digital Outputs. Option: Function:

3 3 Option: Function:
[0] * No operation This parameter is active when VLT® General
[22]
[23]
Ready,no thermal W
Remote,ready,no TW
Purpose I/O MCB 101 is mounted in the [24] Ready, voltage OK
frequency converter. [25] Reverse
[26] Bus OK
5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101)
[27] Torque limit stop
Option: Function:
[28] Brake: No Brake War
[0] * No operation This parameter is active when VLT® General [29] Brake ready, no fault
Purpose I/O MCB 101 is mounted in the [30] Brake fault (IGBT)
frequency converter. Same options and
[31] Relay 123
functions as parameter group 5-3* Digital
[32] Mech brake ctrl
Inputs.
[33] Safe stop active
[36] Control word bit 11
3.7.4 5-4* Relays [37] Control word bit 12
[40] Out of ref range
Parameters for configuring the timing and the output [41] Below reference, low
functions for the relays. [42] Above ref, high
5-40 Function Relay [45] Bus ctrl.
Array [20] [46] Bus ctrl, 1 if timeout
[47] Bus ctrl, 0 if timeout
Option: Function:
[51] MCO controlled
Select options to define the
[60] Comparator 0
function of the relays.
[61] Comparator 1
The selection of each mechanical
[62] Comparator 2
relay is realized in an array
parameter. [63] Comparator 3
[64] Comparator 4
[0] * No operation
[65] Comparator 5
[1] Control ready
[70] Logic rule 0
[2] Drive ready
[71] Logic rule 1
[3] Drive rdy/rem ctrl
[72] Logic rule 2
[4] Enable / no warning
[73] Logic rule 3
[5] VLT running
[74] Logic rule 4
[6] Running / no warning
[75] Logic rule 5
[7] Run in range/no warn
[80] SL digital output A
[8] Run on ref/no warn
[81] SL digital output B
[9] Alarm
[82] SL digital output C
[10] Alarm or warning
[83] SL digital output D
[11] At torque limit
[84] SL digital output E
[12] Out of current range
[85] SL digital output F
[13] Below current, low
[120] Local ref active
[14] Above current, high
[121] Remote ref active
[15] Out of speed range
[122] No alarm
[16] Below speed, low
[123] Start command activ
[17] Above speed, high
[124] Running reverse
[18] Out of feedb. range
[125] Drive in hand mode
[19] Below feedback, low
[126] Drive in auto mode
[20] Above feedback, high
[21] Thermal warning

88 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

5-41 On Delay, Relay 3.7.5 5-5* Pulse Input

Array [20]
The pulse input parameters are used to define an
Range: Function:
appropriate window for the impulse reference area by
0.01 s* [0.01 -
600 s]
Enter the delay of the relay cut-in time.
Select 1 of 2 internal mechanical relays in
configuring the scaling and filter settings for the pulse 3 3
inputs. Input terminal 29 or 33 acts as frequency reference
an array function. See
inputs. Set terminal 29 (parameter 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital
parameter 5-40 Function Relay for details.
Input) or terminal 33 (parameter 5-15 Terminal 33 Digital
Input) to [32] Pulse input. If terminal 29 is used as an input,

130BA171.10
Selected set parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode to [0] Input.
Event

130BA076.10
Ref.
Relay (RPM)
output High
ref.
On Delay Off Delay value
P 5-41 P 5-42 P 5-53/
p 5-58

Selected
Event

Relay Low
ref.
output value
P 5-52/
p 5-57 Low freq. High freq. Input
On Delay P 5-50/ P 5-51/ (Hz)
P 5-41 P 5-55 P 5-56

Figure 3.29 On Delay, Relay Figure 3.31 Pulse Input

5-42 Off Delay, Relay 5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency

Array[20] Range: Function:
Range: Function: 100 [0 - 110000 Enter the low frequency limit
Hz* Hz] corresponding to the low motor shaft
0.01 s* [0.01 - Enter the delay of the relay cutout time. Select
speed (that is low reference value) in
600 s] 1 of 2 internal mechanical relays in an array
parameter 5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb.
function. See parameter 5-40 Function Relay for
Value. Refer to Figure 3.31 in this section.
details. If the selected event condition changes
before a delay timer expires, the relay output
5-51 Term. 29 High Frequency
is unaffected.
Range: Function:
100 Hz* [0 - 110000 Enter the high frequency limit
130BA172.10

Hz] corresponding to the high motor shaft

Selected speed (that is high reference value) in
Event
parameter 5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb.
Value.
Relay
output 5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Range: Function:
On Delay Off Delay
P 5-41 P 5-42 0 ReferenceFeed- [-999999.999 - Enter the low reference
Figure 3.30 Off Delay, Relay backUnit* 999999.999 value limit for the motor
ReferenceFeed- shaft speed [RPM]. This is
backUnit] also the lowest feedback
value, see also
If the selected event condition changes before the on
parameter 5-57 Term. 33
delay or off delay timer expires, the relay output is
Low Ref./Feedb. Value.
unaffected.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 89

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value 5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value
Range: Function: Range: Function:
100 Reference- [-999999.999 - Enter the high reference 100 Reference- [-999999.999 - Enter the high reference

3 3 FeedbackUnit* 999999.999
ReferenceFeed-
value [RPM] for the motor
shaft speed and the high
FeedbackUnit* 999999.999
ReferenceFeed-
value [RPM] for the motor
shaft speed. See also
backUnit] feedback value, see also backUnit] parameter 5-53 Term. 29
parameter 5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value.
High Ref./Feedb. Value.
5-59 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33
5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29 Range: Function:
Range: Function: 100 [5 - 1000 NOTICE!
100 [5 - NOTICE! ms* ms]
This parameter cannot be adjusted
ms* 1000 ms]
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.
while the motor is running.
Enter the pulse filter time constant. The
Enter the pulse filter time constant. The low-pass filter reduces the influence and
pulse filter dampens oscillations of the dampens oscillations on the feedback
feedback signal, which is an advantage if signal from the control.
there is a lot of noise in the system. A high This is an advantage if there is a lot of
time constant value results in better noise in the system.
dampening, but also increases the time delay
through the filter.
3.7.6 5-6* Pulse Outputs
5-55 Term. 33 Low Frequency
Parameters for configuring the scaling and output
Range: Function:
functions of pulse outputs. The pulse outputs are
100 Hz* [0 - 110000 Enter the low frequency corresponding
designated to terminal 27 or 29. Select terminal 27 output
Hz] to the low motor shaft speed (that is
in parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode and terminal 29 output
low reference value) in
in parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode.
parameter 5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb.
Value.
Output value

130BA089.11
5-56 Term. 33 High Frequency
Range: Function: High output
value
100 Hz* [0 - 110000 Enter the high frequency corresponding
P 5-60(term27)
Hz] to the high motor shaft speed (that is P 5-63(term29)
high reference value) in
parameter 5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb.
Value.

5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range: Function: High freq. Output
0 ReferenceFeed- [-999999.999 - Enter the low reference P 5-62(term27) (Hz)
P 5-65(term29)
backUnit* 999999.999 value [RPM] for the motor
Figure 3.32 Pulse Output
ReferenceFeed- shaft speed. This is also
backUnit] the low feedback value,
see also
parameter 5-52 Term. 29
Low Ref./Feedb. Value.

90 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable 5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable
Range: Function: Option: Function:
NOTICE! [101] Reference Min-Max

This parameter cannot be

adjusted while the motor is
[102] Feedback +-200%
[103] Motor cur. 0-Imax
3 3
running. [104] Torque 0-Tlim
[105] Torque 0-Tnom
[0] * No operation Select the operation variable assigned [106] Power 0-Pnom
for terminal 27 readouts. [107] Speed 0-HighLim
[108] Torque +-160%
[45] Bus ctrl.
[109] Out frq 0-Fmax
[48] Bus ctrl., timeout
[113] Ext. Closed Loop 1
[51] MCO controlled
[114] Ext. Closed Loop 2
[100] Output frequency
[115] Ext. Closed Loop 3
[101] Reference
[116] Cascade Reference
[102] Feedback
[103] Motor current 5-65 Pulse Output Max Freq #29
[104] Torque rel to limit Range: Function:
[105] Torq relate to rated 5000 Hz* [0 - 32000 Set the maximum frequency for terminal
[106] Power Hz] 29 corresponding to the output variable
[107] Speed set in parameter 5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse
[108] Torque Output Variable.
[109]
[119] 5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Variable
Select the variable for readout on terminal X30/6.
5-62 Pulse Output Max Freq #27
This parameter is active when VLT® General Purpose I/O MCB 101
Range: Function:
is installed in the frequency converter.
NOTICE! Same options and functions as parameter group 5-6* Pulse
This parameter cannot be adjusted Outputs.
while the motor is running. Option: Function:
[0] * No operation
5000 Hz* [0 - 32000 Set the maximum frequency for terminal [45] Bus ctrl.
Hz] 27 corresponding to the output variable [48] Bus ctrl., timeout
selected in parameter 5-60 Terminal 27 [51] MCO controlled
Pulse Output Variable.
[100] Output frequency
[101] Reference
5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable
[102] Feedback
Option: Function: [103] Motor current
NOTICE! [104] Torque rel to limit
This parameter cannot be [105] Torq relate to rated
adjusted while the motor is [106] Power
running. [107] Speed
[108] Torque
Select the variable for viewing on [109]
terminal 29. Same options and [119]
functions as parameter group 5-6*
Pulse Output.

[0] * No operation
[45] Bus ctrl.
[48] Bus ctrl., timeout
[51] MCO controlled
[100] Output freq. 0-100

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 91

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

5-68 Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/6

130BC368.10
Range: Function: 100%

5000. [0 - NOTICE! 90%

80%
3 3

Nominal Power of Drive

Hz* 32000 Hz]
This parameter cannot be adjusted 70%
while the motor is running. 60%
50%
Select the maximum frequency on terminal 40%
X30/6 referring to the output variable in 30% ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................

parameter 5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output 20% ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10% ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Variable.
0%
This parameter is active when VLT® General
Purpose I/O MCB 101 is installed in the
frequency converter.

On
5-80 AHF Cap Reconnect Delay

Relay Output
Range: Function:
25 s* [1 - 120 Delay time between 2 consecutive AHF
t1 t2
s] capacitor connections. The timer starts once
the AHF capacitor disconnects, and connects 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
back once delay expires and frequency Time (s)
converters power above 20% and below 30%
of nominal power.
Figure 3.33 Example of the Output Function
AHF capacitor connect output function for digital and
relay outputs
Functional description: t1 shows the off delay timer (10 s).
• Connect capacitors at 20% nominal power. t2 shows the capacitor reconnect delay (parameter 5-80 AHF
• Hysteresis ±50% of 20% nominal power Cap Reconnect Delay).
(=minimum 10% and maximum 30% nominal
power). When the nominal power of the frequency converter
exceeds 20%, the output function turns on. When the
• Off delay timer=10 s. The nominal power must be
power goes below 10%, an off delay timer has to expire
below 10% for 10 s to disconnect the capacitors.
before the output goes low. This is represented by t1. After
If the nominal power exceeds 10% during the 10
the output goes low, the capacitor reconnect delay timer
s delay, the timer (10 s) restarts.
has to expire before the output is allowed to be on again,
• The capacitor reconnect delay (default=25 s with shown by t2. When t2 expires, the nominal power is above
a range 1–120 s, see parameter 5-80 AHF Cap 30% and the relay does not turn on.
Reconnect Delay) is used for the minimum off-
time for the AHF capacitor output function.
• If there is a power loss, the frequency converter
guarantees that the minimum off-time is
respected when power is restored.

92 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3.7.7 5-9* Bus-controlled 5-95 Pulse Out #29 Bus Control

Range: Function:
This parameter group selects digital and relay outputs via a 0 %* [0 - 100 %] Contains the frequency to apply to the
fieldbus setting.

5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control

digital output terminal 29 when it is
configured as bus-controlled. 3 3
Range: Function:
5-96 Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset
0* [0 - This parameter holds the state of the
2147483647 ] digital outputs and relays that are Range: Function:
controlled by bus. 0 %* [0 - 100 %] Contains the frequency to apply to the
A logical 1 indicates that the output is high digital output terminal 29 when it is
or active. configured as bus-controlled timeout, and
A logical 0 indicates that the output is low timeout is detected.
or inactive.
5-97 Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control
Bit 0 CC digital output, terminal 27
Range: Function:
Bit 1 CC digital output, terminal 29
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Contains the frequency to apply to the
Bit 2 GPIO digital output, terminal X
digital output terminal 6 when it is
30/6
configured as bus-controlled.
Bit 3 GPIO digital output, terminal X
30/7 5-98 Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout Preset
Bit 4 CC relay 1 output terminal
Range: Function:
Bit 5 CC relay 2 output terminal
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Contains the frequency to apply to the
Bit 6 Option B relay 1 output terminal
digital output terminal 6 when it is
Bit 7 Option B relay 2 output terminal
configured as bus-controlled timeout, and
Bit 8 Option B relay 3 output terminal
timeout is detected.
Bit 9– Reserved for future terminals
15
Bit 16 Option C relay 1 output terminal
Bit 17 Option C relay 2 output terminal
Bit 18 Option C relay 3 output terminal
Bit 19 Option C relay 4 output terminal
Bit 20 Option C relay 5 output terminal
Bit 21 Option C relay 6 output terminal
Bit 22 Option C relay 7 output terminal
Bit 23 Option C relay 8 output terminal
Bit 24– Reserved for future terminals
31

Table 3.16 Digital Output Bits

5-93 Pulse Out #27 Bus Control

Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Contains the frequency to apply to the
digital output terminal 27 when it is
configured as bus-controlled.

5-94 Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset

Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Contains the frequency to apply to the
digital output terminal 27 when it is
configured as bus-controlled timeout, and
timeout is detected.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 93

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.8 Parameters 6-** Analog In/Out 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function
Option: Function:
3.8.1 6-0* Analog I/O Mode
1. Parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout

3 3 Parameter group for setting up the analog I/O configu-

2.
Function.

Parameter 8-04 Control Word Timeout

ration.
The frequency converter is equipped with 2 analog inputs: Function.

• Terminals 53. [0] Off

• Terminals 54. *
[1] Freeze Frozen at the present value. Live zero timeout
The analog inputs can be allocated freely to either voltage
output time does not apply to freeze output.
(0–10 V) or current input (0/4–20 mA).
[2] Stop Overruled to stop.

NOTICE! [3] Jogging Overruled to jog speed.

Thermistors may be connected to either an analog or a [4] Max. Overruled to maximum speed.
digital input. speed
[5] Stop and Overruled to stop with subsequent trip.
6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time trip

Range: Function:

130BA038.13
Ref./Feedback
10 [1 - Enter the live zero timeout in s. Live zero timeout [RPM]
s* 99 s] time is active for analog inputs, that is terminal 53
Par 6-xx
or terminal 54, used as reference or feedback 1500
High Ref./
sources. Feedb. Value'
1200
If the reference signal value associated with the
selected current input drops below 50% of the 900
value set in:
600
• Parameter 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage
Par 6-xx 300
• Parameter 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current Low Ref./ 150
• Parameter 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage Feedb. Value'
1V 5V 10 V [V]
• Parameter 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current Par 6-xx Analog input
'Low Voltage' or
for a time period longer than the time set in 'Low Current'
parameter 6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time, the function Par 6-xx
selected in parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout 'High Voltage' or
'High Current'
Function is activated.
Figure 3.34 Live Zero Conditions
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function
Option: Function:
Select the timeout function. The function set in
parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function is
activated if the input signal on terminal 53 or 54
is below 50% of the value in:
• Parameter 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage.
• Parameter 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current.

• Parameter 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage.

• Parameter 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current.

The function can also be activated for a time

period defined in parameter 6-00 Live Zero
Timeout Time. If several timeouts occur simulta-
neously, the frequency converter prioritizes the
timeout functions as follows:

94 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

6-02 Emergency Mode Live Zero Timeout Function 6-13 Terminal 53 High Current
Option: Function: Range: Function:
Select the timeout function when the 20 mA* [ par. 6-12 - Enter the high current value
emergency mode is active. The function set in
this parameter is activated if the input signal
20 mA] corresponding to the high reference/
feedback set in parameter 6-15 Terminal 53 3 3
on analog inputs is lower than 50% of the High Ref./Feedb. Value.
low value for a time period defined in
parameter 6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time. 6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
[0] * Off Range: Function:
[1] Freeze Frozen at the present value. 0 ReferenceFeed- [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input
output backUnit* 999999.999 scaling value that
[2] Stop Overruled to stop. ReferenceFeed- corresponds to the low
backUnit] voltage/low current set in
[3] Jogging Overruled to jog speed.
parameter 6-10 Terminal 53
[4] Max. speed Overruled to maximum speed. Low Voltage and
parameter 6-12 Terminal 53
Low Current.
3.8.2 6-1* Analog Input 1
6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value
Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for analog
Range: Function:
input 1 (terminal 53).
Size [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input scaling
related* 999999.999 value that corresponds to the
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage
ReferenceFeed- high voltage/high current value
Range: Function: backUnit] set in parameter 6-11 Terminal 53
0.07 V* [0 - NOTICE! High Voltage and
par. 6-11 parameter 6-13 Terminal 53 High
For the live zero alarms to work,
V] Current.
parameter 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage
must have a value of 1 V or greater.
6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant

Enter the low voltage value. This analog input Range: Function:
scaling value should correspond to the low 0.005 s* [0.005 - NOTICE!
reference feedback value set in 10 s]
This parameter cannot be adjusted
parameter 6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. while the motor is running.
Value.

Enter the filter time constant. This

6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage
constant is a first-order digital low-pass
Range: Function: filter time for suppressing electrical noise
10 V* [ par. 6-10 Enter the high voltage value. This analog in terminal 53. A high value improves
- 10 V] input scaling value should correspond to the dampening but also increases the delay
high reference feedback value set in through the filter.
parameter 6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb.
Value. 6-17 Terminal 53 Live Zero
Option: Function:
6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current
This parameter makes it possible to disable the
Range: Function: live zero monitoring. For example, this is used if
4 mA* [0 - Enter the low current value. This reference the analog outputs are used as part of a
par. 6-13 signal should correspond to the low reference decentral I/O system (for example when not part
mA] feedback value set in parameter 6-14 Terminal of any control functions related to the frequency
53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value. Set the value at converter, but feeding an external control system
>2 mA to activate the live zero timeout with data).
function in parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout
[0] Disabled
Function.
[1] * Enabled

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 95

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.8.3 6-2* Analog Input 2 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Range: Function:
Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for analog 100 Reference- [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input
input 2 (terminal 54).
3 3 FeedbackUnit* 999999.999
ReferenceFeed-
scaling value that
corresponds to the high
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage backUnit] voltage/high current value
Range: Function: set in
parameter 6-21 Terminal 54
0.07 V* [ 0 - par. Enter the low voltage value. This analog
High Voltage and
6-21 V] input scaling value should correspond to
parameter 6-23 Terminal 54
the low reference feedback value set in
High Current.
parameter 6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb.
Value.
6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant
6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0.005 s* [0.005 - NOTICE!
10 s]
10 V* [ par. 6-20 Enter the high voltage value. This analog This parameter cannot be adjusted
- 10 V] input scaling value should correspond to the while the motor is running.
high reference feedback value set in
parameter 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Enter the filter time constant. This is a
Value. first-order digital low-pass filter time
constant for suppressing electrical noise in
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current terminal 54. Increasing the value improves
Range: Function: dampening but also increases the time
4 mA* [0 - Enter the low current value. This reference delay through the filter.
par. 6-23 signal should correspond to the low reference
mA] feedback value set in parameter 6-24 Terminal 6-27 Terminal 54 Live Zero
54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value. Set the value at Option: Function:
>2 mA to activate the live zero timeout [0] Disabled
function in parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout [1] * Enabled This parameter makes it possible to disable the
Function. live zero monitoring. For example, this is used if
the analog outputs are used as part of a
6-23 Terminal 54 High Current decentral I/O system (for example when not part
Range: Function: of any control functions related to the frequency
20 mA* [ par. 6-22 Enter the high current value converter, but feeding an external control system
- 20 mA] corresponding to the high reference with data).
feedback value set in
parameter 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb.
Value.

6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range: Function:
0 ReferenceFeed- [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input
backUnit* 999999.999 scaling value that
ReferenceFeed- corresponds to the low
backUnit] voltage/low current value
set in
parameter 6-20 Terminal 54
Low Voltage and
parameter 6-22 Terminal 54
Low Current.

96 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3.8.4 6-3* Analog Input X30/11 6-37 Term. X30/11 Live Zero
Option: Function:
Parameter group for configuring the scale and limits for This parameter makes it possible to disable the
analog input 3 (X30/11) placed on VLT® General Purpose
I/O MCB 101.
live zero monitoring. For example, this is used if
the analog outputs are used as part of a 3 3
6-30 Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage decentral I/O system (for example when not part
of any control functions related to the frequency
Range: Function:
converter, but feeding an external control system
0.07 V* [ 0 - par. Sets the analog input scaling value to
with data).
6-31 V] correspond to the low reference feedback
value (set in parameter 6-34 Term. X30/11 [0] Disabled
Low Ref./Feedb. Value). [1] * Enabled

6-31 Terminal X30/11 High Voltage 3.8.5 6-4* Analog Input X30/12
Range: Function:
10 V* [ par. 6-30 - Sets the analog input scaling value to Parameter group for configuring the scale and limits for
10 V] correspond to the high reference feedback analog input 4 (X30/12) placed on VLT® General Purpose
value (set in parameter 6-35 Term. X30/11 I/O MCB 101.
High Ref./Feedb. Value).
6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage

6-34 Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value Range: Function:

0.07 V* [ 0 - par. Sets the analog input scaling value to
Range: Function:
6-41 V] correspond to the low reference feedback
0 ReferenceFeed- [-999999.999 - Sets the analog input
value set in parameter 6-44 Term. X30/12
backUnit* 999999.999 scaling value to
Low Ref./Feedb. Value.
ReferenceFeed- correspond to the low
backUnit] voltage value (set in
6-41 Terminal X30/12 High Voltage
parameter 6-30 Terminal
X30/11 Low Voltage). Range: Function:
10 V* [ par. 6-40 - Sets the analog input scaling value to
6-35 Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value 10 V] correspond to the high reference feedback
value set in parameter 6-45 Term. X30/12
Range: Function:
High Ref./Feedb. Value.
100 Reference- [-999999.999 - Sets the analog input
FeedbackUnit* 999999.999 scaling value to
6-44 Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
ReferenceFeed- correspond to the high-
backUnit] voltage value (set in Range: Function:
parameter 6-31 Terminal 0 ReferenceFeed- [-999999.999 - Sets the analog output
X30/11 High Voltage). backUnit* 999999.999 scaling value to
ReferenceFeed- correspond to the low
6-36 Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant backUnit] voltage value set in
parameter 6-40 Terminal
Range: Function:
X30/12 Low Voltage.
0.005 s* [0.005 - NOTICE!
10 s]
This parameter cannot be adjusted 6-45 Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb. Value
while the motor is running. Range: Function:
100 Reference- [-999999.999 - Sets the analog input
Enter the filter time constant. This FeedbackUnit* 999999.999 scaling value to
constant is a first-order digital low-pass ReferenceFeed- correspond to the high
filter time for suppressing electrical noise backUnit] voltage value set in
in terminal X30/11. A high value improves parameter 6-41 Terminal
dampening but also increases the delay X30/12 High Voltage.
through the filter.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 97

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

6-46 Term. X30/12 Filter Time Constant 6-50 Terminal 42 Output

Range: Function: Option: Function:
0.005 s* [0.005 - NOTICE! [53] MCO

3 3 10 s]
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running. [100]
4-20mA
Output 0–100 Hz (0–20 mA).
* freq. 0-100
[101] Reference Minimum reference - maximum reference (0–
Enter the filter time constant. This
Min-Max 20 mA).
constant is a first-order digital low-pass
filter time for suppressing electrical noise [102] Feedback -200% to +200% of parameter 3-03 Maximum
in terminal X30/12. A high value improves +-200% Reference (0–20 mA).
dampening but also increases the delay
[103] Motor cur. 0–Inverter maximum current
through the filter.
0-Imax (parameter 16-37 Inv. Max. Current), (0–20 mA)

6-47 Term. X30/12 Live Zero [104] Torque 0- 0–Torque limit (parameter 4-16 Torque Limit
Tlim Motor Mode), (0–20 mA).
Option: Function:
This parameter makes it possible to disable the [105] Torque 0- 0–Motor rated torque (0–20 mA).
live zero monitoring. For example, this is used if Tnom
the analog outputs are used as part of a [106] Power 0- 0–Motor rated power (0–20 mA).
decentral I/O system (for example when not part Pnom
of any control functions related to the frequency [107] Speed 0- 0–Speed high limit (parameter 4-13 Motor
converter, but feeding an external control system HighLim Speed High Limit [RPM] and
with data). parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]),
(0–20 mA)
[0] Disabled
[1] * Enabled [108] Torque (0–20 mA).
+-160%
[109] Out frq 0-
3.8.6 6-5* Analog Output 1
Fmax
[113] Ext. Closed 0–100% (0–20 mA).
Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for analog
Loop 1
output 1, that is terminal 42. Analog outputs are current
[114] Ext. Closed 0–100% (0–20 mA).
outputs: 0/4–20 mA. Common terminal (terminal 39) is the
Loop 2
same terminal and has the same electrical potential for
analog common and digital common connection. [115] Ext. Closed 0–100% (0–20 mA).
Resolution on analog output is 12 bit. Loop 3
[116] Cascade
6-50 Terminal 42 Output Reference
Option: Function: [117] Shaft
NOTICE! Power
[118] Shaft
Values for setting the minimum
Power
reference are found in
4-20mA
parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference and
values for maximum reference in [130] Out frq 0–100 Hz.
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference. 0-100
4-20mA
[131] Reference Minimum reference–maximum reference.
Select the function of terminal 42 as an
4-20mA
analog current output. A motor current of
[132] Feedback -200% to +200% of parameter 3-03 Maximum
20 mA corresponds to Imax.
4-20mA Reference.
[0] No
[133] Motor cur. 0–Inverter maximum current
operation
4-20mA (parameter 16-37 Inv. Max. Current).
[52] MCO
0-20mA/ [134] Torq.0-lim 0–Torque limit (parameter 4-16 Torque Limit
0-10V 4-20 mA Motor Mode).

98 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

6-50 Terminal 42 Output 6-50 Terminal 42 Output

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[135] Torq.0-nom 0–Motor rated torque. Table 3.18 shows the undervoltage and

[136]
4-20mA
Power 0–Motor rated power.
overvoltage limits for different frequency
converter sizes. 3 3
4-20mA
Frequency Undervoltage Overvoltage
[137] Speed 0–Speed high limit (parameter 4-13 Motor
converter limit [V] limit [V]
4-20mA Speed High Limit [RPM] and
size
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]).
T2/S2 185 410
[138] Torque T4/S4 373 855
4-20mA T6/T7 553 1130
[139] Bus ctrl. 0–100% (0–20 mA)
Table 3.18 Undervoltage and Overvoltage
[140] Bus ctrl. 0–100%.
Limits for Different Frequency Converter
4-20 mA
Sizes
[141] Bus ctrl t.o. 0–100% (0–20 mA).

[142] Bus ctrl t.o. 0–100%.

130BD613.10
4-20mA I
1
[143] Ext. CL 1 0–100%. 20
4-20mA
10 2 3
[144] Ext. CL 2 0–100%.
4-20mA
0
[145] Ext. CL 3 0–100%. 0 400 800 1200 VDC
4-20mA
[146] Cascade 1 Analog output
Ref. 2 Undervoltage limit
4-20mA 3 Overvoltage limit
[147] Main act
val 0-20mA Figure 3.35 Example: The Analog Output
[148] Main act of Terminal 42 on the T4 Frequency
val 4-20mA Converter with Option [254] DC Link 0–20
[150] Out frq 0- mA Selected
Fmax
4-20mA
[156] Flow Rate [255] DC Link The function is the same as [254] DC Link 0–
[157] Flow Rate 4-20mA 20 mA.
4-20mA
[254] DC Link With this parameter selected, the terminal
0-20mA output shows the scaled DC-link voltage.
Table 3.17 shows the relationship between
the DC-link voltage and the terminal output.

DC-link voltage (V) Terminal

output
V ≤undervoltage limit 0%
V ≥overvoltage limit 100%
Voltage within range: Linearly
Undervoltage <V interpolated
<overvoltage

Table 3.17 Relationship between the DC-

link Voltage and the Terminal Output

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 99

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale

130BA858.10
Range: Function: 20 mA

0 %* [0 - Scale for the minimum output (0 mA or 4 mA)

3 3 200 %] of the analog signal at terminal 42.

Set the value to be the percentage of the full
range of the variable selected in
0/4 mA
parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output.
0% 50% 100%

6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale

Range: Function:
100 [0 - Scale for the maximum output (20 mA) of the 0Hz 50Hz 100Hz
%* 200 analog signal at terminal 42. Figure 3.37 Example 1
%] Set the value to be the percentage of the full
range of the variable selected in
parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output. Example 2:
Variable = feedback, range = -200% to +200%.
130BA075.11

Current

Range needed for output = 0–100%.

(mA)

20

Output signal 0 mA or 4 mA is needed at 0% (50% of

range). Set parameter 6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale to
50%.
0/4

0% Analog Analog
Output Max
100% Variable for
output
Output signal 20 mA is needed at 100% (75% of range).
output Min

Set parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale to 75%.

Scale Scale example: Speed
par. 6-51 par. 6-52 (RPM)

Figure 3.36 Output Current vs Reference

130BA856.10
Variable
20 mA

It is possible to obtain a value lower than 20 mA

at full scale by programming values >100% by
using a formula as follows: 0/4 mA

20 mA/desired maximum current × 100 % 0% 50% 75% 100%

20 mA
i . e . 10mA: × 100 % = 200 %
10 mA

Example 1:
Variable value = output frequency, range = 0–100 Hz. -200% 0% +100% +200%
Range needed for output = 0–50 Hz. Figure 3.38 Example 2
Output signal 0 mA or 4 mA is needed at 0 Hz (0% of
range). Set parameter 6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale to
0%. Example 3:
Output signal 20 mA is needed at 50 Hz (50% of range). Variable value = reference, range = minimum reference–
Set parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale to 50%. maximum reference
Range needed for output = minimum reference (0%)–
maximum reference (100%), 0–10 mA.
Output signal 0 mA or 4 mA is needed at minimum
reference. Set parameter 6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale
to 0%.
Output signal 10 mA is needed at maximum reference
(100% of range). Set parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output
Max Scale to 200%.
(20 mA/10 mA x 100%=200%).

100 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3.8.7 6-6* Analog Output X30/8

130BA857.10
20 mA

Analog outputs are current outputs: 0/4–20 mA. Common

terminal (terminal X30/8) is the same terminal and
10 mA
electrical potential for analog common connection. 3 3
Resolution on analog output is 12 bit.
6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output

0/4 mA
Same options and functions as parameter 6-50 Terminal 42
0% Output.
100% 200%

6-61 Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale

Range: Function:
Min ref Max ref Max ref X 20/10 0 %* [0 - Scales the minimum output of the selected analog
200 %] signal on terminal X30/8. Scale the minimum
Figure 3.39 Example 3
value as a percentage of the maximum signal
value. For example, enter the value 25% if the
output should be 0 mA at 25% of the maximum
6-53 Terminal 42 Output Bus Control output value. The value can never exceed the
Range: Function: corresponding setting in parameter 6-62 Terminal
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Holds the level of output 42 if controlled by X30/8 Max. Scale if the value is below 100%.
bus. This parameter is active when VLT® General
Purpose I/O MCB 101 is mounted in the frequency
6-54 Terminal 42 Output Timeout Preset converter.
Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - Holds the preset level of output 42.
6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale
100 %] If a timeout function is selected in Range: Function:
parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output, the output 100 [0 - Scales the maximum output of the selected
is preset to this level if a fieldbus timeout %* 200 % analog signal on terminal X30/8. Scale the value
occurs. ] to the required maximum value of the current
signal output. Scale the output to give a lower
6-55 Terminal 42 Output Filter current than 20 mA at full scale, or 20 mA at an
Option: Function: output below 100% of the maximum signal value.
If 20 mA is the required output current at a value
The following readout parameters from selection in
between 0–100% of the full-scale output,
parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output have a filter
program the percentage value in the parameter,
selected when parameter 6-55 Terminal 42 Output Filter
that is 50%=20 mA. If a current 4–20 mA is
is on:
required at maximum output (100%), calculate
Selection 0–20 mA 4–20 mA the percentage value as follows:
Motor current (0–Imax) [103] [133] 20 mA/desired maximum current × 100 %
Torque limit (0–Tlim) [104] [134] i . e . 10 mA:
20 mA
× 100 % = 200 %
10 mA
Rated torque (0–Tnom) [105] [135]
Power (0–Pnom) [106] [136] 6-63 Terminal X30/8 Output Bus Control
Speed (0–Speedmax) [107] [137] Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Contains the value to apply to the output
Table 3.19 Readout Parameters
terminal when it is configured as bus-
controlled.
[0] * Off Filter off.

[1] On Filter on. 6-64 Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout Preset

Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Contains the value to apply to the output
terminal when it is configured as bus-
controlled timeout and timeout is detected.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 101

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

6-70 Terminal X45/1 Output 6-71 Terminal X45/1 Min. Scale

Select the output of terminal X45/1 of VLT® Extended Relay Card Enter the minimum scaling value of output of the analog signal
MCB 113. on terminal X45/1.

3 3 Option:
[0] * No operation
Function: Range:
0 %* [0 - 200 %]
Function:

[52] MCO 0-20mA/0-10V

6-72 Terminal X45/1 Max. Scale
[53] MCO 4-20mA
Enter the maximum scaling value of output of the analog signal
[100] Output freq. 0-100
on terminal X45/1.
[101] Reference Min-Max
[102] Feedback +-200% Range: Function:
[103] Motor cur. 0-Imax 100 %* [0 - 200 %]
[104] Torque 0-Tlim
6-73 Terminal X45/1 Bus Control
[105] Torque 0-Tnom
Enter the output value for terminal X45/1 when the fieldbus
[106] Power 0-Pnom
controls the terminal.
[107] Speed 0-HighLim
[108] Torque +-160% Range: Function:
[109] Out frq 0-Fmax 0 %* [0 - 100 %]
[113] Ext. Closed Loop 1
6-74 Terminal X45/1 Output Timeout Preset
[114] Ext. Closed Loop 2
Enter the output value for terminal X45/1 when the bus control
[115] Ext. Closed Loop 3
timeout for the terminal is detected.
[116] Cascade Reference
Range: Function:
[117] Shaft Power
[118] Shaft Power 4-20mA 0 %* [0 - 100 %]

[130] Out frq 0-100 4-20mA 6-80 Terminal X45/3 Output

[131] Reference 4-20mA
Select the output of terminal X45/3 of VLT® Extended Relay Card
[132] Feedback 4-20mA
MCB 113.
[133] Motor cur. 4-20mA
Option: Function:
[134] Torq.0-lim 4-20 mA
[135] Torq.0-nom 4-20mA [0] * No operation

[136] Power 4-20mA [52] MCO 0-20mA/0-10V

[137] Speed 4-20mA [53] MCO 4-20mA

[138] Torque 4-20mA [100] Output freq. 0-100

[139] Bus ctrl. [101] Reference Min-Max

[140] Bus ctrl. 4-20 mA [102] Feedback +-200%

[141] Bus ctrl t.o. [103] Motor cur. 0-Imax

[142] Bus ctrl t.o. 4-20mA [104] Torque 0-Tlim

[143] Ext. CL 1 4-20mA [105] Torque 0-Tnom

[144] Ext. CL 2 4-20mA [106] Power 0-Pnom

[145] Ext. CL 3 4-20mA [107] Speed 0-HighLim

[146] Cascade Ref. 4-20mA [108] Torque +-160%

[147] Main act val 0-20mA [109] Out frq 0-Fmax

[148] Main act val 4-20mA [113] Ext. Closed Loop 1

[150] Out frq 0-Fmax 4-20mA [114] Ext. Closed Loop 2

[156] Flow Rate [115] Ext. Closed Loop 3

[157] Flow Rate 4-20mA [116] Cascade Reference

[254] DC Link 0-20mA [117] Shaft Power

[255] DC Link 4-20mA [118] Shaft Power 4-20mA

[130] Out frq 0-100 4-20mA
[131] Reference 4-20mA
[132] Feedback 4-20mA
[133] Motor cur. 4-20mA

102 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

6-80 Terminal X45/3 Output

Select the output of terminal X45/3 of VLT® Extended Relay Card
MCB 113.
Option:
[134] Torq.0-lim 4-20 mA
Function:
3 3
[135] Torq.0-nom 4-20mA
[136] Power 4-20mA
[137] Speed 4-20mA
[138] Torque 4-20mA
[139] Bus ctrl.
[140] Bus ctrl. 4-20 mA
[141] Bus ctrl t.o.
[142] Bus ctrl t.o. 4-20mA
[143] Ext. CL 1 4-20mA
[144] Ext. CL 2 4-20mA
[145] Ext. CL 3 4-20mA
[146] Cascade Ref. 4-20mA
[147] Main act val 0-20mA
[148] Main act val 4-20mA
[150] Out frq 0-Fmax 4-20mA
[156] Flow Rate
[157] Flow Rate 4-20mA
[254] DC Link 0-20mA
[255] DC Link 4-20mA

6-81 Terminal X45/3 Min. Scale

Enter the minimum scaling value of output of the analog signal
on terminal X45/3.
Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 200 %]

6-82 Terminal X45/3 Max. Scale

Enter the maximum scaling value of output of the analog signal
on terminal X45/3.
Range: Function:
100 %* [0 - 200 %]

6-83 Terminal X45/3 Bus Control

Enter the output value for terminal X45/3 when the fieldbus
controls the terminal.
Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %]

6-84 Terminal X45/3 Output Timeout Preset

Enter the output value for terminal X45/3 when the bus control
timeout for the terminal is detected.
Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %]

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 103

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.9 Parameters 8-** Communications and 8-03 Control Timeout Time

Options Range: Function:
parameter 8-04 Control Timeout Function is
3.9.1 8-0* General Settings
3 3 then carried out. A valid control word
triggers the timeout counter. The minimum
8-01 Control Site value that can be set depends on the actual
The setting in this parameter overrides the settings in frequency converter used.
parameter 8-50 Coasting Select to parameter 8-56 Preset Reference The object list holds information on the
Select. objects that triggers the control timeout:
Option: Function: • Analog outputs
[0] * Digital and ctrl.word Use both digital input and • Binary outputs
control word.
• AV0
[1] Digital only Use digital inputs only.
• AV1
[2] Controlword only Use control word only.
• AV2

8-02 Control Word Source • AV4

Option: Function: • BV1

NOTICE! • BV2

This parameter cannot be adjusted • BV3

while the motor is running. • BV4

• BV5
Select the source of the control word: 1 of 2
serial interfaces or 4 installed options. During • Multistate outputs
initial power-up, the frequency converter
automatically sets this parameter to [3] Option 8-04 Control Timeout Function
A if it detects a valid fieldbus option installed Select the timeout function. The timeout function is activated
in slot A. If the option is removed, the when the control word fails to be updated within the time
frequency converter detects a change in the period specified in parameter 8-03 Control Timeout Time. [20] N2
configuration, sets parameter 8-02 Control Override Release only appears after setting the Metasys N2
Source to default setting [1] FC Port, and the protocol.
frequency converter then trips. If an option is To change the set-up after a timeout, configure as follows:
installed after initial power-up, the setting of 1. Set parameter 0-10 Active Set-up to [9] Multi set-up.
parameter 8-02 Control Source does not
2. Select the relevant link in parameter 0-12 This Set-up
change, but the frequency converter trips and
Linked to.
shows alarm 67, Option Changed.

[0] None Option: Function:

[1] FC RS-485 [0] * Off Resumes control via fieldbus
[2] FC USB (fieldbus or standard), using the
[3] * Option A most recent control word.
[4] Option B [1] Freeze output Freezes output frequency until
[5] Option C0 communication resumes.
[6] Option C1
[2] Stop Stops with auto restart when
[30] External Can communication resumes.

8-03 Control Timeout Time [3] Jogging Runs the motor at jog frequency
Range: Function: until communication resumes.

Size [1 - Enter the maximum time expected to pass [4] Max. speed Runs the motor at maximum
related* 18000 s] between the reception of 2 consecutive frequency until communication
telegrams. If this time is exceeded, it resumes.
indicates that the serial communication has
stopped. The function selected in

104 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

8-04 Control Timeout Function 8-05 End-of-Timeout Function

Select the timeout function. The timeout function is activated Select the action after receiving a valid control word following a
when the control word fails to be updated within the time timeout.

3 3
period specified in parameter 8-03 Control Timeout Time. [20] N2 This parameter is active only when parameter 8-04 Control
Override Release only appears after setting the Metasys N2 Timeout Function is set to:
protocol.
• [7] Set-up 1.
To change the set-up after a timeout, configure as follows:
• [8] Set-up 2.
1. Set parameter 0-10 Active Set-up to [9] Multi set-up.
• [9] Set-up 3.
2. Select the relevant link in parameter 0-12 This Set-up
Linked to. • [10] Set-up 4.

Option: Function: Option: Function:

converter resumes its original set-
[5] Stop and trip Stops the motor, then resets the
up.
frequency converter to restart via:
[1] * Resume set-up Resumes the set-up that was active
• Fieldbus.
before the timeout.
• [Reset].

• Digital input. 8-06 Reset Control Timeout

[7] Select setup 1 Changes the set-up after a control This parameter is active only when option [0] Hold set-up has
word timeout. If communication been selected in parameter 8-05 End-of-Timeout Function.
resumes after a timeout, Option: Function:
parameter 8-05 End-of-Timeout [0] * Do not reset Retains the set-up specified in
Function either resumes the set-up parameter 8-04 Control Timeout Function:
used before the timeout, or retains
• [7] Set-up 1.
the set-up endorsed by the timeout
function. • [8] Set-up 2.

[8] Select setup 2 See [7] Select set-up 1. • [9] Set-up 3.

[9] Select setup 3 See [7] Select set-up 1.

• [10] Set-up 4.

[1] Do reset Restores the frequency converter to the

[10] Select setup 4 See [7] Select set-up 1.
original set-up following a control word
[20] N2 Override timeout. The frequency converter performs
Release the reset and immediately reverts to the [0]
[27] Forced stop and Do not reset setting.
trip
8-07 Diagnosis Trigger
8-05 End-of-Timeout Function
Not all fieldbusses support the diagnosis functions.
Select the action after receiving a valid control word following a
timeout.
Option: Function:
[0] * Disable Send no extended diagnosis data
This parameter is active only when parameter 8-04 Control
(EDD).
Timeout Function is set to:
• [7] Set-up 1. [1] Trigger on alarms Send EDD after alarms.

• [8] Set-up 2. [2] Trigger alarm/warn. Send EDD after alarms or warnings.

• [9] Set-up 3.
8-08 Readout Filtering
• [10] Set-up 4.
If the speed feedback value readouts on fieldbus are fluctuating,
Option: Function: this function is used. Select filtered, if the function is required. A
[0] Hold set-up Retains the set-up selected in power cycle is required for changes to take effect.
parameter 8-04 Control Timeout Option: Function:
Function and shows a warning until [0] Motor Data Normal fieldbus readouts.
parameter 8-06 Reset Control Timeout Std-Filt.
toggles. Then the frequency [1] Motor Data LP- Filtered fieldbus readouts of the following
Filter parameters:

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 105

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

8-08 Readout Filtering 8-13 Configurable Status Word STW

If the speed feedback value readouts on fieldbus are fluctuating, This parameter enables configuration of bits 12–15 in the status
this function is used. Select filtered, if the function is required. A word.

3 3
power cycle is required for changes to take effect. Array [16]
Option: Function: Option: Function:
• Parameter 16-10 Power [kW]. 0 indicates that the terminal is low.
1 indicates that the terminal is high.
• Parameter 16-11 Power [hp].
[11] T19 DI status The bit indicates the status of terminal
• Parameter 16-12 Motor voltage.
19.
• Parameter 16-14 Motor Current.
0 indicates that the terminal is low.
• Parameter 16-16 Torque [Nm]. 1 indicates that the terminal is high.

• Parameter 16-17 Speed [RPM]. [12] T27 DI status The bit indicates the status of terminal
• Parameter 16-22 Torque [%]. 27.
0 indicates that the terminal is low.
1 indicates that the terminal is high.
3.9.2 8-1* Ctrl. Word Settings
[13] T29 DI status The bit indicates the status of terminal
29.
8-10 Control Profile 0 indicates that the terminal is low.
Select the interpretation of the control and status words 1 indicates that the terminal is high.
corresponding to the installed fieldbus. Only the selections valid
[14] T32 DI status The bit indicates the status of terminal
for the fieldbus installed in slot A are visible in the LPC display.
32.
For guidelines in selection of [0] Frequency converter profile and
0 indicates that the terminal is low.
[1] PROFIdrive profile, refer to the design guide of the related
1 indicates that the terminal is high.
product. For more guidelines in the selection of [1] PROFIdrive
profile, [5] ODVA, and [7] CANopen DSP 402, see the installation [15] T33 DI status The bit indicates the status of terminal
guide for the installed fieldbus. 33.
0 indicates that the terminal is low.
Option: Function:
1 indicates that the terminal is high.
[0] * FC profile
[1] PROFIdrive profile [16] T37 DI status The bit indicates the status of terminal
37.
[5] ODVA Available only with VLT®
0 indicates that T37 is low (Safe Torque
DeviceNet MCA 104 and
Off).
VLT® EtherNet/IP MCA
1 indicates that T37 is high (normal).
121.
[20] CTW Timeout
[7] CANopen DSP 402
Toggle Inverse
8-13 Configurable Status Word STW [21] Thermal The thermal warning turns on when the
This parameter enables configuration of bits 12–15 in the status warning temperature exceeds the limit in the
word. motor, frequency converter, brake
Array [16] resistor, or thermistor.

Option: Function: [30] Brake fault Output is logic 1 when the brake IGBT is
[0] No function (IGBT) short-circuited. Use this function to
protect the frequency converter if there
[1] * Profile Default The function corresponds to the profile
is a fault on the brake modules. Use the
default selected in parameter 8-10 Control
output/relay to cut out the main voltage
Profile.
from the frequency converter.
[2] Alarm 68 Only Only set if alarm 68, Safe Torque Off
[40] Out of ref range
occurs.
[60] Comparator 0 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If
[3] Trip excl Alarm Set if a trip occurs, unless alarm 68, Safe comparator 0 is evaluated as true, the
68 Torque Off is set to execute the trip. output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
[10] T18 DI status The bit indicates the status of terminal
18.

106 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

8-13 Configurable Status Word STW 8-13 Configurable Status Word STW
This parameter enables configuration of bits 12–15 in the status This parameter enables configuration of bits 12–15 in the status
word. word.

3 3
Array [16] Array [16]
Option: Function: Option: Function:
[61] Comparator 1 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If whenever the smart logic action [33] Set
comparator 1 is evaluated as true, the digital out B low is executed.
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
[82] SL digital out C See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
[62] Comparator 2 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If The output goes high whenever the
comparator 2 is evaluated as true, the smart logic action [40] Set digital out C
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. high is executed. The output goes low
whenever the smart logic action [34] Set
[63] Comparator 3 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If
digital out C low is executed.
comparator 3 is evaluated as true, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. [83] SL digital out D See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
The output goes high whenever the
[64] Comparator 4 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If
smart logic action [41] Set digital out D
comparator 4 is evaluated as true, the
high is executed. The output goes low
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
whenever the smart logic action [35] Set
[65] Comparator 5 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If digital out D low is executed.
comparator 5 is evaluated as true, the
[84] SL digital out E See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
The output goes high whenever the
[70] Logic Rule 0 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If smart logic action [42] Set digital out E
logic rule 0 is evaluated as true, the high is executed. The output goes low
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. whenever the smart logic action [36] Set
[71] Logic Rule 1 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If digital out E low is executed.
logic rule 1 is evaluated as true, the [85] SL digital out F See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. The output goes high whenever the
[72] Logic Rule 2 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If smart logic action [43] Set digital out F
logic rule 2 is evaluated as true, the high is executed. The output goes low
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. whenever the smart logic action [37] Set
digital out F low is executed.
[73] Logic Rule 3 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If
logic rule 3 is evaluated as true, the [86] ATEX ETR cur.
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. alarm
[87] ATEX ETR freq.
[74] Logic Rule 4 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If
alarm
logic rule 4 is evaluated as true, the
[88] ATEX ETR cur.
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
warning
[75] Logic Rule 5 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If [89] ATEX ETR freq.
logic rule 5 is evaluated as true, the warning
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. [181] Prev.
[80] SL digital out A See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action. Maintenance
The output goes high whenever the [182] Deragging
smart logic action [38] Set digital out A [183] Post/Pre Lube
high is executed. The output goes low [190] No-Flow
whenever the smart logic action [32] Set [191] Dry Pump
digital out A low is executed. [192] End Of Curve
[81] SL digital out B See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action. [193] Sleep Mode
The output goes high whenever the [194] Broken Belt
smart logic action [39] Set digital out B [196] Emergency
high is executed. The output goes low Mode
[197] Emerg. Mode
was Act.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 107

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

8-13 Configurable Status Word STW 8-17 Configurable Alarm and Warningword
This parameter enables configuration of bits 12–15 in the status Array [16]
word. Select the meaning of a specific bit in the configurable alarm

3 3
Array [16] and warning word. The word has 16 bits (0–15).
Option: Function: Option: Function:
[199] Pipe Filling [32] Motor phase W warning
[200] User Defined [34] Fieldbus communication warning
Alerts [36] Mains failure warning
[40] T27 overload warning
8-14 Configurable Control Word CTW
[41] T29 overload warning
Array [15]
[45] Earth fault 2 warning
Option: Function: [47] 24V supply low warning
[0] The frequency converter ignores the information in [58] AMA internal fault warning
this bit. [59] Current limit warning
[1] * The functionality of the bit depends on the selection [60] External interlock warning
parameter 8-10 Control Word Profile. [61] Feedback error warning
[62] Frequency max warning
[2] If set to 1, the frequency converter ignores the
[64] Voltage limit warning
remaining bits of the control word.
[65] Controlboard overtemp warning

8-17 Configurable Alarm and Warningword [66] Heatsink temp low warning
[68] Safe stop warning
Array [16]
[73] Safe stop autorestart warning
Select the meaning of a specific bit in the configurable alarm
and warning word. The word has 16 bits (0–15). [76] Power unit setup warning
[77] Reduced powermode warning
Option: Function:
[163] ATEX ETR cur limit warning
[0] * Off
[165] ATEX ETR freq limit warning
[1] 10 Volts low warning
[10002] Live zero error alarm
[2] Live zero warning
[10004] Mains phase loss alarm
[3] No motor warning
[10007] DC overvoltage alarm
[4] Mains phase loss warning
[10008] DC undervoltage alarm
[5] DC link voltage high warning
[10009] Inverter overload alarm
[6] DC link voltage low warning
[10010] ETR overtemperature alarm
[7] DC overvoltage warning
[10011] Thermistor overtemp alarm
[8] DC undervoltage warning
[10012] Torque limit alarm
[9] Inverter overloaded warning
[10013] Overcurrent alarm
[10] Motor ETR overtemp warning
[10014] Earth fault alarm
[11] Motor thermistor overtemp warning
[10016] Short circuit alarm
[12] Torque limit warning
[10017] CTW timeout alarm
[13] Over current warning
[10026] Brake powerlimit alarm
[14] Earth fault warning
[10027] Brakechopper shortcircuit alarm
[17] Controlword timeout warning
[10028] Brake check alarm
[19] Discharge temp high warning
[10029] Heatsink temp alarm
[23] Internal fans warning
[10030] Phase U missing alarm
[24] External fans warning
[10031] Phase V missing alarm
[25] Brake resistor short circuit warning
[10032] Phase W missing alarm
[26] Brake powerlimit warning
[10033] Inrush fault alarm
[27] Brake chopper short circuit warning
[10034] Fieldbus com faul alarm
[28] Brake check warning
[10036] Mains failure alarm
[29] Heatsink temperature warning
[10037] Phase imbalance alarm
[30] Motor phase U warning
[10038] Internal fault
[31] Motor phase V warning
[10039] Heatsink sensor alarm

108 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

8-17 Configurable Alarm and Warningword 8-31 Address

Array [16] Range: Function:
Select the meaning of a specific bit in the configurable alarm Size related* [ 1 - 255 ] Enter the address for the frequency

3 3
and warning word. The word has 16 bits (0–15). converter (standard) port.
Option: Function: Valid range: Depends on selected
[10045] Earth fault 2 alarm protocol.
[10046] Powercard supply alarm
[10047] 24V supply low alarm
8-32 Baud Rate
[10048] 1.8V supply low alarm Baud rates 9600, 19200, 38400, and 76800 are valid for BACnet
[10049] Speed limit alarm only. The default value depends on the FC protocol.
[10060] Ext interlock alarm Option: Function:
[10061] Feedback error alarm [0] 2400 Baud
[10063] Mech brake low alarm [1] 4800 Baud
[10065] Controlboard overtemp alarm [2] 9600 Baud
[10067] Option config changed alarm [3] 19200 Baud
[10068] Safe stop alarm [4] 38400 Baud
[10069] Powercard temp alarm [5] 57600 Baud
[10073] Safestop auto restart alarm [6] 76800 Baud
[10074] PTC thermistor alarm [7] 115200 Baud
[10079] Illegal PS config alarm
8-33 Parity / Stop Bits
[10081] CSIV corrupt alarm
[10082] CSIV param error alarm Parity and stop bits for the protocol parameter 8-30 Protocol
using the FC port. For some of the protocols, not all options are
[10090] Feedback monitor alarm
visible. Default depends on the protocol selected.
[10091] AI54 settings alarm
[10164] ATEX ETR current lim alarm Option: Function:
[10166] ATEX ETR freq limit alarm [0] Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit
[1] Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit

3.9.3 8-3* FC Port Settings [2] No Parity, 1 Stop Bit

[3] No Parity, 2 Stop Bits

8-30 Protocol 8-35 Minimum Response Delay

Option: Function: Range: Function:
Protocol selection for the integrated FC 10 ms* [ 5 - 10000 Specify the minimum delay time
(standard) port (RS485) on the control card. ms] between receiving a request and
[0] FC Communication according to the FC protocol transmitting a response. This is used
as described in RS485 Installation and Set-up in for overcoming modem turnaround
the relevant design guide. delays.

[1] FC MC Same as [0] FC but to be used when Size [ 5 - 10000 Specify the minimum delay time
downloading SW to the frequency converter or related* ms] between receiving a request and
uploading dll file (covering information transmitting a response. This is used
regarding parameters available in the for overcoming modem turnaround
frequency converter and their inter-depend- delays.
encies) to MCT 10 Set-up Software.
8-36 Max Response Delay
[2] Modbus Communication according to the Modbus RTU
Range: Function:
RTU protocol.
Size [ 11 - 10001 Specify the maximum allowed delay
[3] Metasys N2
related* ms] time between transmitting a request
[9] FC Option and receiving a response. Exceeding
[22] Modbus Enables cascade 2.0 master capability. Sets this delay time causes control word
CASCADE parameter 8-32 Baud Rate to choice 19200. For timeout.
Master more information, refer to
chapter 3.24.1 Introduction.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 109

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

8-37 Maximum Inter-Char Delay 8-42 PCD Write Configuration

Range: Function: Array [64]
Size related* [ 0.00 - Specify the maximum allowed time Option: Function:

3 3 35.01 ms] interval between receipt of 2 bytes.

This parameter activates timeout if
[414]
[416]
Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
Torque Limit Motor Mode
transmission is interrupted.
[417] Torque Limit Generator Mode
[553] Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value
3.9.4 8-4* Telegram Selection [558] Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value
[590] Digital & Relay Bus Control

8-40 Telegram Selection [593] Pulse Out #27 Bus Control

[595] Pulse Out #29 Bus Control
Enables use of freely configurable telegrams or standard
[597] Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control
telegrams for the FC port.
[615] Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value
Option: Function:
[625] Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value
[1] * Standard telegram 1
[653] Terminal 42 Output Bus Control
[100] None
[663] Terminal X30/8 Output Bus Control
[101] PPO 1
[673] Terminal X45/1 Bus Control
[102] PPO 2
[683] Terminal X45/3 Bus Control
[103] PPO 3
[894] Bus Feedback 1
[104] PPO 4
[895] Bus Feedback 2
[105] PPO 5
[896] Bus Feedback 3
[106] PPO 6
[1680] Fieldbus CTW 1
[107] PPO 7
[1682] Fieldbus REF 1
[108] PPO 8
[1685] FC Port CTW 1
[200] Custom telegram 1
[1686] FC Port REF 1
[202] Custom telegram 3
[2021] Setpoint 1
8-42 PCD Write Configuration [2022] Setpoint 2
[2023] Setpoint 3
Array [64]
[2643] Terminal X42/7 Bus Control
Option: Function:
[2653] Terminal X42/9 Bus Control
[0] None Select the parameters
[2663] Terminal X42/11 Bus Control
to be assigned to
[3401] PCD 1 Write to MCO
PCD telegrams. The
[3402] PCD 2 Write to MCO
number of available
[3403] PCD 3 Write to MCO
PCDs depends on the
[3404] PCD 4 Write to MCO
telegram type. The
values in PCDs are [3405] PCD 5 Write to MCO
then written to the [3406] PCD 6 Write to MCO
selected parameters [3407] PCD 7 Write to MCO
as data values. [3408] PCD 8 Write to MCO
[3409] PCD 9 Write to MCO
[302] Minimum Reference
[3410] PCD 10 Write to MCO
[303] Maximum Reference
[341] Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time 8-43 PCD Read Configuration
[342] Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time Array [64]
[351] Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time
Option: Function:
[352] Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time
[0] None Select the parameters to
[380] Jog Ramp Time
be assigned to PCDs of
[381] Quick Stop Ramp Time
the telegrams. The
[411] Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]
number of available PCDs
[412] Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
depends on the telegram
[413] Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] type. PCDs contain the

110 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

8-43 PCD Read Configuration 8-43 PCD Read Configuration

Array [64] Array [64]
Option: Function: Option: Function:
actual data values of the
selected parameters.
[1652] Feedback[Unit]
[1653] Digi Pot Reference
3 3
[15] Readout: actual setup [1654] Feedback 1 [Unit]
[894] Bus Feedback 1 [1655] Feedback 2 [Unit]
[895] Bus Feedback 2 [1656] Feedback 3 [Unit]
[896] Bus Feedback 3 [1660] Digital Input
[1397] Alert Alarm Word [1661] Terminal 53 Switch Setting
[1398] Alert Warning Word [1662] Analog Input 53
[1399] Alert Status Word [1663] Terminal 54 Switch Setting
[1500] Operating hours [1664] Analog Input 54
[1501] Running Hours [1665] Analog Output 42 [mA]
[1502] kWh Counter [1666] Digital Output [bin]
[1600] Control Word [1667] Pulse Input #29 [Hz]
[1601] Reference [Unit] [1668] Pulse Input #33 [Hz]
[1602] Reference [%] [1669] Pulse Output #27 [Hz]
[1603] Status Word [1670] Pulse Output #29 [Hz]
[1605] Main Actual Value [%] [1671] Relay Output [bin]
[1609] Custom Readout [1672] Counter A
[1610] Power [kW] [1673] Counter B
[1611] Power [hp] [1675] Analog In X30/11
[1612] Motor Voltage [1676] Analog In X30/12
[1613] Frequency [1677] Analog Out X30/8 [mA]
[1614] Motor current [1678] Analog Out X45/1 [mA]
[1615] Frequency [%] [1679] Analog Out X45/3 [mA]
[1616] Torque [Nm] [1684] Comm. Option STW
[1617] Speed [RPM] [1687] Bus Readout Alarm/Warning
[1618] Motor Thermal [1689] Configurable Alarm/Warning Shows the alarm/warning
[1619] Thermistor Sensor Word word that is configured
Temperature in parameter 8-17 Config-
urable Alarm and
[1622] Torque [%]
Warningword.
[1623] Motor Shaft Power [kW] Shows the mechanical
power applied to the [1690] Alarm Word
motor shaft. [1691] Alarm Word 2

[1624] Calibrated Stator Resistance [1692] Warning Word

[1626] Power Filtered [kW] [1693] Warning Word 2

[1627] Power Filtered [hp] [1694] Ext. Status Word

[1630] DC Link Voltage [1695] Ext. Status Word 2

[1632] Brake Energy /s [1696] Maintenance Word

[1633] Brake Energy Average [1697] Alarm Word 3

[1634] Heatsink Temp. [1698] Warning Word 3

[1635] Inverter Thermal [1830] Analog Input X42/1

[1638] SL Controller State [1831] Analog Input X42/3

[1639] Control Card Temp. [1832] Analog Input X42/5

[1642] Service Log Counter [1833] Analog Out X42/7 [V]

[1645] Motor Phase U Current [1834] Analog Out X42/9 [V]

[1646] Motor Phase V Current [1835] Analog Out X42/11 [V]

[1647] Motor Phase W Current [1836] Analog Input X48/2 [mA]

[1650] External Reference [1837] Temp. Input X48/4

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 111

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

8-43 PCD Read Configuration 8-52 DC Brake Select

Array [64] Option: Function:
Option: Function: NOTICE!
3 3 [1838] Temp. Input X48/7
[1839] Temp. Input X48/10
Only selection [0] Digital Input is available
when parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is
[1850] Sensorless Readout [unit] set to [1] PM, non-salient SPM.
[1860] Digital Input 2
[2792] % Of Total Capacity [0] Digital Activates start command via a digital input.
[2795] Advanced Cascade Relay input
Output [bin] [1] Bus Activates start command via the serial communi-
[2796] Extended Cascade Relay cation port or fieldbus option.
Output [bin]
[2] Logic Activates start command via the fieldbus/serial
[2969] Flow AND communication port AND via 1 of the digital
[3421] PCD 1 Read from MCO inputs.
[3422] PCD 2 Read from MCO
[3] Logic OR Activates start command via the fieldbus/serial
[3423] PCD 3 Read from MCO
communication port OR via 1 of the digital inputs.
[3424] PCD 4 Read from MCO
[3425] PCD 5 Read from MCO
8-53 Start Select
[3426] PCD 6 Read from MCO
Select the trigger for the start function.
[3427] PCD 7 Read from MCO
[3428] PCD 8 Read from MCO Option: Function:
[3429] PCD 9 Read from MCO [0] Digital input A digital input triggers the start function.
[3430] PCD 10 Read from MCO [1] Bus A serial communication port or the fieldbus
triggers the start function.
3.9.5 8-5* Digital/Bus [2] Logic AND The fieldbus/serial communication port and a
digital input trigger the start function.
Parameters for configuring the control word merging.
[3] * Logic OR The fieldbus/serial communication port or a
digital input triggers the start function.
NOTICE!
These parameters are active only when 8-54 Reversing Select
parameter 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Digital and control Select control of the frequency converter reverse function via the
word. terminals (digital input) and/or via the fieldbus.
Option: Function:
8-50 Coasting Select
NOTICE!
Select the trigger for the coasting function.
This parameter is active only when
Option: Function: parameter 8-01 Control Site is set to [0]
[0] Digital input A digital input triggers the coasting function. Digital and control word.
[1] Bus A serial communication port or the fieldbus
triggers the coasting function. [0] * Digital input Activates reverse command via a digital input.

[2] Logic AND The fieldbus/serial communication port and a [1] Bus Activates reverse command via the serial
digital input trigger the coasting function. communication port or fieldbus option.

[3] * Logic OR The fieldbus/serial communication port or a [2] Logic AND Activates reverse command via the fieldbus/
digital input triggers the coasting function. serial communication port and via 1 of the
digital inputs.
8-52 DC Brake Select [3] Logic OR Activates reverse command via the fieldbus/
Option: Function: serial communication port or via 1 of the
Select control of the DC brake via the terminals digital inputs.
(digital input) and/or via the fieldbus.

112 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

8-55 Set-up Select 8-83 Slave Error Count

Select the trigger for the set-up selection. Range: Function:
Option: Function: 0* [0 - 4294967295 ] This parameter shows the number of
[0] Digital input A digital input triggers the set-up selection. error telegrams, which are not executed
by the frequency converter. 3 3
[1] Bus A serial communication port or the fieldbus
triggers the set-up selection.

[2] Logic AND The fieldbus/serial communication port and a

3.9.7 8-9* Bus Jog
digital input trigger the set-up selection.
8-94 Bus Feedback 1
[3] * Logic OR The fieldbus/serial communication port or a
digital input triggers the set-up selection. Range: Function:
0* [-200 - Write feedback to this parameter via the serial
8-56 Preset Reference Select 200 ] communication port or fieldbus option. Select
this parameter as a feedback source in
Option: Function:
parameter 20-00 Feedback 1 Source,
Select the trigger for the preset reference
parameter 20-03 Feedback 2 Source, or
selection.
parameter 20-06 Feedback 3 Source.
[0] Digital A digital input triggers the preset reference
input selection. 8-95 Bus Feedback 2
[1] Bus A serial communication port or the fieldbus Range: Function:
triggers the preset reference selection. 0* [-200 - 200 ] See parameter 8-94 Bus Feedback 1 for further
[2] Logic AND The fieldbus/serial communication port and a details.
digital input trigger the preset reference
selection.
8-96 Bus Feedback 3
Range: Function:
[3] * Logic OR The fieldbus/serial communication port or a
0* [-200 - 200 ] See parameter 8-94 Bus Feedback 1 for further
digital input triggers the preset reference
details.
selection.

8-97 Response Error Codes

3.9.6 8-8* FC Port Diagnostics Range: Function:
0* [0 - 0 ]
These parameters are used for monitoring the bus
communication via the frequency converter port. 3.10 Parameters 9-** PROFIBUS
8-80 Bus Message Count For PROFIBUS parameter descriptions, see the VLT®
Range: Function: PROFIBUS DP MCA 101 Programming Guide.
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] This parameter shows the number of
valid telegrams detected on the bus.

8-81 Bus Error Count

Array [6]
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] This parameter shows the number of
telegrams with faults (for example CRC
fault) detected on the bus.

8-82 Slave Message Rcvd

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] This parameter shows the number of
valid telegrams addressed to the slave
sent by the frequency converter.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 113

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.11 Parameters 10-** CAN Fieldbus 3.11.2 10-1* DeviceNet

3.11.1 10-0* Common Settings 10-10 Process Data Type Selection

3 3 10-00 CAN Protocol

Option: Function:
Select the instance (telegram) for data
Option: Function: transmission. The instances available depend
[1] * DeviceNet NOTICE! on the setting of parameter 8-10 Control
The parameter options depend on Profile.
installed option. When parameter 8-10 Control Profile is set to
[0] FC profile, parameter 10-10 Process Data
Type Selection options [0] INSTANCE 100/150
View the active CAN protocol.
and [1] INSTANCE 101/151 are available.
When parameter 8-10 Control Profile is set to
10-01 Baud Rate Select
[5] ODVA, parameter 10-10 Process Data Type
Option: Function: Selection options [2] INSTANCE 20/70 and [3]
Select the fieldbus transmission speed. The INSTANCE 21/71 are available.
selection must correspond to the transmission Instances 100/150 and 101/151 are Danfoss-
speed of the master and the other fieldbus specific. Instances 20/70 and 21/71 are ODVA-
nodes. specific AC motor profiles.
[16] 10 Kbps For guidelines in telegram selection, refer to
[17] 20 Kbps the VLT® DeviceNet MCA 104 Installation Guide.
[18] 50 Kbps NOTICE!
[19] 100 Kbps
A change to this parameter is executed
[20] 125 Kbps immediately.
[21] 250 Kbps
[22] 500 Kbps
[0] INSTANCE
[23] 800 Kbps
100/150
[24] 1000 Kbps
[1] INSTANCE
10-02 MAC ID 101/151
[2] INSTANCE
Range: Function:
20/70
Size related* [ 0 - 63 ] Selection of station address. Every
[3] INSTANCE
station connected to the same
21/71
DeviceNet network must have an
[6] INSTANCE
unambiguous address.
102/152

10-05 Readout Transmit Error Counter 10-11 Process Data Config Write
Range: Function: Option: Function:
0* [0 - 255 ] Shows the number of CAN control transmission Select the process
errors since the last power-up. write data for I/O
assembly instances
10-06 Readout Receive Error Counter 101/151. Elements 2
Range: Function: and 3 of this array
0* [0 - 255 ] Shows the number of CAN control receipt errors can be selected.
since the last power-up. Elements 0 and 1 of
the array are fixed.
10-07 Readout Bus Off Counter [0] None
Range: Function: [302] Minimum Reference
0* [0 - 255 ] View the number of fieldbus off events since the [303] Maximum Reference
last power-up. [341] Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time
[342] Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time
[351] Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time

114 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

10-11 Process Data Config Write Bit Description

Option: Function: 6 I/O send error.

7 Initialization error.
[352] Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time
8 No bus supply.
[380]
[381]
Jog Ramp Time
Quick Stop Ramp Time
9 Bus off. 3 3
10 Error passive.
[411] Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]
11 Error warning.
[412] Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
12 Duplicate MAC ID error.
[413] Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
13 RX queue overrun.
[414] Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
14 TX queue overrun.
[416] Torque Limit Motor Mode
15 CAN overrun.
[417] Torque Limit Generator Mode
[553] Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value Table 3.20 Warning Bits
[558] Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value
[590] Digital & Relay Bus Control 10-14 Net Reference
[593] Pulse Out #27 Bus Control
Read only from LCP.
[595] Pulse Out #29 Bus Control
Option: Function:
[597] Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control
[615] Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value Select the reference source in instances 21/71 and
20/70.
[625] Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value
[653] Terminal 42 Output Bus Control [0] * Off Enables reference via analog/digital inputs.
[663] Terminal X30/8 Output Bus Control [1] On Enables reference via the fieldbus.
[673] Terminal X45/1 Bus Control
[683] Terminal X45/3 Bus Control 10-15 Net Control
[894] Bus Feedback 1 Read only from LCP.
[895] Bus Feedback 2
Option: Function:
[896] Bus Feedback 3
Select the control source in instances 21/71 and 20/70.
[1680] Fieldbus CTW 1
[1682] Fieldbus REF 1 [0] * Off Enables control via analog/digital inputs.
[1685] FC Port CTW 1 [1] On Enable control via the fieldbus.
[1686] FC Port REF 1

10-12 Process Data Config Read 3.11.3 10-2* COS Filters

Option: Function:
Select the process read data for I/O assembly instances 10-20 COS Filter 1
101/151. Elements 2 and 3 of this array can be selected. Range: Function:
Elements 0 and 1 of the array are fixed.
0* [0 - Enter the value for COS filter 1 to set up the
10-13 Warning Parameter 65535 ] filter mask for the status word. When operating
in COS (change-of-state), this function filters
Range: Function:
out bits in the status word that should not be
0* [0 - 65535 ] View a DeviceNet-specific warning word. One
sent if they change.
bit is assigned to every warning. Refer to the
VLT® MCA 104 DeviceNet Installation Guide for 10-21 COS Filter 2
further information.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - Enter the value for COS filter 2 to set up the
Bit Description
65535 ] filter mask for the Main Actual Value. When
0 Bus not active.
operating in COS, this function filters out bits in
1 Explicit connection timeout.
the main actual value that should not be sent if
2 I/O connection.
they change.
3 Retry limit reached.
4 Actual is not updated.
5 CAN bus off.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 115

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

10-22 COS Filter 3 10-33 Store Always

Range: Function: Option: Function:
0* [0 - 65535 ] Enter the value for COS filter 3 to set up the [0] * Off Deactivates non-volatile storage of data.

3 3 filter mask for PCD 3. When operating in COS,

this function filters out bits in PCD 3 that
[1] On Stores parameter data received via VLT® DeviceNet
MCA 104 in EEPROM non-volatile memory as default.
should not be sent if they change.

10-34 DeviceNet Product Code

10-23 COS Filter 4
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 65535 N/A]
0* [0 - 65535 ] Enter the value for COS filter 4 to set up the
filter mask for PCD 4. When operating in COS, 10-39 Devicenet F Parameters
this function filters out bits in PCD 4 that
Array [1000].
should not be sent if they change.
No LCP access.
Range: Function:
3.11.4 10-3* Parameter Access 0* [0 - 0 ] This parameter is used to configure the frequency
converter via VLT® DeviceNet MCA 104 and to
Parameter group providing access to indexed parameters build the EDS file.
and defining programming set-up.

10-30 Array Index

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 255 ] View array parameters. This parameter is valid
only when a VLT® DeviceNet MCA 104 is installed.

10-31 Store Data Values

Option: Function:
Parameter values changed via DeviceNet are not
automatically stored in non-volatile memory. Use
this parameter to activate a function that stores
parameter values in the EEPROM non-volatile
memory, so changed parameter values are
retained at power-down.

[0] * Off Deactivates the non-volatile storage function.

[1] Store edit Stores all parameter values from the active set-
setup up in the non-volatile memory. The selection
returns to [0] Off when all values have been
stored.

[2] Store all Stores all parameter values for all set-ups in the
setups non-volatile memory. The selection returns to [0]
Off when all parameter values have been stored.

10-32 Devicenet Revision

Range: Function:
Size related* [0 - 65535 ] View the DeviceNet revision number.
This parameter is used for EDS file
creation.

116 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3.12 Parameters 13-** Smart Logic 3.12.1 13-0* SLC Settings

Smart logic control (SLC) is essentially a sequence of user- Use the SLC settings to activate, deactivate, and reset the
defined actions (see parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action smart logic control sequence. The logic functions and
[x]) executed by the SLC when the associated user-defined
event (see parameter 13-51 SL Controller Event [x]) is
comparators are always running in the background, which 3 3
opens for separate control of digital inputs and outputs.
evaluated as true by the SLC. Events and actions are each
numbered and linked in pairs. This means that when the 13-00 SL Controller Mode
1st event is fulfilled (attains the value TRUE), the 1st action Option: Function:
is executed. After this, the 2nd event is evaluated and if [0] Off Disables the smart logic controller.
evaluated true, the 2nd action is executed, and so on. Only [1] On Enables the smart logic controller.
1 event is evaluated at any time. If an event is evaluated as
false, nothing happens (in the SLC) during the current scan 13-01 Start Event
interval and no other events are evaluated. This means
Option: Function:
that when the SLC starts, it evaluates the 1st event (and
Select the boolean (true or false) input
only the 1st event) in each scan interval. Only when the 1st
to activate smart logic control.
event is evaluated true, the SLC executes the 1st action and
starts evaluating the 2nd event. It is possible to program [0] False Enters the fixed value of false in the
from 1–20 events and actions. logic rule.
When the last event/action has been executed, the [1] True Enters the fixed value of true in the
sequence starts over again from the 1st event/the 1st logic rule.
action. Figure 3.40 shows an example with 3 events/actions.
[2] Running See parameter group 5-3* Digital
Outputs for further description.

[3] In range See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[4] On reference See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[5] Torque limit See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[6] Current Limit See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[7] Out of current See parameter group 5-3* Digital

range Outputs for further description.

[8] Below I low See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Figure 3.40 Smart Logic Event Actions Outputs for further description.

[9] Above I high See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.
Starting and stopping the SLC
[10] Out of speed
Starting and stopping the SLC can be done by selecting [1]
range
On or [0] Off in parameter 13-00 SL Controller Mode. The SLC
[11] Below speed low See parameter group 5-3* Digital
always starts in state 0 (where it evaluates the first event).
Outputs for further description.
The SLC starts when the start event (defined in
parameter 13-01 Start Event) is evaluated as true (if [1] On is [12] Above speed See parameter group 5-3* Digital
selected in parameter 13-00 SL Controller Mode). The SLC high Outputs for further description.
stops when the stop event (parameter 13-02 Stop Event) is
[13] Out of feedb.
true. Parameter 13-03 Reset SLC resets all SLC parameters
range
and starts programming from scratch.
[14] Below feedb. low
[15] Above feedb.
high

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 117

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

13-01 Start Event 13-01 Start Event

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[16] Thermal warning See parameter group 5-3* Digital [40] Drive stopped This event is true if the frequency

3 3 [17] Mains out of

Outputs for further description.

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

converter is stopped or coasted (either
via digital input, fieldbus, or other).

range Outputs for further description. [41] Reset Trip This event is true if the frequency
converter is tripped (but not trip-
[18] Reversing See parameter group 5-3* Digital
locked) and [Reset] is pressed.
Outputs for further description.
[42] Auto Reset Trip This event is true if the frequency
[19] Warning See parameter group 5-3* Digital
converter is tripped (but not trip-
Outputs for further description.
locked) and an automatic reset is
[20] Alarm (trip) See parameter group 5-3* Digital issued.
Outputs for further description.
[43] OK Key This event is true if [OK] is pressed.
[21] Alarm (trip lock) See parameter group 5-3* Digital
[44] Reset Key This event is true if [Reset] is pressed.
Outputs for further description.
[45] Left Key This event is true if [◄] is pressed.
[22] Comparator 0 Use the result of comparator 0 in the
logic rule. [46] Right Key This event is true if [►] is pressed.

[23] Comparator 1 Use the result of comparator 1 in the [47] Up Key This event is true if [▲] is pressed.
logic rule.
[48] Down Key This event is true if [▼] is pressed.
[24] Comparator 2 Use the result of comparator 2 in the
logic rule. [50] Comparator 4 Use the result of comparator 4 in the
logic rule.
[25] Comparator 3 Use the result of comparator 3 in the
logic rule. [51] Comparator 5 Use the result of comparator 5 in the
logic rule.
[26] Logic rule 0 Use the result of logic rule 0 in the
logic rule. [60] Logic rule 4 Use the result of logic rule 4 in the
logic rule.
[27] Logic rule 1 Use the result of logic rule 1 in the
logic rule. [61] Logic rule 5 Use the result of logic rule 5 in the
logic rule.
[28] Logic rule 2 Use the result of logic rule 2 in the
logic rule. [76] Digital input
x30/2
[29] Logic rule 3 Use the result of logic rule 3 in the
[77] Digital input
logic rule.
x30/3
[33] Digital input DI18 Use the value of DI18 in the logic rule [78] Digital input
(High = true). x30/4
[34] Digital input DI19 Use the value of DI19 in the logic rule [90] ECB Drive Mode
(High = true). [91] ECB Bypass Mode
[92] ECB Test Mode
[35] Digital input DI27 Use the value of DI27 in the logic rule
[94] RS Flipflop 0
(High = true).
[95] RS Flipflop 1
[36] Digital input DI29 Use the value of DI29 in the logic rule [96] RS Flipflop 2
(High = true). [97] RS Flipflop 3
[37] Digital input DI32 Use the value of DI32 in the logic rule [98] RS Flipflop 4
(High = true). [99] RS Flipflop 5

[38] Digital input DI33 Use the value of DI33 in the logic rule [100] RS Flipflop 6 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand S,
(High = true). parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R.

[39] Start command This event is true if the frequency [101] RS Flipflop 7
converter is started (either via digital [102] Verifying Flow
input, fieldbus, or other). [125] Digital input
x46/1

118 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

13-01 Start Event 13-02 Stop Event

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[126] Digital input [14] Below feedb. low See parameter group 5-3* Digital
x46/3
[127] Digital input
[15]
Outputs for further description.

Above feedb. high See parameter group 5-3* Digital

3 3
x46/5
Outputs for further description.
[128] Digital input
x46/7 [16] Thermal warning See parameter group 5-3* Digital
Outputs for further description.
[129] Digital input
x46/9 [17] Mains out of See parameter group 5-3* Digital
[130] Digital input range Outputs for further description.
x46/11
[18] Reversing See parameter group 5-3* Digital
[131] Digital input Outputs for further description.
x46/13
[19] Warning See parameter group 5-3* Digital
13-02 Stop Event Outputs for further description.
Option: Function: [20] Alarm (trip) See parameter group 5-3* Digital
Select the boolean (true or false) input Outputs for further description.
to deactivate smart logic control.
[21] Alarm (trip lock) See parameter group 5-3* Digital
[0] False Enters the fixed value of false in the Outputs for further description.
logic rule.
[22] Comparator 0 Use the result of comparator 0 in the
[1] True Enters the fixed value of true in the logic rule.
logic rule.
[23] Comparator 1 Use the result of comparator 1 in the
[2] Running See parameter group 5-3* Digital logic rule.
Outputs for further description.
[24] Comparator 2 Use the result of comparator 2 in the
[3] In range See parameter group 5-3* Digital logic rule.
Outputs for further description.
[25] Comparator 3 Use the result of comparator 3 in the
[4] On reference See parameter group 5-3* Digital logic rule.
Outputs for further description.
[26] Logic rule 0 Use the result of logic rule 0 in the
[5] Torque limit See parameter group 5-3* Digital logic rule.
Outputs for further description.
[27] Logic rule 1 Use the result of logic rule 1 in the
[6] Current Limit See parameter group 5-3* Digital logic rule.
Outputs for further description.
[28] Logic rule 2 Use the result of logic rule 2 in the
[7] Out of current See parameter group 5-3* Digital logic rule.
range Outputs for further description.
[29] Logic rule 3 Use the result of logic rule 3 in the
[8] Below I low See parameter group 5-3* Digital logic rule.
Outputs for further description.
[30] SL Time-out 0 Use the result of timer 0 in the logic
[9] Above I high See parameter group 5-3* Digital rule.
Outputs for further description.
[31] SL Time-out 1 Use the result of timer 1 in the logic
[10] Out of speed rule.
range
[32] SL Time-out 2 Use the result of timer 2 in the logic
[11] Below speed low See parameter group 5-3* Digital
rule.
Outputs for further description.
[33] Digital input DI18 Use the value of DI18 in the logic rule
[12] Above speed high See parameter group 5-3* Digital
(High = true).
Outputs for further description.
[34] Digital input DI19 Use the value of DI19 in the logic rule
[13] Out of feedb. See parameter group 5-3* Digital
(High = true).
range Outputs for further description.
[35] Digital input DI27 Use the value of DI27 in the logic rule
(High = true).

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 119

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

13-02 Stop Event 13-02 Stop Event

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[36] Digital input DI29 Use the value of DI29 in the logic rule [75] Start command

3 3 [37] Digital input DI32

(High = true).

Use the value of DI32 in the logic rule [76]

given
Digital input x30/2
(High = true). [77] Digital input x30/3
[78] Digital input x30/4
[38] Digital input DI33 Use the value of DI33 in the logic rule
[80] No Flow
(High = true).
[81] Dry Pump
[39] Start command This event is true if the frequency [82] End of Curve
converter is started (either via digital [83] Broken Belt
input, fieldbus or other). [90] ECB Drive Mode
[40] Drive stopped This event is true if the frequency [91] ECB Bypass Mode
converter is stopped or coasted (either [92] ECB Test Mode
via digital input, fieldbus or other). [93] Emergency Mode
[41] Reset Trip This event is true if the frequency [94] RS Flipflop 0
converter is tripped (but not trip- [95] RS Flipflop 1
locked) and [Reset] is pressed. [96] RS Flipflop 2
[97] RS Flipflop 3
[42] Auto Reset Trip This event is true if the frequency
[98] RS Flipflop 4
converter is tripped (but not trip-
[99] RS Flipflop 5
locked) and an automatic reset is
issued. [100] RS Flipflop 6 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand S,
parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R.
[43] OK Key This event is true if [OK] is pressed.
[101] RS Flipflop 7
[44] Reset Key This event is true if [Reset] is pressed.
[102] Verifying Flow
[45] Left Key This event is true if [◄] is pressed. [103] Relay 1

[46] Right Key This event is true if [►] is pressed. [104] Relay 2
[105] Relay 3
[47] Up Key This event is true if [▲] is pressed.
[106] Relay 4
[48] Down Key This event is true if [▼] is pressed. [107] Relay 5
[108] Relay 6
[50] Comparator 4 Use the result of comparator 4 in the
[109] Relay 7
logic rule.
[110] Relay 8
[51] Comparator 5 Use the result of comparator 5 in the [111] Relay 9
logic rule. [112] System On Ref
[60] Logic rule 4 Use the result of logic rule 4 in the [125] Digital input x46/1
logic rule. [126] Digital input x46/3
[127] Digital input x46/5
[61] Logic rule 5 Use the result of logic rule 5 in the
logic rule. [128] Digital input x46/7
[129] Digital input x46/9
[70] SL Time-out 3 Use the result of timer 3 in the logic
[130] Digital input
rule.
x46/11
[71] SL Time-out 4 Use the result of timer 4 in the logic [131] Digital input
rule. x46/13
[72] SL Time-out 5 Use the result of timer 5 in the logic [140] ATEX ETR cur.
rule. warning
[141] ATEX ETR cur.
[73] SL Time-out 6 Use the result of timer 6 in the logic
alarm
rule.
[142] ATEX ETR freq.
[74] SL Time-out 7 Use the result of timer 7 in the logic warning
rule.

120 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

13-02 Stop Event 13-10 Comparator Operand

Option: Function: Array [6]
[143] ATEX ETR freq. Option: Function:
alarm [19]
[20]
Pulse input FI33
Alarm number
3 3
3.12.2 13-1* Comparators [21] Warning number
[22] Analog input x30 11
Comparators are used for comparing continuous variables [23] Analog input x30 12
(that is output frequency, output current, analog input, and [24] Sensorless Flow
so on) to fixed preset values. [25] Sensorless Pressure
[26] Flow Totalized Volume
Par. 13-11 [27] Flow Actual Volume
130BB672.10
Comparator Operator
Par. 13-10 [28] Flow
Comparator Operand [29] Number Of Pump Running
= [30] Counter A
Par. 13-12 TRUE longer than.
[31] Counter B
Comparator Value ...
... [34] Analog Input x48/2
[35] Temp Input x48/4
Figure 3.41 Comparators [36] Temp Input x48/7
[37] Temp Input x48/10
[38] Derag Counter
There are digital values that are compared to fixed time [40] Analog input x42/1
values. See the explanation in parameter 13-10 Comparator [41] Analog input x42/3
Operand. Comparators are evaluated once in each scan [42] Analog input x42/5
interval. Use the result (true or false) directly. All [46] AI53 scaled
parameters in this parameter group are array parameters [47] AI54 scaled
with index 0–5. Select index 0 to program comparator 0,
[48] AI53 unit
select index 1 to program comparator 1, and so on.
[49] AI54 unit
13-10 Comparator Operand [50] FALSE
Array [6] [51] TRUE
[52] Control ready
Option: Function:
[53] Drive ready
Select the variable to be
[54] Running
monitored by the comparator.
[55] Reversing
[0] DISABLED
[56] In range
[1] Reference %
[60] On reference
[2] Feedback %
[61] Below reference, low
[3] Motor speed
[62] Above ref, high
[4] Motor Current
[65] Torque limit
[5] Motor torque
[66] Current Limit
[6] Motor power
[67] Out of current range
[7] Motor voltage
[68] Below I low
[8] DC-link voltage
[69] Above I high
[9] Motor Thermal
[70] Out of speed range
[10] Drive thermal
[71] Below speed low
[11] Heat sink temp.
[72] Above speed high
[12] Analog input AI53
[75] Out of feedback range
[13] Analog input AI54
[76] Below feedback low
[14] Analog input AIFB10
[77] Above feedback high
[15] Analog input AIS24V
[80] Thermal warning
[17] Analog input AICCT
[82] Mains out of range
[18] Pulse input FI29

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 121

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

13-10 Comparator Operand 13-10 Comparator Operand

Array [6] Array [6]
Option: Function: Option: Function:

3 3 [85]
[86]
Warning
Alarm (trip)
[180] Local referecnce active
[181] Remote reference active
[87] Alarm (trip lock) [182] Start command
[90] Bus OK [183] Drive stopped
[91] Torque limit & stop [185] Drive in hand mode
[92] Brake fault (IGBT) [186] Drive in auto mode
[94] Safe stop active [187] Start command given
[100] Comparator 0 [190] Digital input x30/2
[101] Comparator 1 [191] Digital input x30/3
[102] Comparator 2 [192] Digital input x30/4
[103] Comparator 3 [193] Digital input x46/1
[104] Comparator 4 [194] Digital input x46/3
[105] Comparator 5 [195] Digital input x46/5
[110] Logic rule 0 [196] Digital input x46/7
[111] Logic rule 1 [197] Digital input x46/9
[112] Logic rule 2 [198] Digital input x46/11
[113] Logic rule 3 [199] Digital input x46/13
[114] Logic rule 4 [204] System On Ref
[115] Logic rule 5 [205] No Flow
[120] SL Time-out 0 [206] Dry Pump
[121] SL Time-out 1 [207] End of Curve
[122] SL Time-out 2 [208] Broken Belt
[123] SL Time-out 3 [209] ECB Drive Mode
[124] SL Time-out 4 [210] ECB Bypass Mode
[125] SL Time-out 5 [211] ECB Test Mode
[126] SL Time-out 6 [212] Emergency Mode
[127] SL Time-out 7 [240] Totalized Vol in thousands
[130] Digital input DI18 [241] Totalized Vol in millions
[131] Digital input DI19 [242] Totalized Vol in billions
[132] Digital input DI27 [243] Totalized Vol in trillions
[133] Digital input DI29 [245] Actual Vol in thousands
[134] Digital input DI32 [246] Actual Vol in millions
[135] Digital input DI33 [247] Actual Vol in billions
[150] SL digital output A [248] Actual Vol in trillions
[151] SL digital output B [249] Therm. Sensor Temp.
[152] SL digital output C
13-11 Comparator Operator
[153] SL digital output D
[154] SL digital output E Array [6]

[155] SL digital output F Option: Function:

[160] Relay 1 [0] < Select [0] < for the result of the evaluation to be
[161] Relay 2 true, when the variable selected in
[162] Relay 3 parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand is smaller
[163] Relay 4 than the fixed value in
[164] Relay 5 parameter 13-12 Comparator Value. The result is
[165] Relay 6 false, if the variable selected in
parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand is greater
[166] Relay 7
than the fixed value in
[167] Relay 8
parameter 13-12 Comparator Value.
[168] Relay 9

122 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

13-11 Comparator Operator 3.12.3 RS Flip Flops

Array [6]
The reset/set flip flops hold the signal until set/reset.
Option: Function:
[1] ≈ (equal) Select [1] ≈ for the result of the evaluation to be
3 3

130BB959.10
true, when the variable selected in
parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand is approxi- Par. 13-15
RS-FF Operand S
mately equal to the fixed value in Par. 13-16
parameter 13-12 Comparator Value. RS-FF Operand R

[2] > Select [2] > for the inverse logic of option [0] <.
Figure 3.42 Reset/Set Flip Flops
[5] TRUE
longer
than..
[6] FALSE
2 parameters are used, and the output can be used in the
longer
logic rules and as events.
than..
[7] TRUE

130BB960.10
S
shorter
than.. R
[8] FALSE
shorter Flip Flop Output

than.. Figure 3.43 Flip Flop Outputs

13-12 Comparator Value

Array [6] The 2 operators can be selected from a long list. As a
Range: Function: special case, the same digital input can be used as both
Size [-100000 - Enter the trigger level for the set and reset, making it possible to use the same digital
related* 100000 ] variable that is monitored by this input as start/stop. The following settings can be used to
comparator. This is an array set up the same digital input (for example, DI32) as start/
parameter containing comparator stop.
values 0–5.
Parameter Setting Notes
Parameter 13-00 SL Controller
On –
Mode
Parameter 13-01 Start Event True –
Parameter 13-02 Stop Event False –

Parameter 13-40 Logic Rule [37] Digital

–
Boolean 1 [0] Input DI32
Parameter 13-42 Logic Rule
[2] Running –
Boolean 2 [0]
Parameter 13-41 Logic Rule [3] AND
–
Operator 1 [0] NOT

Parameter 13-40 Logic Rule [37] Digital

–
Boolean 1 [1] Input DI32
Parameter 13-42 Logic Rule
[2] Running –
Boolean 2 [1]
Parameter 13-41 Logic Rule
[1] AND –
Operator 1 [1]

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 123

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Parameter Setting Notes 13-15 RS-FF Operand S

Output from Array [8]
Parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand [26] Logic parameter 13-41 Log Select the set input.
S [0] rule 0 ic Rule Operator 1
3 3 [0].
Option:
[24] Comparator 2
Function:

Output from
Parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand [27] Logic parameter 13-41 Log [25] Comparator 3
R [0] rule 1 ic Rule Operator 1 [26] Logic rule 0
[1]. [27] Logic rule 1
[28] Logic rule 2
Output from [29] Logic rule 3
parameter 13-15 RS- [30] SL Time-out 0
Parameter 13-51 SL Controller [94] RS
FF Operand S and
Event [0] Flipflop 0 [31] SL Time-out 1
parameter 13-16 RS-
[32] SL Time-out 2
FF Operand R.
[33] Digital input DI18
Parameter 13-52 SL Controller
[22] Run – [34] Digital input DI19
Action [0]
[35] Digital input DI27
Parameter 13-51 SL Controller [27] Logic [36] Digital input DI29
–
Event [1] rule 1 [37] Digital input DI32
Parameter 13-52 SL Controller [38] Digital input DI33
[24] Stop –
Action [1] [39] Start command
[40] Drive stopped
Table 3.21 Operators
[41] Reset Trip
[42] Auto Reset Trip
13-15 RS-FF Operand S [43] OK Key
Array [8] [44] Reset Key
Select the set input. [45] Left Key
Option: Function: [46] Right Key
[0] False [47] Up Key
[1] True [48] Down Key
[2] Running [50] Comparator 4
[3] In range [51] Comparator 5
[4] On reference [60] Logic rule 4
[5] Torque limit [61] Logic rule 5
[6] Current Limit [70] SL Time-out 3
[7] Out of current range [71] SL Time-out 4
[8] Below I low [72] SL Time-out 5
[9] Above I high [73] SL Time-out 6
[10] Out of speed range [74] SL Time-out 7
[11] Below speed low [75] Start command given
[12] Above speed high [76] Digital input x30/2
[13] Out of feedb. range [77] Digital input x30/3
[14] Below feedb. low [78] Digital input x30/4
[15] Above feedb. high [80] No Flow
[16] Thermal warning [81] Dry Pump
[17] Mains out of range [82] End of Curve
[18] Reversing [83] Broken Belt
[19] Warning [90] ECB Drive Mode
[20] Alarm (trip) [91] ECB Bypass Mode
[21] Alarm (trip lock) [92] ECB Test Mode
[22] Comparator 0 [93] Emergency Mode
[23] Comparator 1 [94] RS Flipflop 0

124 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

13-15 RS-FF Operand S 13-16 RS-FF Operand R

Array [8] Array [8]
Select the set input. Select the reset input. The reset input takes priority over the set

3 3
Option: Function: input.

[95] RS Flipflop 1 Option: Function:

[96] RS Flipflop 2 [13] Out of feedb. range
[97] RS Flipflop 3 [14] Below feedb. low
[98] RS Flipflop 4 [15] Above feedb. high
[99] RS Flipflop 5 [16] Thermal warning
[100] RS Flipflop 6 [17] Mains out of range
[101] RS Flipflop 7 [18] Reversing
[102] Verifying Flow [19] Warning
[103] Relay 1 [20] Alarm (trip)
[104] Relay 2 [21] Alarm (trip lock)
[105] Relay 3 [22] Comparator 0
[106] Relay 4 [23] Comparator 1
[107] Relay 5 [24] Comparator 2
[108] Relay 6 [25] Comparator 3
[109] Relay 7 [26] Logic rule 0
[110] Relay 8 [27] Logic rule 1
[111] Relay 9 [28] Logic rule 2
[112] System On Ref [29] Logic rule 3
[125] Digital input x46/1 [30] SL Time-out 0
[126] Digital input x46/3 [31] SL Time-out 1
[127] Digital input x46/5 [32] SL Time-out 2
[128] Digital input x46/7 [33] Digital input DI18
[129] Digital input x46/9 [34] Digital input DI19
[130] Digital input x46/11 [35] Digital input DI27
[131] Digital input x46/13 [36] Digital input DI29
[140] ATEX ETR cur. warning [37] Digital input DI32
[141] ATEX ETR cur. alarm [38] Digital input DI33
[142] ATEX ETR freq. warning [39] Start command
[143] ATEX ETR freq. alarm [40] Drive stopped
[41] Reset Trip
13-16 RS-FF Operand R
[42] Auto Reset Trip
Array [8] [43] OK Key
Select the reset input. The reset input takes priority over the set [44] Reset Key
input.
[45] Left Key
Option: Function: [46] Right Key
[0] False [47] Up Key
[1] True [48] Down Key
[2] Running [50] Comparator 4
[3] In range [51] Comparator 5
[4] On reference [60] Logic rule 4
[5] Torque limit [61] Logic rule 5
[6] Current Limit [70] SL Time-out 3
[7] Out of current range [71] SL Time-out 4
[8] Below I low [72] SL Time-out 5
[9] Above I high [73] SL Time-out 6
[10] Out of speed range [74] SL Time-out 7
[11] Below speed low [75] Start command given
[12] Above speed high

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 125

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

13-16 RS-FF Operand R 3.12.4 13-2* Timers

Array [8]
Select the reset input. The reset input takes priority over the set Use the result (true or false) from timers directly to define
an event (see parameter 13-51 SL Controller Event), or as
3 3
input.
boolean input in a logic rule (see parameter 13-40 Logic
Option: Function:
Rule Boolean 1, parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2, or
[76] Digital input x30/2
parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3). A timer is only false
[77] Digital input x30/3
when started by an action (for example [29] Start timer 1)
[78] Digital input x30/4 until the timer value entered in this parameter has elapsed.
[80] No Flow Then it becomes true again.
[81] Dry Pump All parameters in this parameter group are array
[82] End of Curve parameters with index 0–2. Select index 0 to program
[83] Broken Belt timer 0, select index 1 to program timer 1, and so on.
[90] ECB Drive Mode
13-20 SL Controller Timer
[91] ECB Bypass Mode
Array [8]
[92] ECB Test Mode
[93] Emergency Mode Range: Function:
[94] RS Flipflop 0 Size [0 - Enter the value to define the duration of
[95] RS Flipflop 1 related* 0] the false output from the programmed
[96] RS Flipflop 2 timer. A timer is only false if it is started
[97] RS Flipflop 3 by an action (for example [29] Start timer
[98] RS Flipflop 4 1) and until the given timer value has
elapsed.
[99] RS Flipflop 5
[100] RS Flipflop 6
[101] RS Flipflop 7 3.12.5 13-4* Logic Rules
[102] Verifying Flow
[103] Relay 1 Combine up to 3 boolean inputs (true/false inputs) from
[104] Relay 2 timers, comparators, digital inputs, status bits, and events
[105] Relay 3 using the logical operators AND, OR, and NOT. Select
[106] Relay 4 boolean inputs for the calculation in parameter 13-40 Logic
[107] Relay 5 Rule Boolean 1, parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2, and
[108] Relay 6 parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3. Define the operators
[109] Relay 7 used to logically combine the selected inputs in
[110] Relay 8 parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 and
[111] Relay 9
parameter 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2.
[112] System On Ref
Par. 13-41 Par. 13-43
130BB673.10

[125] Digital input x46/1

Logic Rule Operator 1 Logic Rule Operator 2
[126] Digital input x46/3 Par. 13-40
Logic Rule Boolean 1
[127] Digital input x46/5 Par. 13-42
[128] Digital input x46/7 Logic Rule Boolean 2 ...
... ...
[129] Digital input x46/9 ...
[130] Digital input x46/11
Par. 13-44
[131] Digital input x46/13 Logic Rule Boolean 3
[140] ATEX ETR cur. warning Figure 3.44 Logic Rules
[141] ATEX ETR cur. alarm
[142] ATEX ETR freq. warning
[143] ATEX ETR freq. alarm Priority of calculation
The results of parameter 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1,
parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1, and
parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 are calculated first.
The outcome (true/false) of this calculation is combined
with the settings of parameter 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2

126 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

and parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3, yielding the final 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1
result (true/false) of the logic rule. Array [6]
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 Option: Function:
Array [6]
Option: Function:
[20] Alarm (trip) See parameter group 5-3* Digital
Outputs for further description.
3 3
[0] False Enters the fixed value of false in the [21] Alarm (trip lock) See parameter group 5-3* Digital
logic rule. Outputs for further description.

[1] True Enters the fixed value of true in the [22] Comparator 0 Use the result of comparator 0 in the
logic rule. logic rule.

[2] Running See parameter group 5-3* Digital [23] Comparator 1 Use the result of comparator 1 in the
Outputs for further description. logic rule.

[3] In range See parameter group 5-3* Digital [24] Comparator 2 Use the result of comparator 2 in the
Outputs for further description. logic rule.

[4] On reference See parameter group 5-3* Digital [25] Comparator 3 Use the result of comparator 3 in the
Outputs for further description. logic rule.

[5] Torque limit See parameter group 5-3* Digital [26] Logic rule 0 Use the result of logic rule 0 in the
Outputs for further description. logic rule.

[6] Current Limit See parameter group 5-3* Digital [27] Logic rule 1 Use the result of logic rule 1 in the
Outputs for further description. logic rule.

[7] Out of current See parameter group 5-3* Digital [28] Logic rule 2 Use the result of logic rule 2 in the
range Outputs for further description. logic rule.

[8] Below I low See parameter group 5-3* Digital [29] Logic rule 3 Use the result of logic rule 3 in the
Outputs for further description. logic rule.

[9] Above I high See parameter group 5-3* Digital [30] SL Time-out 0 Use the result of timer 0 in the logic
Outputs for further description. rule.

[10] Out of speed [31] SL Time-out 1 Use the result of timer 1 in the logic
range rule.
[11] Below speed low See parameter group 5-3* Digital
[32] SL Time-out 2 Use the result of timer 2 in the logic
Outputs for further description.
rule.
[12] Above speed high See parameter group 5-3* Digital
[33] Digital input DI18 Use the value of DI18 in the logic rule
Outputs for further description.
(High = true).
[13] Out of feedb. See parameter group 5-3* Digital
[34] Digital input DI19 Use the value of DI19 in the logic rule
range Outputs for further description.
(High = true).
[14] Below feedb. low See parameter group 5-3* Digital
[35] Digital input DI27 Use the value of DI27 in the logic rule
Outputs for further description.
(High = true).
[15] Above feedb. high See parameter group 5-3* Digital
[36] Digital input DI29 Use the value of DI29 in the logic rule
Outputs for further description.
(High = true).
[16] Thermal warning See parameter group 5-3* Digital
[37] Digital input DI32 Use the value of DI32 in the logic rule
Outputs for further description.
(High = true).
[17] Mains out of See parameter group 5-3* Digital
[38] Digital input DI33 Use the value of DI33 in the logic rule
range Outputs for further description.
(High = true).
[18] Reversing See parameter group 5-3* Digital
[39] Start command This logic rule is true if the frequency
Outputs for further description.
converter is started either via digital
[19] Warning See parameter group 5-3* Digital input, fieldbus, or other.
Outputs for further description.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 127

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1

Array [6] Array [6]
Option: Function: Option: Function:

3 3 [40] Drive stopped This logic rule is true if the frequency

converter is stopped or coasted either
[83]
[90]
Broken Belt
ECB Drive Mode
via digital input, fieldbus, or other. [91] ECB Bypass Mode
[41] Reset Trip This logic rule is true if the frequency [92] ECB Test Mode
converter is tripped (but not trip- [93] Emergency Mode
locked) and [Reset] is pressed. [94] RS Flipflop 0
[95] RS Flipflop 1
[42] Auto Reset Trip This logic rule is true if the frequency
[96] RS Flipflop 2
converter is tripped (but not trip-
locked) and an automatic reset is [97] RS Flipflop 3
issued. [98] RS Flipflop 4
[99] RS Flipflop 5
[43] OK Key This logic rule is true if [OK] is pressed.
[100] RS Flipflop 6 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand S,
[44] Reset Key This logic rule is true if [Reset] is parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R.
pressed.
[101] RS Flipflop 7
[45] Left Key This logic rule is true if [◄] is pressed. [102] Verifying Flow
[46] Right Key This logic rule is true if [►] is pressed. [103] Relay 1
[104] Relay 2
[47] Up Key This logic rule is true if [▲] is pressed.
[105] Relay 3
[48] Down Key This logic rule is true if [▼] is pressed. [106] Relay 4
[107] Relay 5
[50] Comparator 4 Use the result of comparator 4 in the
[108] Relay 6
logic rule.
[109] Relay 7
[51] Comparator 5 Use the result of comparator 5 in the [110] Relay 8
logic rule.
[111] Relay 9
[60] Logic rule 4 Use the result of logic rule 4 in the [112] System On Ref
logic rule. [125] Digital input x46/1
[61] Logic rule 5 Use the result of logic rule 5 in the [126] Digital input x46/3
logic rule. [127] Digital input x46/5
[128] Digital input x46/7
[70] SL Time-out 3 Use the result of timer 3 in the logic
[129] Digital input x46/9
rule.
[130] Digital input
[71] SL Time-out 4 Use the result of timer 4 in the logic x46/11
rule. [131] Digital input
[72] SL Time-out 5 Use the result of timer 5 in the logic x46/13
rule. [140] ATEX ETR cur.
warning
[73] SL Time-out 6 Use the result of timer 6 in the logic
[141] ATEX ETR cur.
rule.
alarm
[74] SL Time-out 7 Use the result of timer 7 in the logic [142] ATEX ETR freq.
rule. warning
[75] Start command [143] ATEX ETR freq.
given alarm
[76] Digital input x30/2
13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1
[77] Digital input x30/3
Array [6]
[78] Digital input x30/4
[80] No Flow Option: Function:
[81] Dry Pump Select the 1st logical operator to use on the
[82] End of Curve boolean inputs from parameter 13-40 Logic Rule

128 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2

Array [6] Array [6]
Option: Function: Option: Function:
Boolean 1 and parameter 13-42 Logic Rule
Boolean 2.
[12]
[13]
Above speed high
Out of feedb. range
3 3
Parameter numbers in square brackets stand [14] Below feedb. low
for the boolean inputs of parameters in [15] Above feedb. high
parameter group 13-** Smart Logic Control. [16] Thermal warning
[0] DISABLED Ignores: [17] Mains out of range
• Parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2. [18] Reversing
[19] Warning
• Parameter 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2.
[20] Alarm (trip)
• Parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3.
[21] Alarm (trip lock)
[1] AND Evaluates the expression [13-40] AND [13-42]. [22] Comparator 0
[2] OR Evaluates the expression [13-40] OR [13-42]. [23] Comparator 1
[24] Comparator 2
[3] AND NOT Evaluates the expression [13-40] AND NOT
[25] Comparator 3
[13-42].
[26] Logic rule 0
[4] OR NOT Evaluates the expression [13-40] OR NOT [27] Logic rule 1
[13-42].
[28] Logic rule 2
[5] NOT AND Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] AND [29] Logic rule 3
[13-42]. [30] SL Time-out 0
[6] NOT OR Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] OR [31] SL Time-out 1
[13-42]. [32] SL Time-out 2
[33] Digital input DI18
[7] NOT AND Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] AND NOT
[34] Digital input DI19
NOT [13-42].
[35] Digital input DI27
[8] NOT OR Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] OR NOT [36] Digital input DI29
NOT [13-42]. [37] Digital input DI32
[38] Digital input DI33
13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2
[39] Start command
Array [6] [40] Drive stopped
Option: Function: [41] Reset Trip
Select the 2nd boolean (true or [42] Auto Reset Trip
false) input for the selected logic [43] OK Key
rule. [44] Reset Key
See parameter 13-40 Logic Rule [45] Left Key
Boolean 1 for further descriptions of [46] Right Key
options and their functions. [47] Up Key
[48] Down Key
[0] False
[50] Comparator 4
[1] True
[51] Comparator 5
[2] Running
[60] Logic rule 4
[3] In range
[61] Logic rule 5
[4] On reference
[70] SL Time-out 3
[5] Torque limit
[71] SL Time-out 4
[6] Current Limit
[72] SL Time-out 5
[7] Out of current range
[73] SL Time-out 6
[8] Below I low
[74] SL Time-out 7
[9] Above I high
[75] Start command given
[10] Out of speed range
[76] Digital input x30/2
[11] Below speed low

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 129

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2

Array [6] Array [6]
Option: Function: Option: Function:

3 3 [77]
[78]
Digital input x30/3
Digital input x30/4
[141] ATEX ETR cur. alarm
[142] ATEX ETR freq.
[80] No Flow warning
[81] Dry Pump [143] ATEX ETR freq. alarm
[82] End of Curve
13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2
[83] Broken Belt
Array [6]
[90] ECB Drive Mode
[91] ECB Bypass Mode Option: Function:
[92] ECB Test Mode Select the 2nd logical operator to be used on
[93] Emergency Mode the boolean input calculated in:
[94] RS Flipflop 0 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand • Parameter 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1.
S, parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R. • Parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator
[95] RS Flipflop 1 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand 1.
S, parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R. • Parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2.
[96] RS Flipflop 2 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand [13-44] signifies the boolean input of
S, parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R. parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3.
[97] RS Flipflop 3 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand [13-40/13-42] signifies the boolean input
S, parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R. calculated in:
• Parameter 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1.
[98] RS Flipflop 4 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand
S, parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R. • Parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator
1.
[99] RS Flipflop 5 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand
S, parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R. • Parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2.

[0] DISABLED Select this option to ignore

[100] RS Flipflop 6 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand
parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3.
S, parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R.
[1] AND
[101] RS Flipflop 7 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand
[2] OR
S, parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R.
[3] AND NOT
[102] Verifying Flow
[4] OR NOT
[103] Relay 1
[5] NOT AND
[104] Relay 2
[6] NOT OR
[105] Relay 3
[7] NOT AND
[106] Relay 4 NOT
[107] Relay 5 [8] NOT OR NOT
[108] Relay 6
[109] Relay 7 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3
[110] Relay 8 Array [6]
[111] Relay 9 Option: Function:
[112] System On Ref
Select the 3rd boolean (true or false)
[125] Digital input x46/1 input for the selected logic rule.
[126] Digital input x46/3
See parameter 13-40 Logic Rule
[127] Digital input x46/5
Boolean 1 for further descriptions of
[128] Digital input x46/7
options and their functions.
[129] Digital input x46/9
[130] Digital input x46/11 [0] False
[131] Digital input x46/13 [1] True
[140] ATEX ETR cur. [2] Running
warning [3] In range

130 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3

Array [6] Array [6]
Option: Function: Option: Function:
[4]
[5]
On reference
Torque limit
[70]
[71]
SL Time-out 3
SL Time-out 4
3 3
[6] Current Limit [72] SL Time-out 5
[7] Out of current range [73] SL Time-out 6
[8] Below I low [74] SL Time-out 7
[9] Above I high [75] Start command given
[10] Out of speed range [76] Digital input x30/2
[11] Below speed low [77] Digital input x30/3
[12] Above speed high [78] Digital input x30/4
[13] Out of feedb. range [80] No Flow
[14] Below feedb. low [81] Dry Pump
[15] Above feedb. high [82] End of Curve
[16] Thermal warning [83] Broken Belt
[17] Mains out of range [90] ECB Drive Mode
[18] Reversing [91] ECB Bypass Mode
[19] Warning [92] ECB Test Mode
[20] Alarm (trip) [93] Emergency Mode
[21] Alarm (trip lock) [94] RS Flipflop 0
[22] Comparator 0 [95] RS Flipflop 1
[23] Comparator 1 [96] RS Flipflop 2
[24] Comparator 2 [97] RS Flipflop 3
[25] Comparator 3 [98] RS Flipflop 4
[26] Logic rule 0 [99] RS Flipflop 5
[27] Logic rule 1 [100] RS Flipflop 6 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand
[28] Logic rule 2 S, parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R.
[29] Logic rule 3 [101] RS Flipflop 7
[30] SL Time-out 0 [102] Verifying Flow
[31] SL Time-out 1 [103] Relay 1
[32] SL Time-out 2 [104] Relay 2
[33] Digital input DI18 [105] Relay 3
[34] Digital input DI19 [106] Relay 4
[35] Digital input DI27 [107] Relay 5
[36] Digital input DI29 [108] Relay 6
[37] Digital input DI32 [109] Relay 7
[38] Digital input DI33 [110] Relay 8
[39] Start command [111] Relay 9
[40] Drive stopped [112] System On Ref
[41] Reset Trip [125] Digital input x46/1
[42] Auto Reset Trip [126] Digital input x46/3
[43] OK Key [127] Digital input x46/5
[44] Reset Key [128] Digital input x46/7
[45] Left Key [129] Digital input x46/9
[46] Right Key [130] Digital input x46/11
[47] Up Key [131] Digital input x46/13
[48] Down Key [140] ATEX ETR cur.
[50] Comparator 4 warning
[51] Comparator 5 [141] ATEX ETR cur. alarm
[60] Logic rule 4 [142] ATEX ETR freq.
[61] Logic rule 5 warning

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 131

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3 13-51 SL Controller Event

Array [6] Array [20]
Option: Function: Option: Function:

3 3 [143] ATEX ETR freq. alarm [34]

[35]
Digital input DI19
Digital input DI27
3.12.6 13-5* States [36] Digital input DI29
[37] Digital input DI32

13-51 SL Controller Event [38] Digital input DI33

[39] Start command
Array [20]
[40] Drive stopped
Option: Function:
[41] Reset Trip
Select the boolean input (true or [42] Auto Reset Trip
false) to define the smart logic
[43] OK Key
controller event.
[44] Reset Key
See parameter 13-02 Stop Event for [45] Left Key
further descriptions of options and [46] Right Key
their functions. [47] Up Key
[0] False [48] Down Key
[1] True [50] Comparator 4
[2] Running [51] Comparator 5
[3] In range [60] Logic rule 4
[4] On reference [61] Logic rule 5
[5] Torque limit [70] SL Time-out 3
[6] Current Limit [71] SL Time-out 4
[7] Out of current range [72] SL Time-out 5
[8] Below I low [73] SL Time-out 6
[9] Above I high [74] SL Time-out 7
[10] Out of speed range [75] Start command given
[11] Below speed low [76] Digital input x30/2
[12] Above speed high [77] Digital input x30/3
[13] Out of feedb. range [78] Digital input x30/4
[14] Below feedb. low [80] No Flow
[15] Above feedb. high [81] Dry Pump
[16] Thermal warning [82] End of Curve
[17] Mains out of range [83] Broken Belt
[18] Reversing [90] ECB Drive Mode
[19] Warning [91] ECB Bypass Mode
[20] Alarm (trip) [92] ECB Test Mode
[21] Alarm (trip lock) [93] Emergency Mode
[22] Comparator 0 [94] RS Flipflop 0 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand
[23] Comparator 1 S, parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R.
[24] Comparator 2 [95] RS Flipflop 1 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand
[25] Comparator 3 S, parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R.
[26] Logic rule 0
[96] RS Flipflop 2 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand
[27] Logic rule 1
S, parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R.
[28] Logic rule 2
[29] Logic rule 3 [97] RS Flipflop 3 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand
S, parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R.
[30] SL Time-out 0
[31] SL Time-out 1 [98] RS Flipflop 4 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand
[32] SL Time-out 2 S, parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R.
[33] Digital input DI18

132 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

13-51 SL Controller Event 13-52 SL Controller Action

Array [20] Array [20]
Option: Function: Option: Function:
[99] RS Flipflop 5 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand
S, parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R.
[4] Select set-up 3 Changes the active set-up
(parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to 3.
3 3
[100] RS Flipflop 6 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand [5] Select set-up 4 Changes the active set-up
S, parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R. (parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to 4. If the
set-up is changed, it merges with other
[101] RS Flipflop 7 See parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand
set-up commands coming from either
S, parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand R.
the digital inputs or via a fieldbus.
[102] Verifying Flow
[10] Select preset ref Selects preset reference 0.
[103] Relay 1
0
[104] Relay 2
[11] Select preset ref Selects preset reference 1.
[105] Relay 3
1
[106] Relay 4
[12] Select preset ref Selects preset reference 2.
[107] Relay 5
2
[108] Relay 6
[13] Select preset ref Selects preset reference 3.
[109] Relay 7
3
[110] Relay 8
[14] Select preset ref Selects preset reference 4.
[111] Relay 9 4
[112] System On Ref [15] Select preset ref Selects preset reference 5.
[125] Digital input x46/1 5
[126] Digital input x46/3 [16] Select preset ref Selects preset reference 6.
[127] Digital input x46/5 6
[128] Digital input x46/7 [17] Select preset ref Selects preset reference 7. If the active
[129] Digital input x46/9 7 preset reference is changed, it merges
[130] Digital input x46/11 with other preset reference commands
[131] Digital input x46/13 coming from either the digital inputs or
[140] ATEX ETR cur. via a fieldbus.
warning
[18] Select ramp 1 Selects ramp 1.
[141] ATEX ETR cur. alarm
[19] Select ramp 2 Selects ramp 2.
[142] ATEX ETR freq.
warning [22] Run Issues a start command to the frequency
[143] ATEX ETR freq. alarm converter.

13-52 SL Controller Action [23] Run reverse Issues a start reverse command to the
frequency converter.
Array [20]
[24] Stop Issues a stop command to the frequency
Option: Function:
converter.
Select the action corresponding to the
SLC event. Actions are executed when [26] DC Brake Issues a DC stop command to the
the corresponding event (defined in frequency converter.
parameter 13-51 SL Controller Event) is [27] Coast The frequency converter coasts
evaluated as true. The following actions immediately. All stop commands
are available for selection: including the coast command stop the
[0] Disabled SLC.
[1] No action [28] Freeze output Freezes the output frequency of the
[2] Select set-up 1 Changes the active set-up frequency converter.
(parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to 1.
[29] Start timer 0 Starts timer 0, see parameter 13-20 SL
[3] Select set-up 2 Changes the active set-up Controller Timer for further description.
(parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to 2.
[30] Start timer 1 Starts timer 1, see parameter 13-20 SL
Controller Timer for further description.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 133

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

13-52 SL Controller Action 13-52 SL Controller Action

Array [20] Array [20]
Option: Function: Option: Function:

3 3 [31] Start timer 2 Starts timer 2, see parameter 13-20 SL

Controller Timer for further description.
[74] Start Timer 7 Starts timer 7, see parameter 13-20 SL
Controller Timer for further description.

[32] Set digital out A Any output with digital output 1 [80] Sleep Mode Starts the sleep mode.
low selected is low (off).
[81] Derag Starts deragging (see parameter group
[33] Set digital out B Any output with digital output 2 29-0* Pipe Fill for further information).
low selected is low (off).
[82] Reset Derag
[34] Set digital out C Any output with digital output 3 Counter
low selected is low (off). [90] Set ECB Bypass
[35] Set digital out D Any output with digital output 4 Mode
low selected is low (off). [91] Set ECB Drive
Mode
[36] Set digital out E Any output with digital output 5
[100] Reset Alarms
low selected is low (off).
[101] Reset Flow
[37] Set digital out F Any output with digital output 6 Totalized
low selected is low (off). Volume Counter
[38] Set digital out A Any output with digital output 1 [102] Reset Flow
high selected is high (closed). Actual Volume
Counter
[39] Set digital out B Any output with digital output 2
high selected is high (closed).

[40] Set digital out C Any output with digital output 3

high selected is high (closed).

[41] Set digital out D Any output with digital output 4

high selected is high (closed).

[42] Set digital out E Any output with digital output 5

high selected is high (closed).

[43] Set digital out F Any output with digital output 6

high selected is high (closed).

[60] Reset Counter A Resets counter A to 0.

[61] Reset Counter B Resets counter B to 0.

[62] Counter A (up)

[63] Counter A
(down)
[64] Counter B (up)
[65] Counter B
(down)
[70] Start Timer 3 Starts timer 3, see parameter 13-20 SL
Controller Timer for further description.

[71] Start Timer 4 Starts timer 4, see parameter 13-20 SL

Controller Timer for further description.

[72] Start Timer 5 Starts timer 5, see parameter 13-20 SL

Controller Timer for further description.

[73] Start Timer 6 Starts timer 6, see parameter 13-20 SL

Controller Timer for further description.

134 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3.12.7 13-9* User-defined Alerts and 13-90 Alert Trigger

Readouts Array [10]
Select the event that triggers the user-defined action and
Parameters in this group allow the configuration of
3 3
message.
application-specific messages, warnings, and alarms.
Option: Function:
Use the following parameters to configure the frequency
[50] Comparator 4
converter to show a message and perform an action when
[51] Comparator 5
a specific event occurs:
• Parameter 13-90 Alert Trigger – the event that [60] Logic rule 4
triggers the user-defined action and message. [61] Logic rule 5
[70] SL Time-out 3
• Parameter 13-91 Alert Action – the action that the
[71] SL Time-out 4
frequency converter performs when the event
[72] SL Time-out 5
defined in parameter 13-90 Alert Trigger occurs.
[73] SL Time-out 6
• Parameter 13-92 Alert Text – the text that the [74] SL Time-out 7
frequency converter shows in the display when [90] ECB Drive Mode
the event defined in parameter 13-90 Alert Trigger
[91] ECB Bypass Mode
occurs.
For example, consider the following use case: 13-91 Alert Action
If there is an active signal on digital input 32, the Array [10]
frequency converter shows the message Valve 5 open and Select the action that the frequency converter performs when
ramps down to a stop. the event defined in parameter 13-90 Alert Trigger occurs.
To achieve this configuration, make the following settings: Option: Function:
• Parameter 13-90 Alert Trigger = [37] Digital input [0] * Info
DI32.
[1] Warning
• Parameter 13-91 Alert Action = [5] Stop & warning. [2] Freeze output

• Parameter 13-92 Alert Text = Valve 5 open. [3] Freeze output & warn
[4] Stop
13-90 Alert Trigger [5] Stop & warning
Array [10] [6] Jogging
Select the event that triggers the user-defined action and [7] Jogging & warning
message. [8] Max speed
Option: Function: [9] Max speed & warn
[0] * False [10] Stop and trip
[1] True [11] Stop and trip w manual
[18] Reversing reset
[22] Comparator 0 [12] Trip
[23] Comparator 1 [13] Trip w manual reset
[24] Comparator 2 [14] Trip Lock
[25] Comparator 3
13-92 Alert Text
[26] Logic rule 0
[27] Logic rule 1 Range: Function:
[28] Logic rule 2 Size [0 - Array [10]
[29] Logic rule 3 related* 20 ] Enter the text that the frequency
converter shows in the display when the
[30] SL Time-out 0
event defined in parameter 13-90 Alert
[31] SL Time-out 1
Trigger occurs.
[32] SL Time-out 2
[33] Digital input DI18
13-97 Alert Alarm Word
[34] Digital input DI19
Range: Function:
[35] Digital input DI27
[36] Digital input DI29 0* [0 - 4294967295 ] Shows the alarm word of a user-defined
alarm in hex code.
[37] Digital input DI32
[38] Digital input DI33

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 135

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

13-98 Alert Warning Word

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] Shows the warning word of a user-

3 3 defined alarm in hex code.

13-99 Alert Status Word

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] Shows the status word of a user-defined
alarm in hex code.

136 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3.13 Parameters 14-** Special Functions 14-03 Overmodulation

Option: Function:
3.13.1 14-0* Inverter Switching
chronous range (from 0% at nominal speed, rising to

14-00 Switching Pattern

approximately 12% at double nominal speed).
3 3
Option: Function: 14-04 Acoustic Noise Reduction
Select the switching pattern: 60° AVM or SFAVM. Option: Function:
[0] 60 AVM [0] * Off No change of the acoustic motor switching noise.
[1] SFAVM [1] On Select to reduce the acoustic noise from the motor.

14-01 Switching Frequency

Option: Function: 3.13.2 14-1* Mains On/Off
Select the inverter switching frequency. Changing
the switching frequency can help reduce acoustic Parameters for configuring mains failure monitoring and
noise from the motor. handling.

NOTICE! 14-10 Mains Failure

The output frequency value of the Option: Function:
frequency converter must never exceed Select the function by which the frequency
1/10 of the switching frequency. When the converter must act when the threshold set in
motor is running, adjust the switching parameter 14-11 Mains Fault Voltage Level has been
frequency in parameter 14-01 Switching reached or a Mains Failure Inverse command is
Frequency until the motor is as noiseless as activated via 1 of the digital inputs (parameter
possible. See also group 5-1* Digital Inputs).
parameter 14-00 Switching Pattern. For
Only selections [0] No function, [3] Coasting, or [6]
information about derating, see the
Alarm are available when parameter 1-10 Motor
relevant design guide.
Construction is set to [1] PM, non-salient SPM.

[0] No The energy left in the capacitor bank is used to

[0] 1.0 kHz
* function run the motor, but is discharged.
[1] 1.5 kHz
[2] 2.0 kHz [1] Ctrl. The frequency converter performs a controlled
[3] 2.5 kHz ramp- ramp down. Parameter 2-10 Brake Function must
[4] 3.0 kHz down be set to [0] Off.
[5] 3.5 kHz [3] Coasting The frequency converter turns off and the
[6] 4.0 kHz capacitor bank backs up the control card, thus
[7] 5.0 kHz ensuring a faster restart when mains reconnect (at
[8] 6.0 kHz short power zags).
[9] 7.0 kHz [4] Kinetic Kinetic back-up ensures that the frequency
[10] 8.0 kHz back-up converter keeps running as long as there is
[11] 10.0 kHz energy in the system due to the inertia from
[12] 12.0kHz motor and load. This is done by converting the
[13] 14.0 kHz mechanical energy to the DC link and maintaining
[14] 16.0kHz control of the frequency converter and motor.
This can extend the controlled operation,
14-03 Overmodulation depending on the inertia in the system. For fans,
Option: Function: it is typically several seconds; for pumps up to 2 s;
[0] Off Selects no overmodulation of the output voltage to and for compressors only for a fraction of a
avoid torque ripple on the motor shaft. second. Many industry applications can extend
controlled operation for many seconds, which is
[1] * On The overmodulation function generates an extra
often enough time for the mains to return.
voltage of up to 8% of Umax output voltage without
overmodulation. This extra voltage results in an extra
torque of 10–12% in the middle of the oversyn-

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 137

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

14-10 Mains Failure 14-10 Mains Failure

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[5] Kinetic The difference between kinetic back-up with and

130BC918.10
A B C DE A

3 3
UDC [V] back-up, without trip is that the latter always ramps down
UDC
trip to 0 RPM and trips, regardless of whether mains
14-11*1.35
n [RPM] t [S] returns or not.
Ref The function does not detect if mains return. This
is the reason for the relatively high level on the
t [S] DC link during ramp down.

130BC920.10
A Normal operation UDC [V]
A B C D

790 V
B Mains failure
C Kinetic back-up UDC
14-11*1.35
D Mains return n [RPM] t [S]

E Normal operation: ramping Ref

Figure 3.45 Kinetic Back-up

0
t [S]

A Normal operation
B Mains failure
The DC level during [4] Kinetic back-up equals
parameter 14-11 Mains Fault Voltage Level x 1.35. C Kinetic back-up
If the mains does not return, UDC is maintained as D Trip
long as possible by ramping the speed down
towards 0 RPM. Finally, the frequency converter Figure 3.46 Kinetic Back-up Trip
coasts.

If the mains return while in kinetic back-up mode,

UDC increases above parameter 14-11 Mains Fault [6] Alarm
Voltage Level x 1.35. This is detected in 1 of the [7] Kin. This option is valid in VVC+ only. Kinetic back-up
following ways: back-up, with recovery combines the features of kinetic
trip w back-up and kinetic back-up with trip. This feature
• If UDC > parameter 14-11 Mains Fault
recovery makes it possible to select between kinetic back-
Voltage Level x 1.35 x 1.05.
up and kinetic back-up with trip, based on a
• If the speed is above the reference. This recovery speed, configurable in
is relevant if the mains come back at a parameter 14-15 Kin. Back-up Trip Recovery Level. If
lower level than before, for example mains do not return, the frequency converter
parameter 14-11 Mains Fault Voltage Level ramps down to 0 RPM and trips. If mains return
x 1.35 x 1.02. This does not fulfill the while in kinetic back-up at a speed above the
criterion in point 1, and the frequency value in parameter 14-15 Kin. Back-up Trip Recovery
converter tries to reduce UDC to Level, normal operation is resumed. This is equal
parameter 14-11 Mains Fault Voltage Level to [4] Kinetic Back-up. The DC level during [7]
x 1.35 by increasing the speed. This Kinetic back-up is parameter 14-11 Mains Fault
cannot be done as the mains cannot be Voltage Level x 1.35.
lowered.

• If running mechanically. The same

mechanism as in point 2 applies, but the
inertia prevents the speed from going
above the reference speed. This leads to
the motor running mechanically until the
speed is above the reference speed and
the situation in point 2 occurs. Instead of
waiting for that criterion, point 3 is
introduced.

138 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

14-10 Mains Failure 14-10 Mains Failure

Option: Function: Option: Function:
A B C DA E

130BC922.10
A B C D E F

130BC924.10
UDC [V]
UDC[V]

3 3
UDC

UDC
14-11*1.35 UDC
t [S] 14-11*1.35
n [RPM] t [s]
n [RPM]
Ref
Ref
14-15
t [S]
0
t [s]

A Normal operation.
B Mains failure. A Normal operation.
C Kinetic back-up. B Mains failure.
D Mains return. C Kinetic back-up.
E Normal operation: ramping. D Mains return.
E Kinetic back-up ramping to trip.
Figure 3.47 Kinetic Back-Up, Trip with Recovery F Trip.
where Mains Return above
Parameter 14-15 Kin. Back-up Trip Recovery Figure 3.49 Kinetic Back-Up, Trip with Recovery
Level where Mains Return below
Parameter 14-15 Kin. Back-up Trip Recovery
Level, here a Quick Ramp is Used
If mains return while in kinetic back-up at a speed
below parameter 14-15 Kin. Back-up Trip Recovery
Level, the frequency converter ramps down to 0
RPM using the ramp and then trips. If the ramp is
NOTICE!
slower than the system ramping down on its own, For best performance of controlled ramp down and
the ramping is done mechanically and UDC is at kinetic back-up, set parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics
the normal level (UDC, m x 1.35). to [0] Compressor or [1] Variable Torque (no automatic
energy optimization should be active).
A B C D E F
130BC923.10

UDC[V]

UDC
14-11*1.35 t [S]
n [RPM]
Ref

0
t [S]

A Normal operation. Figure 3.50 Controlled Ramp Down, Short Mains Failure.
B Mains failure.
C Kinetic back-up.
D Mains return. Figure 3.50 shows ramping down to a stop followed by
E Kinetic back-up, ramping to trip.
ramping up to the reference.
F Trip.

Figure 3.48 Kinetic Back-Up, Trip with

Recovery, Trip Slow Ramp where Mains Return
below Parameter 14-15 Kin. Back-up Trip
Recovery Level, here a Slow Ramp is Used
Figure 3.51 Controlled Ramp Down, Longer Mains Failure.

If the ramp is quicker than the ramp-down speed

of the application, the ramping generates current. Figure 3.51 shows ramping down as long as the energy in
This results in a higher UDC, which is limited using the system allows it, then the motor coasts.
the brake chopper/resistor brake.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 139

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.13.3 14-2* Trip Reset

Parameters for configuring auto reset handling, special trip

handling, and control card self-test or initialization.
3 3 14-20 Reset Mode
Figure 3.52 Kinetic Back-up, Short Mains Failure
Option: Function:
NOTICE!
Figure 3.52 shows riding through as long as the energy in The motor may start without warning. If the
the system allows it. specified number of automatic resets is reached
within 10 minutes, the frequency converter
enters [0] Manual reset mode. After the manual
reset is performed, the setting in
parameter 14-20 Reset Mode reverts to the
original selection. If the number of automatic
resets is not reached within 10 minutes, or
Figure 3.53 Kinetic Back-up, Longer Mains Failure when a manual reset is performed, the internal
automatic reset counter returns to 0.

Figure 3.53 shows the motor coasting when the energy in [0] *
the system is too low. [1]
[2]
14-11 Mains Fault Voltage Level
[3]
Range: Function:
[4]
Size [180 - This parameter defines the threshold
[5]
related* 600 V] voltage at which the selected function in
[6]
parameter 14-10 Mains Failure should be
[7]
activated. The detection level is at a
[8]
factor2 of the value in
[9]
parameter 14-11 Mains Fault Voltage Level.
[10]
[11]
14-12 Response to Mains Imbalance
[12]
Option: Function:
[13] Select the reset function after tripping. Once reset, the
Operation under severe mains imbalance
frequency converter can be restarted.
conditions reduces the lifetime of the motor.
Select [0] Manual reset to perform a reset via [Reset] or
Conditions are considered severe if the motor is
via the digital inputs.
operated continuously near nominal load (for
Select [1]-[12] Automatic reset x 1…x20 to perform 1–20
example a pump or fan running near full speed).
automatic resets after tripping.
When a severe mains imbalance is detected,
Select [13] Infinite Automatic Reset for continuous
select 1 of the available functions.
resetting after tripping.
[0] Trip Trips the frequency converter.
[14]
[1] Warning Issues a warning.
14-21 Automatic Restart Time
[2] Disabled No action.
Range: Function:
[3] * Derate Derates the frequency converter. 10 s* [0 - 600 Enter the time interval from trip to start of the
s] automatic reset function. This parameter is
14-16 Kin. Back-up Gain active when parameter 14-20 Reset Mode is set
Range: Function: to [1]–[13] Automatic reset.
100 %* [0 - 500 %] Enter the kinetic back-up gain value in
percent.

140 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

14-22 Operation Mode 14-22 Operation Mode

Option: Function: Option: Function:
Use this parameter to specify normal operation,

130BA314.10
to perform tests, or to initialize all parameters
except:
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37 3 3
• Parameter 15-03 Power Up's.
• Parameter 15-04 Over Temp's.

• Parameter 15-05 Over Volt's.

This function is active only when the power is

39 42 50 53 54 55
cycled (power off/power on) to the frequency
converter.

[0] Normal Normal operation of the frequency converter

* operation with the motor in the selected application. Figure 3.54 Wiring Control Card Test
[1] Control Tests the analog and digital inputs and outputs
card test and the +10 V control voltage. The test requires
a test connector with internal connections. [2] Initiali- Resets all parameter values to default settings
Use the following procedure for the control card sation except:
test: • Parameter 15-03 Power Up's.
1. Select [1] Control card test.
• Parameter 15-04 Over Temp's.
2. Disconnect the mains supply and wait
• Parameter 15-05 Over Volt's.
for the light in the display to go out.
The frequency converter resets during the next
3. Set switches S201 (A53) and S202
power-up.
(A54)=ON/I.
Parameter 14-22 Operation Mode also reverts to
4. Insert the test plug (see Figure 3.54). the default setting [0] Normal operation.
5. Connect to mains supply. [3] Boot
6. Carry out various tests. mode
[5] Clear
7. The results are shown in the display
service
and the frequency converter moves
logs
into an infinite loop.

8. Parameter 14-22 Operation Mode is 14-24 Trip Delay at Current Limit

automatically set to [0] Normal Range: Function:
operation. Carry out a power cycle to 60 s* [0 - Enter the current limit trip delay in s. When the
start up in normal operation after a 60 s] output current reaches the current limit
control card test. (parameter 4-18 Current Limit), a warning is
If the test is OK triggered. When the current limit warning has
LCP readout: Control card OK. been continuously present for the period specified
Disconnect the mains supply and remove the in this parameter, the frequency converter trips. To
test plug. The green LED on the control card run continuously in current limit without tripping,
lights up. set the parameter to 60 s. Thermal monitoring of
the frequency converter remains active.
If the test fails
LCP readout: Control card I/O failure.
Replace the frequency converter or control card.
The red indicator light on the control card is
turned on. To test the plugs, connect/group the
following terminals as shown in Figure 3.54:

• (18, 27, and 32)

• (19, 29, and 33)

• (42, 53, and 54)

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 141

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit 14-31 Current Lim Ctrl, Integration Time
Range: Function: Range: Function:
60 s* [0 - Enter the torque limit trip delay in s. When the value makes it react faster. A setting

3 3 60 s] output torque reaches the torque limits

(parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode and
too low leads to controller instability.

parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode), a 14-32 Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time
warning is triggered. When the torque limit Range: Function:
warning has been continuously present for the
Size related* [1 - 100 ms] Sets a time constant for the current
period specified in this parameter, the frequency
limit controller low-pass filter.
converter trips. Disable the trip delay by setting
the parameter to 60 s=OFF. Thermal frequency
converter monitoring remains active. 3.13.5 14-4* Energy Optimizing

14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault Parameters for adjusting the energy optimization level in
Range: Function: both variable torque (VT) and automatic energy optimi-
Size related* [0 - 35 s] When the frequency converter detects zation (AEO) mode.
an overvoltage in the set time, trip is
effected after the set time. Automatic energy optimization is only active if
parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics is set to either [2]
Auto Energy Optim. CT or [3] Auto Energy Optim. VT.
3.13.4 14-3* Current Limit Control
14-40 VT Level
The frequency converter features an integral current limit Range: Function:
controller, which is activated when the motor current, and 66 % [40 - NOTICE!
thus the torque, is higher than the torque limits set in * 90 %]
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode and
the motor is running.
parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode.
When the current limit is reached during motor operation
or regenerative operation, the frequency converter tries to NOTICE!
reduce torque below the preset torque limits as quickly as This parameter is not active when
possible without losing control of the motor. parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to
While the current control is active, the frequency converter [1] PM, non-salient SPM.
can only be stopped by setting a digital input to [2] Coast
inverse or [3] Coast and reset inv. Any signal on terminals Enter the level of motor magnetization at low
18–33 are not active until the frequency converter is no speed. Selection of a low value reduces energy
longer near the current limit. loss in the motor, but also reduces load
By using a digital input set to [2] Coast inverse or [3] Coast capability.
and reset inv., the motor does not use the ramp-down
time, since the frequency converter is coasted. 14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation
14-30 Current Lim Ctrl, Proportional Gain Range: Function:
Range: Function: Size [ 30 - NOTICE!
related* 200 %]
100 %* [5 - 500 %] Enter the proportional gain value for the This parameter is not active when
current limit controller. Selection of a high parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is
value makes the controller react faster. Too set to [1] PM, non-salient SPM.
high a setting leads to controller
instability. Enter the minimum allowable magnetization
for AEO. Selection of a low value reduces
14-31 Current Lim Ctrl, Integration Time energy loss in the motor, but can also
Range: Function: reduce resistance to sudden load changes.

Size related* [0.002 - 2 s] Controls the current limit control

integration time. Setting it to a lower

142 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency 14-51 DC-Link Compensation

Range: Function: Option: Function:
Size [0 - 40 NOTICE! current and torque ripples. A compensation method is
related* Hz]
This parameter is not active when
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is
used to reduce these voltage ripples in the DC link. In
general, DC-link compensation is recommended for 3 3
most applications, but pay attention when operating in
set to [1] PM, non-salient SPM.
field weakening as it can generate speed oscillations at
the motor shaft. In field weakening, turn off DC-link
Enter the minimum frequency at which
compensation.
the automatic energy optimization (AEO)
is to be active. [0] Off Disables DC-link compensation.

[1] On Enables DC-link compensation.

14-43 Motor Cos-Phi
Range: Function: 14-52 Fan Control
0.66 [0.40 - NOTICE! Option: Function:
N/A* 0.95
This parameter is not active when Select the minimum speed of the main fan.
N/A]
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set [0] * Auto Select [0] Auto to run the fan only when the
to [1] PM, non-salient SPM. internal temperature of the frequency
converter is in the range 35 °C (95 °F) to
The Cos(phi) setpoint is automatically set to approximately 55 °C (131 °F). The fan runs at
optimum AEO performance during AMA. Under low speed at 35 °C (95 °F) and at full speed
normal circumstances, do NOT alter this at approximately 55 °C (131 °F).
parameter. However, in some situations it may
[1] On 50%
be necessary to enter a new value to fine-tune.
[2] On 75%
[3] On 100%
3.13.6 14-5* Environment [4] Auto (Low
temp env.)
NOTICE! 14-53 Fan Monitor
Perform a power cycle after changing any of the
Option: Function:
parameters in parameter group 14-5* Environment.
Select the frequency converter action if a fan
fault is detected.
These parameters help the frequency converter to operate
under special environmental conditions. [0] Disabled
[1] * Warning
14-50 RFI 1
[2] Trip
Option: Function:
[0] Off Select [0] Off only when the frequency converter is 14-55 Output Filter
supplied from an isolated mains source, that is, IT Option: Function:
mains. In this mode, the internal RFI capacities (filter
NOTICE!
capacitors) between chassis and the mains RFI filter
This parameter cannot be adjusted
circuit is cut off to avoid damage to the DC link and
while the motor is running.
to reduce the ground capacity currents (according to
IEC 61800-3).
Select the type of output filter connected.
[1] * On Select [1] On to ensure that the frequency converter
complies with EMC standards. [0] * No Filter
[1] Sine-Wave Filter
14-51 DC-Link Compensation
Option: Function:
The rectified AC-DC voltage in the frequency converter's
DC link is associated with voltage ripples. These ripples
can increase in magnitude with increased load. These
ripples are undesirable because they can generate

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 143

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

14-56 Capacitance Output Filter 3.13.8 No Trip at Inverter Overload

Enter the capacitance of the output filter. Find the value on the
filter label. For the compensation function of the LC filter in the In some pump systems, the frequency converter has not
been sized properly to yield the current needed in all
3 3
star connection, enter the per phase equivalent capacitance of
the filter (3 times the capacitance between 2 phases in the delta points of the operational flow-head characteristic. At these
connection). points, the pump needs a current higher than the rated
current of the frequency converter. The frequency
Range: Function:
converter can yield 110% of the rated current continuously
2.0 uF* [0.1 - 6500.0 uF] Enter the capacitance of
for 60 s. If still overloaded, the frequency converter
the output filter.
normally trips (causing the pump to stop by coasting) and
issues an alarm.
14-57 Inductance Output Filter
Range: Function:
Current

130BA260.10
7.000 mH* [0.001 - 65.000 Set the inductance of the output % of rated

mH] filter. The value can be found on

the filter label. 110
105
100
14-58 Voltage Gain Filter
95
Range: Function:
~ 60s Time
100 %* [0 - 200 %] Select the gain applied to the voltage Inverter
~
Desired current>100%
when using an LC filter. load
counter
100
14-59 Actual Number of Inverter Units 98

This parameter is only relevant for high-power frequency

converters. 90.7
Range: Function:
Size related* [ 1 - 1 ] Sets the actual number of operating Time
Warning Warning
inverter units.
Figure 3.55 Output Current in Overload Condition

3.13.7 14-6* Auto Derate

If the pump is unable to run continuously with the
This group contains parameters for derating the frequency demanded capacity, run it at reduced speed for a while.
converter if there is high temperature.
Select parameter 14-61 Function at Inverter Overload to
14-60 Function at Over Temperature
automatically reduce pump speed until the output current
If either heat sink or control card temperature exceeds a is below 100% of the rated current (set in
programmed temperature limit, a warning is activated. If the parameter 14-62 Inv. Overload Derate Current).
temperature increases further, select whether the frequency Parameter 14-61 Function at Inverter Overload is an
converter should trip (trip lock) or derate the output current. alternative to letting the frequency converter trip.
Option: Function:
[0] Trip The frequency converter trips (trip The frequency converter estimates the load on the power
lock) and generates an alarm. Cycle section with an inverter load counter, which causes a
power to reset the alarm, but it does warning at 98% and a reset of the warning at 90%. At the
not allow restart of the motor until the value 100%, the frequency converter trips and issues an
heat sink temperature has dropped alarm.
below the alarm limit. Status for the counter can be read in
parameter 16-35 Inverter Thermal.
[1] * Derate If the critical temperature is exceeded,
the output current is reduced until the
allowable temperature has been If parameter 14-61 Function at Inverter Overload is set to [3]
reached. Derate, the pump speed is reduced when the counter
exceeds 98%, and stays reduced until the counter has
dropped below 90.7%.

144 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

If parameter 14-62 Inv. Overload Derate Current is set to for 14-80 Option Supplied by External 24VDC
example 95%, a steady overload causes the pump speed to Option: Function:
fluctuate between values corresponding to 110% and 95%
[0] No Select [0] No to use the frequency converter's 24 V DC
of rated output current for the frequency converter.

14-61 Function at Inverter Overload

supply.

[1] * Yes Select [1] Yes if a 24 V DC external supply is used to

3 3
Is used if there is steady overload beyond the thermal limits power the option. Inputs/outputs are galvanically
(110% for 60 s). isolated from the frequency converter when operated
Option: Function: from an external supply.
[0] Trip The frequency converter trips and issues an alarm.

[1] * Derate Reduces pump speed to decrease the load on the 3.13.10 14-9* Fault Settings
power section, allowing this to cool down.
14-90 Fault Level
14-62 Inv. Overload Derate Current
Array [21]
Range: Function:
Option: Function:
95 %* [50 - Enter the current level (in % of rated output
[0] Off Use this parameter to customize fault
100 %] current for the frequency converter) when
levels. Use [0] Off with caution as it
running with reduced pump speed after load
ignores all warnings and alarms for the
on the frequency converter has exceeded
selected source.
the allowable limit (110% for 60 s).
[1] Warning
[2] Trip
3.13.9 14-8* Options [3] Trip Lock
[4] Trip w. delayed
14-80 Option Supplied by External 24VDC reset
Option: Function:
NOTICE!
This parameter is only changing function by
performing a power cycle.

Failure Parameter Alarm Off Warning Trip Trip lock Trip with delayed reset
10 V low 1490.0 1 X D – – –
24 V low 1490.1 47 X – – D –
1.8 V supply low 1490.2 48 X – – D –
Voltage limit 1490.3 64 X D – – –
Ground fault 1490.41) 14 – – D X –
Ground fault 2 1490.51) 45 – – D X –
Torque limit 1490.6 12 X D – – –
Overcurrent 1490.7 13 – – – D X
Short circuit 1490.8 16 – – X D –
Heat sink temp. 1490.9 29 – – X D –
Heat sink sensor 1490.10 39 – – X D –
Control card temp. 1490.11 65 – – X D –
Power card temp. 1490.12 69 – – X D –
Heat sink temp. 1490.133) 244 – – X D –
Heat sink sensor 1490.143) 245 – – X D –
Power card temp. 1490.153) 247 – – X D –
Derag limit fault 1490.161), 2) 100 – – D X –

Table 3.22 Possible Actions when Selected Alarm Appears

D = Default setting. X = Possible selection.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 145

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

1) Only these faults are configurable on the FC 202. Due to a software limitation with array parameters, all others are shown in the MCT 10 Set-
up Software. For the other parameter indices, writing any other value than its current value (that is, the default value) returns a value-out-of-
range error. Thus, it is not allowed to change the fault level for the non-configurable ones.
2) This parameter has been 1490.6 in all firmware versions up to 1.86.
3 3 3) Alarm 244, Heat sink temp., alarm 245, Heat sink sensor, and alarm 247, Power card temp. are used for multiple power cards.

146 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3.14 Parameters 15-** Drive Information 15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter
Option: Function:
Parameter group containing frequency converter
[0] * Do not No reset of the running hours counter is
information such as operating data, hardware configu-
ration, and software versions.
[1]
reset

Reset
required.

Select [1] Reset counter and press [OK] to reset

3 3
3.14.1 15-0* Operating Data counter the running hours counter
(parameter 15-01 Running Hours) and
parameter 15-08 Number of Starts to 0 (see
15-00 Operating hours
also parameter 15-01 Running Hours).
Range: Function:
0 h* [0 - 2147483647 h] View how many hours the frequency 15-08 Number of Starts
converter has run. The value is saved
Range: Function:
when the frequency converter is
turned off.
0* [0 - NOTICE!
2147483647 ]
This parameter is reset when resetting
15-01 Running Hours parameter 15-07 Reset Running Hours
Counter.
Range: Function:
0 h* [0 - View how many hours the motor has run.
This is a readout parameter only. The
2147483647 h] Reset the counter in
counter shows the number of starts and
parameter 15-07 Reset Running Hours
stops caused by a normal start/stop
Counter. The value is saved when the
command and/or when entering/leaving
frequency converter is turned off.
sleep mode.

15-02 kWh Counter

Range: Function: 3.14.2 15-1* Data Log Settings
0 kWh* [0 - Register the power consumption of
2147483647 the motor as an average value over 1 The data log enables continuous logging of up to 4 data
kWh] hour. Reset the counter in sources (parameter 15-10 Logging Source) at individual rates
parameter 15-06 Reset kWh Counter. (parameter 15-11 Logging Interval). A trigger event
(parameter 15-12 Trigger Event) and window
15-03 Power Up's (parameter 15-14 Samples Before Trigger) are used to start
Range: Function: and stop the logging conditionally.
0* [0 - 2147483647 ] View the number of times the frequency 15-10 Logging Source
converter has been powered up. Array [4]
Option: Function:
15-04 Over Temp's
[0] * None
Range: Function:
[1472]
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the number of frequency converter
[1473]
temperature faults.
[1474]
[1600] Control Word
15-05 Over Volt's
[1601] Reference [Unit]
Range: Function:
[1602] Reference %
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the number of frequency converter
[1603] Status Word
overvoltages.
[1610] Power [kW]
[1611] Power [hp]
15-06 Reset kWh Counter
[1612] Motor voltage
Option: Function:
[1613] Frequency
[0] * Do not reset No reset of the kWh counter is required. [1614] Motor Current
[1] Reset counter Press [OK] to reset the kWh counter to 0 [1616] Torque [Nm]
(see parameter 15-02 kWh Counter). [1617] Speed [RPM]
[1618] Motor Thermal

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 147

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

15-10 Logging Source 15-12 Trigger Event

Array [4] Option: Function:
Option: Function: [8] Below I low

3 3 [1622]
[1625]
Torque [%] [9] Above I high
[10] Out of speed range
[1630] DC Link Voltage [11] Below speed low
[1632] Brake Energy /s [12] Above speed high
[1633] Brake Energy /2 min [13] Out of feedb. range
[1634] Heatsink Temp. [14] Below feedb. low
[1635] Inverter Thermal [15] Above feedb. high
[1650] External Reference [16] Thermal warning
[1651] Pulse Reference [17] Mains out of range
[1652] Feedback [Unit] [18] Reversing
[1660] Digital Input [19] Warning
[1662] Analog Input 53 [20] Alarm (trip)
[1664] Analog Input 54 [21] Alarm (trip lock)
[1665] Analog Output 42 [mA] [22] Comparator 0
[1666] Digital Output [bin] [23] Comparator 1
[1675] Analog In X30/11 [24] Comparator 2
[1676] Analog In X30/12 [25] Comparator 3
[1677] Analog Out X30/8 [mA] [26] Logic rule 0
[1690] Alarm Word [27] Logic rule 1
[1692] Warning Word [28] Logic rule 2
[1694] Ext. Status Word [29] Logic rule 3
[3470] MCO Alarm Word 1 [33] Digital input DI18
[3471] MCO Alarm Word 2 [34] Digital input DI19
[35] Digital input DI27
15-11 Logging Interval [36] Digital input DI29
Array [4] [37] Digital input DI32
Range: Function: [38] Digital input DI33
Size related* [ 0 - 0 ] Enter the interval in ms between each [50] Comparator 4
sampling of the variables to be logged. [51] Comparator 5
[60] Logic rule 4
15-12 Trigger Event [61] Logic rule 5
Option: Function:
15-13 Logging Mode
Selects the trigger event. When the
Option: Function:
trigger event occurs, a window is
applied to freeze the log. The log [0] * Log always Select [0] Log always for continuous logging.
then retains a specified percentage of [1] Log once Select [1] Log once on trigger to start and stop
samples before the occurrence of the on trigger logging conditionally using
trigger event parameter 15-12 Trigger Event and
(parameter 15-14 Samples Before parameter 15-14 Samples Before Trigger.
Trigger).

[0] * False
15-14 Samples Before Trigger
[1] True Range: Function:
[2] Running 50* [0 - 100 ] Enter the percentage of all samples to be
[3] In range retained in the log before a trigger event occurs.
[4] On reference See also parameter 15-12 Trigger Event and
[5] Torque limit parameter 15-13 Logging Mode.
[6] Current Limit
[7] Out of current range

148 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3.14.3 Service Log # Alarm log data Parameter number

1 Time of trip (1 of the Parameter 0-89 Date and Time
The service log functionality saves detailed log information values): Readout or parameter 15-32 Fault
of a 5-second interval in cases when certain alarms occur. • Priority real-time Log: Time
Service technicians can analyze this information to clock (if available). 3 3
troubleshoot and optimize the frequency converter. • Priority operating
time (if RTC is not
The frequency converter can save up to 24 service log available).
records in the flash memory.
2 Alarm code Parameter 15-30 Fault Log: Error
Code
Find the list of alarms that trigger a service log record in 3 Frequency Parameter 16-13 Frequency
chapter 3.14.6 Alarms that Trigger a Service Log Record. 4 Speed (RPM) Parameter 16-17 Speed [RPM]
Application-dependent trips/alarms, for example, Safe
5 Reference (%) Parameter 16-02 Reference %
Torque Off, do not trigger a service log record.
7 DC-link voltage Parameter 16-30 DC Link Voltage
9 Motor phase U current Parameter 16-45 Motor Phase U
Sampling rate Current
There are 2 periods with different sampling rates:
10 Motor phase V current Parameter 16-46 Motor Phase V
• Slow samples: 20 samples at a rate of 250 ms Current
resulting in 5 s of history before the trip. 11 Motor phase W current Parameter 16-47 Motor Phase W

• Fast samples: 50 samples at a rate of 5 ms Current

resulting in 250 ms of detailed history before the 12 Motor phase voltage Parameter 16-12 Motor voltage
trip. 15 Control word Parameter 16-00 Control Word
16 Status word Parameter 16-03 Status Word
NOTICE!
To enable the real-time clock (RTC) stamp, use the real- Table 3.23 Service Log Data
time clock module. If real-time clock is not available, the
operating time in parameter 15-32 Fault Log: Time is
recorded.

The service log contains the elements shown in Table 3.23.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 149

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.14.4 Clearing the Service Log

The flash memory stores up to 24 records. To save more

logs, clear the service log memory.
3 3
To clear the service log:

1. In parameter 14-22 Operation Mode, select option

[5] Clear Service Log.

e30bg260.10
2. Power cycle the frequency converter. Clearing the
service log extends the power-up time by approx-
imately 1 s.
Figure 3.56 MCT 10, Read from Drive
Save the service log records using the MCT 10 Set-up
Software before clearing the service log.

Figure 3.57 shows the service log view in MCT 10 Set-up

Clear the service log after a commissioning to remove any
Software. Use the cursor to view the detailed readings at a
alarms that occurred during the testing.
specific time.

Service log indication

Parameter 16-42 Service Log Counter shows the number of
service logs stored in the memory.
The frequency converter indicates a full service log
memory in 1 of the following ways:
• The LCP shows the message:
Clear logs Service log full: 28 [M26]
• Bit 25 is set high in parameter 16-96 Maintenance
Word (0x2000000).
Performing the frequency converter initialization does not
clear the service log memory.

e30bg261.10
3.14.5 Reading the Service Log Information

Use MCT 10 Set-up Software to read the service log Figure 3.57 Service Log View, 5 s
information.

To read the service information: Use the zoom function to focus on the last 250 ms before
the fault. See Figure 3.58.
1. Open MCT 10 Set-up Software.
2. Select a frequency converter.
3. Select the Service Log plug-in.
4. Click Read from drive.

150 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3.14.7 15-2* Historic Log

View up to 50 logged data items via the array parameters

in this parameter group. Data is logged every time an
event occurs (not to be confused with SLC events). Events 3 3
in this context are defined as a change in 1 of the
following areas:
• Digital inputs.
• Digital outputs.
• Warning word.
• Alarm word.

e30bg262.10
• Status word.
• Control word.
Figure 3.58 Service Log Detailed View, 250 ms
• Extended status word.
Events are logged with value and time stamp in ms. The
3.14.6 Alarms that Trigger a Service Log time interval between 2 events depends on how often
Record events occur (maximum once every scan time). Data
logging is continuous, but if an alarm occurs, the log is
saved and the values can be viewed on the display. This
# Alarm title
feature is useful, for example when carrying out service
4 Mains phase loss
following a trip. View the historic log contained in this
5 DC voltage high
parameter via the serial communication port or via the
6 DC voltage low
display.
7 DC overvolt
8 DC undervolt 15-20 Historic Log: Event
9 Inverter overld. Array [50]
10 Motor ETR over Range: Function:
12 Torque limit 0* [0 - 255 ] View the event type of the logged events.
13 Over Current
14 Earth (ground) Fault 15-21 Historic Log: Value
16 Short Circuit Array [50]
18 Start Failed
Range: Function:
25 Brake resistor
0* [0 - View the value of the logged event. Interpret
26 Brake overload
2147483647 ] the event values according to Table 3.25:
27 Brake IGBT
28 Brake check Digital input Decimal value. See
30 U phase loss parameter 16-60 Digital
31 V phase loss Input for description after
32 W phase loss converting to binary value.
36 Mains failure Digital output Decimal value. See
37 Phase imbalance (not monitored parameter 16-66 Digital
44 Earth (ground) Fault AL44 in this SW Output [bin] for a
45 Earth (ground) Fault 2 release) description after
converting to binary value.
59 Current limit
Warning word Decimal value. See
Table 3.24 Alarms that Trigger a Service Log Record parameter 16-92 Warning
Word for a description.
NOTICE! Alarm word Decimal value. See
If an alarm has 2 states (warning/alarm), it only triggers parameter 16-90 Alarm
a service log record when going into the alarm state. Word for a description.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 151

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

15-21 Historic Log: Value 15-31 Alarm Log: Value

Array [50] Array [10]
Range: Function: Range: Function:

3 3 Status word Decimal value. See

parameter 16-03 Status
0* [-32767 - 32767 ] View an extra description of the error.
This parameter is mostly used with alarm
Word for a description 38, internal fault.
after converting to binary
value. 15-32 Alarm Log: Time
Control word Decimal value. See Array [10]
parameter 16-00 Control
Range: Function:
Word for a description.
0 s* [0 - 2147483647 s] View the time when the logged event
Extended Decimal value. See
occurred. Time is measured in s from
status word parameter 16-94 Ext. Status
frequency converter start-up.
Word for a description.

Table 3.25 Logged Events 15-33 Alarm Log: Date and Time
Array [10]
Range: Function:
15-22 Historic Log: Time
Size related* [ 0 - 0 ] Array parameter; Date & Time 0–9: This
Array [50]
parameter shows when the logged event
Range: Function: occurred.
0 ms* [0 - 2147483647 View the time at which the logged
ms] event occurred. Time is measured in 15-34 Alarm Log: Setpoint
ms since frequency converter start. The Array [10]
maximum value corresponds to
Range: Function:
approximately 24 days, which means
that the count restarts at 0 after this 0 ProcessCtrlUnit* [-999999.999 - Array parameter; status
time period. 999999.999 value 0–9. This
ProcessCtrlUnit] parameter shows the
15-23 Historic log: Date and Time status of the alarm:
0: Alarm inactive.
Array [50]
1: Alarm active.
Range: Function:
Size related* [ 0 - 0 ] Array parameter; Date & Time 0–49: This 15-35 Alarm Log: Feedback
parameter shows when the logged event Array [10]
occurred.
Range: Function:
0 ProcessCtrlUnit* [-999999.999 - 999999.999
3.14.8 15-3* Alarm Log ProcessCtrlUnit]

Parameters in this group are array parameters where up to 15-36 Alarm Log: Current Demand
10 fault logs can be viewed. 0 is the most recent logged Array [10]
data, and 9 is the oldest. Fault codes, values, and time Range: Function:
stamp can be viewed for all logged data. 0 %* [0 - 100 %]
15-30 Alarm Log: Error Code
15-37 Alarm Log: Process Ctrl Unit
Array [10]
Array [10]
Range: Function:
Option: Function:
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the fault code and look up its meaning in
[0] *
chapter 5 Troubleshooting.
[1] %
[5] PPM
[10] 1/min
[11] RPM

152 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

15-37 Alarm Log: Process Ctrl Unit 3.14.9 15-4* Drive Identification
Array [10]
Parameters containing read-only information about the
Option: Function:
hardware and software configuration of the frequency
[12]
[20]
Pulse/s
l/s
converter. 3 3
[21] l/min 15-40 FC Type
[22] l/h Range: Function:
[23] m³/s 0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the FC type. The readout is identical
[24] m³/min to the power field of the type code
[25] m³/h definition, characters 1–6.
[30] kg/s
[31] kg/min 15-41 Power Section
[32] kg/h Range: Function:
[33] t/min 0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the FC type. The readout is identical
[34] t/h to the power field of the type code
[40] m/s definition, characters 7–10.
[41] m/min
[45] m 15-42 Voltage
[60] °C Range: Function:
[70] mbar 0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the FC type. The readout is identical
[71] bar to the power field of the type code
[72] Pa definition, characters 11–12.
[73] kPa
[74] m WG 15-43 Software Version
[75] mm Hg Range: Function:
[80] kW 0* [0 - 5 ] View the combined SW version (or package
[120] GPM version) consisting of power SW and control SW.
[121] gal/s
[122] gal/min 15-44 Ordered Typecode String
[123] gal/h Range: Function:
[124] CFM 0* [0 - 40 ] View the type code string used for reordering the
[125] ft³/s frequency converter in its original configuration.
[126] ft³/min
[127] ft³/h 15-45 Actual Typecode String
[130] lb/s Range: Function:
[131] lb/min 0* [0 - 40 ] View the actual type code string.
[132] lb/h
[140] ft/s 15-46 Frequency Converter Ordering No
[141] ft/min
Range: Function:
[145] ft
0* [0 - 8 ] View the 8-digit ordering number used for
[160] °F
reordering the frequency converter in its original
[170] psi
configuration. To restore the ordering number after
[171] lb/in² the power card exchange, see
[172] in WG parameter 14-29 Service Code.
[173] ft WG
[174] in Hg 15-47 Power Card Ordering No
[180] HP Range: Function:
0* [0 - 8 ] View the power card ordering number.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 153

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

15-48 LCP Id No 15-61 Option SW Version

Range: Function: Array [8]
0* [0 - 20 ] View the LCP ID number. Range: Function:

3 3 15-49 SW ID Control Card

0* [0 - 20 ] View the installed option software version.

Range: Function: 15-62 Option Ordering No

0* [0 - 20 ] View the control card software version number. Array [8]
Range: Function:
15-50 SW ID Power Card
0* [0 - 8 ] Shows the ordering number for the installed
Range: Function: options.
0* [0 - 20 ] View the power card software version number.
15-63 Option Serial No
15-51 Frequency Converter Serial Number Array [8]
Range: Function: Range: Function:
0* [0 - 10 ] View the frequency converter serial number. 0* [0 - 18 ] View the installed option serial number.

15-53 Power Card Serial Number 15-70 Option in Slot A

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0* [0 - 19 ] View the power card serial number. 0* [0 - 30 ] View the type code string for the option installed
in slot A, and a translation of the type code string.
15-54 Config File Name For example, type code string AX means no
Array [5] option.
Range: Function:
Size related* [0 - 16 ] Shows the special configuration 15-71 Slot A Option SW Version
filenames. Range: Function:
0* [0 - 20 ] View the software version for the option installed
15-58 SmartStart Filename in slot A.
Range: Function:
Size related* [0 - 20 ] Shows the SmartStart filename. 15-72 Option in Slot B
Range: Function:
15-59 Filename 0* [0 - 30 ] View the type code string for the option installed
Range: Function: in slot B, and a translation of the type code string.
Size related* [0 - 16 ] Shows the currently used CSIV For example, for type code string BX, the
(costumer-specific initial values) translation is No option.
filename.
15-73 Slot B Option SW Version
Range: Function:
3.14.10 15-6* Option Ident. 0* [0 - 20 ] View the software version for the option installed
in slot B.
This read-only parameter group contains information about
the hardware and software configuration of the options 15-74 Option in Slot C0/E0
installed in slots A, B, C0, and C1.
Range: Function:
15-60 Option Mounted 0* [0 - 30 ] View the type code string for the option installed
Array [8] in slot C, and a translation of the type code string.
Range: Function: For example, type code string CXXXX means no
option.
0* [0 - 30 ] Shows the type of the installed option.

154 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

15-75 Slot C0/E0 Option SW Version

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 20 ] View the software version for the option installed
in slot C.
3 3
15-76 Option in Slot C1/E1
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 30 ] Shows the type code string for the options
(CXXXX if there is no option).

15-77 Slot C1/E1 Option SW Version

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 20 ] Software version for the installed option in option
slot C.

15-80 Fan Running Hours

Range: Function:
0 h* [0 - 2147483647 h] This parameter shows how many
hours the external fan has run. The
value is saved when the frequency
converter is turned off.

3.14.11 15-9* Parameter Info

15-92 Defined Parameters

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 9999 ] View a list of all defined parameters in the
frequency converter. The list ends with 0.

15-93 Modified Parameters

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 9999 ] View a list of the parameters that have been
changed from their default setting. The list ends
with 0. Changes may not be visible until up to
30 s after implementation.

15-98 Drive Identification

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 40 ]

15-99 Parameter Metadata

Array [30]
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 9999 ] This parameter contains data used by the MCT
10 Set-up Software tool.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 155

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.15 Parameters 16-** Data Readouts 16-09 Custom Readout

Range: Function:
parameter 0-32 Custom Readout
3.15.1 16-0* General Status
3 3 Max Value.

16-00 Control Word

3.15.2 16-1* Motor Status
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the control word sent from the frequency
16-10 Power [kW]
converter via the serial communication port in
hex code. Range: Function:
0 kW* [0 - Shows motor power in kW. The value shown
16-01 Reference [Unit] 10000 is calculated based on the actual motor
Range: Function: kW] voltage and motor current. The value is
filtered, and therefore approximately 1.3 s
0 ReferenceFeed- [-999999 - View the present reference
may pass from when an input value changes
backUnit* 999999 value applied on impulse or
to when the data readout values change. The
ReferenceFeed- analog basis in the unit
resolution of readout value on fieldbus is in
backUnit] resulting from the configu-
10 W steps.
ration selected in
parameter 1-00 Configu-
16-11 Power [hp]
ration Mode (Hz, Nm, or
RPM). Range: Function:
0 hp* [0 - View the motor power in hp. The value
16-02 Reference [%] 10000 hp] shown is calculated based on the actual
Range: Function: motor voltage and motor current. The value
is filtered, and therefore approximately 1.3 ms
0 %* [-200 - View the total reference. The total reference
may pass from when an input value changes
200 %] is the sum of digital, analog, preset, bus,
to when the data readout values change.
and freeze references, plus catch up and
slow down.
16-12 Motor Voltage
16-03 Status Word Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0 V* [0 - 6000 V] View the motor voltage, a calculated value
used for controlling the motor.
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the status word sent from the frequency
converter via the serial communication port in
16-13 Frequency
hex code.
Range: Function:
16-05 Main Actual Value [%] 0 Hz* [0 - 6500 Hz] View the motor frequency without
Range: Function: resonance damping.

0.00 %* [-100.00 - View the 2 byte word sent with the

16-14 Motor current
100.00 %] status word to the fieldbus master
reporting the main actual value. Refer to Range: Function:
the VLT®PROFIBUS DP MCA 101 0 A* [0 - 10000 View the motor current measured as an
Programming Guide for further details. A] average value, IRMS. The value is filtered, and
thus approximately 1.3 s may pass from
16-09 Custom Readout when an input value changes to when the
Range: Function: data readout values change.

0 CustomRea- [-999999.99 - View the user-defined readouts

doutUnit* 999999.99 as defined in
CustomRea- parameter 0-30 Custom Readout
doutUnit] Unit, parameter 0-31 Custom
Readout Min Value, and

156 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

16-15 Frequency [%] 16-22 Torque [%]

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0 %* [-100 - View a 2-byte word reporting the actual motor Shows the actual torque yielded in percentage of
100 %] frequency (without resonance damping) as a
percentage (scale 0000–4000 hex) of
the rated torque, based on the setting of the
motor size and rated speed in 3 3
parameter 4-19 Max Output Frequency. Set parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] or
parameter 9-16 PCD Read Configuration index 1 parameter 1-21 Motor Power [HP], and
to send it with the status word instead of the parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed.
MAV. This is the value monitored by the broken-belt
function set in parameter group 22-6* Broken Belt
16-16 Torque [Nm] Detection.
Range: Function:
16-23 Motor Shaft Power [kW]
0 [-30000 - View the torque value with sign, applied to
Nm* 30000 the motor shaft. Linearity is not exact Range: Function:
Nm] between 110% motor current and torque in 0 kW* [0 - 10000 Shows the power applied to the motor
relation to the rated torque. Some motors kW] shaft. The shown value is an estimate
supply more than 160% torque. Therefore, the based on the motor shaft torque and
minimum and the maximum values depend motor speed.
on the maximum motor current and the
motor used. The value is filtered, and thus 16-24 Calibrated Stator Resistance
approximately 1.3 s may pass from when an Range: Function:
input changes value to when the data
0.0000 Ohm* [0.0000 - 100.0000 Shows the calibrated
readout values change.
Ohm] stator resistance.

16-17 Speed [RPM] 16-26 Power Filtered [kW]

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0 RPM* [-30000 - 30000 RPM] View the actual motor RPM.
0 kW* [0 - 10000 kW]

16-18 Motor Thermal 16-27 Power Filtered [hp]

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - View the calculated thermal load on the motor. 0 hp* [0 - 10000 hp]
100 %] The cutout limit is 100%. The basis for
calculation is the ETR function selected in 3.15.3 16-3* Drive Status
parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection.

16-30 DC Link Voltage

16-19 KTY sensor temperature
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0 V* [0 - 10000 V] View a measured value. The value is filtered
0 °C* [0 - 0 °C] Returning the actual temperature on KTY
with a 30 ms time constant.
sensor built into the motor.
See parameter group 1-9* Motor Temperature.
16-32 Brake Energy /s
16-20 Motor Angle Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0 kW* [0 - 10000 kW] View the brake power transmitted to an
external brake resistor, stated as an
0 N/A* [0 - 65535 View the current encoder/resolver angle
instant value.
N/A] offset relative to the index position. The
value range of 0–65535 corresponds to
0–2xpi (radian).

16-22 Torque [%]

Range: Function:
0% [-200 - This is a readout parameter only.
* 200 %]

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 157

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

16-33 Brake Energy Average 16-40 Logging Buffer Full

Range: Function: Option: Function:
0 kW* [0 - 10000 View the brake power transmitted to an buffer is never full when parameter 15-13 Logging

3 3 kW] external brake resistor. The mean power is

calculated on an average level based on the
[0] * No
Mode is set to [0] Log always.

selected time period within

[1] Yes
parameter 2-13 Brake Power Monitoring.
16-42 Service Log Counter
16-34 Heatsink Temp. Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0* [0 - Shows the number of service logs stored in the
0 °C* [0 - View the frequency converter heat sink 24 ] ServiceLog file. If the ServiceLog file is full, clear the
255 °C] temperature. The cutout limit is 90 ±5 °C (194 logged data by selecting option [5] Clear service logs
±9 °F), and the motor cuts back in at 60 in parameter 14-22 Operation Mode. The logged data
±5 °C (140 ±9 °F). is deleted on the next power-up.

16-35 Inverter Thermal 16-49 Current Fault Source

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %] View the thermal load on the inverter. The 0* [0 - 8 ] The value indicates source of current fault,
cutout limit is 100%. including:
• Short circuit.
16-36 Inv. Nom. Current
• Overcurrent.
Range: Function:
• Imbalance of supply voltage (from left):
Size [0.01 - View the inverter nominal current,
1–4 – inverter, 5–8 – rectifier, 0 – no fault
related* 10000 A] which should match the nameplate
recorded.
data on the connected motor. The
data is used for calculation of torque, After a short circuit alarm (Imax2), or overcurrent alarm
motor overload protection, and so on. (Imax1), or imbalance of supply voltage, this contains the
power card number associated with the alarm. It only
16-37 Inv. Max. Current holds 1 number indicating the highest priority power card
Range: Function: number (master first). The value persists on power cycle,
Size [0.01 - View the inverter maximum current, but if a new alarm occurs it is overwritten by the new
related* 10000 A] which should match the nameplate power card number (even if it is a lower priority number).
data on the connected motor. The The value is only cleared when the alarm log is cleared
data is used for calculation of torque, (that is a 3-finger reset would reset the readout to 0).
motor overload protection, and so on.
3.15.4 16-5* Ref. & Feedb.
16-38 SL Controller State
Range: Function: 16-50 External Reference
0* [0 - 100 ] View the state of the event under execution by Range: Function:
the SL controller.
0* [-200 - 200 ] View the total reference, the sum of digital,
analog, preset, fieldbus, and freeze references,
16-39 Control Card Temp. plus catch up and slow down.
Range: Function:
0 °C* [0 - 100 °C] View the temperature on the control card,
stated in °C.

16-40 Logging Buffer Full

Option: Function:
View whether the logging buffer is full (see
chapter 3.14.2 15-1* Data Log Settings). The logging

158 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

16-52 Feedback[Unit] 16-58 PID Output [%]

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0 [-999999.999 View value of resulting feedback 0 %* [0 - 100 %] This parameter returns the frequency
ProcessCtrlUnit* - 999999.999 value after processing of feedback
ProcessCtrlUnit] 1-3, see:
converter closed-loop PID controller output
value in percent. 3 3
• Parameter 16-54 Feedback
1 [Unit]. 16-59 Adjusted Setpoint
• Parameter 16-55 Feedback Range: Function:
2 [Unit]. 0 ProcessCtrlUnit* [-999999.999 - Shows the value of
999999.999 the adjusted
• Parameter 16-56 Feedback
3 [Unit]. ProcessCtrlUnit] setpoint.

in the feedback manager.

See parameter group 20-0* 3.15.5 16-6* Inputs and Outputs

Feedback.
16-60 Digital Input
The value is limited by settings in
parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference Range: Function:
and parameter 3-03 Maximum 0 [0 - View the signal states from the active digital
Reference. Units as set in N/A* 1023 inputs. For example, input 18 corresponds to bit
parameter 20-12 Reference/ N/A] 5. 0=No signal, 1=connected signal.
Feedback Unit.
Bit 0 Digital input terminal 33.
16-53 Digi Pot Reference Bit 1 Digital input terminal 32.
Bit 2 Digital input terminal 29.
Range: Function:
Bit 3 Digital input terminal 27.
0* [-200 - 200 ] View the contribution of the digital potenti-
Bit 4 Digital input terminal 19.
ometer to the actual reference.
Bit 5 Digital input terminal 18.
Bit 6 Digital input terminal 37.
16-54 Feedback 1 [Unit]
Bit 7 Digital input GP I/O terminal
Range: Function:
X30/4.
0 ProcessCtrlUnit* [-999999.999 - View value of
Bit 8 Digital input GP I/O terminal
999999.999 feedback 1, see
X30/3.
ProcessCtrlUnit] parameter group 20-0*
Bit 9 Digital input GP I/O terminal
Feedback.
X30/2.
Bits 10–63 Reserved for future terminals.
16-55 Feedback 2 [Unit]
Range: Function: Table 3.26 Digital Input Bits
0 [-999999.999 - View value of feedback 2, see
ProcessCtrlUnit* 999999.999 parameter group 20-0*
16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting
ProcessCtrlUnit] Feedback.
Option: Function:
The unit is set in
View the setting of input terminal 53.
parameter 20-12 Reference/
Feedback Unit. [0] * Current
[1] Voltage
16-56 Feedback 3 [Unit]
16-62 Analog Input 53
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0 ProcessCtrlUnit* [-999999.999 - View value of
0* [-20 - 20 ] View the actual value at input 53.
999999.999 feedback 3, see
ProcessCtrlUnit] parameter group 20-0*
Feedback.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 159

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting 16-71 Relay Output [bin]

View the setting of input terminal 54. Range: Function:
Option: Function:

3 3 [0] *
[1]
Current
Voltage

16-64 Analog Input 54

Range: Function:
0* [-20 - 20 ] View the actual value at input 54.

16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA]

Range: Function: Figure 3.59 Relay Settings
0* [0 - 30 ] View the actual value at output 42 in mA. The
value shown reflects the selection in
parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output.
16-72 Counter A
16-66 Digital Output [bin] Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0* [-2147483648 View the present value of counter A.
- 2147483647 ] Counters are useful as comparator operands,
0* [0 - 15 ] View the binary value of all digital outputs.
see parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand.
Reset or change the value either via digital
16-67 Freq. Input #29 [Hz]
inputs (parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs)
Range: Function:
or by using an SLC action
0 N/A* [0 - 130000 N/A] View the actual frequency rate on (parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action).
terminal 29.
16-73 Counter B
16-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz]
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0* [-2147483648 View the present value of counter B.
0 N/A* [0 - 130000 N/A] View the actual frequency rate on - 2147483647 ] Counters are useful as comparator operands,
terminal 33. parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand.
Reset or change the value either via digital
16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz] inputs (parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs)
Range: Function: or by using an SLC action
0 N/A* [0 - 40000 N/A] View the actual value on terminal 27 in (parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action).
digital output mode.
16-75 Analog In X30/11
16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz] Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0* [-20 - 20 ] View the actual value at input X30/11 of VLT®
0 N/A* [0 - 40000 N/A] View the actual value of pulses on General Purpose I/O MCB 101.
terminal 29 in digital output mode.
16-76 Analog In X30/12
16-71 Relay Output [bin] Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0* [-20 - 20 ] View the actual value at input X30/12 of VLT®
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the settings of all relays. General Purpose I/O MCB 101.

16-77 Analog Out X30/8 [mA]

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 30 ] View the actual value at input X30/8 in mA.

160 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

16-78 Analog Out X45/1 [mA] 16-86 FC Port REF 1

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0.000 [0.000 - Shows the actual output value at 0* [-200 - View the 2-byte status word (STW) sent to the
N/A* 30.000 N/A] terminal X45/1. The value shown
reflects the selection in
200 ] fieldbus master. Interpretation of the status word
depends on the fieldbus option installed and the 3 3
parameter 6-70 Terminal X45/1 Output. control word profile selected in
parameter 8-10 Control Profile.
16-79 Analog Out X45/3 [mA]
Range: Function: 16-89 Configurable Alarm/Warning Word
0.000 [0.000 - Shows the actual output value at Range: Function:
N/A* 30.000 N/A] terminal X45/3. The value shown 0* [0 - 65535 ] Shows the alarm/warning word that is
reflects the selection in configured in parameter 8-17 Configurable
parameter 6-80 Terminal X45/3 Output. Alarm and Warningword.

3.15.6 16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port 3.15.7 16-9* Diagnosis Readouts

Parameters for reporting the bus references and control NOTICE!

words. When using MCT 10 Set-up Software, the readout
16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1 parameters can only be read online, that is as the actual
status. This means that the status is not stored in the
Range: Function:
MCT 10 Set-up Software file.
0* [0 - View the 2-byte control word (CTW) received
65535 ] from the fieldbus master. Interpretation of the
control word depends on the fieldbus option 16-90 Alarm Word
installed and the control word profile selected in Range: Function:
parameter 8-10 Control Profile. 0* [0 - 4294967295 ] Show the alarm word sent via the serial
For more information, refer to the relevant communication port in hex code.
fieldbus manual.
16-91 Alarm Word 2
16-82 Fieldbus REF 1 Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0* [0 - 4294967295 ] View the alarm word 2 sent via the serial
0* [-200 - 200 ] View the 2-byte word sent with the control communication port in hex code.
word from the fieldbus master to set the
reference value. 16-92 Warning Word
For more information, refer to the relevant
Range: Function:
fieldbus manual.
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] Show the warning word sent via the
serial communication port in hex code.
16-84 Comm. Option STW
Range: Function: 16-93 Warning Word 2
0* [0 - 65535 ] Show the status word of the extended fieldbus
Range: Function:
communication option.
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] View the warning word 2 sent via the
For more information, refer to the relevant
serial communication port in hex code.
fieldbus manual.

16-94 Ext. Status Word

16-85 FC Port CTW 1
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] Returns the extended status word sent
0* [0 - View the 2-byte control word (CTW) received
via the serial communication port in hex
65535 ] from the fieldbus master. Interpretation of the
code.
control word depends on the fieldbus option
installed and the control word profile selected
in parameter 8-10 Control Profile.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 161

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

16-95 Ext. Status Word 2 16-96 Maintenance Word

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] Returns the extended warning word 2 Position Valve Fan Pump Motor

3 3 sent via the serial communication port in

hex code.
4⇒ bea-
rings
bea-
rings
bea-
rings
Position Pump Tempe- Flow Pres-
16-96 Maintenance Word 3⇒ seals rature trans- sure
Range: Function: trans- mitter trans-
mitter mitter
0* [0 - Readout of the preventive maintenance word.
4294967295 ] The bits reflect the status for the Position Drive Drive Filter Fan
programmed preventive maintenance events 2⇒ system cooling belt
in parameter group 23-1* Maintenance. 13 bits health fan
show combinations of all the possible items: check

• Bit 0: Motor bearings. Position

– – –
War-
1⇒ ranty
• Bit 1: Pump bearings.
0hex – – – –
• Bit 2: Fan bearings. 1hex – – – +
• Bit 3: Valve. 2hex – – + –
3hex – – + +
• Bit 4: Pressure transmitter.
4hex – + – –
• Bit 5: Flow transmitter.
5hex – + – +
• Bit 6: Temperature transmitter. 6hex – + + –
• Bit 7: Pump seals. 7hex – + + +
8hex + – – –
• Bit 8: Fan belt.
9hex + – – +
• Bit 9: Filter.
Ahex + – + –
• Bit 10: Frequency converter cooling Bhex + – + +
fan. Chex + + – –
• Bit 11: Frequency converter system Dhex + + – +
health check. Ehex + + + –
Fhex + + + +
• Bit 12: Warranty.

• Bit 13: Maintenance Text 0. Table 3.27 Maintenance Word

• Bit 14: Maintenance Text 1.
Example:
• Bit 15: Maintenance Text 2.
The preventive maintenance word shows
• Bit 16: Maintenance Text 3. 040Ahex.

• Bit 17: Maintenance Text 4.

Position 1 2 3 4
• Bit 25: Service log full. Hex value 0 4 0 A

Table 3.28 Example

The 1st digit 0 indicates that no items from

the 4th row require maintenance.
The 2nd digit 4 refers to the 3rd row indicating
that the frequency converter cooling fan
requires maintenance.
The 3rd digit 0 indicates that no items from
the 2nd row require maintenance.
The 4th digit A refers to the top row
indicating that the valve and the pump
bearings require maintenance.

162 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3.16 Parameters 18-** Data Readouts 2 18-03 Maintenance Log: Date and Time
Array [10]
3.16.1 18-0* Maintenance Log
Range: Function:
This group contains the last 10 preventive maintenance NOTICE! 3 3
events. Maintenance log 0 is the latest and maintenance The frequency converter has no back-
log 9 the oldest. up of the clock function. The set date/
By selecting 1 of the logs and pressing [OK], the time resets to default (2000-01-01
maintenance item, action, and time of the occurrence are 00:00) after a power-down unless a
shown in parameter 18-00 Maintenance Log: Item – real-time clock module with back-up
parameter 18-03 Maintenance Log: Date and Time. is installed. In parameter 0-79 Clock
Fault, it is possible to program a
The alarm log key allows access to both alarm log and warning in case the clock has not
maintenance log. been set properly, for example after a
power-down. Incorrect setting of the
18-00 Maintenance Log: Item clock affects the time stamps for the
Array [10] maintenance events.
Shows the fault code. For information about the fault code, see
the design guide.
Range: Function: NOTICE!
0* [0 - 255 ] Find the meaning of the maintenance item in When mounting a VLT® Analog I/O MCB 109 option card,
parameter 23-10 Maintenance Item. a battery back-up of date and time is included.

18-01 Maintenance Log: Action 3.16.2 18-1* Emergency Mode Log

Array [10]
Shows the fault code. For information about the fault code, see The log covers the latest 10 faults which have been
the design guide. suppressed by the emergency mode function. See
Range: Function: parameter group 24-0* Emergency Mode. The log can be
viewed either via the following parameters or by pressing
0* [0 - 255 ] Find the meaning of the maintenance action in
[Alarm Log] on the LCP and selecting Emergency mode log.
parameter 23-11 Maintenance Action.
It is not possible to reset the emergency mode log.
18-02 Maintenance Log: Time 18-10 Emergency Mode Log:Event
Array [10] Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0* [0 - 255 ] This parameter contains an array with 10
0 s* [0 - 2147483647 s] Shows when the logged event elements. The number read represents a fault
occurred. Time is measured in s since code, which corresponds to a specific alarm. This
last power-up. can be found in the chapter Troubleshooting in
the design guide.
18-03 Maintenance Log: Date and Time
18-11 Emergency Mode Log: Time
Array [10]
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0 s* [0 - 2147483647 This parameter contains an array with
Size [0 - Shows when the logged event occurred.
s] 10 elements. The parameter shows
related* 0]
NOTICE! when the logged event occurred. Time
This requires that the date and time is is measured in seconds since the first
programmed in parameter 0-70 Date start of the motor.
and Time.

Date format depends on the setting in

parameter 0-71 Date Format, while the time
format depends on the setting in
parameter 0-72 Time Format.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 163

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

18-12 Emergency Mode Log: Date and Time 18-34 Analog Out X42/9 [V]
Range: Function: Range: Function:
Size [0 - This parameter contains an array with 10 0* [0 - 30 ] Readout of the value of the signal applied to

3 3 related* 0] elements. The parameter shows at which

date and time the logged event occurred.
terminal X42/9 on the VLT® analog I/O card MCB
109.
The function relies on the fact that the actual The value shown reflects the selection in
date and time has been set in parameter 26-50 Terminal X42/9 Output.
parameter 0-70 Date and Time. Note: There is
no built-in battery back-up of the clock. Use 18-35 Analog Out X42/11 [V]
an external back-up, for example the one in Range: Function:
the VLT® Analog I/O MCB 109 Analog I/O
0* [0 - 30 ] Readout of the value of the signal applied to
option card. See parameter group 0-7* Clock
terminal X42/11 on the VLT® analog I/O card MCB
Settings.
109.
The value shown reflects the selection in
3.16.3 18-3* Analog Readouts parameter 26-60 Terminal X42/11 Output.

18-36 Analog Input X48/2 [mA]

18-30 Analog Input X42/1
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0* [-20 - 20 ] View the actual current measured at input X48/2
0* [-20 - Readout of the value of the signal applied to
(VLT® Sensor Input Card MCB 114).
20 ] terminal X42/1 on the VLT® analog I/O card MCB
109.
18-37 Temp. Input X48/4
The units of the value shown in the LCP
correspond to the mode selected in Range: Function:
parameter 26-00 Terminal X42/1 Mode. 0* [-500 - View the actual temperature measured at input
500 ] X48/4 (VLT® Sensor Input Card MCB 114). The
18-31 Analog Input X42/3 temperature unit is based on the selection in
Range: Function: parameter 35-00 Term. X48/4 Temperature Unit.

0* [-20 - Readout of the value of the signal applied to

18-38 Temp. Input X48/7
20 ] terminal X42/3 on the VLT® analog I/O card MCB
109. Range: Function:
The units of the value shown in the LCP 0* [-500 - View the actual temperature measured at input
correspond to the mode selected in 500 ] X48/7 (VLT® Sensor Input Card MCB 114). The
parameter 26-01 Terminal X42/3 Mode. temperature unit is based on the selection in
parameter 35-02 Term. X48/7 Temperature Unit.
18-32 Analog Input X42/5
Range: Function: 18-39 Temp. Input X48/10
0* [-20 - Readout of the value of the signal applied to Range: Function:
20 ] terminal X42/5 on the VLT® analog I/O card MCB 0* [-500 - View the actual temperature measured at input
109. 500 ] X48/10 (VLT® Sensor Input Card MCB 114). The
The units of the value shown in the LCP temperature unit is based on the selection in
correspond to the mode selected in parameter 35-04 Term. X48/10 Temperature Unit.
parameter 26-02 Terminal X42/5 Mode.
18-50 Sensorless Readout [unit]
18-33 Analog Out X42/7 [V] Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0 SensorlessUnit* [-999999.999 - 999999.999
0* [0 - 30 ] Readout of the value of the signal applied to SensorlessUnit]
terminal X42/7 on the VLT® analog I/O card MCB
109.
The value shown reflects the selection in
parameter 26-40 Terminal X42/7 Output.

164 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3.16.4 18-6* Inputs & Outputs 2

18-60 Digital Input 2

Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 65535 ] View the signal states from the active digital
3 3
inputs on the VLT® Advanced Cascade
Controller MCO 102: Counting from right to left
the positions in the binary are: DI7...DI1 ⇒ pos.
2 ...pos. 8.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 165

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.17 Parameters 20-** FC Closed Loop

Closed-loop PID whether the relevant system is defined as "normal"
This parameter group is used for configuring the closed- (default) or "fast", which can be modified in
3 3 loop PID controller that controls the output frequency of
the frequency converter.
parameter 20-71 Controller Performance. A fast system
might be a well-defined irrigation system with short ramp
times that requires rapid response to changes in desired
Closed-loop DRC
water pressure or opened valves.
DRC (Disturbance Rejection Control) improves adherence
to the desired process control setpoint (for example, NOTICE!
desired water pressure) by responding more rapidly to DRC is not yet recommended for usage in systems that
both incidental load disturbances and changes in setpoint. utilize Cascade Controller functionality (for example,
DRC reacts rapidly to ensure the system quickly returns to municipal water distribution systems).
the desired pressurization. This improved regulation
ensures process consistency and reduces oscillations that
may adversely affect mechanical infrastructure. DRC relies
3.17.1 20-0* Feedback
on a proprietary control algorithm that compensates for
any behavior observed as deviating from the expected This parameter group is used to configure the feedback
behavior based on the basic physical model generated by signal for the closed-loop PID controller. Whether the
DRC Identify. DRC Control thus intrinsically depends on the frequency converter is in closed-loop mode or open-loop
system characteristics measured by mode, the feedback signals can be shown on the LCP
parameter 20-79 Autotuning, when it is set to SPC. The DRC display. It can also be used to control a frequency
controller is then engaged based on the measured system converter analog output, and be transmitted over various
information retrieved during the auto-tuning process. DRC serial communication protocols.
responsiveness is initially set to a value that depends on

130BA354.12
Setpoint to
0% Reference
Handling
Setpoint 1
P 20-21

Setpoint 2
P 20-22 0%

Multi setpoint min.

Setpoint 3
Multi setpoint max.
P 20-23
0%

Feedback
Feedback conv. Feedback 1 Feedback 1 only
Feedback 1 Source
P 20-01 Feedback 2 only
P 20-00 Feedback 3 only
Sum (1+2+3)
Feedback 2 Source Feedback conv. Feedback 2 0%
Difference (1-2)
P 20-04
P 20-03 Average (1+2+3)
Minimum (1|2|3)
Feedback 3 Source Feedback conv. Feedback 3 Maximum (1|2|3)
P 20-07
P 20-06

Feedback Function
P 20-20
Figure 3.60 Input Signals in Closed-loop PID Controller

166 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

20-00 Feedback 1 Source 20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion

Option: Function: This parameter allows a conversion function to be applied to

NOTICE! feedback 1.

3 3
[0] Linear has no effect on the feedback.
If feedback is not used, set its
[1] Square root is commonly used when a pressure sensor is used
source to [0] No Function.
to provide flow feedback (( flow ∝ pressure)).
Parameter 20-20 Feedback Function
determines how the PID controller Option: Function:
uses the 3 possible feedbacks. [0] * Linear
[1] Square root
Up to 3 different feedback signals can
20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit
be used to provide the feedback signal
for the frequency converter’s PID Option: Function:
controller. NOTICE!
This parameter defines which input is This parameter is only available when
used as the source of the first feedback using pressure to temperature feedback
signal. conversion.
Analog input X30/11 and analog input If option [0] Linear is selected in
X30/12 refer to inputs on VLT® General parameter 20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion, the
Purpose I/O MCB 101. setting of any option in
[0] No function parameter 20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit
[1] Analog Input 53
does not matter as a conversion is 1-to-1.
[2] * Analog Input 54
[3] Pulse input 29 This parameter determines the unit that is used
for this feedback source, before applying the
[4] Pulse input 33
feedback conversion of parameter 20-01 Feedback
[7] Analog Input
1 Conversion. This unit is not used by the PID
X30/11
controller.
[8] Analog Input
X30/12 [0]
[9] Analog Input [1] %
X42/1 [5] PPM
[10] Analog Input [10] 1/min
X42/3 [11] RPM
[11] Analog Input [12] Pulse/s
X42/5 [20] l/s
[15] Analog Input [21] l/min
X48/2 [22] l/h
[99] Normal [23] m³/s
Feedback [24] m³/min
[100] Bus Feedback 1 [25] m³/h
[101] Bus Feedback 2 [30] kg/s
[102] Bus feedback 3 [31] kg/min
[104] Sensorless Flow Requires set-up by MCT 10 Set-up [32] kg/h
Software with sensorless plug-in. [33] t/min
[105] Sensorless Requires set-up by MCT 10 Set-up [34] t/h
Pressure Software with sensorless plug-in. [40] m/s
[41] m/min
[200] Ext. Closed Loop
1 [45] m

[201] Ext. Closed Loop [60] °C

2 [70] mbar
[202] Ext. Closed Loop [71] bar
3 [72] Pa
[73] kPa

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 167

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit 20-04 Feedback 2 Conversion

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[74] m WG See parameter 20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion for

3 3 [75]
[80]
mm Hg
kW [0] * Linear
details.

[120] GPM [1] Square root

[121] gal/s
[122] gal/min 20-05 Feedback 2 Source Unit
[123] gal/h See parameter 20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit for details.
[124] CFM Option: Function:
[125] ft³/s [0] * Linear
[126] ft³/min
[127] ft³/h 20-06 Feedback 3 Source
[130] lb/s Option: Function:
[131] lb/min See parameter 20-00 Feedback 1
[132] lb/h Source for details.
[140] ft/s [0] * No function
[141] ft/min [1] Analog Input 53
[145] ft [2] Analog Input 54
[160] °F [3] Pulse input 29
[170] psi [4] Pulse input 33
[171] lb/in² [7] Analog Input X30/11
[172] in WG [8] Analog Input X30/12
[173] ft WG [9] Analog Input X42/1
[174] in Hg [10] Analog Input X42/3
[180] HP [11] Analog Input X42/5
20-03 Feedback 2 Source [15] Analog Input X48/2
[99] Normal Feedback
Option: Function:
[100] Bus Feedback 1
See parameter 20-00 Feedback 1
[101] Bus Feedback 2
Source for details.
[102] Bus feedback 3
[0] * No function [104] Sensorless Flow
[1] Analog Input 53 [105] Sensorless Pressure
[2] Analog Input 54 [200] Ext. Closed Loop 1
[3] Pulse input 29 [201] Ext. Closed Loop 2
[4] Pulse input 33 [202] Ext. Closed Loop 3
[7] Analog Input X30/11
[8] Analog Input X30/12 20-07 Feedback 3 Conversion
[9] Analog Input X42/1 Option: Function:
[10] Analog Input X42/3 See parameter 20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion for
[11] Analog Input X42/5 details.
[15] Analog Input X48/2 [0] * Linear
[99] Normal Feedback [1] Square root
[100] Bus Feedback 1
[101] Bus Feedback 2 20-08 Feedback 3 Source Unit
[102] Bus feedback 3 See parameter 20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit for details.
[104] Sensorless Flow Option: Function:
[105] Sensorless Pressure [0]
[200] Ext. Closed Loop 1 [1] %
[201] Ext. Closed Loop 2 [5] PPM
[202] Ext. Closed Loop 3 [10] 1/min

168 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

20-08 Feedback 3 Source Unit 20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit

See parameter 20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit for details. This parameter determines the unit that is used for the setpoint
Option: Function: reference and feedback that the PID controller uses for

3 3
controlling the output frequency of the frequency converter.
[11] RPM
[12] Pulse/s Option: Function:
[20] l/s [0]
[21] l/min [1] %
[22] l/h [5] PPM
[23] m³/s [10] 1/min
[24] m³/min [11] RPM
[25] m³/h [12] Pulse/s
[30] kg/s [20] l/s
[31] kg/min [21] l/min
[32] kg/h [22] l/h
[33] t/min [23] m³/s
[34] t/h [24] m³/min
[40] m/s [25] m³/h
[41] m/min [30] kg/s
[45] m [31] kg/min
[60] °C [32] kg/h
[70] mbar [33] t/min
[71] bar [34] t/h
[72] Pa [40] m/s
[73] kPa [41] m/min
[74] m WG [45] m
[75] mm Hg [60] °C
[80] kW [70] mbar
[120] GPM [71] bar
[121] gal/s [72] Pa
[122] gal/min [73] kPa
[123] gal/h [74] m WG
[124] CFM [75] mm Hg
[125] ft³/s [80] kW
[126] ft³/min [120] GPM
[127] ft³/h [121] gal/s
[130] lb/s [122] gal/min
[131] lb/min [123] gal/h
[132] lb/h [124] CFM
[140] ft/s [125] ft³/s
[141] ft/min [126] ft³/min
[145] ft [127] ft³/h
[160] °F [130] lb/s
[170] psi [131] lb/min
[171] lb/in² [132] lb/h
[172] in WG [140] ft/s
[173] ft WG [141] ft/min
[174] in Hg [145] ft
[180] HP [160] °F
[170] psi
[171] lb/in²
[172] in WG

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 169

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit

This parameter determines the unit that is used for the setpoint
reference and feedback that the PID controller uses for

3 3
controlling the output frequency of the frequency converter.
Option: Function:
[173] ft WG
[174] in Hg
[180] HP

170 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3.17.2 20-2* Feedback/Setpoint output, and be transmitted over various serial communi-
cation protocols.
This parameter group is used to determine how the PID
controller uses the 3 possible feedback signals to control The frequency converter can be configured to handle
the output frequency of the frequency converter. This multi-zone applications. 2 different multi-zone applications 3 3
group is also used to store the 3 internal setpoint are supported:
references. • Multi-zone, single setpoint.
Parameter 20-20 Feedback Function • Multi-zone, multi-setpoint.
This parameter determines how the 3 possible feedbacks The difference between the 2 is illustrated by the following
are used to control the output frequency of the frequency examples:
converter.

NOTICE! Example 1 – multi-zone, single setpoint

Any unused feedback must be set to [0] No function in its In an office building, a VAV (variable air volume) water
feedback source parameter 20-00 Feedback 1 Source, system must ensure a minimum pressure at selected VAV
parameter 20-03 Feedback 2 Source, or boxes. Due to the varying pressure losses in each duct, the
parameter 20-06 Feedback 3 Source. pressure at each VAV box cannot be assumed to be the
same. The minimum pressure required is the same for all
The feedback resulting from the function selected in VAV boxes. Select option [3] Minimum in
parameter 20-20 Feedback Function is used by the PID parameter 20-20 Feedback Function to set up this control
controller to control the output frequency of the frequency method. Enter the pressure in parameter 20-21 Setpoint 1.
converter. This feedback can also be shown on the The PID controller increases the speed of the fan if any
frequency converter display, be used to control an analog feedback is below the setpoint and decreases the speed of
the fan if all feedbacks are above the setpoint.

130BA353.10
FC 102

P
Zone 1
Damper
Supply VAV
air fan Box

P
Zone 2

VAV
Cooling/ Box
heating coil
Damper
P
Zone 3

Damper VAV
Return air fan Box

Figure 3.61 Multi-zone Application Scheme

Example 2 – multi-zone, multi-setpoint individual setpoints, the PID controller decreases the fan
The previous example illustrates the use of multi-zone, speed.
multi-setpoint control. If the zones require different
20-20 Feedback Function
pressures for each VAV box, each setpoint may be specified
in parameter 20-21 Setpoint 1, parameter 20-22 Setpoint 2, Option: Function:
and parameter 20-23 Setpoint 3. By selecting [5] Multi [0] Sum Sets up the PID controller to use the sum of
setpoint minimum in parameter 20-20 Feedback Function, feedback 1, feedback 2, and feedback 3 as the
the PID controller increases the fan speed if any feedback feedback.
value is below its setpoint. If all feedbacks are above their

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 171

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

20-20 Feedback Function 20-20 Feedback Function

Option: Function: Option: Function:
The sum of setpoint 1 and any other references NOTICE!
3 3 that are enabled (see parameter group 3-1*
References) are used as the setpoint reference of
If only 2 feedback signals are used, the
feedback that is not to be used must be
the PID controller.
set to [0] No Function in
[1] Difference Sets up the PID controller to use the difference parameter 20-00 Feedback 1 Source,
between feedback 1 and feedback 2 as the parameter 20-03 Feedback 2 Source, or
feedback. Feedback 3 is not used with this parameter 20-06 Feedback 3 Source. Each
selection. Only setpoint 1 is used. The sum of setpoint reference is the sum of its
setpoint 1 and any other references that are respective parameter value and any other
enabled (see parameter group 3-1* References) references that are enabled (see
are used as the setpoint reference of the PID parameter group 3-1* References).
controller.

[2] Average Sets up the PID controller to use the average of [6] Multi Sets up the PID controller to calculate the
feedback 1, feedback 2, and feedback 3 as the Setpoint difference between feedback 1 and setpoint 1,
feedback. Max feedback 2 and setpoint 2, and feedback 3 and
setpoint 3. It uses the feedback/setpoint pair in
[3] Minimum Sets up the PID controller to compare feedback
which the feedback is farthest above its
1, feedback 2, and feedback 3, and use the
corresponding setpoint reference. If all feedback
lowest value as the feedback. Only setpoint 1 is
signals are below their corresponding setpoints,
used. The sum of setpoint 1 and any other
the PID controller uses the feedback/setpoint
references that are enabled (see parameter
pair in which the difference between the
group 3-1* References) are used as the setpoint
feedback and the setpoint reference is the least.
reference of the PID controller.

[4] Maximum Sets up the PID controller to compare feedback

NOTICE!
* 1, feedback 2, and feedback 3, and use the
If only 2 feedback signals are used, the
highest value as the feedback.
feedback that is not to be used must be
set to [0] No Function in
Only setpoint 1 is used. The sum of setpoint 1 parameter 20-00 Feedback 1 Source,
and any other references that are enabled (see parameter 20-03 Feedback 2 Source, or
parameter group 3-1* References) are used as the parameter 20-06 Feedback 3 Source. Each
setpoint reference of the PID controller. setpoint reference is the sum of its
[5] Multi Sets up the PID controller to calculate the respective parameter value
Setpoint difference between feedback 1 and setpoint 1, (parameter 20-21 Setpoint 1,
Min feedback 2 and setpoint 2, and feedback 3 and parameter 20-22 Setpoint 2, and
setpoint 3. It uses the feedback/setpoint pair in parameter 20-23 Setpoint 3) and any other
which the feedback is the farthest below its references that are enabled (see
corresponding setpoint reference. If all feedback parameter group 3-1* References).
signals are above their corresponding setpoints,
the PID controller uses the feedback/setpoint
pair in which the difference between the
feedback and setpoint is the least.

172 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

20-21 Setpoint 1 20-23 Setpoint 3

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0 [-999999.999 - Setpoint 1 is used in closed- NOTICE!
ProcessCtrlUnit* 999999.999
ProcessCtrlUnit]
loop mode to enter a setpoint
reference that is used by the
The setpoint reference
entered here is added to
3 3
frequency converter’s PID any other references that
controller. See the description are enabled (see
of parameter 20-20 Feedback parameter group 3-1*
Function. References).
NOTICE!
The setpoint reference
20-60 Sensorless Unit
entered here is added to
any other references that Option: Function:
are enabled (see [20] l/s
parameter group 3-1* [23] m³/s
References). [24] m³/min
[25] m³/h
[71] bar
20-22 Setpoint 2 [73] kPa
Range: Function: [74] m WG
0 [-999999.999 - Setpoint 2 is used in closed- [75] mm Hg
ProcessCtrlUnit* 999999.999 loop mode to enter a [120] GPM
ProcessCtrlUnit] setpoint reference for the PID [121] gal/s
controller. See the description [122] gal/min
of parameter 20-20 Feedback [123] gal/h
Function.
[124] CFM
NOTICE! [125] ft³/s
The setpoint reference [126] ft³/min
entered here is added to [170] psi
any other references that [171] lb/in²
are enabled (see [172] in WG
parameter group 3-1* [173] ft WG
References). [174] in Hg

20-69 Sensorless Information

20-23 Setpoint 3 Array [8]
Range: Function: Range: Function:
0 [-999999.999 - Setpoint 3 is used in closed- 0* [0 - 25 ]
ProcessCtrlUnit* 999999.999 loop mode to enter a setpoint
ProcessCtrlUnit] reference for the PID
3.17.3 20-7* Auto-tuning
controller. See the description
of parameter 20-20 Feedback
PID Auto-tuning
Function.
The frequency converter closed-loop controller (parameter
NOTICE! group 20-** FC Closed Loop) can be auto-tuned, simplifying
If the minimum and and saving time during commissioning, while ensuring
maximum references are accurate control adjustment. To use auto-tuning, configure
altered, a new PID auto- the frequency converter for closed loop in
tuning may be needed. parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.
Use a graphical local control panel (GLCP) to react to
messages during the auto-tuning sequence.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 173

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Selecting either PID or SPC in parameter 20-79 Autotuning If PID auto-tuning is carried out with slow ramp times, the
puts the frequency converter into auto-tuning mode. The auto-tuned parameters typically result in slow control.
LCP then shows on-screen instructions. Before activating PID auto-tuning, remove excessive
feedback sensor noise using the input filter (parameter
3 3
To start the fan/pump, press [Auto On] and apply a start
groups 6-** Analog In/Out, 5-5* Pulse Input and 26-** Analog
signal. The default control settings ensure that the setpoint
I/O Option MCB 109, parameter 6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time
it eventually reached. For PID auto-tuning, it is possible to
Constant, parameter 6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant,
adjust the speed manually by pressing [▲] or [▼] to a level
parameter 5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29,
where the feedback is around the system setpoint.
parameter 5-59 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33). To obtain the
most accurate controller parameters, carry out PID auto-
CAUTION tuning when the application runs in typical operation, that
If the feedback goes outside the specified limits (2073 is with a typical load.
and 2074) defined during auto-tune set-up, the auto- SPC Auto-tuning
tuning is discarded. The limits also serve as application SPC initiates a tuning of DRC. If feedback from the system
protection during auto-tuning execution.
determines the system to be 2nd order, auto-tuning
proceeds automatically with tuning of PID parameters. If
NOTICE! SPC discards the DRC, it is shown by the process bar going
It is not possible to run the motor at maximum or to step 4.
minimum speed when manually adjusting the motor DRC assumes that the frequency converter’s target
speed due to the need of increasing the motor speed applications can be generically modeled as 1st order plus
during auto-tuning. dead-time systems. DRC auto-tuning is providing the
feedback for calculation.
• τ = time constant of process system Kp process
Auto-tuning introduces step changes while operating at a system gain.
steady state and then monitors the feedback. For PID
control, the auto-tuning feedback response defines the • θ = time delay between input and output DRC
required values for parameter 20-93 PID Proportional Gain can only be set up by using SPC.
and parameter 20-94 PID Integral Time are calculated. 20-70 Closed Loop Type
Parameter 20-95 PID Differentiation Time is set to value 0
Option: Function:
(zero). Parameter 20-81 PID Normal/ Inverse Control is
Select the application response speed if it
determined during the tuning process.
is known. The default setting is sufficient
These calculated values are presented in the LCP and can for most applications. A more precise
be either accepted or rejected. Once accepted, the values value decreases the time needed for
are written to the relevant parameters and auto-tuning carrying out PID adaptation. The setting
mode is disabled in parameter 20-79 Autotuning. has no impact on values of parameters
Depending on the system, the time required to carry out and only affects the auto-tuning speed.
auto-tuning could be several minutes.
[0] * Auto Takes 30–120 s to complete.
Before carrying out the auto-tuning, set the following
[1] Fast Pressure Takes 10–60 s to complete.
parameters according to the load inertia:
• Parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time. [2] Slow Pressure Takes 30–120 s to complete.

• Parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time. [3] Fast Takes 10–20 minutes to complete.
Temperature
Or
[4] Slow Takes 30–60 minutes to complete.
• Parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time. Temperature
• Parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time.
20-71 Controller Performance
Option: Function:
[0] * Normal Normal setting of this parameter is suitable for
pressure control in fan systems.

[1] Fast Fast setting is used in pumping systems, where a

faster control response is wanted.

174 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

20-72 Output Change 20-79 Autotuning

Range: Function: Option: Function:
0.10* [0.01 This parameter sets the magnitude of step [3] DRC This option is activated by SPC auto-tuning. Not
- 0.50 ] change during auto-tuning. The value is a
percentage of full speed. That is, if maximum
typically used as a manual option.
3 3
output frequency in parameter 4-13 Motor Speed
High Limit [RPM]/parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High
3.17.4 20-8* PID Basic Settings
Limit [Hz] is set to 50 Hz, 0.10 is 10% of 50 Hz,
which is 5 Hz. Set this parameter to a value This parameter group is used to configure the basic
resulting in feedback changes of 10–20% for best operation of the PID controller, including:
tuning accuracy. • Response to feedback above or below the
setpoint.
20-73 Minimum Feedback Level • The speed at which it first starts functioning.
Range: Function: • When it indicates that the system has reached
-999999 [ -999999.999 - Enter the minimum allowable the setpoint.
ProcessCtrlUnit* par. 20-74 feedback level in user units as
20-81 PID Normal/ Inverse Control
ProcessCtrlUnit] defined in
parameter 20-12 Reference/ Option: Function:
Feedback Unit. If the level [0] * Normal The frequency converter’s output frequency
drops below decreases when the feedback is greater than the
parameter 20-73 Minimum setpoint reference. This behavior is common for
Feedback Level, auto-tuning is pressure-controlled supply fan and pump
aborted and an error message applications.
appears in the LCP.
[1] Inverse The frequency converter’s output frequency
increases when the feedback is greater than the
20-74 Maximum Feedback Level
setpoint reference.
Range: Function:
999999 [ par. 20-73 - Enter the maximum allowable 20-82 PID Start Speed [RPM]
ProcessCtrlUnit* 999999.999 feedback level in user units as Range: Function:
ProcessCtrlUnit] defined in
parameter 20-12 Reference/
Size [0 - NOTICE!
related* par.
Feedback Unit. If the level This parameter is only visible if
4-13
rises above parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit is set
RPM]
parameter 20-74 Maximum to [0] RPM.
Feedback Level, auto-tuning is
aborted and an error message When the frequency converter is first started,
appears in the LCP. it initially ramps up to this output speed in
open-loop mode, following the active ramp-
20-79 Autotuning up time. When the output speed
Option: Function: programmed is reached, the frequency
converter automatically switches to closed-
This parameter starts the auto-tuning sequence.
loop mode and the PID controller begins to
Once the auto-tuning has successfully
function. This is useful in applications that
completed and the settings have been
require quick acceleration to a minimum
accepted or rejected by pressing [OK] or
speed at start-up.
[Cancel] at the end of tuning, this parameter is
reset to [0] Disabled.

[0] * Disabled
[1] PID Enables PID auto-tuning.

[2] Smart Enables smart process control auto-tuning. That

Process automatically selects the best suitable controller
principle (PID or DRC).

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 175

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

20-83 PID Start Speed [Hz] 3.17.5 20-9* PID Controller

Range: Function:
Use these parameters to adjust the PID controller manually.
Size [0 - NOTICE! By adjusting the PID controller parameters, the control
3 3 related* par.
4-14
This parameter is only visible if
parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit is set
performance may be improved. See the VLT® AQUA Drive
Hz] FC 202 Design Guide for guidelines on adjusting the PID
to [1] Hz.
controller parameters.

When the frequency converter is first started, 20-91 PID Anti Windup
it initially ramps up to this output frequency Option: Function:
in open-loop mode, following the active
NOTICE!
ramp-up time. When the output frequency
Option [1] On is activated automatically, if 1 of
programmed is reached, the frequency
the following options is selected in parameters
converter automatically switches to closed-
in parameter group 21-** Ext. Closed Loop: [0]
loop mode and the PID controller begins to
Normal, [X] Enabled Ext CLX PID.
function. This is useful in applications that
require quick acceleration to a minimum
speed at start-up. [0] Off The integrator continues to change value also after
output has reached 1 of the extremes. This can
20-84 On Reference Bandwidth afterwards cause a delay of change of the output of
the controller.
Range: Function:
5 %* [0 - When the difference between the feedback and [1] * On The integrator is locked if the output of the built-in
200 %] the setpoint reference is less than the value of PID controller has reached 1 of the extremes
this parameter, the frequency converter’s display (minimum or maximum value) and therefore is not
shows Run on Reference. This status can be able to add further changes to the value of the
communicated externally by programming the process parameter controlled. This allows the controller
function of a digital output for [8] Run on to respond more quickly when it can control the
Reference/No Warning. Also, for serial communi- system again.
cations, the On Reference status bit of the
frequency converter status word is high (value = 20-93 PID Proportional Gain
1). Range: Function:
The On Reference Bandwidth is calculated as a 2* [0 - 10 ] The proportional gain indicates the number of
percentage of the setpoint reference. times the error between the setpoint and the
feedback signal is to be applied.

If (Error x Gain) jumps with a value equal to what is set in

parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference, the PID controller tries
to change the output speed equal to what is set in
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]/
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]. However, in
practice it is limited by this setting.
The proportional band (error causing output to change
from 0–100%) can be calculated with the formula:

1
× Max Reference
Proportional Gain
NOTICE!
Set the value for parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference
before setting the values for the PID controller in
parameter group 20-9* PID Controller.

176 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

20-94 PID Integral Time

Range: Function:
8 s* [0.01 - The integrator accumulates a contribution to the
10000 s] output from the PID controller as long as there
is a deviation between the reference/setpoint 3 3
and feedback signals. The contribution is propor-
tional to the size of the deviation. This ensures
that the deviation (error) approaches zero.
Quick response on any deviation is obtained
when the integral time is set to a low value.
Setting it too low, however, may cause the
control to become unstable.
The value set is the time needed for the
integrator to add the same contribution as the
proportional for a certain deviation.
If the value is set to 10000, the controller acts as
a pure proportional controller with a P-band
based on the value set in parameter 20-93 PID
Proportional Gain. When no deviation is present,
the output from the proportional controller is 0.

20-95 PID Differentiation Time

Range: Function:
0 s* [0 - 10 The differentiator monitors the rate of change of
s] the feedback. If the feedback is changing quickly,
it adjusts the output of the PID controller to
reduce the rate of change of the feedback. Quick
PID controller response is obtained when this
value is large. However, if too large of a value is
used, the frequency converter’s output frequency
may become unstable.

Differentiation time is useful in situations where

extremely fast frequency converter response and
precise speed control are required. It can be
difficult to adjust this for proper system control.
Differentiation time is not commonly used in
water/wastewater applications. Therefore, it is best
to leave this parameter at 0 or OFF.

20-96 PID Diff. Gain Limit

Range: Function:
5* [1 - The differential function of a PID controller
50 ] responds to the rate of change of the feedback. As
a result, an abrupt change in the feedback can
cause the differential function to make a large
change in the PID controller output. This parameter
limits the maximum effect that the PID controller
differential function can produce. A smaller value
reduces the maximum effect of the PID controller
differential function.

This parameter is only active when

parameter 20-95 PID Differentiation Time is not set
to OFF (0 s).

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 177

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.18 Parameters 21-** Extended Closed Enabling auto-tuning, parameter 21-09 PID Auto Tuning puts
Loop the relevant PID controller into PID auto-tuning mode. The
LCP then provides on-screen instructions.
The FC 202 offers 3 extended closed-loop PID controllers in
3 3 addition to the PID controller. These controllers can be PID auto-tuning introduces step changes and then
configured independently to control either external monitors the feedback. Based on the feedback response,
actuators (valves, dampers, and so on) or be used together the following required values are calculated:
with the internal PID controller to improve the dynamic • PID proportional gain.
responses to setpoint changes or load disturbances.
- Parameter 21-21 Ext. 1 Proportional Gain
for EXT CL 1.
The extended closed-loop PID controllers may be intercon-
nected or connected to the PID closed-loop controller to - Parameter 21-41 Ext. 2 Proportional Gain
form a dual loop configuration. for EXT CL 2.
- Parameter 21-61 Ext. 3 Proportional Gain
To control a modulating device (for example, a valve for EXT CL 3.
motor), this device must be a positioning servo motor with • Integral time.
built-in electronics accepting either a 0–10 V (signal from
- Parameter 21-22 Ext. 1 Integral Time for
VLT® Analog I/O Option MCB 109) or a 0/4–20 mA control
EXT CL 1.
signal.
- Parameter 21-42 Ext. 2 Integral Time for
The output function can be programmed in the following EXT CL 2.
parameters: - Parameter 21-62 Ext. 3 Integral Time for
• Control card, terminal 42: Parameter 6-50 Terminal EXT CL 3.
42 Output (options [113]...[115] or [149]...[151], Ext.
The PID differentiation time is set to 0 in the following
Closed Loop 1/2/3.
parameters:
• VLT® General purpose I/O card MCB 101, terminal • Parameter 21-23 Ext. 1 Differentation Time for EXT
X30/8: Parameter 6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output, CL 1.
(setting [113]...[115] or [149]...[151], Ext. Closed
Loop 1/2/3.
• Parameter 21-43 Ext. 2 Differentation Time for EXT
CL 2.
• VLT® Analog I/O Option MCB 109, terminal • Parameter 21-63 Ext. 3 Differentation Time for EXT
X42/7...11: Parameter 26-40 Terminal X42/7 Output, CL 3 are set to value 0 (zero).
parameter 26-50 Terminal X42/9 Output,
parameter 26-60 Terminal X42/11 Output (options • Parameter 21-20 Ext. 1 Normal/Inverse Control for
[113]...[115], Ext. Closed Loop 1/2/3). EXT CL 1.

VLT® General purpose I/O card MCB 109 and VLT® analog • Parameter 21-40 Ext. 2 Normal/Inverse Control for
EXT CL 2.
I/O option MCB 109 are optional.
• Parameter 21-60 Ext. 3 Normal/Inverse Control for
3.18.1 21-0* Extended CL Autotuning EXT CL 3.
These calculated values are presented on the LCP and can
The extended closed-loop PID controllers can each be either be accepted or rejected. Once accepted, the values
auto-tuned, simplifying and saving time during commis- are written to the relevant parameters, and PID auto-
sioning, while ensuring accurate PID control adjustment. tuning mode is disabled in parameter 21-09 PID Auto
Tuning. Depending on the system being controlled, the
To use PID auto-tuning, configure the relevant extended time required to carry out PID auto-tuning could be
PID controller for the application. several minutes.

Use a graphical LCP to react on messages during the auto- Before activating the PID auto-tuning, remove excessive
tuning sequence. feedback sensor noise using the input filter (parameter
groups 5-5* Pulse Input, 6-** Analog In/Out and 26-** Analog
I/O Option MCB 109, terminal 53/54 filter time constant,
and pulse filter time constant #29/33).

178 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

21-00 Closed Loop Type 21-03 Minimum Feedback Level

Option: Function: Range: Function:
This parameter defines the application an error message appears in the
response. The default mode should be
sufficient for most applications. If the
display.
3 3
relative application speed is known, it 21-04 Maximum Feedback Level
can be selected here. This decreases the Range: Function:
time needed for carrying out PID auto-
999999* [ par. Enter the maximum allowable feedback
tuning. The setting has no impact on the
21-03 - level in user units as defined in:
value of the tuned parameters and is
999999.999 • Parameter 21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./
used only for the PID auto-tuning
] Feedback Unit for EXT CL 1.
sequence.
• Parameter 21-30 Ext. 2 Ref./
[0] * Auto Feedback Unit for EXT CL 2.
[1] Fast Pressure
[2] Slow Pressure
• Parameter 20-05 Feedback 2
Source Unit for EXT CL 3.
[3] Fast
Temperature If the level rises above
[4] Slow parameter 21-04 Maximum Feedback Level,
Temperature PID auto tuning is aborted, and an error
message appears in the display.
21-01 PID Performance
Option: Function: 21-09 PID Auto Tuning
[0] * Normal Normal setting of this parameter is suitable for Option: Function:
pressure control in fan systems. This parameter enables selection of the
extended PID controller to be auto-tuned
[1] Fast Fast setting would generally be used in pumping
and starts the PID auto-tuning for that
systems, where a faster control response is
controller. Once the auto-tuning has
desirable.
successfully completed and the settings
21-02 PID Output Change have been accepted or rejected by
pressing [OK] or [Cancel] at the end of
Range: Function:
tuning, this parameter is reset to [0]
0.10* [0.01 - This parameter sets the magnitude of step Disabled.
0.50 ] change during auto tuning. The value is a
percentage of full operating range. That is, if [0] * Disabled
the maximum analog output voltage is set to [1] Enabled Ext CL1
10 V, 0.10 is 10% of 10 V, which is 1 V. Set this PID
parameter to a value resulting in feedback [2] Enabled Ext CL 2
changes of 10–20% for best tuning accuracy. PID
[3] Enabled Ext CL 3
21-03 Minimum Feedback Level PID

Range: Function:
-999999* Enter the minimum allowable feedback
[ -999999.999 level in user units as defined in:
- par. 21-04 ] • Parameter 21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./
Feedback Unit for EXT CL 1.

• Parameter 21-30 Ext. 2 Ref./

Feedback Unit for EXT CL 2.

• Parameter 20-05 Feedback 2

Source Unit for EXT CL 3.

If the level drops below

parameter 21-03 Minimum Feedback
Level, PID auto-tuning is aborted, and

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 179

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.18.2 21-1* Closed Loop 1 Ref/Feedback 21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback Unit

Option: Function:
[74] m WG

3 3 [75]
[80]
mm Hg
kW
[120] GPM
[121] gal/s
[122] gal/min
[123] gal/h
[124] CFM
[125] ft³/s
[126] ft³/min
[127] ft³/h
[130] lb/s
[131] lb/min
[132] lb/h
[140] ft/s
[141] ft/min
[145] ft
Figure 3.62 Closed Loop 1 Ref/Feedback [160] °F
[170] psi
[171] lb/in²
21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback Unit [172] in WG
Option: Function: [173] ft WG

Select the unit for the reference and feedback. [174] in Hg

[180] HP
[0] *
[1] % 21-11 Ext. 1 Minimum Reference
[5] PPM Range: Function:
[10] 1/min 0 ExtPID1Unit* [ -999999.999 - par. Select the minimum
[11] RPM 21-12 ExtPID1Unit] reference for the closed-
[12] Pulse/s loop 1 controller.
[20] l/s
[21] l/min 21-12 Ext. 1 Maximum Reference
[22] l/h Range: Function:
[23] m³/s 100 [ par. 21-11 - NOTICE!
[24] m³/min ExtPID1Unit* 999999.999
Set the value for
[25] m³/h ExtPID1Unit]
parameter 21-12 Ext. 1
[30] kg/s
Maximum Reference before
[31] kg/min
setting the values for the
[32] kg/h PID controller in parameter
[33] t/min group 20-9* PID Controller.
[34] t/h
[40] m/s Select the maximum reference for
[41] m/min the closed-loop 1 controller.
[45] m
The dynamics of the PID
[60] °C
controller depend on the value
[70] mbar
set in this parameter. See also
[71] bar parameter 21-21 Ext. 1 Propor-
[72] Pa tional Gain.
[73] kPa

180 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

21-13 Ext. 1 Reference Source 21-14 Ext. 1 Feedback Source

Option: Function: Option: Function:
This parameter defines which input [102] Bus feedback 3
on the frequency converter should be
treated as the source of the reference
[104] Sensorless Flow
[105] Sensorless Pressure
3 3
signal for the closed-loop 1 controller. [200] Ext. Closed Loop 1
Analog input X30/11 and analog [201] Ext. Closed Loop 2
input X30/12 refer to inputs on the [202] Ext. Closed Loop 3
VLT® General Purpose I/O Card MCB
101. 21-15 Ext. 1 Setpoint

[0] * No function Range: Function:

[1] Analog Input 53 0 [-999999.999 - The setpoint reference is used in
[2] Analog Input 54 ExtPID1Unit* 999999.999 extended 1 closed loop. Ext.1
[7] Pulse input 29 ExtPID1Unit] Setpoint is added to the value
from the Ext.1 Reference Source
[8] Pulse input 33
selected in parameter 21-13 Ext.
[20] Digital pot.meter
1 Reference Source.
[21] Analog input X30/11
[22] Analog input X30/12
21-17 Ext. 1 Reference [Unit]
[23] Analog Input X42/1
Range: Function:
[24] Analog Input X42/3
0 ExtPID1Unit* [-999999.999 - Readout of the reference
[25] Analog Input X42/5
999999.999 value for the closed-loop
[29] Analog Input X48/2
ExtPID1Unit] 1 controller.
[30] Ext. Closed Loop 1
[31] Ext. Closed Loop 2
21-18 Ext. 1 Feedback [Unit]
[32] Ext. Closed Loop 3
Range: Function:
[33] PCD Bus Reference
[35] Digital input select 0 ExtPID1Unit* [-999999.999 - Readout of the feedback
999999.999 value for the closed-loop
21-14 Ext. 1 Feedback Source ExtPID1Unit] 1 controller.
Option: Function:
This parameter defines which input
21-19 Ext. 1 Output [%]
on the frequency converter should Range: Function:
be treated as the source of the 0 %* [0 - 100 %] Readout of the output value for the closed-
feedback signal for the closed-loop 1 loop 1 controller.
controller. Analog input X30/11 and
analog input X30/12 refer to inputs
on the VLT® General Purpose I/O
3.18.3 21-2* Closed Loop 1 PID
Card MCB 101.
21-20 Ext. 1 Normal/Inverse Control
[0] * No function
Option: Function:
[1] Analog Input 53
[2] Analog Input 54 [0] * Normal Reduces the output when feedback is higher than
the reference.
[3] Pulse input 29
[4] Pulse input 33 [1] Inverse Increase the output when feedback is higher than
[7] Analog Input X30/11 the reference.
[8] Analog Input X30/12
[9] Analog Input X42/1 21-21 Ext. 1 Proportional Gain
[10] Analog Input X42/3 Range: Function:
[11] Analog Input X42/5 0.50* [0 - 10 ] The proportional gain contains the factor
[15] Analog Input X48/2 indicating the number of times the error
[99] Normal Feedback between the setpoint and the feedback signal is
[100] Bus Feedback 1 to be applied.
[101] Bus Feedback 2

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 181

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

If the product error times gain jumps with a value equal to 21-24 Ext. 1 Dif. Gain Limit
what is set in parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference, the PID Range: Function:
controller tries to change the output speed equal to what
are slow and a constant differentiator gain when
is set in parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]/
3 3 parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]. However, in
practice, it is limited by this setting.
quick changes occur.

21-26 Ext. 1 On Reference Bandwidth

The proportional band (error causing output to change
from 0–100%) can be calculated with the formula: Range: Function:
5 %* [0 - 200 %] Enter the on-reference bandwidth. When the
1 PID control error (the difference between the
× Max Reference reference and the feedback) is less than the
Proportional Gain
NOTICE! value of this parameter, the on-reference
status bit is high.
Set the value for parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference
before setting the values for the PID controller in
parameter group 20-9* PID Controller. 3.18.4 21-3* Closed Loop 2 Ref/Fb

21-22 Ext. 1 Integral Time 21-30 Ext. 2 Ref./Feedback Unit

Range: Function: Option: Function:
20 [0.01 - Over time, the integrator accumulates a contri- See parameter 21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback Unit for
s* 10000 s] bution to the output from the PID controller as details.
long as there is a deviation between the
[0] *
reference/setpoint and feedback signals. The
[1] %
contribution is proportional to the size of the
[5] PPM
deviation. This ensures that the deviation
[10] 1/min
(error) approaches 0.
Quick response on any deviation is obtained [11] RPM
when the integral time is set to a low value. [12] Pulse/s
Setting it too low, however, may cause the [20] l/s
control to become unstable. [21] l/min
The value set is the time needed for the [22] l/h
integrator to add the same contribution as the [23] m³/s
proportional for a certain deviation. [24] m³/min
If the value is set to 10000, the controller acts [25] m³/h
as a pure proportional controller with a P-band [30] kg/s
based on the value set in parameter 20-93 PID [31] kg/min
Proportional Gain. When no deviation is [32] kg/h
present, the output from the proportional
[33] t/min
controller is 0.
[34] t/h
[40] m/s
21-23 Ext. 1 Differentation Time
[41] m/min
Range: Function: [45] m
0 s* [0 - 10 s] The differentiator does not react to a constant [60] °C
error. It only provides a gain when the feedback [70] mbar
changes. The quicker the feedback changes, the
[71] bar
stronger the gain from the differentiator.
[72] Pa
[73] kPa
21-24 Ext. 1 Dif. Gain Limit
[74] m WG
Range: Function:
[75] mm Hg
5* [1 - 50 ] Set a limit for the differentiator gain (DG). The DG [80] kW
increases if there are fast changes. Limit the DG to
[120] GPM
obtain a pure differentiator gain when changes
[121] gal/s
[122] gal/min

182 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

21-30 Ext. 2 Ref./Feedback Unit 21-33 Ext. 2 Reference Source

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[123] gal/h [32] Ext. Closed Loop 3
[124] CFM
[125] ft³/s
[33] PCD Bus Reference
[35] Digital input select
3 3
[126] ft³/min
21-34 Ext. 2 Feedback Source
[127] ft³/h
[130] lb/s Option: Function:
[131] lb/min See parameter 21-14 Ext. 1 Feedback
[132] lb/h Source for details.
[140] ft/s [0] * No function
[141] ft/min [1] Analog Input 53
[145] ft [2] Analog Input 54
[160] °F [3] Pulse input 29
[170] psi [4] Pulse input 33
[171] lb/in² [7] Analog Input X30/11
[172] in WG [8] Analog Input X30/12
[173] ft WG [9] Analog Input X42/1
[174] in Hg [10] Analog Input X42/3
[180] HP [11] Analog Input X42/5
[15] Analog Input X48/2
21-31 Ext. 2 Minimum Reference
[99] Normal Feedback
Range: Function: [100] Bus Feedback 1
0 ExtPID2Unit* [ -999999.999 - See parameter 21-11 Ext. 1 [101] Bus Feedback 2
par. 21-32 Minimum Reference for [102] Bus feedback 3
ExtPID2Unit] details.
[104] Sensorless Flow
[105] Sensorless Pressure
21-32 Ext. 2 Maximum Reference
[200] Ext. Closed Loop 1
Range: Function: [201] Ext. Closed Loop 2
100 [ par. 21-31 - See parameter 21-12 Ext. 1 [202] Ext. Closed Loop 3
ExtPID2Unit* 999999.999 Maximum Reference for
ExtPID2Unit] details. 21-35 Ext. 2 Setpoint
Range: Function:
21-33 Ext. 2 Reference Source 0 ExtPID2Unit* [-999999.999 - See parameter 21-15 Ext. 1
Option: Function: 999999.999 Setpoint for details.
See parameter 21-13 Ext. 1 Reference ExtPID2Unit]
Source for details.
21-37 Ext. 2 Reference [Unit]
[0] * No function
Range: Function:
[1] Analog Input 53
0 ExtPID2Unit* [-999999.999 - See parameter 21-17 Ext. 1
[2] Analog Input 54
999999.999 Reference [Unit], Ext. 1
[7] Pulse input 29
ExtPID2Unit] Reference [Unit], for details.
[8] Pulse input 33
[20] Digital pot.meter 21-38 Ext. 2 Feedback [Unit]
[21] Analog input X30/11
Range: Function:
[22] Analog input X30/12
0 ExtPID2Unit* [-999999.999 - See parameter 21-18 Ext. 1
[23] Analog Input X42/1
999999.999 Feedback [Unit] for details.
[24] Analog Input X42/3
ExtPID2Unit]
[25] Analog Input X42/5
[29] Analog Input X48/2
[30] Ext. Closed Loop 1
[31] Ext. Closed Loop 2

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 183

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

21-39 Ext. 2 Output [%] 3.18.6 21-5* Closed Loop 3 Ref/Fb

Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %] See parameter 21-19 Ext. 1 Output [%] for 20-05 Feedback 2 Source Unit

3 3 details. See parameter 20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit for details.

Option: Function:
3.18.5 21-4* Closed Loop 2 PID [0] * Linear

21-51 Ext. 3 Minimum Reference

21-40 Ext. 2 Normal/Inverse Control
Range: Function:
Option: Function: 0 ExtPID3Unit* [ -999999.999 - See parameter 21-11 Ext. 1
See parameter 21-20 Ext. 1 Normal/Inverse Control par. 21-52 Minimum Reference for
for details. ExtPID3Unit] details.
[0] * Normal
[1] Inverse 21-52 Ext. 3 Maximum Reference
Range: Function:
21-41 Ext. 2 Proportional Gain
100 [ par. 21-51 - See parameter 21-12 Ext. 1
Range: Function: ExtPID3Unit* 999999.999 Maximum Reference for
0.50* [0 - 10 ] See parameter 21-21 Ext. 1 Proportional Gain for ExtPID3Unit] details.
details.
21-53 Ext. 3 Reference Source
21-42 Ext. 2 Integral Time Option: Function:
Range: Function: See parameter 21-13 Ext. 1 Reference
20 s* [0.01 - 10000 s] See parameter 21-22 Ext. 1 Integral Time Source for details.
for details.
[0] * No function
[1] Analog Input 53
21-43 Ext. 2 Differentation Time
[2] Analog Input 54
Range: Function:
[7] Pulse input 29
0 s* [0 - 10 s] See parameter 21-23 Ext. 1 Differentation Time for [8] Pulse input 33
details.
[20] Digital pot.meter
[21] Analog input X30/11
21-44 Ext. 2 Dif. Gain Limit
[22] Analog input X30/12
Range: Function: [23] Analog Input X42/1
5* [1 - 50 ] See parameter 21-24 Ext. 1 Dif. Gain Limit for [24] Analog Input X42/3
details. [25] Analog Input X42/5
[29] Analog Input X48/2
21-46 Ext. 2 On Reference Bandwidth
[30] Ext. Closed Loop 1
Range: Function: [31] Ext. Closed Loop 2
5 %* [0 - 200 %] Enter the on-reference bandwidth. When the [32] Ext. Closed Loop 3
PID control error (the difference between the [33] PCD Bus Reference
reference and the feedback) is less than the [35] Digital input select
value of this parameter, the on-reference
status bit is high.

184 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

21-54 Ext. 3 Feedback Source 3.18.7 21-6* Closed Loop 3 PID

Option: Function:
See parameter 21-14 Ext. 1 Feedback 21-60 Ext. 3 Normal/Inverse Control

[0] * No function
Source for details. Option: Function:
See parameter 21-20 Ext. 1 Normal/Inverse Control
3 3
[1] Analog Input 53 for details.
[2] Analog Input 54 [0] * Normal
[3] Pulse input 29 [1] Inverse
[4] Pulse input 33
21-61 Ext. 3 Proportional Gain
[7] Analog Input X30/11
[8] Analog Input X30/12 Range: Function:
[9] Analog Input X42/1 0.50* [0 - 10 ] See parameter 21-21 Ext. 1 Proportional Gain for
[10] Analog Input X42/3 details.
[11] Analog Input X42/5
[15] Analog Input X48/2 21-62 Ext. 3 Integral Time
[99] Normal Feedback Range: Function:
[100] Bus Feedback 1 20 s* [0.01 - 10000 s] See parameter 21-22 Ext. 1 Integral Time
[101] Bus Feedback 2 for details.
[102] Bus feedback 3
[104] Sensorless Flow 21-63 Ext. 3 Differentation Time
[105] Sensorless Pressure Range: Function:
[200] Ext. Closed Loop 1 0 s* [0 - 10 s] See parameter 21-23 Ext. 1 Differentation Time for
[201] Ext. Closed Loop 2 details.
[202] Ext. Closed Loop 3
21-64 Ext. 3 Dif. Gain Limit
21-55 Ext. 3 Setpoint
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
5* [1 - 50 ] See parameter 21-24 Ext. 1 Dif. Gain Limit for
0 ExtPID3Unit* [-999999.999 - See parameter 21-15 Ext. 1 details.
999999.999 Setpoint for details.
ExtPID3Unit] 21-66 Ext. 3 On Reference Bandwidth
21-57 Ext. 3 Reference [Unit] Range: Function:
Range: Function: 5 %* [0 - 200 %] Enter the on-reference bandwidth. When the
PID control error (the difference between the
0 ExtPID3Unit* [-999999.999 - See parameter 21-17 Ext. 1
reference and the feedback) is less than the
999999.999 Reference [Unit] for details.
value of this parameter, the on-reference
ExtPID3Unit]
status bit is high.
21-58 Ext. 3 Feedback [Unit]
Range: Function:
0 ExtPID3Unit* [-999999.999 - See parameter 21-18 Ext. 1
999999.999 Feedback [Unit] for details.
ExtPID3Unit]

21-59 Ext. 3 Output [%]

Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %] See parameter 21-19 Ext. 1 Output [%] for
details.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 185

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.19 Parameters 22-** Application Functions

3.19.1 22-0* Miscellaneous 22-00 External Interlock Delay
Range: Function:
3 3 This group contains parameters used for monitoring water/ external interlock timer introduces a delay after
wastewater applications. the signal has been removed from the digital
22-00 External Interlock Delay input programmed for external interlock, before
reaction takes place.
Range: Function:
0 s* [0 - 600 Only relevant if 1 of the digital inputs in
22-01 Power Filter Time
s] parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs has been
programmed for [7] External Interlock. The
Range: Function:
0.50 s* [0.02 - 10 s]

3.19.2 22-2* No-Flow Detection

Figure 3.63 Signal Flow Chart

The VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202Parameters 25includes No-flow detection

functions that detect if the load conditions in the system This function is used to detect a no-flow situation in pump
allow the motor to be stopped: systems where all valves can be closed. It can be used
• Low-power detection. both when controlled by the integrated PI controller in the
frequency converter or an external PI controller. Program
• Low-speed detection.
the actual configuration in parameter 1-00 Configuration
1 of these 2 signals must be active for a set time Mode.
(parameter 22-24 No-Flow Delay) before selected action Configuration mode for:
takes place. Possible actions to select (parameter 22-23 No-
Flow Function) are: • Integrated PI controller: Closed loop.

• No action. • External PI controller: Open loop.

• Warning.
• Alarm.
• Sleep mode.

186 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

NOTICE! systems with fluctuating suction pressure, or if the pump

Carry out no-flow tuning before setting the PI controller has a flat characteristic towards low speed.
parameters. Base the 2 sets of data on measurement of power at
approximately 50% and 85% of maximum speed with the

FC
valve closed. The data is programmed in parameter group 3 3

130BA253.10
22-3* No-flow Power Tuning. It is also possible to run a
parameter 22-20 Low Power Auto Set-up, automatically
stepping through the commissioning process, and also
automatically storing the data measured. Set the frequency
converter for open loop in parameter 1-00 Configuration
Mode, when carrying out the auto set-up (see parameter
group 22-3* No-flow Power Tuning).

NOTICE!
When using the integrated PI controller, carry out no-
flow tuning before setting the PI controller parameters.

Low-speed detection
Low-speed detection gives a signal if the motor operates
with minimum speed as set in parameter 4-11 Motor Speed
P
Low Limit [RPM] or parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit
[Hz]. Actions are common with no-flow detection
(individual selection not possible).
The use of low-speed detection is not limited to systems
with a no-flow situation. It can be used in any system
Figure 3.64 No-flow Detection Scheme
where operation at minimum speed allows for a stop of
the motor until the load calls for a speed higher than
minimum speed. An example is systems with fans and
compressors.
130BA254.10

Head

NOTICE!
1
In pump systems, ensure that the minimum speed in
parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or
parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] has been set
high enough for detection as the pump can run with a
2
rather high speed even with valves closed.

Dry-pump detection
No-flow detection can also be used to detect if the pump
has run dry (low power consumption and high speed). It
can be used with both the integrated PI controller and an
external PI controller.
Flow
The conditions for dry-pump signal are:
Figure 3.65 No-flow Detection Graph • Power consumption below no-flow level.
• Pump running at maximum speed or maximum
reference open loop, whichever is lowest.
No-flow detection is based on the measurement of speed
The signal must be active for a set time
and power. For a certain speed, the frequency converter
(parameter 22-27 Dry Pump Delay) before the selected
calculates the power at no flow.
action takes place.
This coherence is based on the adjustment of 2 sets of
Possible actions to select (parameter 22-26 Dry Pump
speed and associated power at no flow. By monitoring the
Function) are:
power, it is possible to detect no-flow conditions in
• Warning.
• Alarm.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 187

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Enable the low-power detection in parameter 22-21 Low 22-21 Low Power Detection
Power Detection. Perform the tuning using parameter group Option: Function:
22-3*, No-Flow Power Tuning.
[1] Enabled To set the parameters in parameter group 22-3*
In a dry-pump detection set-up, select [0] Off in
3 3 parameter 22-23 No-Flow Function. Otherwise, make sure
that the options in that parameter do not prevent the dry-
No-Flow Power Tuning for proper operation, carry
out the low-power detection commissioning.

pump detection.
22-22 Low Speed Detection
22-20 Low Power Auto Set-up Option: Function:
Start of auto set-up of power data for no-flow power tuning. [0] Disabled
Option: Function: *

[0] * Off [1] Enabled Detects when the motor operates with a speed
[1] Enabled NOTICE! as set in parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit
[RPM] or parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit
Do the auto set-up when the system has
[Hz].
reached normal operating temperature.
[2] Enabled This option is available when [3] Closed Loop is
with boost selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.
NOTICE!
Enable this option to improve the low-speed
It is important that parameter 4-13 Motor
detection for applications with at least 1 of the
Speed High Limit [RPM] or
following characteristics:
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
is set to the maximum operational speed • Varying inlet pressure.
of the motor. • A pressure drop at the outlet caused
It is important to do the auto set-up before by closing a non-return valve.
configuring the integrated PI controller as In such applications, the frequency converter
settings are reset when changing from potentially does not reduce the speed to the
closed loop to open loop in minimum as required for the normal low speed
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode. detection.
When this option is selected, the frequency
NOTICE! converter creates a pressure pulse (boost of the
Carry out the tuning with the same pressure) when the feedback is within the
settings in parameter 1-03 Torque Charac- range defined in parameter 7-39 On Reference
teristics as for operation after the tuning. Bandwidth for a time period defined in
parameter 22-40 Minimum Run Time or longer.
Parameter 22-45 Setpoint Boost adjusts the
An auto set-up sequence is activated, automat-
height of the pulses.
ically setting the speed to approximately 50% and
Parameter 22-46 Maximum Boost Time defines
85% of nominal motor speed
the maximum length of the pulse.
(parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM],
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]). At NOTICE!
those 2 speeds, the power consumption is Ensure that the system can withstand
automatically measured and stored. the boost pressure.
Before enabling auto set-up:
1. Close valves to create a no-flow [3] Enabled for For applications with multiple frequency
condition. multiple converters. Enable low speed detection with
2. Set the frequency converter to open drives the following features:
loop (parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode). • Minimum run time.
It is important also to set • Minimum sleep time.
parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics.
• Boost.

22-21 Low Power Detection [4] Enabled For applications with multiple frequency
Option: Function: multidrive converters. This option is available when [3]
boost Closed Loop is selected in
[0] * Disabled
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.

188 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

22-22 Low Speed Detection 22-23 No-Flow Function

Option: Function: Common actions for low-power detection and low-speed
Enable this option to improve the low-speed detection (individual selections not possible).
detection for applications with at least 1 of the
following characteristics:
Option: Function:
NOTICE!
3 3
• Varying inlet pressure. Disable the automatic bypass function
• A pressure drop at the outlet caused of the bypass if the frequency converter
by closing a non-return valve. is equipped with a constant-speed
In such applications, the frequency converter bypass with an automatic bypass
potentially does not reduce the speed to the function starting the bypass if the
minimum as required for the normal low speed frequency converter experiences a
detection. persistent alarm condition, and [3]
When this option is selected, the frequency Alarm is selected as the no-flow
converter creates a pressure pulse (boost of the function.
pressure) when the feedback is within the
range defined in parameter 7-39 On Reference [1] Sleep The frequency converter enters sleep mode
Bandwidth for a time period defined in Mode and stops when a no-flow condition is
parameter 22-40 Minimum Run Time or longer. detected. See parameter group 22-4* Sleep
Parameter 22-45 Setpoint Boost adjusts the Mode for programming options for sleep
height of the pulses. mode.
Parameter 22-46 Maximum Boost Time defines
[2] Warning The frequency converter continues to run, but
the maximum length of the pulse.
activates a no-flow warning (warning 92,
Refer to Cascade Controller Options MCO
NoFlow). A digital output or a serial communi-
101/102 Operating Instructions for more
cation bus can communicate a warning to
information about the cascade controller.
other equipment.
NOTICE! [3] Trip The frequency converter stops running and
Ensure that the system can withstand activates a no-flow alarm (alarm 92, NoFlow). A
the boost pressure. frequency converter digital output or a serial
communication bus can communicate an
alarm to other equipment.
22-23 No-Flow Function
[4] Stop and
Common actions for low-power detection and low-speed
Trip
detection (individual selections not possible).
Option: Function: 22-24 No-Flow Delay
[0] * Off NOTICE! Range: Function:
Do not set parameter 14-20 Reset Mode, 10 s* [1 - 600 s] Set the time that low power/low speed must
to [13] Infinite auto reset, when stay detected to activate signal for actions. If
parameter 22-23 No-Flow Function is set detection disappears before the timer runs
to [3] Alarm. Doing so causes the out, the timer is reset.
frequency converter to continuously
cycle between running and stopping 22-26 Dry Pump Function
when a no-flow condition is detected. Select the action for dry-pump operation.
Option: Function:
[0] Off
*

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 189

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

22-26 Dry Pump Function 22-27 Dry Pump Delay

Select the action for dry-pump operation. Range: Function:
Option: Function: 10 s* [0 - Defines for how long the dry-pump condition

3 3 [1] Warning NOTICE! 600 s] must be active before activating a warning or an

alarm.
To use dry-pump detection:
The frequency converter waits for the no-flow
1. Enable low-power detection in delay time (parameter 22-24 No-Flow Delay) to
parameter 22-21 Low Power expire before the timer for the dry-pump delay
Detection. starts.
2. Commission low-power detection
using either parameter group 22-28 No-Flow Low Speed [RPM]
22-3* No-flow Power Tuning No Range: Function:
Flow Power Tuning, or Size related* [ 0 - par. Used to set the speed for no-flow
parameter 22-20 Low Power Auto 4-13 RPM] low-speed detection.
Set-up. If a low-speed detection at a speed
different from the motor minimum
speed is needed, this parameter may
NOTICE! be used.
Do not set parameter 14-20 Reset Mode to
[13] Infinite auto reset, when 22-29 No-Flow Low Speed [Hz]
parameter 22-26 Dry Pump Function is set
Range: Function:
to [2] Alarm. Doing so causes the
Size related* [ 0 - par. Used to set the speed for no-flow
frequency converter to continuously cycle
4-14 Hz] low-speed detection.
between running and stopping when a
If a low-speed detection at a speed
dry-pump condition is detected.
different from the motor minimum
speed is needed, this parameter may
NOTICE! be used.
For frequency converters with constant-
speed bypass.
If an automatic bypass function starts the 3.19.3 22-3* No-flow Power Tuning
bypass at persistent alarm conditions,
disable the automatic bypass function, if If auto set-up is disabled in parameter 22-20 Low Power
[2] Alarm or [3] Man. Reset Alarm is Auto Set-up, the tuning sequence is:
selected as the dry-pump function.
NOTICE!
The frequency converter continues to run, but Set parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics before tuning
activates a dry-pump warning (warning 93, Dry takes place.
pump). A frequency converter digital output or a
serial communication bus can communicate a 1. Close the main valve to stop flow.
warning to other equipment.
2. Run with motor until the system has reached
[2] Trip The frequency converter stops running and normal operating temperature.
activates a dry-pump alarm (alarm 93, Dry
pump). A frequency converter digital output or a 3. Press [Hand On] and adjust speed for approxi-
serial communication bus can communicate an mately 85% of rated speed. Note the exact speed.
alarm to other equipment. 4. Read power consumption either by looking for
[3] Manual The frequency converter stops running and
actual power in the data line in the LCP or by
Reset Trip activates a dry-pump alarm (alarm 93, Dry
viewing 1 of the following parameters:
pump). A frequency converter digital output or a 4a Parameter 16-10 Power [kW].
serial communication bus can communicate an
alarm to other equipment.

[4] Stop and

Trip

190 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

Or 22-32 Low Speed [RPM]

4b Parameter 16-11 Power [hp] in the Main Range: Function:
Menu. Set used speed for the 50% level.
Note the power readout. This function is used for storing values
necessary for tuning no-flow detection. 3 3
5. Change speed to approximately 50% of rated
speed. Note the exact speed. 22-33 Low Speed [Hz]
6. Read power consumption either by looking for Range: Function:
actual power in the data line in the LCP or by Size [ 0 - par. To be used if parameter 0-02 Motor Speed
viewing 1 of the following parameters: related* 22-37 Hz] Unit is set for [1] Hz (parameter not visible
6a Parameter 16-10 Power [kW]. if [0] RPM is selected).
Or Set used speed for the 50% level.
The function is used for storing values
6b Parameter 16-11 Power [hp] in the Main
necessary for tuning no-flow detection.
Menu.
Note the power readout. 22-34 Low Speed Power [kW]
7. Program the speeds used in: Range: Function:
7a Parameter 22-32 Low Speed [RPM]. Size [0 - To be used if parameter 0-03 Regional
related* 5.50 Settings is set for [0] International
7b Parameter 22-33 Low Speed [Hz].
kW] (parameter not visible if [1] North America is
7c Parameter 22-36 High Speed [RPM]. selected).
7d Parameter 22-37 High Speed [Hz]. Set power consumption at 50% speed level.
This function is used for storing values
8. Program the associated power values in:
necessary for tuning no-flow detection.
8a Parameter 22-34 Low Speed Power [kW].
22-35 Low Speed Power [HP]
8b Parameter 22-35 Low Speed Power [HP].
Range: Function:
8c Parameter 22-38 High Speed Power [kW].
Size [0 - To be used if parameter 0-03 Regional
8d Parameter 22-39 High Speed Power [HP]. related* 7.50 hp] Settings is set for [1] North America
9. Switch back with [Auto On] or [Off]. (parameter not visible if [0] International is
selected).
22-30 No-Flow Power
Set power consumption at 50% speed level.
Range: Function: This function is used for storing values
0 kW* [0 - 0 kW] Readout of calculated no-flow power at necessary for tuning no-flow detection.
actual speed. If power drops to the display
value, the frequency converter considers the 22-36 High Speed [RPM]
condition as a no-flow situation. Range: Function:
Size [0 - To be used if parameter 0-02 Motor Speed
22-31 Power Correction Factor
related* par. 4-13 Unit is set for [0] RPM (parameter not
Range: Function: RPM] visible if [1] Hz is selected).
100 % [1 - Make corrections to the calculated power in Set used speed for the 85% level.
* 400 %] parameter 22-30 No-Flow Power. The function is used for storing values
If no-flow is detected when it should not be necessary for tuning no-flow detection.
detected, decrease the setting. However, if no-
flow is not detected when it should be 22-37 High Speed [Hz]
detected, increase the setting to above 100%. Range: Function:
Size [0 - To be used if parameter 0-02 Motor Speed
22-32 Low Speed [RPM]
related* par. 4-14 Unit is set for [1] Hz (parameter not visible
Range: Function: Hz] if [0] RPM is selected).
Size [ 0 - par. To be used if parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Set used speed for the 85% level.
related* 22-36 Unit is set to [0] RPM (parameter not The function is used for storing values
RPM] visible if [1] Hz is selected). necessary for tuning no-flow detection.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 191

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

22-38 High Speed Power [kW] See also signal flow chart, Figure 3.63.
Range: Function: There are 3 different ways of using the sleep mode
function:
Size [0 - To be used, if parameter 0-03 Regional

3 3 related* 5.50
kW]
Settings is set for [0] International
(parameter not visible if [1] North America is • Boost system with pressure feedback.
selected). • System with pressure feedback.
Set power consumption at 85% speed level.
This function is used for storing values
• Boost system without pressure feedback.

necessary for tuning no-flow detection.

130BA255.11
22-39 High Speed Power [HP] FC

Range: Function:
Size [0 - To be used if parameter 0-03 Regional
related* 7.50 hp] Settings is set for [1] North America
(parameter not visible if [0] International is
selected). pSL
Set power consumption at 85% speed level.
This function is used for storing values
necessary for tuning no-flow detection.

3.19.4 22-4* Sleep Mode

fo
If the load on the system allows for stop of the motor and PS

the load is monitored, the motor can be stopped by

activating the sleep mode function. This is not a normal
stop command, but ramps the motor down to 0 RPM and
stops energizing the motor. When in sleep mode, certain
conditions are monitored to find out when load has been FC Frequency converter
applied to the system again. fO Frequency out
PS P system
Sleep mode can be activated either from the no-flow PSL P setpoint
detection/minimum speed detection or via an external
signal applied to 1 of the digital inputs (programmed via Figure 3.66 Sleep Mode Function
the parameters for configuration of the digital inputs,
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs).
To facilitate use of, for example, an electro-mechanical flow In systems where the integrated PI controller is used for
switch to detect a no-flow condition and activate sleep controlling pressure or temperature, for example boost
mode, the action takes place at raising edge of the systems with a pressure feedback signal applied to the
external signal applied. Otherwise, the frequency converter frequency converter from a pressure transducer:
would never come out of sleep mode again as the signal
1. Set parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode for [3]
would be steadily connected.
Closed loop.

If parameter 25-26 Destage At No-Flow is set for [1] Enabled, 2. Configure the PI controller for reference and
activating sleep mode applies a command to the cascade feedback signals.
controller (if enabled) to start destaging of lag pumps Figure 3.67 shows a boost system.
(fixed speed) before stopping the lead pump (variable
speed).

When entering sleep mode, the lower status line in the

display shows sleep mode.

192 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

p (Pressure) In systems where the pressure or temperature is controlled

130BA257.10
by an external PI controller, the wake-up conditions cannot
P Boost PSystem be based on feedback from the pressure/temperature
P 22-45 P Set transducer as the setpoint is not known. In the example
3 3
P 22-44
P Wake
with a boost system, pressure Pset is not known. Set
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode for [1] Open loop.
Time Example: Boost system.
f Ref f out (Frequency)

No/Low Flow t1 Sleep mode Time

detected activated
Boost pSystem = pWake
activated
Figure 3.67 Boost System with Pressure Feedback

If no flow is detected, the frequency converter increases

the setpoint for pressure to ensure a slight overpressure in
the system (boost to be set in parameter 22-45 Setpoint
Boost).
The feedback from the pressure transducer is monitored.
When this pressure has dropped with a set percentage
below the normal setpoint for pressure (Pset), the motor
ramps up again. The pressure is then controlled for
reaching the set value (Pset). Figure 3.69 Boost System without Pressure Feedback
130BA256.11

When low power or low speed is detected, the motor is

FC stopped, but the reference signal (fref) from the external
controller is still monitored, and because of the low
pressure created, the controller increases the reference
signal to gain pressure. When the reference signal has
reached a set value fwake, the motor restarts.
External PID
controller
The speed is set manually by an external reference signal
(remote reference). Set the settings (parameter group 22-3*
fRef PSet
No-Flow Power Tuning) for tuning of the no-flow function
to default.
PSystem

fOut
P

Figure 3.68 System with Pressure Feedback

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 193

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Internal PI controller External PI controller or manual control

(parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode) (parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode)
Sleep mode Wake up Sleep mode Wake up
No-flow detection (pumps only) Yes – Yes (except manual –
3 3 setting of speed)
Low-speed detection Yes – Yes –
External signal Yes – Yes –
Pressure/temperature – Yes – No
(transmitter connected)
Output frequency – No – Yes

Table 3.29 Overview of Configuration Possibilities

NOTICE! 22-43 Wake-up Speed [Hz]

Sleep mode is not active when local reference is active Range: Function:
(set speed manually with the navigation keys on the Set the reference speed at which the sleep
LCP). See parameter 3-13 Reference Site. mode should be canceled.
Does not work in hand-on mode. Carry out auto set-up
in open loop before setting input/output in closed loop. 22-44 Wake-up Ref./FB Difference
Range: Function:
22-40 Minimum Run Time 10 [0 - Only to be used if parameter 1-00 Configuration
Range: Function: %* 100 %] Mode is set to [3] Closed Loop and the integrated
60 s* [0 - 600 s] Set the minimum running time for the motor PI controller is used for controlling the pressure.
after a start command (digital input or Set the pressure drop allowed in percentage of
fieldbus) before entering sleep mode. setpoint for the pressure (Pset) before canceling
the sleep mode.
22-41 Minimum Sleep Time
NOTICE!
Range: Function: If used in applications where the integrated
30 s* [0 - 600 s] Set the minimum time for staying in sleep PI controller is set for inverse control in
mode. This setting overrides any wake-up parameter 20-71 Controller Performance, the
conditions. value set in parameter 22-44 Wake-up
Ref./FB Difference is automatically added.
22-42 Wake-up Speed [RPM]
Range: Function:
22-45 Setpoint Boost
Size [0 - To be used if parameter 0-02 Motor Speed
related* par. Unit has been set for [0] RPM (parameter Range: Function:
4-13 not visible if [1] Hz is selected). Only to be 0% [-100 - Only to be used if parameter 1-00 Configuration
RPM] used if parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is * 100 %] Mode is set to [3] Closed Loop and the integrated
set for [0] Open loop and an external PI controller is used. In systems with, for example,
controller applies speed reference. constant pressure control, it is advantageous to
Set the reference speed at which the sleep increase the system pressure before the motor is
mode should be canceled. stopped. This extends the time in which the
motor is stopped and helps to avoid frequent
22-43 Wake-up Speed [Hz] start/stop.
Range: Function: Set the overpressure/overtemperature in
percentage of setpoint for the pressure (Pset)/
Size [0 - To be used if parameter 0-02 Motor Speed
temperature before entering sleep mode.
related* par. Unit has been set for [1] Hz (parameter not
If set to 5%, the boost pressure is Psetx1.05. The
4-14 visible if [0] RPM is selected). Only to be used
negative values can be used, for example, in
Hz] if parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set
cooling tower control where a negative change is
for [0] Open Loop and speed reference is
needed.
applied by an external controller controlling
the pressure.

194 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

22-46 Maximum Boost Time 22-50 End of Curve Function

Range: Function: Option: Function:
60 [0 - Only to be used if parameter 1-00 Configuration NOTICE!
s* 600 s] Mode is set to [3] Closed Loop and the integrated
PI controller is used for controlling the pressure.
Do not set parameter 14-20 Reset Mode,
to [13] Infinite auto reset, when
3 3
Set the maximum time for which boost mode is parameter 22-50 End of Curve Function is
allowed. If the set time is exceeded, sleep mode is set to [2] Alarm. Doing so causes the
entered, not waiting for the set boost pressure to frequency converter to continuously cycle
be reached. between running and stopping when an
end-of-curve condition is detected.
3.19.5 22-5* End of Curve
NOTICE!
The end-of-curve conditions occur when a pump is If the frequency converter is equipped
yielding a too large volume to ensure the set pressure. This with a constant speed bypass with an
can occur if there is a leakage in the distribution pipe automatic bypass function that starts the
system. bypass if the frequency converter
experiences a persistent alarm condition,
The frequency converter initiates the function selected in be sure to disable the automatic bypass
parameter 22-50 End of Curve Function in the following function, if [2] Alarm or [3] Man. Reset
conditions: Alarm is selected as the end-of-curve
• The frequency converter is running at maximum function.
speed (parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit
[RPM] or parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [0] Off End-of-curve monitoring is not active.
[Hz]). *

• The feedback signal is less than the pressure [1] Warning The frequency converter continues to run, but
setpoint by a value that is equal to or exceeds activates an end-of-curve warning (warning 94,
2.5% of the value in parameter 3-03 Maximum End of curve). A frequency converter digital
Reference. output or a serial communication bus can
communicate a warning to other equipment.
• The conditions are active for a time set in
parameter 22-51 End of Curve Delay. [2] Trip The frequency converter stops running and
activates an end-of-curve alarm (alarm 94, End of
It is possible to obtain a signal on 1 of the digital outputs
curve). A frequency converter digital output or a
by selecting [192] End of Curve in parameter group 5-3*
serial communication bus can communicate an
Digital Outputs and/or parameter group 5-4* Relays. The
alarm to other equipment.
signal is present when an end-of-curve condition occurs
and the selection in parameter 22-50 End of Curve Function [3] Manual The frequency converter stops running and
is different from [0] Off. The end-of-curve function can only Reset Trip activates an end-of-curve alarm (alarm 94, End of
be used when operating with the built-in PID controller curve). A frequency converter digital output or a
([3] Closed Loop in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode). fieldbus can communicate an alarm to other
equipment.
22-50 End of Curve Function
[4] Stop and
Option: Function:
Trip
NOTICE!
Automatic restart resets the alarm and 22-51 End of Curve Delay
restarts the system. Range: Function:
10 s* [0 - When an end-of-curve condition is detected, a
600 s] timer is activated. When the time set in this
parameter expires, and the end-of-curve
condition is steady during the entire period, the
function set in parameter 22-50 End of Curve
Function is activated. If the condition disappears
before the timer expires, the timer is reset.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 195

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.19.6 22-6* Broken Belt Detection 22-62 Broken Belt Delay

Range: Function:
The broken-belt detection can be used in both closed-loop 10 s [0 - 600 Sets the time for which the broken belt
systems and open-loop systems for pumps and fans. If the
3 3 estimated motor torque is below the broken belt torque
s] conditions must be active before carrying out
the action selected in parameter 22-60 Broken
value (parameter 22-61 Broken Belt Torque) and the Belt Function.
frequency converter output frequency is above or equal to
15 Hz, the broken-belt function (parameter 22-60 Broken
Belt Function) is performed. 3.19.7 22-7* Short Cycle Protection
22-60 Broken Belt Function
In some applications, a need for limiting the numbers of
Selects the action to be performed if the broken-belt condition is
starts often exists. One way to do this is to ensure a
detected.
minimum run time (time between a start and a stop) and a
Option: Function: minimum interval between starts.
NOTICE! This means that any normal stop command can be
overridden by parameter 22-77 Minimum Run Time and any
Do not set parameter 14-20 Reset Mode
normal start command (start/jog/freeze) can be overridden
to [13] Infinite auto reset, when
by parameter 22-76 Interval between Starts.
parameter 22-60 Broken Belt Function is
None of the 2 functions are active if hand-on mode or off
set to [2] Trip. Doing so causes the
mode have been activated via the LCP. If pressing [Hand
frequency converter to continuously
On] or [Off], the 2 timers are reset to 0 and do not start
cycle between running and stopping
counting until [Auto On] is pressed, and an active start
when a broken-belt condition is
command is applied.
detected.
22-75 Short Cycle Protection
NOTICE! Option: Function:
For frequency converters with constant- [0] * Disabled Timer set in parameter 22-76 Interval between
speed bypass. Starts is disabled.
If an automatic bypass function starts
[1] Enabled Timer set in parameter 22-76 Interval between
the bypass at persistent alarm
Starts is enabled.
conditions, disable the bypass’s
automatic bypass function if [2] Alarm
22-76 Interval between Starts
or [3] Man. Reset Alarm is selected as
the broken-belt function. Range: Function:
Size related* [ par. 22-77 - Sets the minimum time between 2
3600 s] starts. Any normal start command
[0] * Off
(start/jog/freeze) is disregarded
[1] Warning The frequency converter continues to run, but
until the timer has expired.
activates a broken-belt warning (warning 95,
Broken belt). A frequency converter digital
22-77 Minimum Run Time
output or a serial communication bus can
communicate a warning to other equipment. Range: Function:

[2] Trip The frequency converter stops running and

0 s* [ 0 - par. NOTICE!
22-76 s]
activates a broken-belt alarm (alarm 95, Broken Does not work in cascade mode.
belt). A frequency converter digital output or a
serial communication bus can communicate Sets the minimum run time after a normal start
an alarm to other equipment. command (start/jog/freeze). Any normal stop
command is disregarded until the set time has
[3] Stop and
expired. The timer starts counting following a
Trip
normal start command (start/jog/freeze).
22-61 Broken Belt Torque A coast (inverse) or an external interlock
Range: Function: command overrides the timer.
10 %* [0 - 100 %] Sets the broken-belt torque as a percentage
of the rated motor torque.

196 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

22-78 Minimum Run Time Override

130BA383.11
Option: Function:
[0] * Disabled
[1] Enabled
3 3
22-79 Minimum Run Time Override Value
Range: Function:
0 ProcessCtrlUnit* [-999999.999 - 999999.999
ProcessCtrlUnit]

3.19.8 22-8* Flow Compensation

In certain applications, it is not possible for a pressure Figure 3.70 Flow Compensation Set-up
transducer to be placed at a remote point in the system,
and it can only be located close to the fan/pump outlet.
Flow compensation operates by adjusting the setpoint There are 2 methods which can be employed, depending
according to the output frequency, which is almost propor- on whether the speed at system design working point is
tional to flow. Thus, it compensates for higher losses at known.
higher flow rates.

HDESIGN (required pressure) is the setpoint for closed-loop

(PI) operation of the frequency converter and is set as for
closed-loop operation without flow compensation.

Speed at design point Speed at design point

Parameter used
known unknown
Parameter 22-80 Flow Compensation + +
Parameter 22-81 Square-linear Curve Approximation + +
Parameter 22-82 Work Point Calculation + +
Parameter 22-83 Speed at No-Flow [RPM]/parameter 22-84 Speed at No-
+ +
Flow [Hz]
Parameter 22-85 Speed at Design Point [RPM]/parameter 22-86 Speed at
+ –
Design Point [Hz]
Parameter 22-87 Pressure at No-Flow Speed + +
Parameter 22-88 Pressure at Rated Speed – +
Parameter 22-89 Flow at Design Point – +
Parameter 22-90 Flow at Rated Speed – +

Table 3.30 Speed at Design Point Known/Unknown

22-80 Flow Compensation 22-81 Square-linear Curve Approximation

Option: Function: Range: Function:
[0] * Disabled Setpoint compensation not active. Example 1
Adjustment of this parameter allows the
[1] Enabled Setpoint compensation is active. Enabling this
shape of the control curve to be adjusted.
parameter allows the flow-compensated setpoint
0=Linear
operation.
100%=Ideal shape (theoretical).

22-81 Square-linear Curve Approximation

Range: Function:
100 %* [0 - 100 %] NOTICE!
Not visible when running in cascade.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 197

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

H (head) 22-82 Work Point Calculation

130BA388.11
Option: Function:
described, allows the frequency converter to

3 3 calculate the reference point B and thus to plot

the control curve, which also includes the system
0% design working point A.
-81
P22
%
100

130BA387.11
H (head)

H RATED DB
P22-88 A C
H DESIGN
Setpoint
Control Curve

nR GN
nD

AT
ES

ED
I
H MIN
P22-83/
P22-84 Control Curve
P22-87
Q (flow) Q DESIGN Q RATED Q
P22-89 P22-90

Figure 3.71 Square-Linear Curve Approximation

Figure 3.73 Speed at System Design Working
Point is not Known

22-82 Work Point Calculation

Option: Function: [0] Disabled Work point calculation not active. To be used if
Example 1 * speed at design point is known.
H(head)
130BA385.11

[1] Enabled Work point calculation is active. Enabling this

parameter allows the calculation of the unknown
A
HDESIGNSetpoint
system design working point at 50/60 Hz speed,
nR
AT
nD P22

D_ E
ES -85

from the input data set in:

IGN /2

fRA
TE
-fD 2-86

HMIN
D
ES

• Parameter 22-83 Speed at No-Flow [RPM].

IGN

P22-83/
P22-84
P22-87 Control Curve

• Parameter 22-84 Speed at No-Flow [Hz].

Figure 3.72 Speed at System Design Working
Point is Known
• Parameter 22-87 Pressure at No-Flow
Speed.

• Parameter 22-88 Pressure at Rated Speed.

From the datasheet showing characteristics for the • Parameter 22-89 Flow at Design Point.
specific equipment at different speeds, simply
• Parameter 22-90 Flow at Rated Speed.
reading across from the HDESIGN point and the
QDESIGN point allows finding point A, which is the 22-83 Speed at No-Flow [RPM]
system design working point. The pump character-
Range: Function:
istics at this point should be identified and the
associated speed programmed. Closing the valves Size [0 - Resolution 1 RPM.
and adjusting the speed until HMIN has been related* par. Enter the speed of the motor in RPM at
achieved allows the speed at the no-flow point to 22-85 which flow is 0 and minimum pressure HMIN
be identified. RPM] is achieved. Alternatively, enter the speed in
Adjustment of parameter 22-81 Square-linear Curve Hz in parameter 22-84 Speed at No-Flow
Approximation then allows the shape of the [Hz]. If parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit is
control curve to be adjusted infinitely. set to RPM, parameter 22-85 Speed at Design
Point [RPM] should also be used. Closing
Example 2
the valves and reducing the speed until
Speed at system design working point is not
minimum pressure HMIN is achieved
known: Where the speed at system design
determines this value.
working point is unknown, another reference point
on the control curve has to be determined based
on the datasheet. Looking at the curve for the
rated speed and plotting the design pressure
(HDESIGN, Point C), the flow at that pressure, QRATED,
can be determined. Similarly, by plotting the
design flow (QDESIGN, Point D), the pressure HDESIGN
at that flow can be determined. Knowing these 2
points on the pump curve, along with HMIN as

198 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

22-84 Speed at No-Flow [Hz] 22-88 Pressure at Rated Speed

Range: Function: Also see parameter 22-82 Work Point Calculation.
Size [0 - Resolution 0.033 Hz. Range: Function:
related* par.
22-86
Enter the motor speed in Hz at which flow
has effectively stopped and minimum
999999.999* [ par. 22-87 -
999999.999 ]
Enter the value corresponding
to the pressure at rated speed,
3 3
Hz] in reference/feedback units.
pressure HMIN is achieved. Alternatively,
enter the speed in RPM in This value can be defined
parameter 22-83 Speed at No-Flow [RPM]. If using the pump datasheet.
parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit is set to
Hz, parameter 22-86 Speed at Design Point 22-89 Flow at Design Point
[Hz] should also be used. Closing the valves Also, see parameter 22-88 Pressure at Rated Speed point A.
and reducing the speed until minimum
Range: Function:
pressure HMIN is achieved determines this
0* [0 - 999999.999 ] Flow at design point (no units).
value.

22-90 Flow at Rated Speed

22-85 Speed at Design Point [RPM]
Also, see parameter 22-82 Work Point Calculation.
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
Size [0 - Resolution 1 RPM.
related* 60000 Size related* [ 0 - 999999999 ] Enter the value corresponding
Only visible when parameter 22-82 Work
RPM] to flow at rated speed. This
Point Calculation is set to [0] Disabled. Enter
value can be defined using the
the motor speed in RPM at which the
pump datasheet.
system design working point is achieved.
Alternatively, enter the speed in Hz in
parameter 22-86 Speed at Design Point [Hz].
If parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit is set to
RPM, parameter 22-83 Speed at No-Flow
[RPM] should also be used.

22-86 Speed at Design Point [Hz]

Range: Function:
Size [ 0.0 - Resolution 0.033 Hz.
related* par. Only visible when parameter 22-82 Work
4-19 Point Calculation is set to [0] Disabled. Enter
Hz] the motor speed in Hz at which the system
design working point is achieved. Alterna-
tively, enter the speed in RPM in
parameter 22-85 Speed at Design Point [RPM].
If parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit is set to
Hz, parameter 22-83 Speed at No-Flow [RPM]
should also be used.

22-87 Pressure at No-Flow Speed

Range: Function:
0* [ 0 - par. 22-88 ] Enter the pressure HMIN corresponding to
speed at no-flow in reference/feedback
units.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 199

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.20 Parameters 23-** Time-based 23-00 ON Time

Functions Array [10]
Range: Function:
3.20.1 23-0* Timed Actions
3 3 Size
related*
[ 0 - 0 ] Sets the ON time for the timed action.

Use timed actions for actions performed on a daily or NOTICE!

weekly basis, for example different references for working The frequency converter has no
hours/non-working hours. Up to 10 timed actions can be back-up of the clock function. The
programmed in the frequency converter. Select the timed set date/time resets to default
action number from the list when entering parameter (2000-01-01 00:00) after a power-
group 23-** Time-based Functions from the LCP. down unless a real-time clock-
Parameter 23-00 ON Time and parameter 23-04 Occurrence module with back-up is installed. In
then refer to the selected timed action number. Each parameter 0-79 Clock Fault, it is
timed action is divided into an ON time and an OFF time, possible to program a warning if
in which 2 different actions may be performed. the clock has not been set properly,
for example after a power-down.
Display lines 2 and 3 in the LCP show the status for timed
actions mode (parameter 0-23 Display Line 2 Large and
parameter 0-24 Display Line 3 Large, setting [1643] Timed 23-01 ON Action
Actions Status). Array [10]
Option: Function:
NOTICE! NOTICE!
If commands are applied simultaneously to the digital For options [32] Set
inputs for constant OFF and constant ON, the timed digital out A low–
actions mode changes to timed actions auto and the 2 [43] Set digital out
commands are disregarded. F high, see also
If parameter 0-70 Date and Time is not set or the parameter group
frequency converter is set to hand-on mode or OFF 5-3* Digital Outputs
mode (for example via the LCP), the timed actions mode and parameter
is changed to [0] Disabled. group 5-4* Relays.
The timed actions have a higher priority than the same
actions/commands activated by the digital inputs or the
Select the action
smart logic controller.
during ON time. See
parameter 13-52 SL
The actions programmed in timed actions are merged with Controller Action for
corresponding actions from digital inputs, control word via descriptions of the
bus, and smart logic controller, according to merge rules options.
set up in parameter group 8-5* Digital/Bus.
[0] * Disabled
[1] No action
NOTICE! [2] Select set-up 1
Program the clock (parameter group 0-7* Clock Settings) [3] Select set-up 2
correctly for timed actions to function. [4] Select set-up 3
[5] Select set-up 4
NOTICE! [10] Select preset ref 0
When mounting VLT® Analog I/O Option MCB 109, a [11] Select preset ref 1
battery back-up of the date and time is included. [12] Select preset ref 2
[13] Select preset ref 3
NOTICE! [14] Select preset ref 4

The PC-based configuration tool MCT 10 Set-up Software [15] Select preset ref 5
comprises a special guide for easy programming of [16] Select preset ref 6
timed actions. [17] Select preset ref 7
[18] Select ramp 1

200 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

23-01 ON Action 23-02 OFF Time

Array [10] Array [10]
Option: Function: Range: Function:
[19] Select ramp 2 Size
related*
[ 0 - 0 ] Sets the OFF time for the timed action.
3 3
[22]
[23]
Run
Run reverse
NOTICE!
The frequency converter has no
[24] Stop
back-up of the clock function. The
[26] DC Brake
set date/time is reset to default
[27] Coast
(2000-01-01 00:00) after a power-
[28] Freeze output down unless a real-time clock
[29] Start timer 0 module with back-up is installed. In
[30] Start timer 1 parameter 0-79 Clock Fault, it is
[31] Start timer 2 possible to program a warning if
[32] Set digital out A low the clock has not been set properly,
[33] Set digital out B low for example after a power-down.
[34] Set digital out C low
[35] Set digital out D low
[36] Set digital out E low
23-03 OFF Action
[37] Set digital out F low Array [10]
[38] Set digital out A high See parameter 23-01 ON Action for available actions.
[39] Set digital out B high Option: Function:
[40] Set digital out C high [0] * Disabled
[41] Set digital out D high
[42] Set digital out E high
[43] Set digital out F high
[60] Reset Counter A
[61] Reset Counter B
[62] Counter A (up)
[63] Counter A (down)
[64] Counter B (up)
[65] Counter B (down)
[70] Start Timer 3
[71] Start Timer 4
[72] Start Timer 5
[73] Start Timer 6
[74] Start Timer 7
[80] Sleep Mode
[81] Derag
[82] Reset Derag Counter
[90] Set ECB Bypass Mode
[91] Set ECB Drive Mode
[100] Reset Alarms
[101] Reset Flow Totalized Volume
Counter
[102] Reset Flow Actual Volume Counter

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 201

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

23-04 Occurrence 23-04 Occurrence

Array [10] Array [10]
Option: Function: Option: Function:

3 3 Select which days the timed action

applies to. Specify working/non-working
[17] Day 8 of month
[18] Day 9 of month
days in: [19] Day 10 of month
• Parameter 0-81 Working Days. [20] Day 11 of month
• Parameter 0-82 Additional [21] Day 12 of month
Working Days. [22] Day 13 of month
[23] Day 14 of month
• Parameter 0-83 Additional Non-
Working Days. [24] Day 15 of month
[25] Day 16 of month
[0] * All days
[26] Day 17 of month
[1] Working days
[27] Day 18 of month
[2] Non-working days
[28] Day 19 of month
[3] Monday
[29] Day 20 of month
[4] Tuesday
[30] Day 21 of month
[5] Wednesday
[31] Day 22 of month
[6] Thursday
[32] Day 23 of month
[7] Friday
[33] Day 24 of month
[8] Saturday
[34] Day 25 of month
[9] Sunday
[35] Day 26 of month
[10] Day 1 of month
[36] Day 27 of month
[11] Day 2 of month
[37] Day 28 of month
[12] Day 3 of month
[38] Day 29 of month
[13] Day 4 of month
[39] Day 30 of month
[14] Day 5 of month
[40] Day 31 of month
[15] Day 6 of month
[16] Day 7 of month

3.20.2 23-1* Maintenance

Wear and tear calls for periodic inspection and service of elements in the application, for example motor bearings, feedback
sensors, seals, and filters. With preventive maintenance, the service intervals may be programmed into the frequency
converter. The frequency converter gives a message when maintenance is required. 20 preventive maintenance events can
be programmed into the frequency converter.

Specify the following for each event:

• Maintenance item (for example, motor bearings).
• Maintenance action (for example, replacement).
• Maintenance time base (for example, running hours, or a specific date and time).
• Maintenance time interval or the date and time of next maintenance.

NOTICE!
To disable a preventive maintenance event, set the associated parameter 23-12 Maintenance Time Base to [0] Disabled.

Preventive maintenance can be programmed from the LCP, but use of the PC-based MCT 10 Set-up Software is
recommended.

202 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

130BA492.10
Untitled - MCT 10 SET - up Software
File Edit View Insert Communication Tools OptionsHelp

+ Network ID Name Setup 1 Setup 2 Setup 3 Setup 4

3 3
Project
- 2310.0 Maintenance Item Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings
- VLT AQUA DRIVE
All Parameters 2310.1 Maintenance Item Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings
-
2310.2 Maintenance Item Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings
+ Operation/Display
2310.3 Maintenance Item Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings
+ Load/Motor
2310.4 Maintenance Item Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings
+ Brakes
2310.5 Maintenance Item Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings
+ Reference / Ramps
+ Limits / Warnings 2310.6 Maintenance Item Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings
+ Digital In/Out 2310.7 Maintenance Item Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings
+ Analog In/Out 2310.8 Maintenance Item Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings
+ Comm. andOptions 2310.9 Maintenance Item Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings
+ Smart logic 2310.10 Maintenance Item Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings
+ Special Functions 2310.11 Maintenance Item Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings
+ Drive Information 2310.12 Maintenance Item Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings
+ Data Readouts 2310.13 Maintenance Item Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings
+ Info & Readouts 2310.14 Maintenance Item Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings
+ Drive Closed Loop 2310.15 Maintenance Item Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings
+ Ext. Closed Loop 2310.16 Maintenance Item Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings
+ Application Functions
2310.17 Maintenance Item Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings
- Time-based Functions
2310.18 Maintenance Item Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings
Timed Actions
2310.19 Maintenance Item Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings Motor bearings
Maintenance
2311.0 Maintenance Action Lubricate Lubricate Lubricates Lubricate
Maintenance Reset
2311.2 Maintenance Action Lubricate Lubricate Lubricates Lubricate
Energy Log
2311.3 Maintenance Action Lubricate Lubricate Lubricates Lubricate
Trending
Payback Counter 2311.4 Maintenance Action Lubricate Lubricate Lubricates Lubricate

+ Cascade Controller 2311.5 Maintenance Action Lubricate Lubricate Lubricates Lubricate

+ Water Application Functions 2311.6 Maintenance Action Lubricate Lubricate Lubricates Lubricate
+ Cascade Controller

Figure 3.74 MCT 10 Set-up Software

The LCP indicates (with a wrench icon and letter M) when it is time for a preventive maintenance action and can be
programmed to be indicated on a digital output in parameter group 5-3* Digital Outputs. The preventive maintenance status
is shown in parameter 16-96 Maintenance Word. A preventive maintenance indication can be reset from a digital input, the
FC bus, or manually from the LCP through parameter 23-15 Reset Maintenance Word.

A maintenance log with the latest 10 loggings can be read from parameter group 18-0* Maintenance Log and via [Alarm Log]
on the LCP after selecting maintenance log.

NOTICE!
The preventive maintenance events are defined in a 20-element array. Hence, each preventive maintenance event must
use the same array element index in parameter 23-10 Maintenance Item to parameter 23-14 Maintenance Date and Time.

23-10 Maintenance Item 23-10 Maintenance Item

Array [20] Array [20]
Option: Function: Option: Function:
Array with 20 elements shown below [5] Pressure transmitter
the parameter number in the display. [6] Flow transmitter
Press [OK] and step between [7] Temperature transm.
elements with [◄], [►], [▲], and [▼]. [8] Pump seals
Select the item to be associated with [9] Fan belt
the preventive maintenance event. [10] Filter
[11] Drive cooling fan
[1] * Motor bearings
[12] System health check
[2] Fan bearings
[13] Warranty
[3] Pump bearings
[20] Maintenance Text 0
[4] Valve
[21] Maintenance Text 1

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 203

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

23-10 Maintenance Item 23-13 Maintenance Time Interval

Array [20] Array [20]
Option: Function: Range: Function:

3 3 [22] Maintenance Text 2

[23] Maintenance Text 3
1
h*
[1 -
2147483647
Set the interval associated with the current
preventive maintenance event. This
[24] Maintenance Text 4 h] parameter is only used if [1] Running Hours
[25] Maintenance Text 5 or [2] Operating Hours is selected in
[26] Service log full parameter 23-12 Maintenance Time Base. The
timer is reset from parameter 23-15 Reset
23-11 Maintenance Action Maintenance Word.
Array [20] Example
Option: Function: A preventive maintenance event is set up
Select the action to be associated with Monday at 8:00.
the preventive maintenance event. Parameter 23-12 Maintenance Time Base is [2]
Operating hours and
[1] * Lubricate
parameter 23-13 Maintenance Time Interval is
[2] Clean
7 x 24 hours=168 hours. Next maintenance
[3] Replace event is indicated the following Monday at
[4] Inspect/Check 8:00. If this maintenance event is not reset
[5] Overhaul until Tuesday at 9:00, the next occurrence is
[6] Renew the following Tuesday at 9:00.
[7] Check
[20] Maintenance Text 0 23-14 Maintenance Date and Time
[21] Maintenance Text 1 Array [20]
[22] Maintenance Text 2
Range: Function:
[23] Maintenance Text 3
Size [0 - Set the date and time for next maintenance
[24] Maintenance Text 4
related* 0] occurrence if the preventive maintenance
[25] Maintenance Text 5 event is based on date/time. Date format
[28] Clear logs depends on the setting in
parameter 0-71 Date Format while the time
23-12 Maintenance Time Base
format depends on the setting in
Array [20]
parameter 0-72 Time Format.
Option: Function:
Select the time base to be associated with the
NOTICE!
preventive maintenance event.
The frequency converter has no back-
up of the clock function. The set date/
[0] Disabled Disables the preventive maintenance event. time is reset to default (2000-01-01
* 00:00) after a power-down. In
[1] Running The number of hours the motor has run. parameter 0-79 Clock Fault, it is possible
Hours Running hours are not reset at power-on. to program a warning if the clock has
Specify the maintenance time interval in not been set properly, for example after
parameter 23-13 Maintenance Time Interval. a power-down.
[2] Operating The number of hours the frequency converter Set the time at least 1 hour later than
Hours has run. Operating hours are not reset at actual time.
power-on. Specify the maintenance time
interval in parameter 23-13 Maintenance Time NOTICE!
Interval.
When mounting a VLT® Analog I/O
[3] Date & Uses the internal clock. Specify the date and option MCB 109 option card, a battery
Time time of the next maintenance occurrence in back-up of the date and time is
parameter 23-14 Maintenance Date and Time. included.

204 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

23-15 Reset Maintenance Word The data is based on the value registered by the kWh
Option: Function: counter in the frequency converter. This counter value can
be read in parameter 15-02 kWh Counter containing the
NOTICE! accumulated value since the first power-up or latest reset
When messages are reset, maintenance
item, action, and maintenance date/time
of the counter (parameter 15-06 Reset kWh Counter). 3 3
are not canceled. All data for the energy log is stored in counters, which can
Parameter 23-12 Maintenance Time Base is be read from parameter 23-53 Energy Log.
set to [0] Disabled.

Σ kWh

130BA282.10
Set this parameter to [1] Do reset to reset the (P 15-02, kWh Counter)
maintenance word in parameter 16-96 Maintenance
Counter 6
Word and reset the message shown in the LCP.
Counter 5
This parameter changes back to [0] Do not reset
Counter 4
when pressing [OK]. Counter 3

[0] * Do not Counter 2

reset Counter 1
Counter 0
[1] Do
reset

23-16 Maintenance Text

Array [6]
Days
Range: Function: Figure 3.75 Energy Log Graph
0* [0 - 6 individual texts (Maintenance Text
20 ] 0...Maintenance Text 5) can be written for use in
either parameter 23-10 Maintenance Item or Counter 00 always contains the oldest data. A counter
parameter 23-11 Maintenance Action. covers a period from XX:00 to XX:59 if hours or 00:00 to
The text is written according to the guidelines in 23:59 if days.
parameter 0-37 Display Text 1. If logging either the last hours or last days, the counters
shift contents at XX:00 every hour or at 00:00 every day.
The counter with highest index is always subject to update
3.20.3 23-5* Energy Log
(containing data for the actual hour since XX:00 or the
actual day since 00:00).
The frequency converter is continuously accumulating the
consumption of the motor controlled, based on the actual
power yielded by the frequency converter. The contents of counters can be shown as bars on the LCP.
Select Quick Menu, Loggings, Energy Log: Trending Continued
Bin/Trending Timed Bin/Trending Comparison.
This data can be used for an energy log function allowing
to compare and structure the information about the
energy consumption related to time.

There are 2 functions:

• Data related to a pre-programmed period,
defined by a set date and time for start.
• Data related to a predefined period back in time,
for example last 7 days within the pre-
programmed period.
For each of the above 2 functions, the data is stored in
several counters allowing for selecting time frame and a
split on hours, days, or weeks.
The period/split (resolution) can be set in
parameter 23-50 Energy Log Resolution.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 205

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

23-50 Energy Log Resolution 23-51 Period Start

Option: Function: Range: Function:
NOTICE! Set the date and time at which the energy log

3 3 The frequency converter has no back-

up of the clock function. The set date/
starts updating the counters. First, data is
stored in counter [00] and start at the time/
date programmed in this parameter.
time resets to default (2000-01-01
00:00) after a power-down unless a Date format depends on setting in
real-time clock-module with back-up is parameter 0-71 Date Format and time format
installed. Therefore, the logging is on setting in parameter 0-72 Time Format.
stopped until date/time is readjusted
in parameter 0-70 Date and Time. In 23-53 Energy Log
parameter 0-79 Clock Fault, it is Array [31]
possible to program a warning if the
Range: Function:
clock has not been set properly, for
example after a power-down.
0* [0 - NOTICE!
4294967295 ]
All counters are automatically reset
Select the type of period for logging when changing the setting in
consumption: [0] Hour of Day, [1] Day of parameter 23-50 Energy Log Resolution.
Week, or [2] Day of Month. The counters At overflow, the update of the counters
contain the logging data from the stops at maximum value.
programmed date/time for start
(parameter 23-51 Period Start) and the NOTICE!
numbers of hours/days as programmed for
When mounting VLT® Analog I/O Option
(parameter 23-50 Energy Log Resolution).
MCB 109 option card, a battery back-up
The logging starts on the date programmed
of the date and time is included.
in parameter 23-51 Period Start and continues
until 1 day/week/month has passed. The
Array with several elements equal to the
counters contain data for 1 day, 1 week, or 5
number of counters ([00]-[xx] below parameter
weeks back in time, and up to the actual
number in display). Press [OK] and step
time.
between elements with [▲] and [▼].
The logging starts at the date programmed
in parameter 23-51 Period Start. In all cases, Array elements:
the period split refers to operating hours
(time where frequency converter is powered
up).

[0] Hour of Day

[1] Day of Week
[2] Day of
Month
[5] * Last 24
Hours
[6] Last 7 Days
[7] Last 5
Weeks
Figure 3.76 Energy Log
23-51 Period Start
Range: Function:
Data from the latest period is stored in the
Size [0 - NOTICE! counter with the highest index.
related* 0]
When mounting VLT® Analog I/O option At power-down, all counter values are stored
MCB 109, a battery back-up of the date and resumed at next power-up.
and time is included.

206 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

23-54 Reset Energy Log Relative value

130BA281.10
operating variable
Option: Function: %
100 Counter 9: +0
Select [1] Do reset to reset all values in the 90 Counter 8: +6
energy log counters shown in
parameter 23-53 Energy Log. After pressing OK,
80
70
60
Counter 7: +2
Counter 6: +1
Counter 5: +11
3 3
the setting of the parameter value automatically 50 Counter 4: +0
40 Counter 3: +1
changes to [0] Do not reset. 30 Counter 2: +0
20 Counter 1: +1
[0] * Do not 10
Counter 0: +5
reset
[1] Do reset Figure 3.77 Time and Relative Values

3.20.4 23-6* Trending

Once per second, the value of the operating variable
Trending is used to monitor a process variable over time selected is registered. If a value has been registered to
and record how often the data falls into each of 10 user- equal 13%, the counter 10 to <20% is updated with the
defined data ranges. This is a convenient tool to obtain a value 1. If the value stays at 13% for 10 s, 10 is added to
quick overview indicating where to focus on improvement the counter value.
of operation.
The contents of counters can be shown as bars on the LCP.
2 sets of data for trending can be created to make it Select Quick Menu⇒Loggings: Trending Continued Bin/
possible to compare current values for a selected operating Trending Timed Bin/Trending Comparison.
variable with data for a certain reference period, for the
same variable. This reference period can be pre- NOTICE!
programmed (parameter 23-63 Timed Period Start and The counters start counting whenever the frequency
parameter 23-64 Timed Period Stop). The 2 sets of data can converter is powered up. A power cycle shortly after a
be read from parameter 23-61 Continuous Bin Data (current) reset resets the counters. EEPROM data is updated once
and parameter 23-62 Timed Bin Data (reference). per hour.

It is possible to create trending for the following operation

23-60 Trend Variable
variables:
Option: Function:
• Power.
Select the required operating variable to be
• Current.
monitored for trending.
• Output frequency.
[0] Power [kW] Power yielded to the motor. Reference for the
• Motor speed. relative value is the rated motor power
The trending function includes 10 counters (forming a bin) programmed in parameter 1-20 Motor Power
for each set of data containing the numbers of [kW] or parameter 1-21 Motor Power [HP]. The
registrations reflecting how often the operating variable is actual value can be read in
within each of 10 pre-defined intervals. The sorting is parameter 16-10 Power [kW] or
based on a relative value of the variable. parameter 16-11 Power [hp].

[1] Current [A] Output current to the motor. Reference for the
The relative value for the operating variable is determined relative value is the rated motor current
as: programmed in parameter 1-24 Motor Current.
• Actual/rated x 100% - for power and current. The actual value can be read in
parameter 16-14 Motor current.
• Actual/max x 100% - for output frequency and
motor speed. [2] Frequency Output frequency to the motor. Reference for
* [Hz] the relative value is the maximum output
The size of each interval can be adjusted individually, but
frequency programmed in
is 10% for each as default. Power and current can exceed
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]. The
rated value, but those registrations are included in 90–
actual value can be read in
100% (MAX) counter.
parameter 16-13 Frequency.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 207

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

23-60 Trend Variable 23-62 Timed Bin Data

Option: Function: Array [10]
[3] Motor Reference for the relative value is the Range: Function:

3 3 Speed
[RPM]
maximum motor speed programmed in
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM].
counters can be reset to 0 in
parameter 23-67 Reset Timed Bin Data.

23-61 Continuous Bin Data 23-63 Timed Period Start

Range: Function: Array [10]
0* [0 - Array with 10 elements ([0]-[9] below Range: Function:
4294967295 ] parameter number in display). Press [OK] and
step between elements with [▲] and [▼].
Size [0 - NOTICE!
related* 0]
The frequency converter has no back-up
10 counters with the frequency of of the clock function. The set date/time
occurrence for the operating variable is reset to default (2000-01-01 00:00)
monitored, sorted according to the following after a power-down unless a real-time
intervals: clock-module with back-up is installed.
• Counter [0]: 0–<10%. Therefore, the logging is stopped until
• Counter [1]: 10–<20%. date/time is readjusted in
parameter 0-70 Date and Time. In
• Counter [2]. 20–<30%.
parameter 0-79 Clock Fault, it is possible
• Counter [3]: 30–<40%. to program a warning if the clock has
• Counter [4]: 40–<50%. not been set properly, for example after
a power-down.
• Counter [5]: 50–<60%.

• Counter [6]. 60–<70%.

NOTICE!
• Counter [7]: 70–<80%.
When mounting VLT® Analog I/O option
• Counter [8]. 80–<90%. MCB 109, a battery back-up of the date
• Counter [9]: 90–<100% or and time is included.
maximum.

The above minimum limits for the intervals Set the date and time at which the trending
are the default limits. These can be changed starts the update of the timed bin counters.
in parameter 23-65 Minimum Bin Value. Date format depends on setting in
Starts to count when the frequency parameter 0-71 Date Format, and time format
converter is powered up for the first time. All on setting in parameter 0-72 Time Format.
counters can be reset to 0 in
parameter 23-66 Reset Continuous Bin Data. 23-64 Timed Period Stop
Range: Function:
23-62 Timed Bin Data Size [0 - NOTICE!
Array [10] related* 0]
When mounting VLT® Analog I/O
Range: Function: Option MCB 109, a battery back-up of
0* [0 - Array with 10 elements ([0]-[9] below the date and time is included.
4294967295 ] parameter number in display). Press [OK] and
step between elements with [▲] and [▼]. Set the date and time at which the trend
analyses must stop updating the timed bin
10 counters with the frequency of occurrence
counters.
for the operating data monitored sorted
according to the intervals as for Date format depends on the setting in
parameter 23-61 Continuous Bin Data. parameter 0-71 Date Format, and time format
on the setting in parameter 0-72 Time Format.
Starts to count at the date/time programmed
in parameter 23-63 Timed Period Start, and
stops at the time/date programmed in
parameter 23-64 Timed Period Stop. All

208 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

23-65 Minimum Bin Value The difference between the reference power at fixed speed
Range: Function: and the actual power yielded with speed control shows
the actual saving.
Size [0 - Array with 10 elements ([0]–[9] below
related* 100
%]
parameter number in display). Press [OK] and
step between elements with [▲] and [▼].
As value for the fixed speed case, the rated motor size 3 3
(kW) is multiplied by a factor (set in %) showing the power
Set the minimum limit for each interval in yielded at fixed speed. The difference between this
parameter 23-61 Continuous Bin Data and reference power and the actual power is accumulated and
parameter 23-62 Timed Bin Data. Example: If stored. Read the difference in energy in
selecting [1] counter and changing setting from parameter 23-83 Energy Savings.
10% to 12%, [0] counter is based on the The accumulated value for the difference in power
interval 0 to <12% and [1] counter on interval consumption is multiplied by the energy cost in local
12 to <20%. currency and the investment is subtracted. Read this
calculation for cost savings in parameter 23-84 Cost Savings.
23-66 Reset Continuous Bin Data
Option: Function: Cost savings=(∑ (reference power – actual power)) x
[0] * Do not Select [1] Do reset to reset all values in energy cost – extra cost.
reset parameter 23-61 Continuous Bin Data. After
pressing [OK], the setting of the parameter Breakeven (payback) occurs when the value read in the
value automatically changes to [0] Do not reset. parameter turns from negative to positive.
[1] Do reset
It is not possible to reset the energy savings counter, but
23-67 Reset Timed Bin Data the counter can be stopped any time by setting
Option: Function: parameter 23-80 Power Reference Factor to 0.
Select [1] Do reset to reset all counters in
parameter 23-62 Timed Bin Data. Parameter for settings
After pressing [OK], the setting of the Rated motor power Parameter 1-20 Motor Power
parameter value automatically changes to [0] [kW]
Do not reset. Power reference factor in % Parameter 23-80 Power Reference
[0] * Do not Factor
reset Energy cost per kWh Parameter 23-81 Energy Cost
[1] Do reset Investment Parameter 23-82 Investment
Parameters for readout

3.20.5 23-8* Payback Counter Energy savings Parameter 23-83 Energy Savings
Actual power Parameter 16-10 Power [kW]/
parameter 16-11 Power [hp]
The Payback Counter feature can give a rough calculation
of payback if the frequency converter has been installed in Cost savings Parameter 23-84 Cost Savings
an existing plant to ensure energy saving by changing
Table 3.31 Parameter Overview
from fixed to variable speed control. Reference for the
savings is a set value to show the average power yielded
23-80 Power Reference Factor
before the upgrade with variable speed control.
Range: Function:
100 % [0 - Set the percentage of the rated motor size (set
* 100 %] in parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] or
parameter 1-21 Motor Power [HP]), which shows
the average power yielded at the time running
Figure 3.78 Comparison of the Reference Power and Actual with fixed speed (before upgrade with variable
Power speed control).
Set a value different from 0 to start counting.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 209

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

23-81 Energy Cost 23-86 CO2 Reduction

Range: Function: Range: Function:
1* [0 - 999999.99 ] Set the actual cost for a kWh in local 0 kg* [0 - 0 Shows the CO2 depletion in kg based on the

3 3 currency. If the energy cost is changed

later on, it impacts the calculation for the
kg] CO2 conversion factor (parameter 23-85 CO2
Conversion Factor) and saved energy
entire period. (parameter 23-83 Energy Savings).

23-82 Investment
Range: Function:
0* [0 - Set the value of the investment spent on
999999999 ] upgrading the plant with speed control, in
same currency as used in
parameter 23-81 Energy Cost.

23-83 Energy Savings

Range: Function:
0 kWh* [0 - 0 This parameter allows a readout of the
kWh] accumulated difference between the reference
power and the actual output power.
If motor size is set in hp
(parameter 1-21 Motor Power [HP]), the
equivalent kW value is used for the energy
savings.

23-84 Cost Savings

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 2147483647 ] This parameter allows a readout of the
calculation based on the above equation
(in local currency).

23-85 CO2 Conversion Factor

Range: Function:
500 [0 - Enter the CO2 emission in grams per 1 kWh of
g* 1000 g] electrical energy produced. Typical life-cycle
greenhouse-gas emission values for different
power sources are:

• Renewable: 25 g.

• Nuclear: 70 g.

• Natural gas: 350 g.

• Oil: 800 g.

• Coal: 1000 g.

For more precise emission values in your

region, contact your regional environment
agency.

210 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3.21 Parameters 24-** Application Functions 2

3.21.1 24-0* Emergency Mode

CAUTION 3 3
Note that the frequency converter is only 1 component of the system. Correct function of emergency mode depends on
the correct design and selection of system components. Ventilation systems working in life safety applications must be
approved by the local emergency authorities. Non-interruption of the frequency converter due to emergency mode
operation could cause overpressure and damage the system and components, including dampers and air ducts. The
frequency converter itself could be damaged and become a source of danger. Danfoss accepts no responsibility for
errors, malfunctions personal injury, or any damage to the frequency converter itself or components herein, pump
systems and components herein, or other property when the frequency converter has been programmed for emergency
mode. In no event shall Danfoss be liable to the end user or any other party for any direct or indirect, special, or
consequential damage or loss suffered by such party, which has occurred due to the frequency converter being
programmed and operated in emergency mode.

Background
Emergency mode is for use in critical situations, where it is imperative for the motor to keep running, regardless of the
frequency converter’s normal protective functions. Some selections of the emergency mode function cause alarms and trip
conditions to be disregarded, enabling the motor to run without interruption.
Activation
Emergency mode is activated only via digital input terminals. See parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.
Messages in display
When emergency mode is activated, the display shows a status message Emergency Mode and a warning Emergency Mode.
Once the emergency mode is again deactivated, the status messages disappear and the warning is replaced by the warning
Emergency M Was Active. This message can only be reset by power-cycling the frequency converter supply. If a warranty-
affecting alarm (see parameter 24-09 Emergency Mode Alarm Handling) should occur while the frequency converter is active
in emergency mode, the display shows the warning Emergency M Limits Exceeded.
Digital and relay outputs can be configured for the status messages Emergency Mode Active and the warning Emergency M
Was Active. See parameter group 5-3* Digital Outputs and parameter group 5-4* Relays.
Emergency M was Active messages can also be accessed in the warning word via serial communication. (See relevant
documentation).
Access the status messages Emergency Mode via the extended status word.

Messages in
Message Type LCP Warning word 2 Ext. status word 2
display
Emergency Mode Status + + – + (bit 25)
Emergency Mode Warning + – – –
Emergency M was Active Warning + + + (bit 3) –
Emergency M Limits
Warning + + – –
Exceeded

Table 3.32 Messages in Display

Log
To see an overview of emergency mode-related events, view the emergency mode log, parameter group 18-1* Emergency
mode log, or press [Alarm Log] on the LCP.
The log includes up to 10 of the latest events. Warranty-affecting alarms have a higher priority than the other 2 types of
events.
The log cannot be reset.
The following events are logged:
• Warranty-affecting alarms (see parameter 24-09 Emergency Mode Alarm Handling).
• Emergency mode activated.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 211

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

• Emergency mode deactivated.

All other alarms occurring while emergency mode is activated are logged as usual.

NOTICE!
3 3 During emergency mode operation, all stop commands to the frequency converter are ignored, including coast/coast
inverse and external interlock. However, if Safe Torque Off is available in the frequency converter, this function is still
active.

NOTICE!
If using the live zero function in emergency mode, then it is also active for analog inputs other than that used for
emergency mode setpoint/feedback. Should the feedback to any of those other analog inputs be lost, for example a
cable is burned, live zero function operates. If this is not wanted, disable the live zero function for those other inputs.
Set the wanted live zero function if there is a missing signal when emergency mode is active in
parameter 6-02 Emergency Mode Live Zero Timeout Function.
Warning for live zero has a higher priority than the warning Emergency Mode.

NOTICE!
If setting the command [11] Start Reversing on a digital input terminal in parameter 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input, the
frequency converter interprets this as a reversing command.

24-00 Emergency Mode Function 24-01 Emergency Mode Configuration

Option: Function: Option: Function:
NOTICE! NOTICE!
In the above, alarms are produced or Before adjusting the PID controller, set
ignored in accordance with the selection parameter 24-09 Emergency Mode Alarm
in parameter 24-09 Emergency Mode Handling, [2] Trip, All Alarms/Test.
Alarm Handling.
NOTICE!
[0] Disabled Emergency mode function is not active. If [2] Enable-Run Reverse is selected in
* parameter 24-00 Emergency Mode Function,
[1] Enabled- In this mode, the motor continues to operate [3] Closed Loop cannot be selected in
Run in a clockwise direction. Works only in open parameter 24-01 Emergency Mode Configu-
Forward loop. Set parameter 24-01 Emergency Mode ration.
Configuration to [0] Open Loop.

[2] Enabled- In this mode, the motor continues to operate [0] Open When emergency mode is active, the motor runs
Run in a counterclockwise direction. Works only in * Loop with a fixed speed based on a reference set. The
Reverse open loop. Set parameter 24-01 Emergency unit is the same as selected in
Mode Configuration to [0] Open Loop. parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit.

[3] Enabled- In this mode, the output is disabled and the [3] Closed When emergency mode is active, the built-in PID
Coast motor is allowed to coast to stop. Loop controller controls the speed based on the setpoint
and a feedback signal selected in
[4] Enabled-
parameter 24-07 Emergency Mode Feedback Source.
Run
Select the unit in parameter 24-02 Emergency Mode
Fwd/Rev
Unit. For other PID controller settings, use
parameter group 20-** FC Closed Loop as for normal
operation. If the motor also is controlled by the
built-in PID controller when in normal operation,
the same transmitter can be used for both cases by
selecting the same source.

212 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

24-02 Emergency Mode Unit 24-02 Emergency Mode Unit

Option: Function: Option: Function:
Select the unit when emergency mode is active [171] lb/in²

[0]
and running in closed loop. [172] in WG
[173] ft WG
3 3
[1] % [174] in Hg

[2] RPM [180] HP

[3] Hz 24-03 Emergency Mode Min Reference

[4] Nm
Range: Function:
[5] PPM
Size [ -999999.999 Minimum value for the reference/
[10] 1/min
related* - par. 24-04 setpoint (limiting the sum of value in
[11] RPM
FireModeUnit] parameter 24-05 Emergency Mode
[12] Pulse/s
Preset Reference and value of signal on
[20] l/s
input selected in
[21] l/min parameter 24-06 Emergency Mode
[22] l/h Reference Source).
[23] m³/s If running in open loop when
[24] m³/min emergency mode is active, the unit is
[25] m³/h selected by the setting of
[30] kg/s parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit. For
[31] kg/min closed loop, select the unit in
[32] kg/h parameter 24-02 Emergency Mode Unit.
[33] t/min
[34] t/h 24-04 Emergency Mode Max Reference
[40] m/s Range: Function:
[41] m/min Size [ par. 24-03 Maximum value for the reference/
[45] m related* - 999999.999 setpoint (limiting the sum of value in
[60] °C FireMo- parameter 24-05 Emergency Mode Preset
[70] mbar deUnit] Reference and value of signal on input
[71] bar selected in parameter 24-06 Emergency
[72] Pa Mode Reference Source).
[73] kPa If running in open loop when
emergency mode is active, the unit is
[74] m WG
selected by the setting of
[75] mm Hg
parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit. For
[80] kW
closed loop, select the unit in
[120] GPM
parameter 24-02 Emergency Mode Unit.
[121] gal/s
[122] gal/min 24-05 Emergency Mode Preset Reference
[123] gal/h
Range: Function:
[124] CFM
0 %* [-100 - Enter the required preset reference/setpoint as a
[125] ft³/s
100 %] percentage of the value in
[126] ft³/min
parameter 24-04 Emergency Mode Max Reference.
[127] ft³/h
The set value is added to the value represented
[130] lb/s
by the signal on the analog input selected in
[131] lb/min parameter 24-06 Emergency Mode Reference
[132] lb/h Source.
[140] ft/s
[141] ft/min
[145] ft
[160] °F
[170] psi

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 213

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

24-06 Emergency Mode Reference Source 24-09 Emergency Mode Alarm Handling
Option: Function: Option: Function:
Select the external reference input to [0] Trip+Reset, If this mode is selected, the frequency

3 3 be used for the emergency mode.

This signal is added to the value set
Critical
Alarms
converter continues to run, ignoring most
alarms, even if doing so may result in
in parameter 24-06 Emergency Mode damage of the frequency converter. Critical
Reference Source. alarms are alarms which cannot be
suppressed, but a restart attempt is possible
[0] * No function
(infinity automatic reset).
[1] Analog Input 53
[2] Analog Input 54 [1] * Trip, Critical If there is a critical alarm, the frequency
[7] Pulse input 29 Alarms converter trips and does not auto restart
[8] Pulse input 33 (manual reset).
[20] Digital pot.meter [2] Trip, All It is possible to test the operation of
[21] Analog input X30/11 Alarms/Test emergency mode, but all alarm states are
[22] Analog input X30/12 activated normally (manual reset).
[23] Analog Input X42/1
[24] Analog Input X42/3 NOTICE!
[25] Analog Input X42/5 Certain alarms are warranty-affecting alarms that can
[29] Analog Input X48/2 affect the lifetime of the frequency converter. Should 1
[33] PCD Bus Reference of these ignored alarms occur while in emergency mode,
a log of the event is stored in the emergency mode log.
24-07 Emergency Mode Feedback Source Here the 10 latest events of warranty-affecting alarms,
Option: Function: emergency mode activation, and emergency mode
Select the feedback input to be used deactivation are stored.
for the emergency mode feedback
signal when emergency mode is NOTICE!
active. The setting in parameter 14-20 Reset Mode is disregarded
If the motor is also controlled by the if emergency mode is active (see parameter group 24-0*
built–in PID controller when in Emergency Mode).
normal operation, the same
transmitter can be used for both
Warranty-
cases by selecting the same source. Num- Critical
Description affecting
ber alarms
[0] * No function alarms
[1] Analog Input 53 4 Mains ph. Loss x
[2] Analog Input 54 7 DC overvolt x
[3] Pulse input 29 8 DC undervolt x
[4] Pulse input 33 9 Inverter overloaded x
[7] Analog Input X30/11 13 Over current x
[8] Analog Input X30/12 14 Earth (ground) fault x
[9] Analog Input X42/1 16 Short circuit x
[10] Analog Input X42/3 29 Power card temp x
[11] Analog Input X42/5 33 Inrush fault x
[99] Normal Feedback 38 Internal fault x
[100] Bus Feedback 1 65 Ctrl. card temp x
[101] Bus Feedback 2 68 Safe Stop x
[102] Bus feedback 3
Table 3.33 Emergency Mode Alarm Handling

214 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3.21.2 24-1* Drive Bypass 24-11 Drive Bypass Delay Time

Range: Function:
Function for activation of external contactors to bypass the 0 s* [0 - Programmable in 1 s increments. Once the bypass
frequency converter for direct online operation of the
motor, if there is a trip.
600 s] function is activated in accordance with the setting
in parameter 24-10 Drive Bypass Function, the 3 3
24-10 Drive Bypass Function bypass delay timer begins to operate. If the
frequency converter has been set for several restart
Option: Function:
attempts, the timer continues to run while the
NOTICE! frequency converter tries to restart. Should the
After enabling the frequency converter motor have restarted within the time period of the
bypass function, the Safe Torque Off bypass delay timer, the timer is reset.
function (in versions, where included)
Should the motor fail to restart at the end of the
does not comply with standard EN
bypass delay time, the frequency converter bypass
954-1, Cat. 3 installations.
relay is activated, which has been programmed for
bypass in parameter 5-40 Function Relay. If a relay
This parameter determines the circumstances delay has also been programmed in
that activate the frequency converter bypass parameter 5-41 On Delay, Relay, [Relay] or
function. parameter 5-42 Off Delay, Relay, [Relay], this time
[0] Disabled must also elapse before the relay action is
* performed.
[1] Enabled If in normal operation, the automatic Where no restart attempts are programmed, the
frequency converter bypass function is timer runs for the delay period set in this
activated under the following conditions: parameter and activates the frequency converter
• If there is a trip lock or a trip. bypass relay, which has been programmed for
• After the programmed number of bypass in parameter 5-40 Function Relay. If a relay
reset attempts programmed in delay has also been programmed in
parameter 14-20 Reset Mode. parameter 5-41 On Delay, Relay or
parameter 5-42 Off Delay, Relay, [Relay], this time
• If the bypass delay timer
must also elapse before the relay action is
(parameter 24-11 Drive Bypass Delay
performed.
Time) expires before reset attempts
have been completed.

[2] Enabled
(Emergency
M Only)

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 215

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.22 Parameters 25-** Cascade Controller

Parameters for configuring the basic cascade controller for sequence control of multiple pumps. For a more application-
oriented description and wiring examples, see Application Examples, Cascade Controller in the design guide.
3 3 For information on using the advanced features of the cascade controller options, see chapter 3.24 Parameters 27-** Cascade
CTL Option.

To configure the cascade controller to the actual system and the required control strategy, follow the sequence starting with
parameter group 25-0* System Settings and next parameter group 25-5* Alternation Settings. These parameters can normally be
set in advance.
Parameters in parameter groups 25-2* Bandwidth Settings and 25-4* Staging Settings often depend on the dynamic of the
system and final adjustment to be done at the commissioning of the plant.

NOTICE!
The cascade controller is supposed to operate in closed loop controlled by the built-in PI controller ([3] closed loop
selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode). If [0] open loop is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode, all
fixed speed pumps are destaged, but the variable speed pump is still controlled by the frequency converter, now as an
open-loop configuration:

216 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3 3

Figure 3.79 Cascade Controller Sample Set-up

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 217

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.22.1 25-0* System Settings 25-04 Pump Cycling

Option: Function:
Parameters related to control principles and configuration selection of pump cycling is either first in – last out
of the system.
3 3 25-00 Cascade Controller
or equal running hours for each pump.

[0] Disabled The fixed speed pumps are connected in the order
Option: Function: 1–2 and disconnected in the order 2–1 (first in–last
For operation of multiple devices (pump/fan) out).
systems where capacity is adapted to actual [1] Enabled The fixed speed pumps are connected/discon-
load with speed control combined with on/off nected to have equal running hours for each
control of the devices. For simplicity, only pump.
pump systems are described.
To enable the cascade controller functionality, 25-05 Fixed Lead Pump
set parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode to
Option: Function:
option [3] Closed Loop.
Fixed lead pump is a configuration when the variable
[0] Disabled The cascade controller is not active. All built-in speed pump is connected directly to the frequency
relays assigned to pump motors in the cascade converter. If a contactor is applied between frequency
function are de-energized. If a variable speed converter and pump, this contactor is not controlled by
pump is connected to the frequency converter the frequency converter.
directly (not controlled by a built-in relay), this If operating with parameter 25-50 Lead Pump Alternation
pump/fan is controlled as a single-pump set to other than [0] Off, set this parameter to [0] No.
system.
[0] No The lead pump function can alternate between the
[1] Basic The cascade controller is active and stages/ pumps controlled by the 2 built-in relays. Connect 1
Cascade Ctrl destages pump according to load on the pump to the built-in relay 1, and the other pump to
system. relay 2. The pump function (cascade pump1 and
[2] Motor cascade pump2) is automatically assigned to the relays
Alternation (maximum 2 pumps can in this case be controlled by
Only the frequency converter).

[1] Yes The lead pump is fixed (no alternation) and connected
25-02 Motor Start
directly to the frequency converter.
Option: Function: Parameter 25-50 Lead Pump Alternation is automatically
Motors are connected to mains directly with a set to [0] Off. Built-in relays, relay 1 and relay 2, can be
contactor or with a soft starter. When the value of assigned to separate fixed speed pumps. In total, the
parameter 25-02 Motor Start is set to an option frequency converter can control 3 pumps.
other than [0] Direct on Line, then
parameter 25-50 Lead Pump Alternation is automat-
ically set to the default of [0] Direct on Line.

[0] Direct Each fixed speed pump is connected to mains

* on Line directly via a contactor.

[1] Soft Each fixed speed pump is connected to mains via

Starter a soft starter.

[2] Star Fixed pumps connected with star-delta starters

Delta are staged in the same way as pumps connected
with soft starters. They are destaged in the same
way as pumps connected directly to mains.

25-04 Pump Cycling

Option: Function:
To provide equal hours of operation with fixed
speed pumps, the pump used can be cycled. The

218 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

25-06 Number of Pumps 25-20 Staging Bandwidth

Range: Function: Range: Function:
2* [2 - The number of pumps connected to the cascade
9] controller including the variable speed pump. If the
variable speed pump is connected directly to the 3 3
frequency converter, and the other fixed speed
pumps (lag pumps) are controlled by the 2 built-in
relays, 3 pumps can be controlled. If both the
variable speed and fixed speed pumps are to be
controlled by built-in relays, only 2 pumps can be Figure 3.80 Staging Bandwidth
connected.

If parameter 25-05 Fixed Lead Pump is set to [0] No: 1

variable speed pump and 1 fixed speed pump, both Size [1 - Set the staging bandwidth (SBW) percentage
controlled by built-in relay. If parameter 25-05 Fixed related* par. to accommodate normal system pressure
Lead Pump is set to [1] Yes: 1 variable speed pump 25-21 fluctuation. In cascade control systems, to
and 1 fixed speed pump controlled by built-in %] avoid frequent switching of fixed speed
relays. pumps, the system pressure is typically kept
1 lead pump, see parameter 25-05 Fixed Lead Pump. within a bandwidth rather than at a constant
2 fixed speed pumps controlled by built-in relays. level.

The SBW is programmed as a percentage of

parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference and
3.22.2 25-2* Bandwidth Settings parameter 3-04 Reference Function. For example,
if the setpoint is 5 bar and the SBW is set to
Parameters for setting the bandwidth within which the 10%, a system pressure of 4.5–5.5 bar is
pressure is allowed to operate before staging/destaging tolerated. No staging or destaging occurs
fixed speed pumps. Also includes various timers to stabilize within this bandwidth.
the control.

25-20 Staging Bandwidth

Range: Function:
Size [1 - Set the staging bandwidth (SBW) percentage
related* par. to accommodate normal system pressure
25-21 fluctuation. In cascade control systems, to
%] avoid frequent switching of fixed speed
pumps, the system pressure is typically kept Figure 3.81 Staging Bandwidth
within a bandwidth rather than at a constant
level.

The SBW is programmed as a percentage of

25-21 Override Bandwidth
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference. For
example, if the maximum reference is 6 bar, Range: Function:
the setpoint is 5 bar and the SBW is set to 100 [ par. When a large and quick change in the system
10%, a system pressure between 4.5 bar and %* 25-20 - demand occurs (such as a sudden water
5.5 bar is tolerated. No staging or destaging 100 %] demand), the system pressure rapidly changes
occurs within this bandwidth. and an immediate staging or destaging of a
fixed speed pump becomes necessary to match
the requirement. The override bandwidth (OBW)
is programmed to override the staging/
destaging timer (parameter 25-23 SBW Staging
Delay and parameter 25-24 SBW Destaging Delay)
for immediate response.

Always program the OBW to a higher value

than the value set in parameter 25-20 Staging
Bandwidth. The OBW is a percentage of

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 219

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

25-21 Override Bandwidth 25-22 Fixed Speed Bandwidth

Range: Function: Range: Function:
parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference and emergency stop (coast/coast inverse

3 3 parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference. command) for the cascade controller.

175ZA673.10
25-23 SBW Staging Delay
Override Bandwidth

Range: Function:
SBW
Setpoint
15 [0 - Immediate staging of a fixed speed pump is not
SBW s* 3000 desirable when a momentary pressure drop in the
s] system exceeds the staging bandwidth (SBW).
Staging is delayed by the length of time
programmed. If the pressure increases within the
SBW before the timer has elapsed, the timer is
Figure 3.83 reset.

175ZA672.12
Setting the OBW too close to the SBW could
defeat the purpose with frequent staging at
momentary pressure changes. Setting the OBW SBW (27-20)
too high might lead to unacceptably high or
Setpoint
low pressure in the system while the SBW
timers are running. The value can be optimized SBW (27-20)
with increased familiarity with the system. See
parameter 25-25 OBW Time.

To avoid unintended staging during the SBW staging-vertr. (27-23)

commissioning phase and fine-tuning of the Figure 3.84 SBW Staging Delay
controller, initially leave the OBW at the factory
setting of 100% (Off). When the fine-tuning is
completed, set the OBW to the required value.
Initial value of 10% is suggested. 25-24 SBW Destaging Delay
Range: Function:
25-22 Fixed Speed Bandwidth 15 [0 - Immediate destaging of a fixed speed pump is not
Range: Function: s* 3000 recommended when a momentary pressure
Size [ par. When the cascade control system runs s] increases in the system that exceeds the staging
related* 25-20 - normally and the frequency converter issues bandwidth (SBW). Destaging is delayed by the
par. a trip alarm, it is important to maintain the length of time programmed. If the pressure
25-21 % system head. The cascade controller does decreases within the SBW before the timer has
] this by continuing to stage/destage the elapsed, the timer is reset.
fixed speed pump on and off. As keeping
175ZA671.11

the head at the setpoint would require

frequent staging and destaging when only a (27-24) SBW destage delay
fixed speed pump is running, a wider fixed
speed bandwidth (FSBW) is used instead of
SBW
SBW. In alarm situations, or if the start signal (27-20)
on the digital input goes low, it is possible Setpoint
to stop the fixed speed pumps by pressing
SBW
[Off] or [Hand On]. (27-20)

If the issued alarm is a trip lock alarm, the

cascade controller stops the system
immediately by cutting out all the fixed Figure 3.85 SBW Destaging Delay
speed pumps. This is basically the same as

220 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

25-25 OBW Time 25-28 Stage Function Time

Range: Function: Range: Function:
10 [0 - Staging a fixed speed pump creates a momentary 15 [0 - The stage function time is programmed to avoid
s* 300 s] pressure peak in the system, which might exceed
the override bandwidth (OBW). It is not
s* 300 s] frequent staging of the fixed speed pumps. The
stage function time starts if it is [1] Enabled by 3 3
recommended to destage a pump in response to a parameter 25-27 Stage Function, and when the
staging pressure peak. The OBW time can be variable speed pump runs at motor speed high
programmed to prevent staging until the system limit, parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
pressure has stabilized and normal control or parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz], with
established. Set the timer to a value that allows the at least 1 fixed speed pump in the stop position.
system to stabilize after staging. The 10 s factory When the programmed value of the timer expires, a
setting is appropriate in most applications. In highly fixed speed pump is staged.
dynamic systems, a shorter time may be wanted.
130BA370.11 25-29 Destage Function
Option: Function:
The destage function ensures that the lowest
OBW (27-71)
numbers of pumps are running to save energy and
to avoid dead head water circulation in the
variable speed pump. If the destage function is set
SBW (27-70) to [0] Disabled, parameter 25-30 Destage Function
Actual head
Setpoint
Time is not activated.

SBW (27-70) [0] Disabled

[1] Enabled

OBW (27-71)
25-30 Destage Function Time
OBW timer (27-25)
Range: Function:
Figure 3.86 OBW Time 15 [0 - The destage function timer is programmable to
s* 300 s] avoid frequent staging/destaging of the fixed speed
pumps. The destage function time starts when the
adjustable speed pump is running at
25-26 Destage At No-Flow
parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or
Option: Function: parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz], with 1 or
This parameter ensures that when a no-flow more fixed speed pumps in operation and system
situation occurs, the fixed speed pumps are requirements satisfied. In this situation, the
destaged 1 by 1 until the no-flow signal adjustable speed pump contributes a little to the
disappears. This requires that no-flow detection is system. When the programmed value of the timer
active. See parameter group 22-2* No-Flow expires, a stage is removed, avoiding dead head
Detection. water circulation in the adjustable speed pump.
If [0] Disabled is selected, the cascade controller
does not change the normal behavior of the
system.

[0] * Disabled
[1] Enabled

25-27 Stage Function

Option: Function:
If the stage function is set to [0] Disabled,
parameter 25-28 Stage Function Time is not
activated.

[0] Disabled
[1] Enabled

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 221

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

175ZA640.11

130BC371.10
Staging
F VLT pump

3 3
Pump Speed
switch-off
Fixed speed pump
(controlled by soft starter)

Fmin
(4-12)

Lead pump
De-stage (controlled by freq. conv.)
timer period
(27-27)
Figure 3.87 Destage Function Time

t1 Time

3.22.3 25-4* Staging Settings P 25-40

Lead pump starts

Parameters determining conditions for staging/destaging to ramp down
the pumps. Cascade Controller
calls for another
25-40 Ramp Down Delay pump
Range: Function:
10 s* [0 - When adding a fixed speed pump controlled by
120 s] a soft starter or a star-delta starter, it is possible Figure 3.88 Staging
to delay the ramp down of the lead pump until
a preset time after the start of the fixed speed
pump. This delay eliminates pressure surges or
water hammer in the system.

Use this option only if [1] Soft Starter or [2] Star

Delta is selected in parameter 25-02 Motor Start.

25-41 Ramp Up Delay

Range: Function:
2 s* [0 - 12 When removing a fixed speed pump controlled by
s] a soft starter, it is possible to delay the ramp up
of the lead pump until a preset time after the
stop of the fixed speed pump. This delay
eliminates pressure surges or water hammer in
the system.

Only to be used if [1] Soft Starter is selected in

parameter 25-02 Motor Start.

222 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

25-42 Staging Threshold

130BC372.10
Destaging Range: Function:
to 100%, where nLOW is motor speed low limit
Speed

Lead pump
and nHIGH is motor speed high limit.
3 3
(controlled by freq. conv.)

Fixed speed pump

(controlled by soft starter)

Figure 3.90 Staging Threshold

t2 Time

P 25-41
NOTICE!
Lead pump starts If the setpoint is reached after staging before the
to ramp up
variable speed pump reaches its minimum speed, the
Cascade Controller
prepares for system enters the state closed loop when the feedback
removing pump pressure is crossing the setpoint.

25-43 Destaging Threshold

Figure 3.89 Destaging Range: Function:
Size [0 - When removing a fixed speed pump to
related* 100 % prevent an undershoot of pressure, the
NOTICE! ] variable speed pump ramps up to a higher
Fixed pumps connected with star-delta starters are speed. When the variable speed pump
staged in the same way as pumps connected with soft reaches the destaging speed, the fixed speed
starters. They are destaged in the same way as pumps pump is destaged. The destaging threshold is
connected directly to mains. used to calculate the speed of the variable
speed pump when the destaging of the fixed
speed pump occurs. The calculation of the
25-42 Staging Threshold
destaging threshold is the ratio of
Range: Function:
parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or
Size [0 - When adding a fixed speed pump to prevent parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz], to
related* 100 % an overshoot of pressure, the variable speed parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
] pump ramps down to a lower speed. When or parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz],
the variable speed pump reaches the staging expressed in percent.
speed, the fixed speed pump is staged on.
Destaging threshold must range from
The staging threshold is used to calculate the
STAGE % =
LOW
× 100 % to 100%, where nLOW is
speed of the variable speed pump when the HIGH

cut-in point of the fixed speed pump occurs. motor speed low limit and nHIGH is motor
The calculation of the staging threshold is the speed high limit.
ratio of parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit
[RPM] or parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit
[Hz], to the parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High
Limit [RPM] or parameter 4-14 Motor Speed
High Limit [Hz], expressed in percent.

Staging threshold must range from

LOW
STAGE % = HIGH
× 100 %

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 223

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

25-45 Staging Speed [Hz]

Range: Function:
0 [0 - Readout of the calculated value for staging

3 3 Hz* 6500
Hz]
speed. When adding a fixed speed pump to
prevent an overshoot of pressure, the variable
speed pump ramps down to a lower speed.
When the variable speed pump reaches the
staging speed, the fixed speed pump is staged
on. Staging speed calculation is based on
Figure 3.91 Destaging Threshold parameter 25-42 Staging Threshold and
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz].

Staging speed is calculated with the following

25-44 Staging Speed [RPM] formula:
Range: Function: STAGE = HIGH
STAGE %
100
where nHIGH is motor speed

0 [000 - Readout of the calculated value for staging high limit and nSTAGE100% is the value of staging
RPM* 30000 speed. When adding a fixed speed pump to threshold.
RPM] prevent an overshoot of pressure, the variable
speed pump ramps down to a lower speed. 25-46 Destaging Speed [RPM]
When the variable speed pump reaches the Range: Function:
staging speed, the fixed speed pump is staged 0 [000 - Readout of the calculated value for destaging
on. Staging speed calculation is based on RPM* 30000 speed. When removing a fixed speed pump to
parameter 25-42 Staging Threshold and RPM] prevent an undershoot of pressure, the
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]. variable speed pump ramps up to a higher
Staging speed is calculated with the following speed. When the variable speed pump reaches
formula: the destaging speed, the fixed speed pump is
ηSTAGE % destaged. Destaging speed is calculated based
ηSTAGE = ηHIGH
100
on parameter 25-43 Destaging Threshold and
where nHIGH is motor speed high limit and
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM].
nSTAGE100% is the value of staging threshold.
Destaging speed is calculated with the
following formula:
DESTAGE = HIGH
DESTAGE %
100
where nHIGH is motor
speed high limit and nDESTAGE100% is the value
of destaging threshold.

25-47 Destaging Speed [Hz]

Range: Function:
0 [0 - Readout of the calculated value for destaging
Hz* 6500 speed. When removing a fixed speed pump to
Hz] prevent an undershoot of pressure, the variable
speed pump ramps up to a higher speed. When
the variable speed pump reaches the destaging
speed, the fixed speed pump is destaged.
Destaging speed is calculated based on
parameter 25-43 Destaging Threshold and
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz].

Destaging speed is calculated with the following

formula:
DESTAGE %
DESTAGE = HIGH
100
where nHIGH is motor speed high limit and
nDESTAGE100% is the value of destaging threshold.

224 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

25-50 Lead Pump Alternation

Option: Function:
equally used over time. Alternation equalizes the
usage of pumps by always selecting the pump
with the lowest number of hours run to stage 3 3
on next.

[0] Off No alternation of lead pump function takes

place. It is not possible to set this parameter to
options other than [0] Off if
parameter 25-02 Motor Start is set other than [0]
Direct on Line.

[1] At staging Alternation of the lead pump function takes

place when staging another pump.

[2] At Alternation of the lead pump function takes

command place at an external command signal or a pre-
programmed event. See
parameter 25-51 Alternation Event for available
options.

[3] At staging Alternation of the variable speed (lead) pump

or takes place at staging or according to [2] At
command command.

Figure 3.92 Destaging Speed 25-51 Alternation Event

Option: Function:
This parameter is only active if the options [2]
25-49 Staging Principle At Command or [3] At Staging or Command
Select the staging principle for the staging of fixed speed pumps have been selected in parameter 25-50 Lead
(direct online mode). To configure the frequency converter to Pump Alternation. If an alternation event is
return to closed-loop operation immediately after a pump was selected, the alternation of lead pump takes
staged or destaged, select [1] Rapid Staging. Use [1] Rapid Staging place every time the event occurs.
in systems with rapid demand changes.
[0] External Alternation takes place when a signal is
Option: Function: * applied to 1 of the digital inputs on the
[0] * Normal terminal strip and this input has been assigned
[1] Rapid Staging to [121] Lead Pump Alternation in parameter
group 5-1*, Digital Inputs.
3.22.4 25-5* Alternation Settings [1] Alternation Alternation takes place every time
Time parameter 25-52 Alternation Time Interval
Parameters for defining the conditions for alternation of Interval expires.
the variable speed pump (lead), if selected as control
[2] Sleep Mode Alternation takes place each time the lead
strategy.
pump goes into sleep mode. Set
25-50 Lead Pump Alternation parameter 20-23 Setpoint 3 to [1] Sleep Mode or
Option: Function: apply an external signal for this function.

NOTICE! [3] Predefined Alternation takes place at a defined time of the

Time day. If parameter 25-54 Alternation Predefined
If parameter 25-05 Fixed Lead Pump is set
Time is set, the alternation is carried out every
to [1] Yes, it is only possible to select [0]
day at the specified time. Default time is
Off.
midnight (00:00 or 12:00AM depending on the
time format).
Lead pump alternation equalizes the use of
pumps by periodically changing the pump that
is speed-controlled. This ensures that pumps are

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 225

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

25-52 Alternation Time Interval 25-56 Staging Mode at Alternation

Range: Function: Option: Function:
24 [1 - If selecting [1] Alternation Time Interval in [0] * Slow This parameter is only active if the option selected

3 3 h* 999 h] parameter 25-51 Alternation Event, the alternation

of the variable speed pump takes place every
in parameter 25-50 Lead Pump Alternation is different
from [0] Off.
time the alternation time interval expires (can be 2 types of staging and destaging of pumps are
checked in parameter 25-53 Alternation Timer possible. Slow transfer makes staging and destaging
Value). The timer pauses when the frequency smooth. Quick transfer makes staging and destaging
converter is not running. as fast as possible; the variable speed pump is cut
out (coasted).
25-53 Alternation Timer Value At alternation, the variable speed pump is ramped
Range: Function: up to maximum speed and then ramped down to a
0* [0 - 7 ] Readout parameter for the alternation time interval standstill.
value set in parameter 25-52 Alternation Time
[1] Quick At alternation, the variable speed pump is ramped
Interval.
up to maximum speed and then coasted to a
standstill.
25-54 Alternation Predefined Time
Figure 3.93 and Figure 3.94 show alternation in both
Range: Function:
quick and slow configurations.
Size [0 - If selecting [3] Predefined Time in
related* 0] parameter 25-51 Alternation Event, the variable Alternation command/PID stops

130BA613.10
speed pump alternation is carried out every fMAX
day at the specified time set in alternation Destaging freq. Mains operation
fMIN.
predefined time. Default time is midnight Time
PID contr.
(00:00 or 12:00AM depending on the time starts
fMAX
format). Staging freq.

Mains operation 5s Time

25-55 Alternate if Load < 50%
Figure 3.93 Slow Configuration
Option: Function:
NOTICE!
Only valid if parameter 25-50 Lead Pump

130BA614.10
Alternation is different from [0] Off. Coast

Mains operation
If selecting [1] Enabled, the pump alternation can
only occur if the capacity is equal to or below 200ms-2s (default 500ns)5 s Time

50%. The capacity calculation is the ratio of

running pumps (including the variable speed
pump) to the total number of available pumps
(including variable speed pump, but not those Time
that are interlocked). 100ms
NRUNNING
Capacity = × 100 % Figure 3.94 Quick Configuration
NTOTAL

For the basic cascade controller, all pumps are of

equal size.

[0] Disabled The lead pump alternation takes place at any

pump capacity.

[1] * Enabled The lead pump function is alternated only if the

number of pumps running are providing less
than 50% of total pump capacity.

226 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

25-58 Run Next Pump Delay 25-82 Lead Pump

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0.1 s* [0.1 - This parameter is only active if the option controller disabled or all pumps interlocked), the
5 s] selected in parameter 25-50 Lead Pump
Alternation is different from [0] Off.
display shows N1.
3 3
This parameter sets the time between stopping 25-83 Relay Status
the old variable speed pump and starting Array [9]
another pump as a new variable speed pump.
Range: Function:
Refer to parameter 25-56 Staging Mode at
0* [0 - 4 ] Readout of the status for each of the relays
Alternation for description of staging and
assigned to control the pumps. Every element in
alternation.
the array shows a relay. If a relay is activated, the
corresponding element is set to On. If a relay is
25-59 Run on Mains Delay
deactivated, the corresponding element is set to
Range: Function: Off.
0.5 s* [ par. This parameter is only active if the option
25-58 - 5 selected in parameter 25-50 Lead Pump 25-84 Pump ON Time
s] Alternation is different from [0] Off.
Array [10]
This parameter sets the time between Range: Function:
stopping the old variable speed pump and
0 h* [0 - Readout of the value for pump ON time.
starting this pump as a new fixed speed
2147483647 h] The cascade controller has separate
pump. Refer to Figure 3.93 for description of
counters for the pumps and for the relays
staging and alternation.
that control the pumps. Pump ON time
monitors the operating hours of each
3.22.5 25-8* Status pump. The value of each pump ON time
counter can be reset to 0 by writing in
Readout parameters informing about the operating status the parameter, for example, if the pump is
of the cascade controller and the pumps controlled. replaced at a service.

25-80 Cascade Status 25-85 Relay ON Time

Range: Function: Array [9]
0* [0 - 25 ] Readout of the status of the cascade controller. Range: Function:
0 h* [0 - Readout of the value for relay ON time.
25-81 Pump Status
2147483647 h] The cascade controller has separate
Range: Function: counters for the pumps and for the relays
0* [0 - Pump status shows the status for the number of that control the pumps. Pump cycling is
25 ] pumps selected in parameter 25-06 Number of Pumps. always done based on the relay counters,
It is a readout of the status for each of the pumps otherwise it would always use the new
showing a string, which consists of pump number pump if a pump is replaced and its value
and the status of the pump. in parameter 25-84 Pump ON Time is reset.
Example: Readout is with the abbreviation like “1:D To use parameter 25-04 Pump Cycling, the
2:O” This means that pump 1 is running and speed cascade controller is monitoring the relay
controlled by the frequency converter and pump 2 is ON time.
stopped.
25-86 Reset Relay Counters
25-82 Lead Pump Option: Function:
Range: Function: Resets all elements in parameter 25-85 Relay
0* [ 0 - par. Readout parameter for the actual variable speed ON Time counters.
25-06 ] pump in the system. The lead pump parameter is
[0] * Do not reset
updated to reflect the current variable speed
[1] Do reset
pump in the system when an alternation takes
place. If no lead pump is selected (cascade

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 227

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.22.6 25-9* Service

Parameters used if there is a service on 1 or more of the

pumps controlled.
3 3 25-90 Pump Interlock
Array [10]
Option: Function:
In this parameter, it is possible to disable 1 or more of
the fixed lead pumps. For example, the pump is not
selected for staging on even if it is the next pump in
the operation sequence. It is not possible to disable
the lead pump with the pump interlock command.
The digital input interlocks are selected as [130] Pump
1 Interlock – [132] Pump 1 Interlock in parameter group
5-1* Digital In/Out.

[0] * Off The pump is active for staging/destaging.

[1] On The pump interlock command is given. If a pump runs,

it is immediately destaged. If the pump does not run,
it is not allowed to stage on.

25-91 Manual Alternation

Range: Function:
0* [ 0 - par. Readout parameter for the actual variable speed
25-06 ] pump in the system. When an alternation takes
place, the lead pump parameter is updated to
reflect the current variable speed pump in the
system. If no lead pump is selected (cascade
controller disabled or all pumps interlocked), the
display shows N1.

228 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3.23 Parameters 26-** Analog I/O Option Terminal Parameters

MCB 109 Analog inputs

X42/1 Parameter 26-00 Terminal X42/1
The VLT® Analog I/O Option MCB 109 extends the Mode, parameter 26-10 Terminal
functionality of VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 Series frequency X42/1 Low Voltage. 3 3
converters by adding some extra, programmable analog X42/3 Parameter 26-01 Terminal X42/3
inputs and outputs. This is useful in control installations Mode, parameter 26-20 Terminal
where the frequency converter may be used as decentral X42/3 Low Voltage.
I/O, obviating the need for an outstation and thus reducing X42/5 Parameter 26-02 Terminal X42/5
cost. It also provides flexibility in project planning. Mode, parameter 26-30 Terminal
X42/5 Low Voltage.

NOTICE! Analog outputs

X42/7 Parameter 26-40 Terminal X42/7
The maximum current for the analog outputs 0–10 V is 1
Output.
mA.
X42/9 Parameter 26-50 Terminal X42/9
Output.
NOTICE! X42/11 Parameter 26-60 Terminal X42/11
Where live zero monitoring is used, it is important that Output.
any analog inputs not being used for the frequency Analog inputs
controller, for example being used as part of the building 53 Parameter group 6-1* Analog
management system decentral I/O, have their live zero Input 1.
function disabled. 54 Parameter group 6-2* Analog
Input 2.
Analog output
42 Parameter group 6-5* Analog
Input 1.
Relays
Relay 1, terminals 1, 2, 3. Parameter group 5-4* Relays.
Relay 2, terminals 4, 5, 6. Parameter group 5-4* Relays.

Table 3.34 Analog Inputs

It is also possible to read the analog inputs, write to the

analog outputs, and control the relays, using communi-
cation via the fieldbus.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 229

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Terminal Parameters 26-00 Terminal X42/1 Mode

Analog inputs (read) Option: Function:
X42/1 Parameter 18-30 Analog Input
Terminal X42/1 can be programmed as an
X42/1.
3 3 X42/3 Parameter 18-31 Analog Input
analog input accepting a voltage or input
from either Pt1000 (1000 Ω at 0 °C (32 °F)) or
X42/3.
Ni 1000 (1000 Ω at 0 °C (32 °F)) temperature
X42/5 Parameter 18-32 Analog Input sensors. Select the mode.
X42/5. [2] Pt 1000 [°C] and [4] Ni 1000 [°C] if
Analog outputs (write) operating in Celsius, or [3] Pt 1000 [°F] and [5]
X42/7 Parameter 18-33 Analog Out Ni 1000 [°F] if operating in Fahrenheit.
X42/7 [V].
X42/9 Parameter 18-34 Analog Out NOTICE!
X42/9 [V]. If the input is not in use, set it for
X42/11 Parameter 18-35 Analog Out voltage.
X42/11 [V].
Analog inputs (read) If set for temperature and used as feedback,
53 Parameter 16-62 Analog Input set the unit for either Celsius or Fahrenheit.
53. • Parameter 20-12 Reference/Feedback
54 Parameter 16-64 Analog Input Unit.
54. • Parameter 21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback
Analog output Unit.
42 Parameter 6-63 Terminal X30/8
• Parameter 21-30 Ext. 2 Ref./Feedback
Output Bus Control. Unit.
Relays
Relay 1, terminals 1, 2, 3. Parameter 16-71 Relay Output
• Parameter 20-05 Feedback 2 Source
Unit.
[bin].
Relay 2, terminals 4, 5, 6. Parameter 16-71 Relay Output [1] * Voltage
[bin]. [2] Pt 1000 [°C]

NOTICE! [3] Pt 1000 [°F]

[4] Ni 1000 [°C]
Enable the relay outputs via control word bit 11 (relay
1) and bit 12 (relay 2). [5] Ni 1000 [°F]

Table 3.35 Analog Inputs via Fieldbus

On-board real-time clock setting

The VLT® Analog I/O Option MCB 109 incorporates a real-
time clock with battery back-up. This option can be used
as back-up of the standard clock function included in the
frequency converter. See parameter group 0-7* Clock
Settings.
Use the MCB 109 for control of devices such as actuators
or valves, using the extended closed-loop facility, thus
removing control from the existing control system. See
parameter group 21-** Extended Closed Loop. There are 3
independent closed-loop PID controllers.

230 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

26-01 Terminal X42/3 Mode 26-02 Terminal X42/5 Mode

Option: Function: Option: Function:
Terminal X42/3 can be programmed as an • Parameter 21-30 Ext. 2 Ref./Feedback
analog input accepting a voltage or input
from either Pt 1000 or Ni 1000 temperature
•
Unit.

Parameter 20-05 Feedback 2 Source

3 3
sensors. Select the mode. Unit.
[2] Pt 1000 [°C] and [4] Ni 1000 [°C] if
operating in Celsius, or [3] Pt 1000 [°F] and [5] [1] * Voltage
Ni 1000 [°F] if operating in Fahrenheit. [2] Pt 1000 [°C]
[3] Pt 1000 [°F]
NOTICE! [4] Ni 1000 [°C]
If the input is not in use, set it for [5] Ni 1000 [°F]
voltage.
26-10 Terminal X42/1 Low Voltage
If set for temperature and used as feedback, Range: Function:
set the unit for either Celsius or Fahrenheit. 0.07 V* [ 0 - par. Enter the low voltage value. This analog
• Parameter 20-12 Reference/Feedback 6-31 V] input scaling value should correspond to
Unit. the low reference/feedback value set in
• Parameter 21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback parameter 26-14 Term. X42/1 Low Ref./Feedb.
Unit. Value.

• Parameter 21-30 Ext. 2 Ref./Feedback

26-11 Terminal X42/1 High Voltage
Unit.
Range: Function:
• Parameter 20-05 Feedback 2 Source
10 V* [ par. 6-30 Enter the high-voltage value. This analog
Unit.
- 10 V] input scaling value should correspond to the
[1] * Voltage high reference/feedback value set in
[2] Pt 1000 [°C] parameter 26-15 Term. X42/1 High Ref./Feedb.
[3] Pt 1000 [°F] Value.
[4] Ni 1000 [°C]
[5] Ni 1000 [°F] 26-14 Term. X42/1 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Range: Function:
26-02 Terminal X42/5 Mode
0 ReferenceFeed- [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input
Option: Function: backUnit* 999999.999 scaling value that
Terminal X42/5 can be programmed as an ReferenceFeed- corresponds to the low-
analog input accepting a voltage or input backUnit] voltage value set in
from either Pt 1000 (1000 Ω at 0 °C) or Ni parameter 26-10 Terminal
1000 (1000 Ω at 0 °C) temperature sensors. X42/1 Low Voltage.
Select the mode.
[2] Pt 1000 [°C] and [4] Ni 1000 [°C] if 26-15 Term. X42/1 High Ref./Feedb. Value
operating in Celsius, or [3] Pt 1000 [°F] and [5]
Range: Function:
Ni 1000 [°F] if operating in Fahrenheit.
100 Reference- [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input
NOTICE! FeedbackUnit* 999999.999 scaling value that
If the input is not in use, set it for ReferenceFeed- corresponds to the high-
voltage. backUnit] voltage value set in
parameter 26-11 Terminal
If set for temperature and used as feedback, X42/1 High Voltage.
set the unit for either Celsius or Fahrenheit:
• Parameter 20-12 Reference/Feedback
Unit.

• Parameter 21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback

Unit.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 231

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

26-16 Term. X42/1 Filter Time Constant 26-25 Term. X42/3 High Ref./Feedb. Value
Range: Function: Range: Function:
0.005 s* [0.005 - 10 NOTICE! 100 Reference- [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input

3 3 s]
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
FeedbackUnit* 999999.999
ReferenceFeed-
scaling value that
corresponds to the high-
backUnit] voltage value set in
parameter 26-21 Terminal
This is a first-order digital low-pass filter
X42/3 High Voltage.
time constant for suppressing noise in
terminal X42/1. A high time constant
26-26 Term. X42/3 Filter Time Constant
value improves dampening, but also
increases the time delay through the filter. Range: Function:
0.005 s* [0.005 - NOTICE!
26-17 Term. X42/1 Live Zero 10 s]
This parameter cannot be adjusted
Option: Function: while the motor is running.
This parameter makes it possible to enable the
live zero monitoring, for example, where the Enter the time constant. This is a first-
analog input is the frequency converter control, order digital low-pass filter time constant
rather than being used as a decentral I/O system, for suppressing noise in terminal X42/3. A
such as a building management system. high time constant value improves
dampening, but also increases the time
[0] Disabled
delay through the filter.
[1] * Enabled

26-20 Terminal X42/3 Low Voltage 26-27 Term. X42/3 Live Zero
Range: Function: Option: Function:
0.07 V* [ 0 - par. Enter the low voltage value. This analog This parameter makes it possible to enable the
6-31 V] input scaling value should correspond to live zero monitoring, for example, where the
the low reference/feedback value set in analog input is the frequency converter control,
parameter 26-24 Term. X42/3 Low Ref./Feedb. rather than being used as a decentral I/O system,
Value. such as a building management system.

[0] Disabled
26-21 Terminal X42/3 High Voltage [1] * Enabled
Range: Function:
26-30 Terminal X42/5 Low Voltage
10 V* [ par. 6-30 Enter the high-voltage value. This analog
- 10 V] input scaling value should correspond to the Range: Function:
high reference/feedback value set in 0.07 V* [ 0 - par. Enter the low-voltage value. This analog
parameter 26-25 Term. X42/3 High Ref./Feedb. 6-31 V] input scaling value should correspond to
Value. the low reference/feedback value set in
parameter 26-34 Term. X42/5 Low Ref./Feedb.
26-24 Term. X42/3 Low Ref./Feedb. Value Value.
Range: Function:
26-31 Terminal X42/5 High Voltage
0 ReferenceFeed- [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input
backUnit* 999999.999 scaling value that Range: Function:
ReferenceFeed- corresponds to the low- 10 V* [ par. 6-30 Enter the high-voltage value. This analog
backUnit] voltage value set in - 10 V] input scaling value should correspond to the
parameter 26-20 Terminal high reference/feedback value set in
X42/3 Low Voltage. parameter 26-35 Term. X42/5 High Ref./Feedb.
Value.

232 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

26-34 Term. X42/5 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 26-40 Terminal X42/7 Output
Range: Function: Option: Function:
0 ReferenceFeed- [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input [103] Motor cur. 0- 0–inverter maximum current
backUnit* 999999.999
ReferenceFeed-
scaling value that
corresponds to the low-
Imax (parameter 16-37 Inv. Max. Current), (0–
10 V). 3 3
backUnit] voltage value set in
[104] Torque 0-Tlim 0–torque limit (parameter 4-16 Torque
parameter 26-30 Terminal
Limit Motor Mode), (0–10 V).
X42/5 Low Voltage.
[105] Torque 0-Tnom 0–motor rated torque, (0–10 V).
26-35 Term. X42/5 High Ref./Feedb. Value [106] Power 0-Pnom 0–motor rated power, (0–10 V).
Range: Function: [107] Speed 0-HighLim 0–speed high limit
100 Reference- [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input (parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit
FeedbackUnit* 999999.999 scaling value that [RPM] and parameter 4-14 Motor Speed
ReferenceFeed- corresponds to the high- High Limit [Hz]), (0–10 V).
backUnit] voltage value set in
[108] Torque +-160%
parameter 26-21 Terminal
[109] Out frq 0-Fmax
X42/3 High Voltage.
[113] Ext. Closed Loop 0–100%, (0–10 V).
26-36 Term. X42/5 Filter Time Constant 1
[114] Ext. Closed Loop 0–100%, (0–10 V).
Range: Function:
2
0.005 s* [0.005 - 10 NOTICE! [115] Ext. Closed Loop 0–100%, (0–10 V).
s]
This parameter cannot be adjusted 3
while the motor is running. [139] Bus ctrl. 0–100%, (0–10 V).

[141] Bus ctrl t.o. 0–100%, (0–10 V).

This is a first-order digital low-pass filter
time constant for suppressing noise in [156] Flow Rate
terminal X42/5. A high time constant
26-41 Terminal X42/7 Min. Scale
value improves dampening, but also
increases the time delay through the filter. Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - Scale the minimum output of the selected analog
26-37 Term. X42/5 Live Zero 200 %] signal at terminal X42/7 as a percentage of the
maximum signal level. For example, if 0 V (or
Option: Function:
0 Hz) is required at 25% of the maximum output
Enable or disable the live zero monitoring.
value, program 25%. Scaling values up to 100%
[0] Disabled can never be higher than the corresponding
[1] * Enabled setting in parameter 26-42 Terminal X42/7 Max.
Scale.
26-40 Terminal X42/7 Output See principle graph for parameter 6-51 Terminal 42
Option: Function: Output Min Scale.
Set the function of terminal X42/7 as an
analog current output.

[0] * No operation
[52] MCO 0-20mA/
0-10V
[100] Output freq. 0–100 Hz, (0–10 V).
0-100
[101] Reference Min- Minimum reference–maximum
Max reference, (0–10 V).

[102] Feedback -200% to +200% of

+-200% parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference, (0–
10 V).

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 233

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

26-42 Terminal X42/7 Max. Scale 26-50 Terminal X42/9 Output

Range: Function: Option: Function:
100 [0 - Scale the maximum output of the selected [105] Torque 0-Tnom 0–motor rated torque, (0–10 V).

3 3 %* 200 %] analog signal at terminal X42/7. Set the value to

the maximum value of the voltage signal output.
[106] Power 0-Pnom 0–motor rated power, (0–10 V).

Scale the output to give a voltage lower than [107] Speed 0-HighLim 0–speed high limit
10 V at full scale; or 10 V at an output below (parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit
100% of the maximum signal value. If 10 V is the [RPM] and parameter 4-14 Motor Speed
required output current at a value between 0– High Limit [Hz]), (0–10 V).
100% of the full-scale output, program the [108] Torque +-160%
percentage value in the parameter, that is [109] Out frq 0-Fmax
50%=10 V. If a voltage 0–10 V is required at [113] Ext. Closed Loop 0–100%, (0–10 V).
maximum output, calculate the percentage as 1
follows:
[114] Ext. Closed Loop 0–100%, (0–10 V).
10V
x 100 % 2
desired maximum voltage
[115] Ext. Closed Loop 0–100%, (0–10 V).
that is
3
10V
5V : × 100 % = 200 % [139] Bus ctrl. 0–100%, (0–10 V).
5V
See Figure 3.36.
[141] Bus ctrl t.o. 0–100%, (0–10 V).

26-43 Terminal X42/7 Bus Control [156] Flow Rate

Range: Function: 26-51 Terminal X42/9 Min. Scale

0 %* [0 - 100 %] Holds the level of terminal X42/7 if For more information, see parameter 6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min
controlled by bus. Scale.
Range: Function:
26-44 Terminal X42/7 Timeout Preset
0 %* [0 - Scale the minimum output of the selected
Range: Function:
200 %] analog signal at terminal X42/9 as a percentage
0 %* [0 - Holds the preset level of terminal X42/7. of the maximum signal level. For example, if 0 V
100 %] If a fieldbus and a timeout function are is required at 25% of the maximum output
selected in parameter 26-50 Terminal X42/9 value, program 25%. Scaling values up to 100%
Output, the output presets to this level. can never be higher than the corresponding
setting in parameter 26-52 Terminal X42/9 Max.
26-50 Terminal X42/9 Output Scale.
Option: Function:
Set the function of terminal X42/9. 26-52 Terminal X42/9 Max. Scale

[0] * No operation See Figure 3.36.

[52] MCO 0-20mA/ Range: Function:

0-10V 100 % [0 - Scale the maximum output of the selected
[100] Output freq. 0–100 Hz, (0–10 V). * 200 %] analog signal at terminal X42/9. Set the value to
0-100 the maximum value of the voltage signal
[101] Reference Min- Minimum reference–maximum output. Scale the output to give a voltage lower
Max reference, (0–10 V). than 10 V at full scale; or 10 V at an output
below 100% of the maximum signal value. If
[102] Feedback +-200% -200% to +200% of
10 V is the required output current at a value
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference, (0–
between 0–100% of the full-scale output,
10 V).
program the percentage value in the parameter,
[103] Motor cur. 0-Imax 0–inverter maximum current that is, 50%=10 V. If a voltage 0–10 V is required
(parameter 16-37 Inv. Max. Current), (0– at maximum output, calculate the percentage as
10 V). follows:
[104] Torque 0-Tlim 0–torque limit (parameter 4-16 Torque 5V :
10V
× 100 % = 200 %
5V
Limit Motor Mode), (0–10 V).

234 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

26-53 Terminal X42/9 Bus Control 26-61 Terminal X42/11 Min. Scale
Range: Function: For more information, see parameter 6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Holds the level of terminal X42/9 if Scale.
controlled by bus. Range:
0 %* [0 -
Function:
Scale the minimum output of the selected
3 3
26-54 Terminal X42/9 Timeout Preset 200 %] analog signal at terminal X42/11 as a
Range: Function: percentage of the maximum signal level. For
0 %* [0 - Holds the preset level of terminal X42/9. example, if 0 V is required at 25% of the
100 %] If a fieldbus and a timeout function are maximum output value, program 25%. Scaling
selected in parameter 26-60 Terminal X42/11 values up to 100% can never be higher than
Output, the output presets to this level. the corresponding setting in
parameter 26-62 Terminal X42/11 Max. Scale.
26-60 Terminal X42/11 Output
26-62 Terminal X42/11 Max. Scale
Option: Function:
Set the function of terminal X42/11. See Figure 3.36.
Range: Function:
[0] * No operation
100 % [0 - Scale the maximum output of the selected
[52] MCO 0-20mA/
* 200 %] analog signal at terminal X42/9. Set the value to
0-10V
the maximum value of the voltage signal
[100] Output freq. 0–100 Hz, (0–10 V).
output. Scale the output to give a voltage lower
0-100
than 10 V at full scale; or 10 V at an output
[101] Reference Min- Minimum reference–maximum
below 100% of the maximum signal value. For
Max reference, (0–10 V).
example, if 10 V is the required output current
[102] Feedback +-200% -200% to +200% of at a value between 0–100% of the full-scale
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference, (0– output, program the percentage value in the
10 V). parameter, that is, 50%=10 V. If a voltage 0–10 V
[103] Motor cur. 0-Imax 0–inverter maximum current is required at maximum output, calculate the
(parameter 16-37 Inv. Max. Current), (0– percentage as follows:
10 V). 10V
x100 %
desired maximum voltage
[104] Torque 0-Tlim 0–torque limit (parameter 4-16 Torque that is
Limit Motor Mode), (0–10 V). 10V
5V : x100 % = 200 %
5V
[105] Torque 0-Tnom 0–motor rated torque, (0–0 V).

[106] Power 0-Pnom 0–motor rated power, (0–10 V). 26-63 Terminal X42/11 Bus Control
Range: Function:
[107] Speed 0-HighLim 0–speed high limit
(parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit 0 %* [0 - 100 %] Holds the level of terminal X42/11 if
[RPM] and parameter 4-14 Motor Speed controlled by bus.
High Limit [Hz]), (0–10 V).
26-64 Terminal X42/11 Timeout Preset
[108] Torque +-160%
Range: Function:
[109] Out frq 0-Fmax
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Holds the preset level of terminal X42/11.
[113] Ext. Closed Loop 0–100%, (0–10 V).
If a fieldbus and a timeout function are
1
selected, the output presets to this level.
[114] Ext. Closed Loop 0–100%, (0–10 V).
2
[115] Ext. Closed Loop 0–100%, (0–10 V).
3
[139] Bus ctrl. 0–100%, (0–10 V).

[141] Bus ctrl t.o. 0–100%, (0–10 V).

[156] Flow Rate

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 235

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.24 Parameters 27-** Cascade CTL Option

e30bg296.10
1 2 3 4
Parameter group 27-** Cascade CTL Option is available if 1
of the following conditions is met:
3 3 • VLT® Extended Cascade Controller MCO 101 is
installed.
• VLT® Advanced Cascade Controller MCO 102 is
installed.
68 69 68 69 68 69 68 69
• The frequency converter was ordered with the
type code LXX1.

Relay wiring configuration using MCO 101 or MCO 102 1 Primary master 1
For a detailed description of commissioning for mixed 2 Slave 1
pump and master/slave applications (using relay 3 Slave 2
operation), refer to VLT® Cascade Controller Options MCO 4 Slave X (up to 7 slaves)
101/102 Operating Instructions.
Serial communication wiring configuration Figure 3.95 Serial Communication Wiring
The serial communication wiring configuration supports
the master/slave cascade controller set-up controlling up to
8 pumps in total. 3.24.1 Master/Slave Configuration
At least 1 of the frequency converters in the set-up must
have parameter group 27-** Cascade CTL Option enabled. The master/slave cascade control mode offers the best
That enables option Modbus CASCADE Master in performance, the most precise control, and maximum
parameter 8-30 Protocol. energy savings. This mode controls multiple equally sized
pumps in parallel, running all pumps at the same speed
The frequency converter with the lowest address and the and stages the pumps on and off according to system
cascade controller capability is set as the primary master. requirements.
The remaining frequency converters must be addressed Compared to the closed-loop cascade control, staging and
with a unique address or forward-running number. destaging decisions are made based on the speed
For slave frequency converters, option Modbus RTU in calculated by frequency converters instead of feedback.
parameter 8-30 Protocol has to be set. Reaction at Set the stage-on and stage-off speed according to the
communication loss can be set in parameter 8-03 Control system requirements to obtain the highest energy saving.
Timeout Time and parameter 8-04 Control Timeout Function. In the master/slave configuration, the master frequency
Apply this setting to all frequency converters in the converter is running in closed loop, and the slave
system. frequency converters are running in open loop. All slave
This configuration only supports the master/slave mode. frequency converters are connected to mains and the
NOTICE! motors in the same way as the master frequency converter.
Terminate the RS485 bus with a resistor at both ends. In this configuration, each pump is controlled by a
For this purpose, set switch S801 on the control card to frequency converter. All pumps and frequency converters
ON. must be of the same size.

3.24.2 Mixed Pump Configuration

This configuration combines some of the benefits of the

master/slave configuration with some of the initial cost
savings of the fixed speed configuration. Use this configu-
ration when the extra capacity of the fixed pumps is rarely
needed.
The mixed pump configuration supports a mix of variable
speed pumps connected to the frequency converters with
extra fixed speed pumps. The variable speed pumps are
staged on and destaged first based on the frequency

236 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

converter speed. The fixed speed pumps are then staged 27-01 Pump Status
on last and destaged last based on the feedback pressure. Shows the status of each pump in the system.
Option: Function:
NOTICE!
All frequency converters must have the same power
[0] * Ready The pump is available for use by the
Cascade Controller.
3 3
range. All variable speed pumps must be of the same
[1] On Drive The pump is:
size. Fixed speed pumps may be of different sizes. See
Figure 3.96. • Running.
• Connected to the frequency
converter.

• Controlled by the Cascade

Controller.

[2] On Mains The pump is:

• Running.
• Connected to mains.

• Controlled by the Cascade

Controller.

[3] Offline - Off The pump is off and not available for use
by the Cascade Controller.

[4] Offline - On The pump is:

Mains • Running.
• Connected to mains.
Figure 3.96 Mixed Pump Configuration • Not available for use by the
Cascade Controller.

[5] Offline - On The pump is:

3.24.3 Unequal Pump Size Configuration Drive • Running.
The unequal pump size configuration supports a limited
• Connected to the frequency
converter.
mix of fixed speed pumps in different sizes. This configu-
ration provides the largest range of system output with the • Not available for use by the
smallest number of pumps. Cascade Controller.

[6] Offline - Fault The pump is:

3.24.4 Using Soft Starters for Fixed Speed • Running.
Pumps • Connected to mains.

In a mixed pump configuration, contractors can be

• Not available for use by the
Cascade Controller.
replaced with soft starters.
[7] Offline - Hand The pump is:

NOTICE! • Running.
Mixing soft starters and contactors hinders the control of • Connected to mains.
output pressure during the staging and destaging • Not available for use by the
transitions. The use of soft starters delays staging due to Cascade Controller.
the ramp time of a fixed speed pump.
[8] Offline - The pump is off and is externally
External interlocked.
Interlock
[9] Spinning The Cascade Controller is executing a
spin cycle of the pump.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 237

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

27-01 Pump Status 27-10 Cascade Controller

Shows the status of each pump in the system. Select the operating mode of the Cascade Controller. To enable
Option: Function: the Cascade Controller functionality, set parameter 1-00 Configu-

3 3
ration Mode to option [3] Closed Loop.
[10] No Relay The pump is not directly connected to
Connection the frequency converter, and a relay is Option: Function:
not assigned to the pump. [0] Disabled Turns off the Cascade Controller option.

[1] Master/ Select this option to use only variable speed

27-02 Manual Pump Control
Follower pumps connected to frequency converters.
This parameter is a command parameter that allows manual Selecting this option sets
control of individual pump states. Selecting one of the options parameter 8-30 Protocol to [22] Cascade
executes the command in the option and then returns to option Modbus Master.
[0] No Operation.
[2] Mixed Pumps Select this option to use both variable and
Option: Function: fixed speed pumps.
[0] * No Operation The frequency converter does
[3] Basic Cascade Turns off the cascade option and reverts to
not issue any commands.
Ctrl basic cascade operation (see parameter group
[1] Online Makes the pump available to 25-** Cascade Controller for more
the Cascade Controller. information). Selecting this option increases
[2] Alternate On Forces the selected pump to the number of pumps that the basic Cascade
be the lead pump. Controller can control. The additional relays
on the option can be used to extend the
[3] Offline - Off Turns off the pump and
basic Cascade Controller with 3 relays.
makes the pump unavailable
for cascading.
27-11 Number Of Drives
[4] Offline - On Turns on the pump and Range: Function:
makes the pump unavailable
Size [1 - Shows the number of frequency converters
for cascading.
related* 8] that the Cascade Controller controls.
[5] Offline - Spin Initiates a pump spin. Depending on the option installed, the
Cascade Controller can control the following
27-03 Current Runtime Hours number of frequency converters:
Range: Function: • VLT® Extended Cascade Controller
0 h* [0 - Shows the total number of hours each MCO 101: 1–6.
2147483647 h] pump has run since the last reset. This • VLT® Advanced Cascade Controller
value is used to balance the running MCO 102: 1–8.
hours between pumps. To reset the value
to 0, use parameter 27-91 Cascade
• Cascade CTL License software (type
code LXX1): 1–8.
Reference.

27-12 Number Of Pumps

27-04 Pump Total Lifetime Hours
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
Size [2 - Shows the number of pumps that the
0 h* [0 - 2147483647 h] Shows the total hours run for each
related* 8] Cascade Controller controls. Depending on
connected pump.
the configuration, the Cascade Controller can
control the following number of pumps:
NOTICE!
This parameter may be set to a certain value for • VLT® Extended Cascade Controller
MCO 101: 0–6.
maintenance purposes.
• VLT® Advanced Cascade Controller
3.24.5 27-1* Configuration MCO 102: 0–8.

• Cascade CTL License software (type

Parameters for configuring the Cascade Controller option. code LXX1): 1–8.

238 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

27-14 Pump Capacity 27-19 Reset Current Runtime Hours

Range: Function: Select option [1] Do reset to reset all current run-time hours to 0.
Size [ 10 - Enter the capacity of each pump in the The run-time hours value is used for run-time balancing.
related* 800 %] system relative to the first pump. This is
an indexed parameter with one entry per
Option:
[0] * Do not reset
Function:
3 3
pump. The capacity of the first pump is [1] Do reset
100%.

27-16 Runtime Balancing

3.24.6 27-2* Bandwidth Settings
Set the priority of each pump for balancing its running hours.
Parameters for configuring the control response.
Pumps with the same priority are staged/destaged based on the
running hours. 27-20 Normal Operating Range
Option: Function: Range: Function:
[0] * Balanced Priority 1 Turned on first, turned off last. Size [1 - Enter the maximum offset from the setpoint
related* 100 before a pump may be added or removed. The
[1] Balanced Priority 2 Turned on if no priority 1
%] value is a percentage of parameter 21-12 Ext. 1
pumps are available. Turned
Maximum Reference. The system must be
off before priority 1 pumps are
outside the normal operating range for the
turned off.
time specified in parameter 27-23 Staging Delay
[2] Spare Pump Turned on last, turned off first. or parameter 27-24 Destaging Delay before a
cascade operation takes place. Normal
27-17 Motor Starters operation is operation with at least one
Option: Function: variable speed pump available.
Select the type of the mains starter for the fixed

175ZA672.12
speed pumps. All fixed speed pumps must have
the same starter type.

[0] * Direct
Online SBW (27-20)

[1] Soft This option adds a delay when staging and Setpoint
Starter destaging pumps. The delay is defined in
parameter 27-41 Ramp Down Delay and SBW (27-20)

parameter 27-42 Ramp Up Delay.

[2] Star/ This option adds a delay when staging pumps.

SBW staging-vertr. (27-23)
Delta The delay is defined in parameter 27-42 Ramp Up
Figure 3.97 SBW Staging Delay
Delay.

27-18 Spin Time for Unused Pumps

175ZA671.11

Range: Function:
Size [0 - Enter the time to spin unused pumps. If a (27-24) SBW destage delay
related* 99 s] fixed speed pump has not run in the last
72 hours, it is turned on for this time. This
function prevents the damage caused by SBW
(27-20)
leaving the pump off for too long. To Setpoint
disable the function, set the value of this
SBW
parameter to 0. (27-20)

CAUTION
Ensure that the value in this parameter does not cause Figure 3.98 SBW Destaging Delay
overpressure in the system.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 239

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

27-21 Override Limit

175ZA672.12
Range: Function:
100 [0 - Enter the maximum offset from the setpoint

3 3 %* 100 %] before a pump is added or removed immediately

(for instance, if there was a sudden water
SBW (27-20)

Setpoint
demand). The value is the percentage of
parameter 21-12 Ext. 1 Maximum Reference. This SBW (27-20)
parameter allows responding to sudden changes
in demand without a delay. The override
functionality can be disabled by setting this SBW staging-vertr. (27-23)
parameter to 100%. Figure 3.100 SBW Staging Delay

NOTICE!
In master/slave applications, the override limit is used as

175ZA671.11
the wake-up condition. See documentation for Cascade
Controller Option MCO 101 for further information. (27-24) SBW destage delay
130BA370.11

SBW
(27-20)
Setpoint
OBW (27-71)
SBW
(27-20)

SBW (27-70)
Actual head
Setpoint Figure 3.101 SBW Destaging Delay
SBW (27-70)

27-23 Staging Delay

OBW (27-71)
OBW timer (27-25) Range: Function:
15 [0 - Enter the time during which the system feedback
Figure 3.99 OBW Time
s* 3000 s] must remain below the operating range before a
fixed speed pump is turned on. If the system is
operating with at least 1 variable speed pump
27-22 Fixed Speed Only Operating Range available, parameter 27-20 Normal Operating Range
Range: Function: is used. If no variable speed pumps are available,
Size [0 - Enter the allowed offset from the setpoint parameter 27-22 Fixed Speed Only Operating Range
related* par. at which a fixed speed pump is added or is used.
27-21 % removed when there are no operational
] variable speed pumps. The value is a 27-24 Destaging Delay
percentage of parameter 21-12 Ext. 1 Range: Function:
Maximum Reference. The system must be 15 [0 - Enter the time during which the system feedback
outside this limit for the time specified in s* 3000 s] must remain above the operating range before a
parameter 27-23 Staging Delay or pump is turned off. If the system is operating
parameter 27-24 Destaging Delay before a with at least 1 variable speed pump available,
cascade operation takes place. parameter 27-20 Normal Operating Range is used. If
no variable speed pumps are available,
parameter 27-22 Fixed Speed Only Operating Range
is used.

240 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

27-25 Override Hold Time 27-30 Auto Tune Staging Speeds

Range: Function: Option: Function:
10 [0 - Enter the minimum time that must elapse after [1] * Enabled When this option is selected, the frequency
s* 300 s] staging or destaging before another staging or
destaging may take place due to the system
converter calculates and keeps parameters 27-31
to 27-34 up to date. If parameter 27-31 Stage On 3 3
exceeding the value in parameter 27-21 Override Speed [RPM], parameter 27-32 Stage On Speed [Hz],
Limit. This value allows the system to stabilize after parameter 27-33 Stage Off Speed [RPM], and
a pump is turned on or off. If this delay is not long parameter 27-34 Stage Off Speed [Hz] are modified
enough, the transients caused by turning a pump via the fieldbus or LCP, then the new values are
on or off may cause the system to add or remove used but are continuously automatically tuned.
another pump unnecessarily. The frequency converter recalculates and updates
the parameters when staging occurs and
27-27 Min Speed Destage Delay optimizes the settings to ensure high
Range: Function: performance and low energy consumption.
Size [0 - Enter the time that the lead pump must run
related* 300 s] at minimum speed while the system 27-31 Stage On Speed [RPM]
feedback is still inside the normal operating Range: Function:
band before a pump is turned off to save Size [ 0 - par. To be used if RPM is selected.
energy. Energy savings are achieved by related* 4-13 If the lead pump is operating above Stage
turning off a pump if all variable speed RPM] On Speed for the time specified in
pumps are operating at minimum speed, but parameter 27-23 Staging Delay and a
the feedback is still within the specified band. variable speed pump is available, it is
Under these conditions, a pump may be turned on.
turned off and the system is still able to
maintain control. The pumps that remain on

175ZA672.12
operate more efficiently.
175ZA640.11

SBW (27-20)

Setpoint
F VLT pump
Pump
switch-off SBW (27-20)

SBW staging-vertr. (27-23)

Fmin
Figure 3.103 SBW Staging Delay
(4-12)
175ZA671.11

De-stage
timer period (27-24) SBW destage delay
(27-27)
Figure 3.102 Destage Function Time
SBW
(27-20)
Setpoint
3.24.7 27-3* Staging Speed
SBW
(27-20)
Parameters for configuring the master/slave control
response.

27-30 Auto Tune Staging Speeds Figure 3.104 SBW Destaging Delay

Option: Function:
[0] Disabled

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 241

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

27-32 Stage On Speed [Hz] (27-41)

130BA598.11
Range: Function:
Size [0 - If the lead pump speed is exceeding the

3 3 related* par. 4-14

Hz]
value in this parameter for the time
specified in parameter 27-23 Staging Delay
and a variable speed pump is available,
the variable pump is turned on.

27-33 Stage Off Speed [RPM]

Range: Function:
Size [0 - If the lead pump speed is lower than the
related* 1500 value in this parameter for the time Figure 3.105 Ramp Down Delay
RPM] specified in parameter 27-24 Destaging
Delay and more than 1 variable speed
pump is on, a variable speed pump is
27-42 Ramp Up Delay
turned off.
Range: Function:
27-34 Stage Off Speed [Hz] 2 s* [0 - 12 Enter the delay between turning off a pump
s] controlled by a soft starter and ramping up a
Range: Function:
pump controlled by the frequency converter.
Size [ 0.0 - If the lead pump speed is lower than the
This parameter is only used for soft starter
related* 50 Hz] value in this parameter for the time
controlled pumps.
specified in parameter 27-24 Destaging Delay
and more than 1 variable speed pump is NOTICE!
on, a variable speed pump is turned off. Not used with star/delta controlled
pumps.
3.24.8 27-4* Staging Settings
(27-42)

130BA599.11
Parameters for configuring the staging transitions.

27-40 Auto Tune Staging Settings

When this parameter is enabled, the staging and destaging
threshold is auto tuned during operation. The settings are
optimized to prevent the pressure from overshooting or
undershooting when staging and destaging pumps.
Option: Function:
[0] * Disabled
[1] Enabled

27-41 Ramp Down Delay Figure 3.106 Ramp Up Delay

Range: Function:
10 s* [0 - 120 Enter the delay between turning on a pump
s] controlled by a soft starter and ramping down 27-43 Staging Threshold
a pump controlled by the frequency converter.
Range: Function:
This parameter is only used for soft starter and
Size [0 - Enter the speed in the staging ramp at which
star/delta controlled pumps.
related* 100 the fixed speed pump is turned on. The value
%] is a percentage of the maximum pump speed.

If parameter 27-40 Auto Tune Staging Settings is

set to [1] Enabled, parameter 27-43 Staging
Threshold and parameter 27-44 Destaging
Threshold are kept up to date with the new
calculated values. If parameter 27-43 Staging

242 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

27-43 Staging Threshold 27-46 Staging Speed [Hz]

Range: Function: Range: Function:
Threshold and parameter 27-44 Destaging 0 Hz* [0 - 0 Hz] Shows the actual staging speed based on the
Threshold are modified via the fieldbus or the
LCP, then the new values are used, but are
staging threshold.
3 3
continuously automatically tuned. 27-47 Destaging Speed [RPM]
Range: Function:

130BD075.11
0 RPM* [0 - 0 RPM] Shows the actual destaging speed based
on the destaging threshold.
Fixed speed pump
Motor speed
high
Monitor feedback and 27-48 Destaging Speed [Hz]
change to closed loop if
Staging speed
set point is reached Range: Function:
(27-43) Variable speed pump 0 Hz* [0 - 0 Hz] Shows the actual destaging speed based on
Motor speed
low
the destaging threshold.
Time
Closed loop
Figure 3.107 Staging Threshold

27-44 Destaging Threshold

Range: Function:
Size [ 0 - Enter the speed in the staging ramp at which
related* 100 the fixed speed pump is turned off. The value is
%] a percentage of the maximum pump speed.

If parameter 27-40 Auto Tune Staging Settings is

set to [1] Enabled, parameter 27-43 Staging
Threshold and parameter 27-44 Destaging
Threshold are kept up to date with the new
calculated values. If parameter 27-43 Staging
Threshold and parameter 27-44 Destaging
Threshold are modified via the fieldbus or the
LCP, then the new values are used, but are
continuously automatically tuned.
130BD076.11

Closed loop

Motor speed Variable speed

high pump
Destaging
speed Monitor feedback and
(27-44)
change to closed loop if
Fixed speed pump set point is reached
Motor speed
low
Time
Figure 3.108 Destaging Threshold

27-45 Staging Speed [RPM]

Range: Function:
0 RPM* [0 - 0 RPM] Shows the actual staging speed based on
the staging threshold.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 243

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.24.9 27-5* Alternation Settings 27-58 Run Next Pump Delay

Range: Function:
Parameters for configuring the alternation settings. 0.1 s* [0.1 - 5 s] Enter the delay between stopping the current

3 3 27-51 Alternation Event

Select option [1] At Destage to enable alternation at destaging.
lead pump and starting the next lead pump
when alternating lead pumps. This parameter
gives the contactors time to switch while both
Option: Function: pumps are stopped.
[0] Off
[1] At Destage

130BA597.11
27-52 Alternation Time Interval
Range: Function:
0 min* [0 - Enter the time between alternations. Disable
10080 the alternation by entering the value 0.
min] Parameter 27-53 Alternation Timer Value
shows the time remaining until the next
alternation occurs.

(27-58)
27-53 Alternation Timer Value
Figure 3.109 Run Next Pump Delay
Range: Function:
0 min* [0 - 10080 Shows the time remaining before an
min] interval-based alternation occurs.
3.24.10 27-6* Digital Inputs
Parameter 27-52 Alternation Time Interval
defines the time interval.
Parameters for configuring digital inputs. Parameters in this
27-54 Alternation At Time of Day group are only available if VLT® Advanced Cascade
Controller MCO 102 is installed.
Enable alternating pumps at a specific time of day. The time is
set in parameter 27-55 Alternation Predefined Time. This parameter 27-60 Terminal X66/1 Digital Input
requires the real-time clock. Select the function for this digital input.
Option: Function: Option: Function:
[0] * Disabled [0] * No operation
[1] Enabled [1] Reset
[2] Coast inverse
27-55 Alternation Predefined Time
[3] Coast and reset inv
Range: Function:
[5] DC-brake inverse
Size [0 - Enter the time of day for pump alternation.
[6] Stop inverse
related* 0] This parameter is only available if
[7] External Interlock
parameter 27-54 Alternation At Time of Day is
[8] Start
set to option [1] Enabled.
[9] Latched start
[10] Reversing
27-56 Alternate Capacity is <
[11] Start reversing
Range: Function:
[14] Jog
0 %* [0 - This parameter ensures that the lead pump is
[15] Preset reference on
100 %] operating at a speed lower than a certain value
[16] Preset ref bit 0
before the time-based alternation takes place.
[17] Preset ref bit 1
This ensures that alternation only takes place
[18] Preset ref bit 2
when the interruption in operation does not
affect the quality of the process and minimizes [19] Freeze reference
the system disturbance caused by alternations. [20] Freeze output
The value is a percentage of the capacity of [21] Speed up
pump 1. Setting this parameter to 0% disables it. [22] Speed down
[23] Set-up select bit 0
[24] Set-up select bit 1

244 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

27-60 Terminal X66/1 Digital Input 27-65 Terminal X66/11 Digital Input
Select the function for this digital input. This parameter contains all options and functions listed in
Option: Function: parameter 27-60 Terminal X66/1 Digital Input.

[34]
[36]
Ramp bit 0
Mains failure inverse
27-66 Terminal X66/13 Digital Input 3 3
This parameter contains all options and functions listed in
[37] Emergency Mode
parameter 27-60 Terminal X66/1 Digital Input.
[42] Ref source bit 0
[51] Hand/Auto Start
[52] Run permissive
[53] Hand start
[54] Auto start
[55] DigiPot increase
[56] DigiPot decrease
[57] DigiPot clear
[62] Reset Counter A
[65] Reset Counter B
[66] Sleep Mode
[75] MCO Specific
[78] Reset Preventive Maintenance Word
[80] PTC Card 1
[85] Latched Pump Derag
[86] Flow Confirmation
[87] Reset Flow Totalized Volume Counter
[88] Reset Flow Actual Volume Counter
[89] Reset Derag Counter
[120] Lead Pump Start
[121] Lead Pump Alternation
[130] Pump 1 Interlock
[131] Pump 2 Interlock
[132] Pump 3 Interlock
[133] Pump 4 Interlock
[134] Pump 5 Interlock
[135] Pump 6 Interlock
[136] Pump 7 Interlock
[137] Pump 8 Interlock
[138] Pump 9 Interlock

27-61 Terminal X66/3 Digital Input

This parameter contains all options and functions listed in
parameter 27-60 Terminal X66/1 Digital Input.

27-62 Terminal X66/5 Digital Input

This parameter contains all options and functions listed in
parameter 27-60 Terminal X66/1 Digital Input.

27-63 Terminal X66/7 Digital Input

This parameter contains all options and functions listed in
parameter 27-60 Terminal X66/1 Digital Input.

27-64 Terminal X66/9 Digital Input

This parameter contains all options and functions listed in
parameter 27-60 Terminal X66/1 Digital Input.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 245

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.24.11 27-7* Connections 27-70 Relay

This parameter is only relevant for a relay wiring configuration.
Parameters for configuring relay connections. Use this parameter to set up the function of the option relays.

3 3
This parameter is an array. The visibility of options depends on
27-70 Relay
the MCO option installed in the frequency converter:
This parameter is only relevant for a relay wiring configuration.
Use this parameter to set up the function of the option relays. • VLT® Extended Cascade Controller MCO 101: Relays 10–
This parameter is an array. The visibility of options depends on 12 are available.
the MCO option installed in the frequency converter: • VLT® Advanced Cascade Controller MCO 102: Relays
• VLT® Extended Cascade Controller MCO 101: Relays 10– 13-20 are available.
12 are available. In any case, the standard relays (Relay 1 and Relay 2), and the
• VLT® Advanced Cascade Controller MCO 102: Relays relays in the VLT® Relay Option MCB 105 are available.
13-20 are available. To set the function of a specific relay, select the relay and then
select the function. If the option [0] Standard Relay is selected,
In any case, the standard relays (Relay 1 and Relay 2), and the
the relay can be used as a general-purpose relay and the
relays in the VLT® Relay Option MCB 105 are available.
function can be set in parameter group 5-4* Relays.
To set the function of a specific relay, select the relay and then
select the function. If the option [0] Standard Relay is selected, Option: Function:
the relay can be used as a general-purpose relay and the [29] Pump 3 to Drive 6
function can be set in parameter group 5-4* Relays. [30] Pump 3 to Drive 7

Option: Function: [31] Pump 3 to Drive 8

[32] Pump 4 to Drive 1
[0] * Standard Relay Enable slave
[33] Pump 4 to Drive 2
frequency
converter X. [34] Pump 4 to Drive 3
[35] Pump 4 to Drive 4
[1] Drive 2 Enable
[36] Pump 4 to Drive 5
[2] Drive 3 Enable
[37] Pump 4 to Drive 6
[3] Drive 4 Enable
[38] Pump 4 to Drive 7
[4] Drive 5 Enable
[39] Pump 4 to Drive 8
[5] Drive 6 Enable
[40] Pump 5 to Drive 1
[6] Drive 7 Enable
[41] Pump 5 to Drive 2
[7] Drive 8 Enable
[42] Pump 5 to Drive 3
[8] Pump 1 to Drive 1
[43] Pump 5 to Drive 4
[9] Pump 1 to Drive 2
[44] Pump 5 to Drive 5
[10] Pump 1 to Drive 3
[45] Pump 5 to Drive 6
[11] Pump 1 to Drive 4
[46] Pump 5 to Drive 7
[12] Pump 1 to Drive 5
[47] Pump 5 to Drive 8
[13] Pump 1 to Drive 6
[48] Pump 6 to Drive 1
[14] Pump 1 to Drive 7
[49] Pump 6 to Drive 2
[15] Pump 1 to Drive 8
[50] Pump 6 to Drive 3
[16] Pump 2 to Drive 1
[51] Pump 6 to Drive 4
[17] Pump 2 to Drive 2
[52] Pump 6 to Drive 5
[18] Pump 2 to Drive 3
[53] Pump 6 to Drive 6
[19] Pump 2 to Drive 4
[54] Pump 6 to Drive 7
[20] Pump 2 to Drive 5
[55] Pump 6 to Drive 8
[21] Pump 2 to Drive 6
[56] Pump 7 to Drive 1
[22] Pump 2 to Drive 7
[57] Pump 7 to Drive 2
[23] Pump 2 to Drive 8
[58] Pump 7 to Drive 3
[24] Pump 3 to Drive 1
[59] Pump 7 to Drive 4
[25] Pump 3 to Drive 2
[60] Pump 7 to Drive 5
[26] Pump 3 to Drive 3
[61] Pump 7 to Drive 6
[27] Pump 3 to Drive 4
[62] Pump 7 to Drive 7
[28] Pump 3 to Drive 5

246 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

27-70 Relay 27-92 % Of Total Capacity

This parameter is only relevant for a relay wiring configuration. Shows the system operating point as a percentage of the total
Use this parameter to set up the function of the option relays. system capacity. 100% means that all pumps are on at full speed.

3 3
This parameter is an array. The visibility of options depends on Range: Function:
the MCO option installed in the frequency converter:
0 %* [0 - 0 %]
• VLT® Extended Cascade Controller MCO 101: Relays 10–
12 are available.
27-93 Cascade Option Status
Shows the status of the cascade system.
• VLT® Advanced Cascade Controller MCO 102: Relays
13-20 are available. Option: Function:
[0] * Disabled The cascade option is not used.
In any case, the standard relays (Relay 1 and Relay 2), and the
relays in the VLT® Relay Option MCB 105 are available. [1] Off The cascade function is turned off.
To set the function of a specific relay, select the relay and then [2] Running The cascade function is running normally.
select the function. If the option [0] Standard Relay is selected,
[3] Running at The cascade function is running in the
the relay can be used as a general-purpose relay and the
FSBW fixed speed mode. No variable speed
function can be set in parameter group 5-4* Relays.
pumps are available.
Option: Function:
[4] Jogging The system is running at the jog speed
[63] Pump 7 to Drive 8
set in parameter 3-11 Jog Speed [Hz].
[64] Pump 8 to Drive 1
[65] Pump 8 to Drive 2 [5] In Open Loop The control principle is set to open loop.
[66] Pump 8 to Drive 3 [6] Freezed The system is frozen in the current state.
[67] Pump 8 to Drive 4 No changes take place.
[68] Pump 8 to Drive 5
[7] Coast The system is stopped due to coasting.
[69] Pump 8 to Drive 6
[70] Pump 8 to Drive 7 [8] Alarm The system is operating with an alarm.
[71] Pump 8 to Drive 8 [9] Staging A staging operation is in progress.
[72] Pump 1 to Mains
[10] Destaging A destaging operation is in progress.
[73] Pump 2 to Mains
[74] Pump 3 to Mains [11] Alternating An alternation operation is in progress.

[75] Pump 4 to Mains [12] All Offline

[76] Pump 5 to Mains [13] Cascade CTL
[77] Pump 6 to Mains Sleep
[78] Pump 7 to Mains
[79] Pump 8 to Mains

3.24.12 27-9* Readouts

This parameter group contains the cascade controller

readout parameters.

27-91 Cascade Reference

Shows the reference output for the slave frequency converters.
This reference is available even when the master frequency
converter is stopped. This is the speed that the frequency
converter is operating at or would be operating at if it was on.
The value is a percentage of parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High
Limit [RPM] or parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz].
Range: Function:
0 %* [-200 - 200 %]

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 247

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

27-94 Cascade System Status

This parameter shows the status of each individual pump. The
value depends on the wiring configuration.

3 3 • Relay wiring configuration:

The parameter shows the status of all relays configured
in the system. The value has the following format:
PUMP_NUMBER:PUMP_STATUS. PUMP_STATUS can have
1 of the following values: 0, R, D, X.
For example:
1:D 2:R 3:0 4:X
D: Variable speed pump. R: Fixed speed pump. 0: Not
running. X: Interlock.

• Serial communication wiring configuration:

The parameter shows the system status. The value has
the following format: MASTER/FOLLOWER:PUMP_STATUS.
PUMP_STATUS can have 1 of the following values: 0, D,
X.
For example:
M:D F:0 F:X
D: Variable speed pump. 0: Not running. X: Interlock or
OFF mode. x: Tripped or no communication.

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 25 ]

27-95 Advanced Cascade Relay Output [bin]

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 255 ] Shows the status of each individual relay. From
left to right, the bits correspond to relays 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20.

27-96 Extended Cascade Relay Output [bin]

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 7 ] Shows the status of relay outputs. From left to
right, the bits correspond to relay outputs 12, 11,
and 10.

248 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3.25 Parameters 29-** Water Application Speed

130BA612.10
Functions
Max. speed
The group contains parameters used for monitoring water/
wastewater applications. Closed loop 3 3
Min. speed
Fill rate unit/sec.
3.25.1 29-0* Pipe Fill function
Initial ramp
In water supply systems, water hammering can occur when
filling the pipes too fast. It is therefore desirable to limit Filled setpoint Time
the filling rate. Pipe fill mode eliminates the occurrence of Figure 3.111 Vertical Pipe System
water hammering associated with the rapid exhausting of
air from the piping system by filling the pipes at a low
rate.
29-00 Pipe Fill Enable
This function is used in horizontal, vertical, and mixed
piping systems. As the pressure in horizontal pipe systems Option: Function:
does not climb as the system fills, filling horizontal pipe [0] * Disabled Select [1] Enabled to fill pipes at a user-specified
systems requires a user-specified speed to fill for a user- rate.
specified time and/or until a user-specified pressure [1] Enabled Select [1] Enabled to fill pipes at a user-specified
setpoint is reached. rate.
The best way to fill a vertical pipe system is to use the PID
function to ramp the pressure at a user-specified rate 29-01 Pipe Fill Speed [RPM]
between the motor speed low limit and a user-specified
Range: Function:
pressure.
The pipe fill function uses a combination of the above to Size [ par. Set the filling speed for filling horizontal
ensure a safe filling of any system. related* 4-11 - pipe systems. The speed can be selected
No matter which system, the pipe fill mode starts using par. 4-13 in Hz or RPM depending on the selection
the constant speed set in parameter 29-01 Pipe Fill Speed RPM] made in parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low
[RPM] until the pipe fill time in parameter 29-03 Pipe Fill Limit [RPM]/parameter 4-13 Motor Speed
Time has expired. Filling then continues with the filling High Limit [RPM] or in
ramp set in parameter 29-04 Pipe Fill Rate until the filling parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]/
setpoint specified in parameter 29-05 Filled Setpoint is parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz].
reached.
29-02 Pipe Fill Speed [Hz]
Speed Range: Function:
130BA611.10

Size [ par. Set the filling speed for filling horizontal

related* 4-12 - pipe systems. The speed can be selected
Max. speed
par. 4-14 in Hz or RPM depending on the options
Closed loop Hz] selected in parameter 4-11 Motor Speed
Fill speed
Low Limit [RPM]/parameter 4-13 Motor
Min. speed
Normal ramp Speed High Limit [RPM] or in
parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]/
Initial ramp parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz].

Fill time or filled setpoint 29-03 Pipe Fill Time

Figure 3.110 Horizontal Pipe System Range: Function:
0 s* [0 - 3600 s] Set the specified time for pipe filling of
horizontal pipe systems.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 249

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

29-04 Pipe Fill Rate

e30bc369.11
Speed
Range: Function: Derag
0.001 [0.001 - Specifies the fill rate in units function
activated

3 3 ProcessCtrlUnit* 999999.999
ProcessCtrlUnit]
using the PI controller. Fill
rate units are feedback units.
This function is used for
filling up vertical pipe +/- Derag
systems, but is active when speed:
Par.: 29 -13
the filling time has expired, Par.: 29 -14
until the pipe fill setpoint set Derag off delay:
Par. 29 -15
in parameter 29-05 Filled
Setpoint is reached. 0 Hz/RPM

29-05 Filled Setpoint

Range: Function:
0 [-999999.999 - Specifies the filled
ProcessCtrlUnit* 999999.999 setpoint at which the pipe
ProcessCtrlUnit] fill function is disabled
and the PID controller
Deragging run-time : Par . 29-12
takes control. This
function can be used both
1 Cycle
for horizontal and vertical Number of cycles : Par . 29 -10
pipe systems.
Figure 3.112 Derag Function

29-06 No-Flow Disable Timer

Range: Function: If a derag is triggered from a frequency converter-stopped
0 s* [0 - 3600 s] state, the first off delay is skipped. The deragging event
may consist of several cycles: one cycle consisting of 1
29-07 Filled setpoint delay
pulse in the reverse direction followed by 1 pulse in the
Range: Function: forward direction. Deragging is considered finished after
0 s* [0 - 10 s] Select the delay before the frequency converter the specified number of cycles have completed. More
considers the filled setpoint to be reached if a specifically, on the last pulse (it is always forward) of the
fill rate in units per second is used. last cycle, the derag is considered finished after the
deragging run-time expires (the frequency converter is
running at derag speed). In between pulses, the frequency
3.25.2 29-1* Deragging Function
converter output coasts for a specified off-delay time to let
debris in the pump settle.
The purpose of the deragging feature is to free the pump
blade of debris in waste water applications so that the
pump operates normally. NOTICE!
A deragging event is defined as the time when the Do not enable deragging if the pump cannot operate in
frequency converter starts to derag to when the deragging reverse direction.
finishes. When a derag is started, the frequency converter
ramps first to a stop and then an off delay expires before There are 3 different notifications for an ongoing
the first cycle begins. deragging event:
• Status in the LCP: Auto Remote Derag.
• A bit in the extended status word (bit 23, 80 0000
hex).
• A digital output can be configured to reflect the
active deragging status.

250 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

Depending on the application and the purpose of using it, 29-15 Derag Off Delay
this feature can be used as a preventive or reactive Range: Function:
measure and can be triggered/started in the following
10 s* [1 - 600 s] The time that the frequency converter
ways:
• On each start command (parameter 29-11 Derag
at Start/Stop).
remains off before starting another derag
pulse. Allows contents of the pump to settle. 3 3
• On each stop command (parameter 29-11 Derag 29-16 Derag Counter
at Start/Stop). Range: Function:
• On each start/stop command 0* [0 - 2147483647 ] Shows the number of deragging events.
(parameter 29-11 Derag at Start/Stop).
• On digital input (parameter group 5-1* Digital 29-17 Reset Derag Counter
Inputs). Option: Function:
• On frequency converter action with the smart [0] * Do not reset
logic controller (parameter 13-52 SL Controller [1] Reset counter Select option [1] Reset counter to reset the
Action). deragging counter.

• As timed action (parameter group 23-** Time-

based Functions). 3.25.3 29-2* Derag Power Tuning
• On high power (parameter group 29-2* Derag
Power Tuning). The derag feature monitors frequency converter power in a
similar fashion as no-flow. Based on 2 user-defined points
29-10 Derag Cycles and an offset value, the monitor calculates a derag power
Range: Function: curve. It uses the exact same calculations as no-flow with
Size related* [0 - 10 ] The number of cycles the frequency the difference being that derag monitors for high power
converter derags. and not low power.
Commissioning the no-flow user points via the no-flow
29-11 Derag at Start/Stop auto set-up also sets the points of the derag curve to the
Option: Function: same value.
Derag function when starting and stopping
the frequency converter.

[0] * Off
[1] Start
[2] Stop
[3] Start and stop

29-12 Deragging Run Time

Range: Function:
0 s* [0 - 3600 s] The time that the frequency converter dwells
at the derag speed.

29-13 Derag Speed [RPM]

Range: Function:
Size related* [ 0 - par. 4-13 The speed at which the
RPM] frequency converter derags in
RPM.

29-14 Derag Speed [Hz]

Range: Function:
Size related* [ 0.0 - par. 4-14 The speed at which the
Hz] frequency converter derags in
Hz.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 251

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

29-25 Low Speed [Hz]

130BC370.10
Power [kW/HP] Range: Function:
Size related* [ 0 - par. 29-29 Set output speed used for
The calculated power

3 3 + the power factor (readout)

Par. 29-20, Par. 29-21
Hz] registration of derag power at
low speed in Hz.
High Speed
power
Par. 29-30,
29-26 Low Speed Power [kW]
Par. 29-31 Range: Function:
Size related* [ 0 - 5.50 kW] Set derag power at low speed in
Activate Derag kW.
Derag power factor
Par. 29-22
29-27 Low Speed Power [HP]
Range: Function:
Size related* [ 0 - 7.50 hp] Set derag power at low speed in
Low Speed hp.
power
Par. 29-26,
Par. 29-27 29-28 High Speed [RPM]
Range: Function:
Size related* [ 0.0 - par. 4-13 Set output speed used for
Speed [Hz/RPM] RPM] registration of derag power at
Low Speed High Speed
Par. 29-24, Par. 29-25 Par. 29-28, Par. 29-29 high speed in RPM.

Figure 3.113 Derag Power Tuning 29-29 High Speed [Hz]

Range: Function:
Size related* [ 0.0 - par. Set output speed used for
29-20 Derag Power[kW]
4-14 Hz] registration of derag power at
Range: Function: high speed in Hz.
0 kW* [0 - 0 kW] Readout of calculated derag power at actual
speed. 29-30 High Speed Power [kW]
Range: Function:
29-21 Derag Power[HP]
Size related* [ 0 - 5.50 kW] Set derag power at high speed in
Range: Function: kW.
0 hp* [0 - 0 hp] Readout of calculated derag power at actual
speed. 29-31 High Speed Power [HP]
Range: Function:
29-22 Derag Power Factor
Size related* [ 0 - 7.50 hp] Set derag power at high speed in
Range: Function: hp.
200 %* [1 - 400 %] Set a correction if derag detection reacts
on too low a power value. 29-32 Derag On Ref Bandwidth
Range: Function:
29-23 Derag Power Delay
5 %* [1 - 100 %] Set the bandwidth percentage of motor
Range: Function: speed high limit to accommodate system
601 s* [1 - 601 s] The time that the frequency converter must pressure fluctuation.
remain on reference and a high-power
condition for a derag to occur. 29-33 Power Derag Limit
Range: Function:
29-24 Low Speed [RPM]
3* [0 - 10 ] The number of times the power monitor can
Range: Function: trigger consecutive derags before a fault is
Size related* [ 0 - par. 29-28 Set output speed used for reported.
RPM] registration of derag power at
low speed in RPM.

252 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

29-34 Consecutive Derag Interval

130BD765.10
N MAX
1
Range: Function:
Size related* [Size related] Derags are considered to be
consecutive if they happen within
the interval specified in this
N MIN
3 3
parameter. 0
T
2
1
3.25.4 29-4* Pre/Post-Lube Function
0
T
Use the pre/post-lube function in the following 3
1
applications:
• A motor requires lubrication of its mechanical 0
parts before and while it runs to prevent damage t1 t2 t3 T
and wear. This is especially the case when the
motor has not been running for a long time. 1 Speed curve

• An application requires external fans to run. 2 Start command (for example terminal 18)
3 Pre-lube output signal
The function makes the frequency converter signal an
t1 Start command issued (for example terminal 18 is set
external device for a user-defined period. A start delay can
active). The start delay timer (parameter 1-71 Start Delay)
be configured with parameter 1-71 Start Delay. With this
and the pre-lube timer (parameter 29-41 Pre Lube Time).
delay, the pre-lube function runs while the motor is
t2 The start delay timer expires. The frequency converter
stopped.
starts to ramp up.
t3 The pre-lube timer (parameter 29-41 Pre Lube Time)
For information about the pre/post lube function options,
expires.
see the following parameters:
• Parameter 29-40 Pre/Post Lube Function. Figure 3.114 Pre/Post Lube Function Example
• Parameter 29-41 Pre Lube Time.
• Parameter 29-42 Post Lube Time.
Consider the following use case: 29-40 Pre/Post Lube Function
• A lubricating device starts the lubrication at the Select when the pre/post-lube function is active. Use
time when the frequency converter receives the parameter 1-71 Start Delay to set the delay before the frequency
start command. converter starts to ramp up.

• The frequency converter starts the motor. The Option: Function:

lubrication device is still running. [0] * Disabled

• After a certain time, the frequency converter [1] Pre Lube Only

stops the lubrication device. [2] Pre & Running

[3] Pre & Running & Post
See Figure 3.114.
29-41 Pre Lube Time
Range: Function:
10 s* [0 - 600 Enter how long the pre-lube function is
s] active. Use only when option [1] Pre Lube Only
is selected in parameter 29-40 Pre/Post Lube
Function.

29-42 Post Lube Time

Range: Function:
10 s* [0 - 600 Enter how long the post-lube function is on
s] after the motor stops. Use only when option
[3] Pre & Running & Post is selected in
parameter 29-40 Pre/Post Lube Function.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 253

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.25.5 29-5* Flow Confirmation 29-50 Validation Time

Range: Function:
The flow confirmation feature is designed for applications
where there is a need for the motor/pump to run while
Size [0 - NOTICE!
3 3 waiting for an external event. The flow confirmation
related* 999 s]
Parameter 29-50 Validation Time is
only visible in the LCP if a digital
monitor expects to receive a digital input from a sensor on
a gate valve, flow switch, or a similar external device, input is set to [86] Flow Confirmation
indicating that the device is in the open position and flow (see parameter group 5-1* Digital
is possible. In parameter 29-50 Validation Time, define for Inputs).
how long the VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 waits for the digital
input signal from the external device to confirm the flow. The digital input from an external device
After the flow is confirmed, the frequency converter checks must be active during the validation time.
the signal again after the flow verification time and then
runs normally. The LCP status reads Verifying flow while the 29-51 Verification Time
flow monitor is active. Range: Function:
The frequency converter trips with the alarm Flow Not 15 s* [ 0.10 - NOTICE!
Confirmed if the expected digital input signal becomes 255 s]
Parameter 29-51 Verification Time is only
inactive before either the flow validation time or the flow
visible in the LCP if a digital input is set
verification time expires.
to [86] Flow Confirmation (see parameter
group 5-1* Digital Inputs).
130BD766.10

N MAX
1
When the time in this parameter passes, the
N MIN
frequency converter checks the signal from the
0 external device. If the signal is active, the
2 T
frequency converter runs normally.
1

0
29-52 Signal Lost Verification Time
3 T
Enter the length of the delay after which the signal is considered
1 to be lost. This parameter is ignored if parameter 29-53 Flow
4 0 Confirmation Mode is set to [0] Confirmation Only.
T
1 Range: Function:
0 1 s* [0.01 - 255 s]
t0 <t1 t2 T
29-53 Flow Confirmation Mode
1 Speed curve. Select the operating mode of the flow monitor function.
2 Start command (for example, terminal 18). Option: Function:
[0] * Confirmation The flow confirmation function is only
3 Digital signal from an external device that confirms that Only active during the start-up of the pump.
the flow is possible.
[1] Monitor and The flow confirmation function is active
4 Flow verification.
Stop during and after the pump start-up. The
t0 Start command issued (for example, terminal 18 is set
frequency converter performs a ramp
active).
down to a stop if the input signal is lost.
t1 Digital signal from an external device becomes active
before parameter 29-50 Validation Time expires. [2] Monitor and The flow confirmation function is active
t2 When parameter 29-51 Verification Time passes, the Coast during and after the pump start-up. The
frequency converter checks the signal from the external frequency converter performs coasting if
device again and then runs normally. the input signal is lost.

Figure 3.115 Flow Confirmation

254 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3.25.6 29-6* Flow Meter • Using an action of the smart logic controller.
Reading the data
VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202 can measure the flow in the The measured data is available via readout parameters:
system. Irrigation applications is the most common use
case for parameters in this parameter group. The
• Parameter 29-65 Totalized Volume.
3 3
functionality allows to: • Parameter 29-66 Actual Volume.
• Measure the flow in the system. • Parameter 29-69 Flow.
• Calculate the water volume pumped for a period To show the readout parameters on the LCP, configure the
of time. display lines. Comparator operands can use the data from
• React on flow conditions (for example, low flow readout parameters as conditions for SLC, and as triggers
rate). for actions. The measured flow can also be used as input
for the feedback.
• Control the system using the pumped water
volume calculated by the frequency converter (for NOTICE!
example, stop pumping when a certain amount This software feature has not been designed as being
of water is pumped, cyclic pumping of water part of a calibrated measurement system. The overall
volumes). accuracy also depends on external factors such as flow
• Utilize the output signal of an external flow meter conditions and used flow meter. See the design guide for
that is connected to an input of the frequency details about analog and digital inputs of the frequency
converter. converter.

Inputs and supported signal types

Examples
The flow meter feature can use and scale the output
signals of commonly used flow meters. The feature • A sequence of SLC is triggered (or stopped) after
supports the following signal types: a specific amount of water is pumped.
• Current: 0/4–20 mA. • The frequency converter performs 1 or more
actions and resets the volume counters within a
• Voltage: 0–10 V.
sequence of SLC.
• Pulse signal (for example: paddle wheel flow
meters). • An alert shows up after a specific amount of
water is pumped.
Configure the scaling of the flow meter signal received as
input via the available parameters for the input configu- 29-60 Flow Meter Monitor
ration (parameters in parameter group 6-** Analog In/Out, Enable the flow meter monitor.
or 5-5* Pulse Input). The flow meter feature also supports Option: Function:
inputs of hardware options. [0] * Disabled
Volume counters [1] Enabled
The flow meter feature uses 2 different counters for storing [2] Enabled While Running Enable the monitor only when the
the calculated volume of pumped water: connected pump is running.

• Parameter 29-66 Actual Volume: See the volume of

water pumped since the last counter reset. 29-61 Flow Meter Source
Select the source for the flow meter signal. Available options
• Parameter 29-65 Totalized Volume: See the volume
depend on the hardware configuration.
of water pumped since the last counter reset. Use
this parameter for the total volume of water Option: Function:
pumped. [0] * Analog Input 53
[1] Analog Input 54
The 2 counters can have different units. Use
parameter 29-66 Actual Volume for shorter periods of time. [2] Analog Input X30/11
[3] Analog Input X30/12
Each parameter can be reset individually in 1 of the
[4] Analog Input X42/1
following ways:
[5] Analog Input X42/3
• Using parameter 29-67 Reset Totalized Volume or [6] Analog Input X42/5
parameter 29-68 Reset Actual Volume. [7] Analog Input X48/2
• Using a digital input. [8] Pulse Input 29
[9] Pulse Input 33

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 255

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

29-61 Flow Meter Source 29-65 Totalized Volume

Select the source for the flow meter signal. Available options Shows the total volume of pumped water.
depend on the hardware configuration. Range: Function:

3 3 Option:
[10] Bus Feedback 1
Function: 0 TotalizedVolumeUnit* [0 - 2147483647 Totalized-
VolumeUnit]
[11] Bus Feedback 2
29-66 Actual Volume
[12] Bus Feedback 3
Shows the volume of pumped water for a period of time.
29-62 Flow Meter Unit Range: Function:
Select the unit for the flow meter output. 0.00 ActualVolumeUnit* [0.00 - 21474836.47 Actual-
Option: Function: VolumeUnit]
[0] * l/s
29-67 Reset Totalized Volume
[1] l/min
Set parameter 29-65 Totalized Volume to 0.
[2] l/h
[3] m^3/s Option: Function:
[4] m^3/min [0] * Do not reset
[5] m^3/h [1] Do reset
[6] gal/s
29-68 Reset Actual Volume
[7] gal/min
Set parameter 29-66 Actual Volume to 0.
[8] gal/h
[9] in^3/s Option: Function:
[10] in^3/min [0] * Do not reset
[11] in^3/h [1] Do reset
[12] ft^3/s
29-69 Flow
[13] ft^3/min
Shows the actual flow rate.
[14] ft^3/h
Range: Function:
29-63 Totalized Volume Unit 0 FlowMeterUnit* [0 - 2147483647 FlowMeterUnit]
Select the unit for parameter 29-65 Totalized Volume.
Option: Function:
[0] * Disabled
[1] l
[2] m^3
[3] gal
[4] in^3
[5] ft^3
[6] acre-in
[7] acre-ft

29-64 Actual Volume Unit

Select the unit for parameter 29-66 Actual Volume.
Option: Function:
[0] * Disabled
[1] l
[2] m^3
[3] gal
[4] in^3
[5] ft^3
[6] acre-in
[7] acre-ft

256 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3.26 Parameters 30-** Special Features 3.26.3 30-9* Wifi LCP

3.26.1 30-2* Adv. Start Adjust Parameters for configuring the wireless LCP 103.

30-22 Locked Rotor Detection

30-90 SSID
Range: Function:
3 3
Turn the locked rotor detection on or off. Available only for PM
Size [1 - Enter the wireless network name (SSID). The
motors in VVC+.
related* 32 ] default value is: Danfoss_<Serial number of
Option: Function: the frequency converter>. The serial number
[0] Off is in parameter 15-51 Adj Freq Dr Serial No..
[1] On Protects the motor from the locked-rotor condition. The
control algorithm detects a possible locked-rotor 30-91 Channel
condition in the motor and trips the frequency Range: Function:
converter to protect the motor.
5* [1 - Enter the wireless channel number. The default
11 ] channel number is 5. Change the channel number,
30-23 Locked Rotor Detection Time [s]
if there is an interference from other wireless
Range: Function: networks. Recommended channels:
Size related* [0.05 - 1 s] Enter the time period for detecting USA territory: 1, 6, 11.
the locked-rotor condition. A low Europe: 1, 7, 13.
parameter value provides faster
detection. 30-92 Password
Range: Function:
3.26.2 30-8* Compatibility Size related* [8 - 48 ] Enter the wireless network password.
Password length: 8–48 characters.

30-81 Brake Resistor (ohm)

30-97 Wifi Timeout Action
Range: Function:
Select which action to execute if a local reference (hand-on
50. [5. - Set the brake resistor value in Ω with 2
mode) or a remote reference (auto-on mode) is set via the
Ohm* 32000.0 decimals. This value is used for
wireless connection and the connection is lost.
Ohm] monitoring the power to the brake
resistor in parameter 2-13 Brake Power
Option: Function:
Monitoring. [0] * Do Nothing The frequency converter does
not do any extra actions.

[1] Stop Motor The frequency converter

stops the motor (if the motor
was started via a wireless
connection).

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 257

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

3.27 Parameters 31-** Bypass Option

Parameter group for the configuration of the electronically 31-11 Bypass Running Hours
controlled bypass option board, VLT® Bypass Option MCO Range: Function:
3 3 104.
0 h* [0 - Views the number of hours in which the
31-00 Bypass Mode 2147483647 h] motor has run in bypass mode. The
Option: Function: counter can be reset in
parameter 15-07 Reset Running Hours
[0] * Drive Select the operating mode of the bypass:
Counter. The value is saved, when the
The frequency converter operates the motor.
frequency converter is turned off.
[1] Bypass The motor can be run at full speed in bypass
mode. 31-19 Remote Bypass Activation
Option: Function:
31-01 Bypass Start Time Delay
[0] * Disabled
Range: Function: [1] Enabled
30 s* [0 - 60 s] Set the time delay within the time when the
bypass receives a run command and the time
when it starts the motor at full speed. A
countdown timer shows the time left.

31-02 Bypass Trip Time Delay

Range: Function:
0 s* [0 - 300 Set the time delay within the time that the
s] frequency converter experiences an alarm that
stops it and the time when the motor is
automatically switched to bypass control. If the
time delay is set to 0, a frequency converter
alarm does not automatically switch the motor
to bypass control.

31-03 Test Mode Activation

Option: Function:
[0] * Disabled Test mode is disabled.

[1] Enabled The motor runs in bypass, while the frequency

converter can be tested in an open circuit. In this
mode, the LCP does not control start/stop of the
bypass.

31-10 Bypass Status Word

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535 ] Views the status of the bypass as a
hexadecimal value.

258 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

3.28 Parameters 35-** Sensor Input Option 35-06 Temperature Sensor Alarm Function
Select the alarm function:
3.28.1 35-0* Temp. Input Mode (MCB 114)
Option: Function:

35-00 Term. X48/4 Temperature Unit

[0]
[2]
Off
Stop
3 3
Select the unit to be used with temperature input X48/4 settings
[5] * Stop and trip
and readouts:
[27] Forced stop and trip
Option: Function:
[60] * °C
3.28.2 35-1* Temp. Input X48/4 (MCB 114)
[160] °F

35-01 Term. X48/4 Input Type 35-14 Term. X48/4 Filter Time Constant
View the temperature sensor type detected at input X48/4: Range: Function:
Option: Function: 0.005 s* [0.005 - 10 Enter the filter time constant. This is a
[0] * Not Connected s] first-order digital low-pass filter time
constant for suppressing electrical noise
[1] PT100 2-wire
in terminal X48/4. A high time constant
[3] PT1000 2-wire
value improves dampening, but also
[5] PT100 3-wire
increases the time delay through the
[7] PT1000 3-wire
filter.
35-02 Term. X48/7 Temperature Unit
35-15 Term. X48/4 Temp. Monitor
Select the unit to be used with temperature input X48/7 settings
and readouts: This parameter gives the possibility of enabling or disabling the
temperature monitor for terminal X48/4. The temperature limits
Option: Function:
can be set in parameter 35-16 Term. X48/4 Low Temp. Limit and
[60] * °C
parameter 35-17 Term. X48/4 High Temp. Limit.
[160] °F
Option: Function:
35-03 Term. X48/7 Input Type [0] * Disabled
View the temperature sensor type detected at input X48/7: [1] Enabled

Option: Function: 35-16 Term. X48/4 Low Temp. Limit

[0] * Not Connected
Enter the minimum temperature reading that is expected for
[1] PT100 2-wire normal operation of the temperature sensor at terminal X48/4.
[3] PT1000 2-wire
Range: Function:
[5] PT100 3-wire
Size related* [ -50 - par. 35-17 ]
[7] PT1000 3-wire
35-17 Term. X48/4 High Temp. Limit
35-04 Term. X48/10 Temperature Unit
Enter the maximum temperature reading that is expected for
Select the unit to be used with temperature input X48/10
normal operation of the temperature sensor at terminal X48/4.
settings and readouts:
Range: Function:
Option: Function:
Size related* [ par. 35-16 - 204 ]
[60] * °C
[160] °F
3.28.3 35-2* Temp. Input X48/7 (MCB 114)
35-05 Term. X48/10 Input Type
View the temperature sensor type detected at input X48/10: 35-24 Term. X48/7 Filter Time Constant
Option: Function: Range: Function:
[0] * Not Connected 0.005 s* [0.005 - 10 Enter the filter time constant. This is a
[1] PT100 2-wire s] first-order digital low-pass filter time
[3] PT1000 2-wire constant for suppressing electrical noise
[5] PT100 3-wire in terminal X48/7. A high time constant
[7] PT1000 3-wire value improves dampening, but also

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 259

 Parameter Description VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

35-24 Term. X48/7 Filter Time Constant 35-36 Term. X48/10 Low Temp. Limit
Range: Function: Enter the minimum temperature reading that is expected for
increases the time delay through the normal operation of the temperature sensor at terminal X48/10.

3 3 filter. Range:
Size related* [ -50 - par. 35-37 ]
Function:

35-25 Term. X48/7 Temp. Monitor

This parameter gives the possibility of enabling or disabling the 35-37 Term. X48/10 High Temp. Limit
temperature monitor for terminal X48/7. The temperature limits Enter the maximum temperature reading that is expected for
can be set in parameter 35-26 Term. X48/7 Low Temp. Limit and normal operation of the temperature sensor at terminal X48/10.
parameter 35-27 Term. X48/7 High Temp. Limit. Range: Function:
Option: Function: Size related* [ par. 35-36 - 204 ]
[0] * Disabled
[1] Enabled 3.28.5 35-4* Analog Input X48/2 (MCB 114)
35-26 Term. X48/7 Low Temp. Limit
35-42 Term. X48/2 Low Current
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
Size related* [ -50 - par. Enter the minimum temperature
35-27 ] reading that is expected for 4 mA* [ 0 - par. Enter the current (mA) that corresponds to
normal operation of the 35-43 mA] the low reference value, set in
temperature sensor at terminal parameter 35-44 Term. X48/2 Low Ref./Feedb.
X48/7. Value. Set the value at >2 mA to activate the
live-zero timeout function in
35-27 Term. X48/7 High Temp. Limit parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function.

Range: Function:
35-43 Term. X48/2 High Current
Size related* [ par. 35-26 - Enter the maximum temperature
Range: Function:
204 ] reading that is expected for
normal operation of the 20 mA* [ par. 35-42 - Enter the current (mA) that corresponds
temperature sensor at terminal 20 mA] to the high reference value (set in
X48/7. parameter 35-45 Term. X48/2 High Ref./
Feedb. Value).

3.28.4 35-3* Temp. Input X48/10 (MCB 114) 35-44 Term. X48/2 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Range: Function:
35-34 Term. X48/10 Filter Time Constant 0 ReferenceFeed- [-999999.999 - Enter the reference or
Range: Function: backUnit* 999999.999 feedback value (in RPM,
0.005 s* [0.005 - 10 Enter the filter time constant. This is a ReferenceFeed- Hz, bar, and so on) that
s] first-order digital low-pass filter time backUnit] corresponds to the voltage
constant for suppressing electrical noise or current set in
in terminal X48/10. A high time constant parameter 35-42 Term.
value improves dampening, but also X48/2 Low Current.
increases the time delay through the
filter. 35-45 Term. X48/2 High Ref./Feedb. Value
Range: Function:
35-35 Term. X48/10 Temp. Monitor 100 Reference- [-999999.999 - Enter the reference or
This parameter gives the possibility of enabling or disabling the FeedbackUnit* 999999.999 feedback value (in RPM,
temperature monitor for terminal X48/10. The temperature limits ReferenceFeed- Hz, bar, and so on) that
can be set in parameter 35-36 Term. X48/10 Low Temp. Limit/ backUnit] corresponds to the voltage
parameter 35-37 Term. X48/10 High Temp. Limit. or current set in
Option: Function: parameter 35-43 Term.
X48/2 High Current.
[0] * Disabled
[1] Enabled

260 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Description Programming Guide

35-46 Term. X48/2 Filter Time Constant

Range: Function:
0.005 s* [0.005 - 10 Enter the filter time constant. This is a
s] first-order digital low-pass filter time
constant for suppressing electrical noise 3 3
in terminal X48/2. A high time constant
value improves dampening, but also
increases the time delay through the
filter.

35-47 Term. X48/2 Live Zero

This parameter makes it possible to enable the live zero
monitoring.
Option: Function:
[0] Disabled
[1] * Enabled

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 261

 Parameter Lists VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

4 Parameter Lists

4.1 Parameter Options

4.1.1 Default Settings
4 4 Changes during operation
TRUE means that the parameter can be changed while the frequency converter is in operation. FALSE means that the
frequency converter must be stopped before a change can be made.
4-set-up
All set-ups: The parameter can be set individually in each of the 4 set-ups, that is 1 single parameter can have 4 different
data values.
1 set-up: Data value is the same in all set-ups.
N/A
No default value available.
Conversion index
This number refers to a conversion figure used when writing or reading via a frequency converter.

Conv. 100 75 74 70 67 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6
index
Conv. 1 3600000 3600 60 1/60 1000000 100000 10000 1000 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
factor

Table 4.1 Conversion Index

Data type Description Type

2 Integer 8 Int8
3 Integer 16 Int16
4 Integer 32 Int32
5 Unsigned 8 Uint8
6 Unsigned 16 Uint16
7 Unsigned 32 Uint32
9 Visible String VisStr
33 Normalized value 2 bytes N2
35 Bit sequence of 16 boolean variables V2
54 Time difference w/o date TimD

Table 4.2 Conversion Index Description

262 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

4.1.2 0-** Operation/Display

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
0-0* Basic Settings
0-01 Language [0] English 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8

4 4
0-02 Motor Speed Unit [0] RPM 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-03 Regional Settings [0] International 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-04 Operating State at Power-up [0] Resume All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
[0] As Motor Speed
0-05 Local Mode Unit Unit 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-1* Set-up Operations
0-10 Active Set-up [1] Set-up 1 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-11 Programming Set-up [9] Active Set-up All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-12 This Set-up Linked to [0] Not linked All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
0-14 Readout: Prog. Set-ups/Channel 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
0-2* LCP Display
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 1601 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small 1662 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small 1614 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-23 Display Line 2 Large 1613 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-24 Display Line 3 Large 1652 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-25 My Personal Menu ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
0-3* LCP Custom Readout
0-30 Custom Readout Unit [1] % All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-31 Custom Readout Min Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
100 CustomRea-
0-32 Custom Readout Max Value doutUnit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
0-37 Display Text 1 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[25]
0-38 Display Text 2 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[25]
0-39 Display Text 3 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[25]
0-4* LCP Keypad
0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-41 [Off] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-44 [Off/Reset] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-45 [Drive Bypass] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-5* Copy/Save
0-50 LCP Copy [0] No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-51 Set-up Copy [0] No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-6* Password
0-60 Main Menu Password 100 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int16
0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-65 Personal Menu Password 200 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
Access to Personal Menu w/o
0-66 Password [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-67 Bus Password Access 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
0-7* Clock Settings
0-70 Date and Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 TimeOfDay

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 263

 Parameter Lists VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
0-71 Date Format ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-72 Time Format ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-74 DST/Summertime [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-76 DST/Summertime Start ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 TimeOfDay
0-77 DST/Summertime End ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 TimeOfDay
4 4 0-79 Clock Fault ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-81 Working Days ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-82 Additional Working Days ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 TimeOfDay
0-83 Additional Non-Working Days ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 TimeOfDay
0-89 Date and Time Readout 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 VisStr[25]

264 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

4.1.3 1-** Load and Motor

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
1-0* General Settings
1-00 Configuration Mode ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

4 4
1-01 Motor Control Principle [1] VVC+ All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
[3] Auto Energy
1-03 Torque Characteristics Optim. VT All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-04 Overload Mode [1] Normal torque All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-06 Clockwise Direction [0] Normal All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-1* Motor Selection
1-10 Motor Construction [0] Asynchron All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-1* VVC+ PM/SYN RM
1-14 Damping Gain ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-15 Low Speed Filter Time Const. ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
1-16 High Speed Filter Time Const. ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
1-17 Voltage filter time const. ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
1-2* Motor Data
1-20 Motor Power [kW] ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 1 Uint32
1-21 Motor Power [HP] ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
1-22 Motor Voltage ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-23 Motor Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-24 Motor Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
1-25 Motor Nominal Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 67 Uint16
1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint32
1-28 Motor Rotation Check [0] Off All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) [0] Off All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-3* Adv. Motor Data
1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-35 Main Reactance (Xh) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint32
1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -6 Int32
1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -6 Int32
1-39 Motor Poles ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-44 d-axis Inductance Sat. (LdSat) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -6 Int32
1-45 q-axis Inductance Sat. (LqSat) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -6 Int32
1-46 Position Detection Gain 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
1-47 Torque Calibration [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-48 Inductance Sat. Point ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
1-5* Load Indep. Setting
1-50 Motor magnetization at Zero Speed 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
Min Speed Normal Magnetizing
1-51 [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
1-52 Min Speed Normal Magnetizing [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-55 V/f Characteristic - V ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-56 V/f Characteristic - f ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 265

 Parameter Lists VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
1-58 Flying Start Test Pulses Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-59 Flying Start Test Pulses Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-6* Load Depen. Setting
1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-61 High Speed Load Compensation 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
4 4 1-62 Slip Compensation 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
1-64 Resonance Damping 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
1-65 Resonance Damping Time Constant 5 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
1-7* Start Adjustments
1-70 PM Start Mode ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-71 Start Delay 00 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-72 Start Function ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-73 Flying Start ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-77 Compressor Start Max Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
1-78 Compressor Start Max Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-79 Pump Start Max Time to Trip 0s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-8* Stop Adjustments
1-80 Function at Stop [0] Coast All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Min Speed for Function at Stop
1-81 [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
1-82 Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
1-87 Trip Speed Low [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-9* Motor Temperature
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-91 Motor External Fan [0] No All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-93 Thermistor Source [0] None All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-94 ATEX ETR cur.lim. speed reduction 0% 2 set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-98 ATEX ETR interpol. points freq. ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -1 Uint16
1-99 ATEX ETR interpol points current ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

266 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

4.1.4 2-** Brakes

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
2-0* DC-Brake
2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current 50% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8

4 4
2-01 DC Brake Current 50% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-02 DC Braking Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-06 Parking Current 50% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-07 Parking Time 3s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-1* Brake Energy Funct.
2-10 Brake Function ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
2-13 Brake Power Monitoring [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-15 Brake Check [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-16 AC brake Max. Current 100% All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint32
2-17 Over-voltage Control [2] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 267

 Parameter Lists VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

4.1.5 3-** Reference/Ramps

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
3-0* Reference Limits
3-02 Minimum Reference ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32

4 4
3-03 Maximum Reference ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
3-04 Reference Function [0] Sum All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-1* References
3-10 Preset Reference 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
3-11 Jog Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
[0] Linked to Hand/
3-13 Reference Site Auto All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-14 Preset Relative Reference 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
3-15 Reference 1 Source [1] Analog Input 53 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-16 Reference 2 Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-17 Reference 3 Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-19 Jog Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
3-4* Ramp 1
3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-5* Ramp 2
3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-8* Other Ramps
3-80 Jog Ramp Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-84 Initial Ramp Time 0s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
3-85 Check Valve Ramp Time 0s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
3-86 Check Valve Ramp End Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
3-87 Check Valve Ramp End Speed [HZ] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
3-88 Final Ramp Time 0s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
3-9* Digital Pot.Meter
3-90 Step Size 0.10% All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
3-91 Ramp Time 1s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-92 Power Restore [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-93 Maximum Limit 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
3-94 Minimum Limit 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
3-95 Ramp Delay ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 TimD

268 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

4.1.6 4-** Limits/Warnings

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
4-1* Motor Limits
4-10 Motor Speed Direction [0] Clockwise All set-ups FALSE - Uint8

4 4
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode 100% All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-18 Current Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint32
4-19 Max Output Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
4-5* Adj. Warnings
4-50 Warning Current Low 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
4-51 Warning Current High ImaxVLT (P1637) All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
4-52 Warning Speed Low 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
outputSpeed-
4-53 Warning Speed High HighLimit (P413) All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-54 Warning Reference Low -999999.999 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-55 Warning Reference High 999999.999 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
-999999.999
ReferenceFeed-
4-56 Warning Feedback Low backUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
999999.999
ReferenceFeed-
4-57 Warning Feedback High backUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function [2] Trip 1000 ms All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-6* Speed Bypass
4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-62 Bypass Speed To [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-64 Semi-Auto Bypass Set-up [0] Off All set-ups FALSE - Uint8

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 269

 Parameter Lists VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

4.1.7 5-** Digital In/Out

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
5-0* Digital I/O mode
[0] PNP - Active at
5-00 Digital I/O Mode 24 V All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
4 4 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode [0] Input All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode [0] Input All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-1* Digital Inputs
5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-11 Terminal 19 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-16 Terminal X30/2 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-17 Terminal X30/3 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-18 Terminal X30/4 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-19 Terminal 37 Digital Input [1] Safe Stop Alarm 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
5-20 Terminal X46/1 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-21 Terminal X46/3 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-22 Terminal X46/5 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-23 Terminal X46/7 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-24 Terminal X46/9 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-25 Terminal X46/11 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-26 Terminal X46/13 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-3* Digital Outputs
5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-31 Terminal 29 Digital Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101) [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101) [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-4* Relays
5-40 Function Relay ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-41 On Delay, Relay 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-42 Off Delay, Relay 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-5* Pulse Input
5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-51 Term. 29 High Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29 100 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16
5-55 Term. 33 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-56 Term. 33 High Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-59 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33 100 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16
5-6* Pulse Output
5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-62 Pulse Output Max Freq #27 5000 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

270 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
5-65 Pulse Output Max Freq #29 5000 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Variable [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-68 Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/6 5000 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-8* I/O Options
5-80 AHF Cap Reconnect Delay 25 s 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
5-9* Bus Controlled 4 4
5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-93 Pulse Out #27 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
5-94 Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
5-95 Pulse Out #29 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
5-96 Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
5-97 Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
5-98 Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 271

 Parameter Lists VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

4.1.8 6-** Analog In/Out

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
6-0* Analog I/O Mode
6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8

4 4
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-1* Analog Input 53
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current 4 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-13 Terminal 53 High Current 20 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-17 Terminal 53 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-2* Analog Input 54
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current 4 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-23 Terminal 54 High Current 20 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-27 Terminal 54 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-3* Analog Input X30/11
6-30 Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-31 Terminal X30/11 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-34 Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-35 Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-36 Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-37 Term. X30/11 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-4* Analog Input X30/12
6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-41 Terminal X30/12 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-44 Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-45 Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-46 Term. X30/12 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-47 Term. X30/12 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-5* Analog Output 42
[100] Output freq.
6-50 Terminal 42 Output 0-100 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale 100% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-53 Terminal 42 Output Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
6-54 Terminal 42 Output Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
6-55 Terminal 42 Output Filter [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
6-6* Analog Output X30/8
6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-61 Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale 100% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16

272 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
6-63 Terminal X30/8 Output Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout
6-64 Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
6-7* Analog Output X45/1
6-70 Terminal X45/1 Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-71 Terminal X45/1 Min. Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16 4 4
6-72 Terminal X45/1 Max. Scale 100% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-73 Terminal X45/1 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
Terminal X45/1 Output Timeout
6-74 Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
6-8* Analog Output X45/3
6-80 Terminal X45/3 Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-81 Terminal X45/3 Min. Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-82 Terminal X45/3 Max. Scale 100% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-83 Terminal X45/3 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
Terminal X45/3 Output Timeout
6-84 Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 273

 Parameter Lists VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

4.1.9 8-** Comm. and Options

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
8-0* General Settings
[0] Digital and
8-01 Control Site ctrl.word All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4 4 8-02 Control Source ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-03 Control Timeout Time ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -1 Uint32
8-04 Control Timeout Function [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-05 End-of-Timeout Function [1] Resume set-up 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-06 Reset Control Timeout [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-07 Diagnosis Trigger [0] Disable 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-08 Readout Filtering ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-1* Control Settings
8-10 Control Profile [0] FC profile All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-13 Configurable Status Word STW [1] Profile Default All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-14 Configurable Control Word CTW [1] Profile default 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Configurable Alarm and
8-17 Warningword [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
8-3* FC Port Settings
8-30 Protocol [0] FC 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-31 Address ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
8-32 Baud Rate ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-33 Parity/Stop Bits ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-35 Minimum Response Delay 10 ms 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
8-36 Max Response Delay ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
8-37 Maximum Inter-Char Delay ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -5 Uint16
8-4* FC MC protocol set
[1] Standard
8-40 Telegram Selection telegram 1 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-42 PCD Write Configuration ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
8-43 PCD Read Configuration ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
8-5* Digital/Bus
8-50 Coasting Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-51 Quick Stop Select [4] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-52 DC Brake Select ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-53 Start Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-54 Reversing Select [0] Digital input All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-55 Set-up Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-56 Preset Reference Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-7* BACnet
8-70 BACnet Device Instance 1 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
8-72 MS/TP Max Masters 127 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
8-73 MS/TP Max Info Frames 1 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
[0] Send at power-
8-74 "I-Am" Service up 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-75 Initialisation Password ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[20]
8-8* FC Port Diagnostics
8-80 Bus Message Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-81 Bus Error Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32

274 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
8-82 Slave Message Rcvd 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-83 Slave Error Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-9* Bus Jog/Feedback
8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed 100 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
8-94 Bus Feedback 1 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 N2 4 4
8-95 Bus Feedback 2 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 N2
8-96 Bus Feedback 3 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 N2

4.1.10 9-** PROFIdrive

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
9-00 Setpoint 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-07 Actual Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-15 PCD Write Configuration ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint16
9-16 PCD Read Configuration ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
9-18 Node Address 126 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
9-22 Telegram Selection [100] None 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
9-23 Parameters for Signals 0 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
9-27 Parameter Edit [1] Enabled 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint16
[1] Enable cyclic
9-28 Process Control master 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
9-31 Safe Address 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
9-44 Fault Message Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-45 Fault Code 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-47 Fault Number 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-52 Fault Situation Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-53 PROFIBUS Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
[255] No baudrate
9-63 Actual Baud Rate found All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
9-64 Device Identification 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-65 Profile Number 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 OctStr[2]
9-67 Control Word 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
9-68 Status Word 1 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
9-70 Programming Set-up [9] Active Set-up All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
9-71 PROFIBUS Save Data Values [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
9-72 ProfibusDriveReset [0] No action 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
9-75 DO Identification 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-80 Defined Parameters (1) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-81 Defined Parameters (2) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-82 Defined Parameters (3) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-83 Defined Parameters (4) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-84 Defined Parameters (5) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-85 Defined Parameters (6) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-90 Changed Parameters (1) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-91 Changed Parameters (2) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-92 Changed Parameters (3) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-93 Changed Parameters (4) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 275

 Parameter Lists VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
9-94 Changed Parameters (5) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-99 PROFIBUS Revision Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

4 4

276 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

4.1.11 10-** CAN Fieldbus

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
10-0* Common Settings
10-00 CAN Protocol [1] DeviceNet 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8

4 4
10-01 Baud Rate Select ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-02 MAC ID ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-05 Readout Transmit Error Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-06 Readout Receive Error Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-07 Readout Bus Off Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-1* DeviceNet
10-10 Process Data Type Selection ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-11 Process Data Config Write ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
10-12 Process Data Config Read ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
10-13 Warning Parameter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
10-14 Net Reference [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-15 Net Control [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-2* COS Filters
10-20 COS Filter 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
10-21 COS Filter 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
10-22 COS Filter 3 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
10-23 COS Filter 4 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
10-3* Parameter Access
10-30 Array Index 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-31 Store Data Values [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-32 DeviceNet Revision ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
10-33 Store Always [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
10-34 DeviceNet Product Code ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
10-39 DeviceNet F Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 277

 Parameter Lists VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

4.1.12 13-** Smart Logic

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
13-0* SLC Settings
13-00 SL Controller Mode ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

4 4
13-01 Start Event ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-02 Stop Event ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
[0] Do not reset
13-03 Reset SLC SLC All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-1* Comparators
13-10 Comparator Operand ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-11 Comparator Operator ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-12 Comparator Value ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
13-1* RS Flip Flops
13-15 RS-FF Operand S ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-16 RS-FF Operand R ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-2* Timers
13-20 SL Controller Timer ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -3 TimD
13-4* Logic Rules
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2 ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3 ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-5* States
13-51 SL Controller Event ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-52 SL Controller Action ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-9* User Defined Alerts
13-90 Alert Trigger [0] False 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-91 Alert Action [0] Info 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-92 Alert Text ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 VisStr[20]
13-9* User Defined Readouts
13-97 Alert Alarm Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
13-98 Alert Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
13-99 Alert Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32

278 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

4.1.13 14-** Special Functions

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
14-0* Inverter Switching
14-00 Switching Pattern ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

4 4
14-01 Switching Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-03 Overmodulation [1] On All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-04 PWM Random [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-1* Mains On/Off
14-10 Mains Failure [0] No function All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-12 Function at Mains Imbalance [3] Derate All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-16 Kin. Backup Gain 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
14-2* Reset Functions
[10] Automatic
14-20 Reset Mode reset x 10 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-21 Automatic Restart Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
[0] Normal
14-22 Operation Mode operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-23 Typecode Setting ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint16
14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-28 Production Settings [0] No action All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-29 Service Code 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
14-3* Current Limit Ctrl.
14-30 Current Lim Ctrl, Proportional Gain 100% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
14-31 Current Lim Ctrl, Integration Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16
14-32 Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint16
14-4* Energy Optimizing
14-40 VT Level 66% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetization ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-43 Motor Cosphi ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
14-5* Environment
14-50 RFI Filter [1] On 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
14-51 DC Link Compensation ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-52 Fan Control [0] Auto All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-53 Fan Monitor [1] Warning All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-55 Output Filter [0] No Filter 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
14-56 Capacitance Output Filter 2 uF 1 set-up FALSE -7 Uint16
14-57 Inductance Output Filter 7 mH 1 set-up FALSE -6 Uint16
14-58 Voltage Gain Filter 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-59 Actual Number of Inverter Units ExpressionLimit 1 set-up FALSE 0 Uint8
14-6* Auto Derate
14-60 Function at Over Temperature [1] Derate All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-61 Function at Inverter Overload [1] Derate All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-62 Inv. Overload Derate Current 95% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-8* Options
14-80 Option Supplied by External 24VDC [0] No 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-9* Fault Settings

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 279

 Parameter Lists VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
14-90 Fault Level ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8

4 4

280 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

4.1.14 15-** Drive Information

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
15-0* Operating Data
15-00 Operating hours 0h All set-ups FALSE 74 Uint32

4 4
15-01 Running Hours 0h All set-ups FALSE 74 Uint32
15-02 kWh Counter 0 kWh All set-ups FALSE 75 Uint32
15-03 Power Up's 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-04 Over Temp's 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-05 Over Volt's 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-06 Reset kWh Counter [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-08 Number of Starts 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-1* Data Log Settings
15-10 Logging Source 0 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
15-11 Logging Interval ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -3 TimD
15-12 Trigger Event [0] False 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
15-13 Logging Mode [0] Log always 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-14 Samples Before Trigger 50 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
15-2* Historic Log
15-20 Historic Log: Event 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
15-21 Historic Log: Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-22 Historic Log: Time 0 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint32
15-23 Historic log: Date and Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 TimeOfDay
15-3* Alarm Log
15-30 Alarm Log: Error Code 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-31 Alarm Log: Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
15-32 Alarm Log: Time 0s All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-33 Alarm Log: Date and Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 TimeOfDay
15-34 Alarm Log: Setpoint 0 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
15-35 Alarm Log: Feedback 0 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
15-36 Alarm Log: Current Demand 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
15-37 Alarm Log: Process Ctrl Unit [0] All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
15-4* Drive Identification
15-40 FC Type 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[6]
15-41 Power Section 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-42 Voltage 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-43 Software Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[5]
15-44 Ordered Typecode String 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
15-45 Actual Typecode String 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
15-46 Frequency Converter Ordering No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-47 Power Card Ordering No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-48 LCP Id No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-49 SW ID Control Card 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-50 SW ID Power Card 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-51 Frequency Converter Serial Number 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[10]
15-53 Power Card Serial Number 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[19]
15-54 Config File Name ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[16]
15-58 SmartStart Filename ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 VisStr[20]
15-59 Filename ExpressionLimit 1 set-up FALSE 0 VisStr[16]

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 281

 Parameter Lists VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
15-6* Option Ident
15-60 Option Mounted 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-61 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-62 Option Ordering No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-63 Option Serial No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[18]
4 4 15-70 Option in Slot A 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-71 Slot A Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-72 Option in Slot B 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-73 Slot B Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-74 Option in Slot C0/E0 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-75 Slot C0/E0 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-76 Option in Slot C1/E1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-77 Slot C1/E1 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-8* Operating Data II
15-80 Fan Running Hours 0h All set-ups TRUE 74 Uint32
15-81 Preset Fan Running Hours 0h All set-ups TRUE 74 Uint32
15-9* Parameter Info
15-92 Defined Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-93 Modified Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-98 Drive Identification 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
15-99 Parameter Metadata 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16

282 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

4.1.15 16-** Data Readouts

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
16-0* General Status
16-00 Control Word 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2

4 4
0 ReferenceFeed-
16-01 Reference [Unit] backUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
16-02 Reference [%] 0% All set-ups TRUE -1 Int16
16-03 Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
16-05 Main Actual Value [%] 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
0 CustomRea-
16-09 Custom Readout doutUnit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
16-1* Motor Status
16-10 Power [kW] 0 kW All set-ups TRUE 1 Int32
16-11 Power [hp] 0 hp All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
16-12 Motor Voltage 0V All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
16-13 Frequency 0 Hz All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
16-14 Motor current 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
16-15 Frequency [%] 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
16-16 Torque [Nm] 0 Nm All set-ups TRUE -1 Int32
16-17 Speed [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Int32
16-18 Motor Thermal 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
16-20 Motor Angle 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
16-22 Torque [%] 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
16-23 Motor Shaft Power [kW] 0 kW All set-ups TRUE 1 Int32
16-24 Calibrated Stator Resistance 0.0000 Ohm All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
16-26 Power Filtered [kW] 0 kW All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-27 Power Filtered [hp] 0 hp All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-3* Drive Status
16-30 DC Link Voltage 0V All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
16-31 System Temp. 0 °C All set-ups TRUE 100 Int8
16-32 Brake Energy /s 0 kW All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
16-33 Brake Energy Average 0 kW All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
16-34 Heatsink Temp. 0 °C All set-ups TRUE 100 Uint8
16-35 Inverter Thermal 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
16-36 Inv. Nom. Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
16-37 Inv. Max. Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
16-38 SL Controller State 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
16-39 Control Card Temp. 0 °C All set-ups TRUE 100 Uint8
16-40 Logging Buffer Full [0] No All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
16-49 Current Fault Source 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
16-5* Ref. & Feedb.
16-50 External Reference 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Int16
16-52 Feedback[Unit] 0 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
16-53 Digi Pot Reference 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
16-54 Feedback 1 [Unit] 0 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
16-55 Feedback 2 [Unit] 0 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
16-56 Feedback 3 [Unit] 0 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
16-58 PID Output [%] 0% All set-ups TRUE -1 Int16
16-59 Adjusted Setpoint 0 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 283

 Parameter Lists VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
16-6* Inputs & Outputs
16-60 Digital Input 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting [0] Current All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
16-62 Analog Input 53 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting [0] Current All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4 4 16-64 Analog Input 54 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA] 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int16
16-66 Digital Output [bin] 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
16-67 Pulse Input #29 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-68 Pulse Input #33 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-71 Relay Output [bin] 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
16-72 Counter A 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-73 Counter B 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-75 Analog In X30/11 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
16-76 Analog In X30/12 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
16-77 Analog Out X30/8 [mA] 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int16
16-78 Analog Out X45/1 [mA] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
16-79 Analog Out X45/3 [mA] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port
16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
16-82 Fieldbus REF 1 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 N2
16-84 Comm. Option STW 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
16-85 FC Port CTW 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-86 FC Port REF 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 N2
16-89 Configurable Alarm/Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-9* Diagnosis Readouts
16-90 Alarm Word 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
16-91 Alarm Word 2 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
16-92 Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
16-93 Warning Word 2 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
16-94 Ext. Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
16-95 Ext. Status Word 2 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
16-96 Maintenance Word 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32

284 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

4.1.16 18-** Info & Readouts

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
18-0* Maintenance Log
18-00 Maintenance Log: Item 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8

4 4
18-01 Maintenance Log: Action 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
18-02 Maintenance Log: Time 0s All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
18-03 Maintenance Log: Date and Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 TimeOfDay
18-3* Analog Readouts
18-30 Analog Input X42/1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
18-31 Analog Input X42/3 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
18-32 Analog Input X42/5 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
18-33 Analog Out X42/7 [V] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
18-34 Analog Out X42/9 [V] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
18-35 Analog Out X42/11 [V] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
18-36 Analog Input X48/2 [mA] 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
18-37 Temp. Input X48/4 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
18-38 Temp. Input X48/7 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
18-39 Temp. Input X48/10 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
18-5* Ref. & Feedb.
18-50 Sensorless Readout [unit] 0 SensorlessUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
18-6* Inputs & Outputs 2
18-60 Digital Input 2 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
18-7* Rectifier Status
18-70 Mains Voltage 0V All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
18-71 Mains Frequency 0 Hz All set-ups TRUE -1 Int16
18-72 Mains Imbalance 0% All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
18-75 Rectifier DC Volt. 0V All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 285

 Parameter Lists VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

4.1.17 20-** Drive Closed Loop

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
20-0* Feedback
20-00 Feedback 1 Source [2] Analog Input 54 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

4 4
20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion [0] Linear All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-03 Feedback 2 Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-04 Feedback 2 Conversion [0] Linear All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
20-05 Feedback 2 Source Unit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-06 Feedback 3 Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-07 Feedback 3 Conversion [0] Linear All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
20-08 Feedback 3 Source Unit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-2* Feedback/Setpoint
20-20 Feedback Function [4] Maximum All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-21 Setpoint 1 0 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
20-22 Setpoint 2 0 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
20-23 Setpoint 3 0 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
20-6* Sensorless
20-60 Sensorless Unit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-69 Sensorless Information 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 VisStr[25]
20-7* PID Autotuning
20-70 Closed Loop Type [0] Auto 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-71 PID Performance [0] Normal 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-72 PID Output Change 0.10 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
-999999
20-73 Minimum Feedback Level ProcessCtrlUnit 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
999999
20-74 Maximum Feedback Level ProcessCtrlUnit 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
20-79 PID Autotuning [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-8* PID Basic Settings
20-81 PID Normal/ Inverse Control [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-82 PID Start Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
20-83 PID Start Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
20-84 On Reference Bandwidth 5% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
20-9* PID Controller
20-91 PID Anti Windup [1] On All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-93 PID Proportional Gain 2 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
20-94 PID Integral Time 8s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
20-95 PID Differentiation Time 0s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
20-96 PID Diff. Gain Limit 5 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16

286 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

4.1.18 21-** Ext. Closed Loop

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
21-0* Ext. CL Autotuning
21-00 Closed Loop Type [0] Auto 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

4 4
21-01 PID Performance [0] Normal 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-02 PID Output Change 0.10 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
21-03 Minimum Feedback Level -999999 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-04 Maximum Feedback Level 999999 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-09 PID Auto Tuning [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-1* Ext. CL 1 Ref./Fb.
21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback Unit [0] All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-11 Ext. 1 Minimum Reference 0 ExtPID1Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-12 Ext. 1 Maximum Reference 100 ExtPID1Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-13 Ext. 1 Reference Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-14 Ext. 1 Feedback Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-15 Ext. 1 Setpoint 0 ExtPID1Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-17 Ext. 1 Reference [Unit] 0 ExtPID1Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-18 Ext. 1 Feedback [Unit] 0 ExtPID1Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-19 Ext. 1 Output [%] 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
21-2* Ext. CL 1 PID
21-20 Ext. 1 Normal/Inverse Control [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-21 Ext. 1 Proportional Gain 0.50 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
21-22 Ext. 1 Integral Time 20 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
21-23 Ext. 1 Differentiation Time 0s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
21-24 Ext. 1 Dif. Gain Limit 5 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
21-3* Ext. CL 2 Ref./Fb.
21-30 Ext. 2 Ref./Feedback Unit [0] All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-31 Ext. 2 Minimum Reference 0 ExtPID2Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-32 Ext. 2 Maximum Reference 100 ExtPID2Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-33 Ext. 2 Reference Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-34 Ext. 2 Feedback Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-35 Ext. 2 Setpoint 0 ExtPID2Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-37 Ext. 2 Reference [Unit] 0 ExtPID2Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-38 Ext. 2 Feedback [Unit] 0 ExtPID2Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-39 Ext. 2 Output [%] 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
21-4* Ext. CL 2 PID
21-40 Ext. 2 Normal/Inverse Control [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-41 Ext. 2 Proportional Gain 0.50 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
21-42 Ext. 2 Integral Time 20 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
21-43 Ext. 2 Differentiation Time 0s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
21-44 Ext. 2 Dif. Gain Limit 5 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
21-5* Ext. CL 3 Ref./Fb.
21-50 Ext. 3 Ref./Feedback Unit [0] All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-51 Ext. 3 Minimum Reference 0 ExtPID3Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-52 Ext. 3 Maximum Reference 100 ExtPID3Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-53 Ext. 3 Reference Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-54 Ext. 3 Feedback Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-55 Ext. 3 Setpoint 0 ExtPID3Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-57 Ext. 3 Reference [Unit] 0 ExtPID3Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 287

 Parameter Lists VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
21-58 Ext. 3 Feedback [Unit] 0 ExtPID3Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-59 Ext. 3 Output [%] 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
21-6* Ext. CL 3 PID
21-60 Ext. 3 Normal/Inverse Control [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-61 Ext. 3 Proportional Gain 0.50 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
4 4 21-62 Ext. 3 Integral Time 20 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
21-63 Ext. 3 Differentiation Time 0s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
21-64 Ext. 3 Dif. Gain Limit 5 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16

288 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

4.1.19 22-** Appl. Functions

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
22-0* Miscellaneous
22-00 External Interlock Delay 0s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

4 4
22-01 Power Filter Time 0.50 s 2 set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
22-2* No-Flow Detection
22-20 Low Power Auto Set-up [0] Off All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
22-21 Low Power Detection [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
22-22 Low Speed Detection [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
22-23 No-Flow Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
22-24 No-Flow Delay 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-26 Dry Pump Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
22-27 Dry Pump Delay 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-28 No-Flow Low Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
22-29 No-Flow Low Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
22-3* No-Flow Power Tuning
22-30 No-Flow Power 0 kW All set-ups TRUE 1 Uint32
22-31 Power Correction Factor 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-32 Low Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
22-33 Low Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
22-34 Low Speed Power [kW] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 1 Uint32
22-35 Low Speed Power [HP] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
22-36 High Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
22-37 High Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
22-38 High Speed Power [kW] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 1 Uint32
22-39 High Speed Power [HP] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
22-4* Sleep Mode
22-40 Minimum Run Time 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-41 Minimum Sleep Time 30 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-42 Wake-up Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
22-43 Wake-up Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
22-44 Wake-up Ref./FB Difference 10% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int8
22-45 Setpoint Boost 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int8
22-46 Maximum Boost Time 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-5* End of Curve
22-50 End of Curve Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
22-51 End of Curve Delay 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-6* Broken Belt Detection
22-60 Broken Belt Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
22-61 Broken Belt Torque 10% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
22-62 Broken Belt Delay 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-7* Short Cycle Protection
22-75 Short Cycle Protection [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
start_to_start_min_
22-76 Interval between Starts on_time (P2277) All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-77 Minimum Run Time 0s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-78 Minimum Run Time Override [0] Disabled All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
22-79 Minimum Run Time Override Value 0 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
22-8* Flow Compensation

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 289

 Parameter Lists VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
22-80 Flow Compensation [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
22-81 Square-linear Curve Approximation 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
22-82 Work Point Calculation [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
22-83 Speed at No-Flow [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
22-84 Speed at No-Flow [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4 4 22-85 Speed at Design Point [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
22-86 Speed at Design Point [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
22-87 Pressure at No-Flow Speed 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
22-88 Pressure at Rated Speed 999999.999 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
22-89 Flow at Design Point 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
22-90 Flow at Rated Speed 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32

290 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

4.1.20 23-** Time-based Functions

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
23-0* Timed Actions
TimeOfDay-
23-00 ON Time ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 WoDate
23-01 ON Action [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8 4 4
TimeOfDay-
23-02 OFF Time ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 WoDate
23-03 OFF Action [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
23-04 Occurrence [0] All days 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
23-1* Maintenance
23-10 Maintenance Item [1] Motor bearings 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
23-11 Maintenance Action [1] Lubricate 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
23-12 Maintenance Time Base [0] Disabled 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
23-13 Maintenance Time Interval 1h 1 set-up TRUE 74 Uint32
23-14 Maintenance Date and Time ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 TimeOfDay
23-1* Maintenance Reset
23-15 Reset Maintenance Word [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
23-16 Maintenance Text 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[20]
23-5* Energy Log
23-50 Energy Log Resolution [5] Last 24 Hours 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
23-51 Period Start ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 TimeOfDay
23-53 Energy Log 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
23-54 Reset Energy Log [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
23-6* Trending
23-60 Trend Variable [2] Frequency [Hz] 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
23-61 Continuous Bin Data 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
23-62 Timed Bin Data 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
23-63 Timed Period Start ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 TimeOfDay
23-64 Timed Period Stop ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 TimeOfDay
23-65 Minimum Bin Value ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
23-66 Reset Continuous Bin Data [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
23-67 Reset Timed Bin Data [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
23-8* Payback Counter
23-80 Power Reference Factor 100% 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
23-81 Energy Cost 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
23-82 Investment 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
23-83 Energy Savings 0 kWh All set-ups TRUE 75 Int32
23-84 Cost Savings 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 291

 Parameter Lists VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

4.1.21 24-** Appl. Functions 2

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
24-1* Drive Bypass
24-10 Drive Bypass Function [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

4 4
24-11 Drive Bypass Delay Time 0s 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

4.1.22 25-** Cascade Controller

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
25-0* System Settings
25-00 Cascade Controller ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
25-02 Motor Start [0] Direct on Line 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
25-04 Pump Cycling ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
25-05 Fixed Lead Pump ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
25-06 Number of Pumps 2 N/A 2 set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
25-2* Bandwidth Settings
25-20 Staging Bandwidth ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
25-21 Override Bandwidth 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
casco_staging_ban
25-22 Fixed Speed Bandwidth dwidth (P2520) All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
25-23 SBW Staging Delay 15 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
25-24 SBW Destaging Delay 15 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
25-25 OBW Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
25-26 Destage At No-Flow [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
25-27 Stage Function ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
25-28 Stage Function Time 15 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
25-29 Destage Function ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
25-30 Destage Function Time 15 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
25-4* Staging Settings
25-40 Ramp Down Delay 10 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
25-41 Ramp Up Delay 2s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
25-42 Staging Threshold ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
25-43 Destaging Threshold ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
25-44 Staging Speed [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
25-45 Staging Speed [Hz] 0 Hz All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
25-46 Destaging Speed [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
25-47 Destaging Speed [Hz] 0 Hz All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
25-49 Staging Principle [0] Normal All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
25-5* Alternation Settings
25-50 Lead Pump Alternation ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
25-51 Alternation Event [0] External All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
25-52 Alternation Time Interval 24 h All set-ups TRUE 74 Uint16
25-53 Alternation Timer Value 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 VisStr[7]
TimeOfDay-
25-54 Alternation Predefined Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 WoDate
25-55 Alternate if Load < 50% [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
25-56 Staging Mode at Alternation [0] Slow All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
25-58 Run Next Pump Delay 0.1 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16

292 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
25-59 Run on Mains Delay 0.5 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
25-8* Status
25-80 Cascade Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 VisStr[25]
25-81 Pump Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 VisStr[25]
25-82 Lead Pump 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
25-83 Relay Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 VisStr[4] 4 4
25-84 Pump ON Time 0h All set-ups TRUE 74 Uint32
25-85 Relay ON Time 0h All set-ups TRUE 74 Uint32
25-86 Reset Relay Counters [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
25-9* Service
25-90 Pump Interlock [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
25-91 Manual Alternation 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8

4.1.23 26-** Analog I/O Option

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
26-0* Analog I/O Mode
26-00 Terminal X42/1 Mode [1] Voltage All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
26-01 Terminal X42/3 Mode [1] Voltage All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
26-02 Terminal X42/5 Mode [1] Voltage All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
26-1* Analog Input X42/1
26-10 Terminal X42/1 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
26-11 Terminal X42/1 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
26-14 Term. X42/1 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
26-15 Term. X42/1 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
26-16 Term. X42/1 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
26-17 Term. X42/1 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
26-2* Analog Input X42/3
26-20 Terminal X42/3 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
26-21 Terminal X42/3 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
26-24 Term. X42/3 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
26-25 Term. X42/3 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
26-26 Term. X42/3 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
26-27 Term. X42/3 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
26-3* Analog Input X42/5
26-30 Terminal X42/5 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
26-31 Terminal X42/5 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
26-34 Term. X42/5 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
26-35 Term. X42/5 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
26-36 Term. X42/5 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
26-37 Term. X42/5 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
26-4* Analog Out X42/7
26-40 Terminal X42/7 Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
26-41 Terminal X42/7 Min. Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
26-42 Terminal X42/7 Max. Scale 100% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
26-43 Terminal X42/7 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
26-44 Terminal X42/7 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
26-5* Analog Out X42/9

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 293

 Parameter Lists VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
26-50 Terminal X42/9 Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
26-51 Terminal X42/9 Min. Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
26-52 Terminal X42/9 Max. Scale 100% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
26-53 Terminal X42/9 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
26-54 Terminal X42/9 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
4 4 26-6* Analog Out X42/11
26-60 Terminal X42/11 Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
26-61 Terminal X42/11 Min. Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
26-62 Terminal X42/11 Max. Scale 100% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
26-63 Terminal X42/11 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
26-64 Terminal X42/11 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16

294 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

4.1.24 29-** Water Application Functions

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
29-0* Pipe Fill
29-00 Pipe Fill Enable [0] Disabled 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8

4 4
29-01 Pipe Fill Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
29-02 Pipe Fill Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
29-03 Pipe Fill Time 0s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
0.001
29-04 Pipe Fill Rate ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
29-05 Filled Setpoint 0 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
29-06 No-Flow Disable Timer 0s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
29-07 Filled setpoint delay 0s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
29-1* Deragging Function
29-10 Derag Cycles ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
29-11 Derag at Start/Stop [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
29-12 Deragging Run Time 0s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
29-13 Derag Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
29-14 Derag Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
29-15 Derag Off Delay 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
29-2* Derag Power Tuning
29-20 Derag Power[kW] 0 kW All set-ups TRUE 1 Uint32
29-21 Derag Power[HP] 0 hp All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
29-22 Derag Power Factor 200% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
29-23 Derag Power Delay 601 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
29-24 Low Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
29-25 Low Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
29-26 Low Speed Power [kW] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 1 Uint32
29-27 Low Speed Power [HP] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
29-28 High Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
29-29 High Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
29-30 High Speed Power [kW] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 1 Uint32
29-31 High Speed Power [HP] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
29-32 Derag On Ref Bandwidth 5% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
29-33 Power Derag Limit 3 N/A 2 set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
29-34 Consecutive Derag Interval ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
29-35 Derag at Locked Rotor [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
29-4* Pre/Post Lube
29-40 Pre/Post Lube Function [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
29-41 Pre Lube Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
29-42 Post Lube Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
29-5* Flow Confirmation
29-50 Validation Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
29-51 Verification Time 15 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
29-52 Signal Lost Verification Time 1s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
[0] Confirmation
29-53 Flow Confirmation Mode Only All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
29-6* Flow Meter
29-60 Flow Meter Monitor [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
29-61 Flow Meter Source [0] Analog Input 53 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 295

 Parameter Lists VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
29-62 Flow Meter Unit [0] l/s All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
29-63 Totalized Volume Unit [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
29-64 Actual Volume Unit [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0 TotalizedVolu-
29-65 Totalized Volume meUnit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
4 4 0.00 ActualVolu-
29-66 Actual Volume meUnit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
29-67 Reset Totalized Volume [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
29-68 Reset Actual Volume [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
29-69 Flow 0 FlowMeterUnit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32

296 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

4.1.25 30-** Special Features

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
30-2* Adv. Start Adjust
30-22 Locked Rotor Detection ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

4 4
30-23 Locked Rotor Detection Time [s] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint8
30-5* Unit Configuration
30-50 Heat Sink Fan Mode ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - uint8
30-8* Compatibility (I)
30-81 Brake Resistor (ohm) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32

4.1.26 31-** Bypass Option

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
31-00 Bypass Mode [0] Drive All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
31-01 Bypass Start Time Delay 30 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
31-02 Bypass Trip Time Delay 0s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
31-03 Test Mode Activation [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
31-10 Bypass Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
31-11 Bypass Running Hours 0h All set-ups FALSE 74 Uint32
31-19 Remote Bypass Activation [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

4.1.27 35-** Sensor Input Option

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
35-0* Temp. Input Mode
35-00 Term. X48/4 Temperature Unit [60] °C All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-01 Term. X48/4 Input Type [0] Not Connected All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-02 Term. X48/7 Temperature Unit [60] °C All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-03 Term. X48/7 Input Type [0] Not Connected All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-04 Term. X48/10 Temperature Unit [60] °C All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-05 Term. X48/10 Input Type [0] Not Connected All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-06 Temperature Sensor Alarm Function [5] Stop and trip All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-1* Temp. Input X48/4
35-14 Term. X48/4 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
35-15 Term. X48/4 Temp. Monitor [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-16 Term. X48/4 Low Temp. Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
35-17 Term. X48/4 High Temp. Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
35-2* Temp. Input X48/7
35-24 Term. X48/7 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
35-25 Term. X48/7 Temp. Monitor [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-26 Term. X48/7 Low Temp. Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
35-27 Term. X48/7 High Temp. Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
35-3* Temp. Input X48/10
35-34 Term. X48/10 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
35-35 Term. X48/10 Temp. Monitor [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-36 Term. X48/10 Low Temp. Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
35-37 Term. X48/10 High Temp. Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 297

 Parameter Lists VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Param- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conversion Type
eter # operation index
35-4* Analog Input X48/2
35-42 Term. X48/2 Low Current 4 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
35-43 Term. X48/2 High Current 20 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
35-44 Term. X48/2 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
35-45 Term. X48/2 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4 4 35-46 Term. X48/2 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
35-47 Term. X48/2 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

298 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Troubleshooting Programming Guide

5 Troubleshooting

5.1 Status Messages alarm can be reset. After being switched back on, the
frequency converter is no longer blocked and may be reset
5.1.1 Warnings/Alarm Messages as described above once the cause has been rectified.

A warning or an alarm is signaled by the relevant LED on Alarms that are not trip-locked can also be reset using the
the front of the frequency converter and indicated by a automatic reset function in parameter 14-20 Reset Mode.
code on the display.
5 5
NOTICE!
A warning remains active until its cause is no longer
Automatic wake-up is possible!
present. Under certain circumstances, operation of the
motor may still continue. Warning messages may be
If a warning and alarm are marked against a code in
critical, but are not necessarily so.
Table 5.1, this means that either a warning occurs before
an alarm, or else that it is possible to specify whether it is
An alarm trips the frequency converter. Reset alarms to
a warning or an alarm that is to be shown for a given
restart operation once their cause has been rectified.
fault.

This can be done in 3 ways

This is possible, for instance, in parameter 1-90 Motor
• By pressing [Reset]. Thermal Protection. After an alarm or trip, the motor carries
• Via a digital input with the reset function. on coasting, and the alarm and warning flash. Once the
problem has been rectified, only the alarm continues
• Via serial communication/optional fieldbus.
flashing until the frequency converter is reset.
NOTICE!
After a manual reset pressing [Reset], press [Auto On] to NOTICE!
restart the motor.
No missing motor phase detection (numbers 30–32) and
no stall detection is active when parameter 1-10 Motor
If an alarm cannot be reset, its cause may not have been Construction is set to [1] PM non-salient SPM.
rectified, or the alarm is trip-locked (see also Table 5.1).

Alarms that are trip-locked offer extra protection, meaning

that the mains supply must be switched off before the

Num Description Warning Alarm/Trip Alarm/Trip Lock Parameter

- reference
ber
1 10 volts low X – –
2 Live zero error (X) (X) – Parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout
Function
3 No motor (X) – – Parameter 1-80 Function at Stop
4 Mains phase loss (X) (X) (X) Parameter 14-12 Function at
Mains Imbalance
5 DC-link voltage high X – – –
6 DC-link voltage low X – – –
7 DC overvoltage X X – –
8 DC undervoltage X X – –
9 Inverter overloaded X X – –
10 Motor ETR overtemperature (X) (X) – Parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal
Protection

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 299

 Troubleshooting VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Num Description Warning Alarm/Trip Alarm/Trip Lock Parameter

- reference
ber
11 Motor thermistor overtemperature (X) (X) – Parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal
Protection
12 Torque limit X X – –
13 Overcurrent X X X –
14 Ground fault X X X –
15 Hardware mismatch – X X –
16 Short circuit – X X –
5 5 17 Control word timeout (X) (X) – Parameter 8-04 Control Word
Timeout Function
18 Start failed X – Parameter 1-77 Compressor Start
Max Speed [RPM] and
parameter 1-79 Pump Start Max
Time to Trip
20 Temperature input error – – – –
21 Parameter error – – – –
22 Hoist mechanical brake (X) (X) Parameter group 2-2* No-Flow
Detection
23 Internal fans X – – –
24 External fans X – – –
25 Brake resistor short-circuited X – – –
26 Brake resistor power limit (X) (X) – Parameter 2-13 Brake Power
Monitoring
27 Brake chopper short-circuited X X –
28 Brake check (X) (X) – Parameter 2-15 Brake Check
29 Heat sink temp X X X
30 Motor phase U missing (X) (X) (X) Parameter 4-58 Missing Motor
Phase Function
31 Motor phase V missing (X) (X) (X) Parameter 4-58 Missing Motor
Phase Function
32 Motor phase W missing (X) (X) (X) Parameter 4-58 Missing Motor
Phase Function
33 Inrush fault – X X –
34 Fieldbus communication fault X X – –
35 Option fault – – –
36 Mains failure X X – –
37 Phase imbalance – X – –
38 Internal fault – X X –
39 Heat sink sensor – X X –
40 Overload of digital output terminal 27 (X) – – Parameter 5-00 Digital I/O Mode,
parameter 5-01 Terminal 27
Mode
41 Overload of digital output terminal 29 (X) – – Parameter 5-00 Digital I/O Mode,
parameter 5-02 Terminal 29
Mode
42 Ovrld X30/6-7 (X) – – –
43 External supply (option) – – –
45 Ground fault 2 X X X –
46 Pwr. card supply X X –
47 24 V supply low X X X –

300 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Troubleshooting Programming Guide

Num Description Warning Alarm/Trip Alarm/Trip Lock Parameter

- reference
ber
48 1.8 V supply low – X X –
49 Speed limit – X – Parameter 1-86 Trip Speed Low
[RPM]
50 AMA calibration failed – X – –
51 AMA check Unom and Inom – X – –
52 AMA low Inom – X – –
53 AMA motor too big – X – –
54 AMA motor too small – X – – 5 5
55 AMA parameter out of range – X – –
56 AMA interrupted by user – X – –
57 AMA timeout – X – –
58 AMA internal fault X X – –
59 Current limit X – –
60 External interlock X X – –
61 Feedback error (X) (X) – –
62 Output frequency at maximum limit X – – –
63 Mechanical brake low – (X) – –
64 Voltage limit X – – –
65 Control board overtemperature X X X –
66 Heat sink temperature low X – – –
67 Option configuration has changed – X – –
68 Safe Torque Off (X) (X)1) – Parameter 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe
Stop
69 Pwr. card temp – X X –
70 Illegal FC configuration – – X –
71 PTC 1 Safe Torque Off – – – –
72 Dangerous failure – – – –
73 Safe Torque Off auto restart (X) (X) – Parameter 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe
Stop
74 PTC thermistor – – X –
75 Illegal profile sel. – X – –
76 Power unit set-up X – – –
77 Reduced power mode X – – Parameter 14-59 Actual Number
of Inverter Units
78 Tracking error (X) (X) – –
79 Illegal PS config – X X –
80 Frequency converter initialized to default – X – –
value
81 CSIV corrupt – X – –
82 CSIV parameter error – X – –
83 Illegal option combination – X –
84 No safety option – X –
88 Option detection – – X –
89 Mechanical brake sliding X – – –
90 Feedback monitor (X) (X) – –
91 Analog input 54 wrong settings – – X S202
92 No-flow (X) (X) – Parameter 22-23 No-Flow
Function

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 301

 Troubleshooting VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Num Description Warning Alarm/Trip Alarm/Trip Lock Parameter

- reference
ber
93 Dry pump (X) (X) (X) Parameter 22-26 Dry Pump
Function
94 End of curve (X) (X) (X) Parameter 22-50 End of Curve
Function
95 Broken belt (X) (X) (X) Parameter 22-60 Broken Belt
Function
98 Clock fault (X) (X) (X) Parameter 0-79 Clock Fault
5 5 163 ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning X – – –
164 ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm X – –
165 ATEX ETR freq.lim.warning X – – –
166 ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm – X – –
200 Emergency mode – – – Parameter 24-00 Emergency
Mode Function
201 Emergency mode was active – – – Parameter 24-00 Emergency
Mode Function
250 New spare parts – – X –
251 New type code – X X –

Table 5.1 Alarm/Warning Code List

(X) Dependent on parameter.
1) Cannot be auto reset via parameter 14-20 Reset Mode.

A trip is the action when an alarm has appeared. The trip Warning yellow
coasts the motor and can be reset by pressing [Reset] or Alarm flashing red
make a reset by a digital input (parameter group 5-1* Trip locked yellow and red
Digital Inputs [1]). The event that caused an alarm cannot
damage the frequency converter or cause dangerous Table 5.2 LED Indication
conditions. A trip lock is an action when an alarm occurs
that may damage the frequency converter or connected
parts. A trip lock situation can only be reset by a power
cycling.

Bit Hex Dec Alarm word Alarm word 2 Warning word Warning Extended Extended
word 2 status word status word 2
Alarm word extended status word
0 0000000 1 Brake check ServiceTrip, Brake check (W28) Reserved Ramping. Off
1 (A28) Read/Write
1 0000000 2 Heat sink temp. ServiceTrip, Heat sink temp. Reserved AMA Running. Hand/auto
2 (A29) (reserved) (W29)
2 0000000 4 Ground fault ServiceTrip, Earth fault (W14) Clock Start CW/CCW Not used
4 (A14) Typecode/ Failure start_possible is
Sparepart active, when the
DI selections [12]
OR [13] are active
and the requested
direction matches
the reference sign.

302 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Troubleshooting Programming Guide

Bit Hex Dec Alarm word Alarm word 2 Warning word Warning Extended Extended
word 2 status word status word 2
Alarm word extended status word
3 0000000 8 Ctrl.Card Temp ServiceTrip, Ctrl.Card Temp Reserved Slow-down Not used
8 (A65) (reserved) (W65) command active,
for example via
CTW bit 11 or DI.
4 0000001 16 Ctrl. Word TO ServiceTrip, Ctrl. Word TO Catch-up Not used
0 (A17) (reserved) (W17) command active,
for example via
CTW bit 12 or DI. 5 5
5 0000002 32 Over Current Reserved Over Current (W13) Reserved Feedback high. Relay 123 active
0 (A13) Feedback
>parameter 4-57 W
arning Feedback
High.
6 0000004 64 Torque Limit Reserved Torque limit (W12) Reserved Feedback low. Start prevented
0 (A12) Feedback
<parameter 4-56 W
arning Feedback
Low.
7 0000008 128 Motor Th over Reserved Motor Th over End of Output current Control ready
0 (A11) (W11) Curve high.
Current
>parameter 4-51 W
arning Current
High.
8 0000010 256 Motor ETR Over Reserved Motor ETR over Broken Output current Drive ready
0 (A10) (W10) Belt low.
Current
<parameter 4-50 W
arning Current
Low.
9 0000020 512 Inverter Overld. Reserved Inverter Overld Reserved Output freq high. Quick stop
0 (A9) (W9) Speed
>parameter 4-53 W
arning Speed High.
10 0000040 1024 DC under Volt Reserved DC under Volt (W8) Output freq low. DC Brake
0 (A8) Speed
<parameter 4-52 W
arning Speed Low.
11 0000080 2048 DC over Volt Reserved DC over Volt (W7) Brake check OK. Stop
0 (A7) Brake test NOT
OK.
12 0000100 4096 Short Circuit Reserved DC Voltage Low Reserved Braking maximum, Standby
0 (A16) (W6) brake power
>brake power
limit
(parameter 2-12 Br
ake Power Limit
(kW)).
13 0000200 8192 Inrush Fault Reserved DC Voltage High Braking. Freeze output request
0 (A33) (W5)

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 303

 Troubleshooting VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Bit Hex Dec Alarm word Alarm word 2 Warning word Warning Extended Extended
word 2 status word status word 2
Alarm word extended status word
14 0000400 16384 Mains ph. Loss Reserved Mains ph. Loss Out of speed Freeze output
0 (A4) (W4) range.
15 0000800 32768 AMA Not OK Reserved No Motor (W3) OVC active. Jog request
0
16 0001000 65536 Live Zero Error Reserved Live Zero Error AC brake. Jog
0 (A2) (W2)
17 0002000 131072 Internal Fault KTY error 10V Low (W1) KTY Warn Password timelock Start request
5 5 0 (A38) number of
allowed password
trials exceeded,
timelock active.
18 0004000 262144 Brake Overload Fans error Brake Overload Fans Warn Password Start
0 (A26) (W26) protection.
Parameter 0-61 Acc
ess to Main Menu
w/o Password = [3]
Bus: Read only, or
[4] Bus: No access,
or [6] All: No
access.
19 0008000 524288 U phase loss ECB error Brake Resistor ECB Warn Reference high. Start applied
0 (A30) (W25) Reference
>parameter 4-55 W
arning Reference
High.
20 0010000 1048576 V phase loss Reserved Brake IGBT (W27) Reserved Reference low. Start delay
0 (A31) Reference
<parameter 4-54 W
arning Reference
Low.
21 0020000 2097152 W phase loss Reserved Speed Limit (W49) Reserved Local reference. Sleep
0 (A32) Parameter 3-13 Ref
erence Site = [1]
Remote.
[Auto On] key is
pressed and auto-
on is active.
22 0040000 4194304 Fieldbus Fault Reserved Fieldbus Fault Reserved Protection mode. Sleep boost
0 (A34) (W34)
23 0080000 8388608 24 V Supply Low Reserved 24V Supply Low Reserved Unused. Running
0 (A47) (W47)
24 0100000 1677721 Mains Failure Reserved Mains Failure Reserved Unused. Bypass
0 6 (A36) (W36)
25 0200000 3355443 1.8 V Supply Reserved Current Limit Reserved Unused. Emergency mode
0 2 Low (A48) (W59)
26 0400000 6710886 Brake Resistor Reserved Low Temp (W66) Reserved Unused. Reserved
0 4 (A25)
27 0800000 1342177 Brake IGBT (A27) Reserved Voltage Limit Reserved Unused. Reserved
0 28 (W64)

304 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Troubleshooting Programming Guide

Bit Hex Dec Alarm word Alarm word 2 Warning word Warning Extended Extended
word 2 status word status word 2
Alarm word extended status word
28 1000000 2684354 Option Change Reserved Encoder loss (W90) Reserved Unused. Reserved
0 56 (A67)
29 2000000 5368709 Drive Feedback Fault Feedback Fault Unused. Reserved
0 12 Initialized(A80) (A61, A90) (W61, W90)
30 4000000 1073741 Safe Torque Off PTC 1 Safe Stop Safe Torque Off PTC 1 Unused. Reserved
0 824 (A68) (A71) (W68) Safe
Torque
Off (W71) 5 5
31 8000000 2147483 Mech. brake low Dangerous Extended Status Unused. Reserved
0 648 (A63) Failure (A72) Word

Table 5.3 Description of Alarm Word, Warning Word, and Extended Status Word

The alarm words, warning words, and extended status words can be read out via fieldbus or optional fieldbus for diagnosis.
See also parameter 16-94 Ext. Status Word.

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 305

Index VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Index Default settings................................................................................... 262

DeviceNet............................................................................................. 114
A Diagnosis............................................................................................... 161
Abbreviation............................................................................................. 7 Discharge time......................................................................................... 8
Additional resources.............................................................................. 4 Display line large.................................................................................. 33
Advanced minimum speed monitoring................................ 58, 59 Display line small.................................................................................. 33
Advanced motor data......................................................................... 49 Display mode......................................................................................... 18
Alarm...................................................................................................... 299 Dry pump function............................................................................ 189
Alarm log............................................................................................... 152
Analog I/O option..................................................................... 229, 293 E
Analog output X30/8........................................................................ 101 Emergency mode............................................................................... 211
Application End of curve......................................................................................... 195
functions........................................................................................... 289 Energy log............................................................................................. 205
Deragging........................................................................................ 250
Flow confirmation......................................................................... 254 ETR........................................................................................................... 157
Submersible pump.......................................................................... 58 Extended CL autotuning................................................................. 178
Auto derate.......................................................................................... 144
Automatic energy optimization................................................... 142 F
Auto-tuning......................................................................................... 173 Feedback...................................................................................... 166, 171
Fieldbus jog.......................................................................................... 113
B Flow compensation........................................................................... 197
Brake Freeze output........................................................................................... 4
energy functions.............................................................................. 65
Frequency converter identification............................................. 153
power...................................................................................................... 5
Brakes................................................................................................. 267 Frequency converter information...................................... 147, 281
DC brake.............................................................................................. 64 Frequency converter status............................................................ 157
Break-away torque.................................................................................. 5
Bypass option...................................................................................... 297 G
General settings........................................................................... 40, 104
C General status...................................................................................... 156
CAN fieldbus........................................................................................ 277 Graphical display.................................................................................. 13
Cascade controller.................................................................... 216, 292
Clock setting........................................................................................... 37 H
Closed loop....................................................................... 166, 286, 287 High voltage............................................................................................. 8
Coast............................................................................................ 4, 17, 250
Communication.................................................................................. 274 I
Comparator.......................................................................................... 121 Identification, frequency converter............................................. 153
Configuration...................................................................................... 106 Indexed parameter.............................................................................. 22
Control cable.......................................................................................... 11 Indicator light........................................................................................ 14
Cooling..................................................................................................... 61 Initialization............................................................................................ 25
Current limit control.......................................................................... 142

D
Data log settings................................................................................ 147
Data readout.............................................................................. 156, 283
Data readout 2.................................................................................... 285

306 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Index Programming Guide

Inputs Motor
Analog I/O mode.............................................................................. 94 Load/motor...................................................................................... 265
Analog in/out.................................................................................. 272 data................................................................................................ 43, 47
Analog input.......................................................................... 5, 96, 97 limit....................................................................................................... 74
Analog input scaling value........................................................ 232 protection........................................................................................... 59
Analog input X30/11....................................................................... 97 speed, rated.......................................................................................... 5
Digital I/O mode............................................................................... 79 speed, synchronous........................................................................... 5
Digital in/out................................................................................... 270 status.................................................................................................. 156
Sensor input option...................................................................... 297 temperature....................................................................................... 59
PM motor..................................................................................... 43, 45
Inverter switching.............................................................................. 137

J N
Jog................................................................................................................ 4 Numerical local control panel.......................................................... 23

L O
Language package............................................................................... 27 Operating data.................................................................................... 147

LCP............................................................................. 4, 6, 13, 17, 23, 254 Operating mode................................................................................... 28

LCP copy/save........................................................................................ 36 Operation/display.............................................................................. 263

LCP custom readout............................................................................ 33 Overload

Inverter overload, no trip............................................................ 144
LCP display.............................................................................................. 30 Overload.............................................................................................. 58
LCP key..................................................................................................... 24 Override limit....................................................................................... 240
LED...................................................................................................... 13, 14
Limit/warning...................................................................................... 269 P
Load dependent settings.................................................................. 55 Parameter access................................................................................ 116
Load sharing............................................................................................. 8 Parameter information..................................................................... 155
Local reference............................................................................... 28, 71 Parameter option............................................................................... 262
Log........................................................................................................... 151 Parameter set-up........................................................................... 19, 26
Logic rule............................................................................................... 126 Password.................................................................................................. 37
Low-power detection....................................................................... 188 PID Auto-tuning.................................................................................. 173
Low-speed detection........................................................................ 188 PID basic settings............................................................................... 175
PID controller....................................................................................... 176
M Pipe fill function.................................................................................. 249
Main menu......................................................................... 15, 19, 21, 26 Pipe fill mode....................................................................................... 249
Main reactance............................................................................... 48, 49 Port diagnostics.................................................................................. 113
Mains Potentiometer reference.................................................................... 12
supply..................................................................................................... 7
Pre-lube................................................................................................. 253
Mains on/off......................................................................................... 137
PROFIBUS.............................................................................................. 275
Mains RFI filter circuit....................................................................... 143
Protection mode..................................................................................... 9
Maintenance log................................................................................ 163
Pulse start/stop..................................................................................... 12
MCB 114................................................................................................. 259

Q
Quick menu....................................................................... 14, 15, 19, 26

R
Ramp.................................................................................................. 71, 72
RCD............................................................................................................... 6

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 307

Index VLT® AQUA Drive FC 202

Reference.............................................................................................. 158
Reference limit....................................................................................... 68 U
Reference/ramps................................................................................ 268 U/f characteristic................................................................................... 54
Relay output........................................................................................... 84 Unintended start..................................................................................... 8
Reset.......................................................................................................... 17
Rs flip flops........................................................................................... 123
V
VVC+............................................................................................................ 7
S
Serial communication........................................................................... 5
W
Shielded................................................................................................... 11 Warning................................................................................................. 299

Short cycle protection...................................................................... 196 Water application functions................................................. 249, 295

Sleep mode.......................................................................................... 192

Smart logic........................................................................................... 278
Smart logic control............................................................................ 251
Special features................................................................................... 297
Special functions................................................................................ 279
Speed bypass......................................................................................... 77
Speed up/down.................................................................................... 12
Spin time............................................................................................... 239
Start adjustments................................................................................. 57
Start delay............................................................................................... 57
Start function......................................................................................... 57
Start/stop................................................................................................. 11
Stator leakage reactance............................................................ 48, 49
Status........................................................................................................ 14
Status message...................................................................................... 13
Status word.......................................................................................... 250
Stop adjustments................................................................................. 58
Symbol........................................................................................................ 7

T
Terminals
Terminal X30/11............................................................................... 97
Terminal X30/12............................................................................... 97
Thermal load................................................................................. 54, 157
Thermistor
Thermistor............................................................................................. 6
Thermistor............................................................................................... 59
Timed actions............................................................................. 200, 291
Timer....................................................................................................... 126
Trip
Trip............................................................................................... 59, 254
reset.................................................................................................... 140

308 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. MG20OB22

Index Programming Guide

MG20OB22 Danfoss A/S © 05/2018 All rights reserved. 309

 Danfoss Drives Danfoss Drives
4401 N. Bell School Rd. 8800 W. Bradley Rd.
Loves Park lL 61111 USA Milwaukee, Wl 53224 USA
Phone: 1-888-DANFOSS Phone: 1-888-DANFOSS
Fax: 1-815-639-8000 Fax: 1-414-355-6117
www.danfossdrives.com www.danfossdrives.com

Danfoss shall not be responsible for any errors in catalogs, brochures or other printed material. Danfoss reserves the right to alter its products at any time without notice, provided that alterations to
products already on order shall not require material changes in specifications previously agreed upon by Danfoss and the Purchaser. All trademarks in this material are property of the respective
companies. Danfoss and the Danfoss logotype are trademarks of Danfoss A/S. All rights reserved.

Danfoss A/S
Ulsnaes 1
DK-6300 Graasten
vlt-drives.danfoss.com

130R0338 MG20OB22 05/2018

*MG20OB22*